-r^ 


^T^  o^  o^  ^::a.  <^£:i.  i:a.  ^^2^ 

OF  THK 

AT 

PRINCETON,   N.  J. 
SAMUEL    AGNEW, 

OF     PHILADELPHIA, 

I         Case,  Division | 

%       '  Hhelt\         .Section.... |. 


ri  /.' 


.  .  .  leave  the  stump  of  the 
roots  th'ireof  in  tlie  earth,  even 
with  a  band  of  iron  and  brass, 
till  seven  times  pass  over  him. 
—  Ban.  iv.  16—23,  25—32. 


rmT> 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

OF 

PROPHECY; 

PARTICULARLY    THE 

EVENING  Ax\D  MORNING   VISIONS   OF   DANIEL, 

AND    THE 

APOCALYPTICAL  VISIONS  OF  JOHN. 


Y     D  A  V  T  D     C  A  M  B  E  L  L. 


Blessed  i>  lip  «hat  readeth,  and  they  that  hear  the  words  of  this 
prophecy,  ami  keep  those  things  which  are  written  therein  ;  lor  tlie 
time  is  at  hand  — Rev.  1  :  3. 

Here  is  wisdom.     Lit  hii-i  that  readeth  understand. — Rev  13  :   18. 

Many  '<hiill  be  purifif;il,  and  made  white,  and  tried  ;  but  the  wicked 
shall  do  wickedly  :  and  noie  ot"  the  wicked  shall  understand  ;  butlhu 
wise  shall  understand. — Dan.  12:  10. 


BOSTON: 

PUBLISHED    BY    THE    AUTHOR, 

No.  9  Washington  st. 
FOR    SAEE    BY    BOOKSELLERS    IN    BOSTON    AND    N.  YORK. 

1840. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1839, 

By  David  Cambell, 
in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  Disiiict  court  of  Massachusettg. 


Vow  ^  Jackson,  friniersy 
14  Devomhire-St. 


PREFACE 


In  this  little  work  the  author  has  aimed  at 
simple  illustration.  He  has  entered  a  field 
hitherto  neglected  with  a  special  intention  to 
awaken  in  the  youthful  readers  of  the  Bible 
an  interest  in  the  prophecies,  and  to  aid  them 
in  understanding  this  instructive  part  of  the 
sacred  word.  He  does  not  undertake  to  give 
a  general  exposition  of  prophecy,  but  directs 
his  attention  mainly  to  the  predictions  of 
Daniel  and  John.  In  preparing  this  work  he 
has  had  recourse  to  various  sources,  and  used 
impartially  every  advantage  within  his  reach. 

Whil^j  the  author  cheerfully  acknowledges 
his  indebtedness  to  several  excellent  treatises 
on  the  prophecies,  he  can  not  resist  the  im- 


6  PREFACE. 

pression  that  they  leave  the  subject  unneces- 
sarily obscure.  He  has  labored  in  some  mea- 
sure  to  obviate    this  defect. 

I.  By  pictural  representations  of  the  nat- 
ural emblems  used  by  the  prophet  in  the 
passages  under  consideration. 

II.  By  a  strict  regard  to  ihe  chronological 
order  of  the  events  that  fulfil  these  predict  ons. 

This,  some  writers  have  disregarded  in 
their  remarks  on  the  visions  of  Daniel. 

III.  By  due  regard  to  locahty.  To  aid  the 
reader,  an  atlas,  prepared  to  accompany  this 
work, presents  the  generaloutlines  of  the  coun- 
tries which  are  the  theatre  of  predicted  events. 

The  author  does  not  come  forward  with  a 
new  theory ;  still,  by  giving  to  the  eye  tlie 
symbols  from  nature  employed  by  the  inspired 
writers,  by  adhering  to  the  order  of  time,  to 
the  location  of  events  predicted,  and  by  some 
well  marked  distinctions  hitherto  overlooked, 
he  hopes  to  render  the  study  of  the  prophe- 
cies more  interesting  and  successful.  Of  these 
peculiarities  of  this  work,  discerning  readers 
will  form  a  due  estimate. 


PREFACE.  7 

Should  these  illustrations  and  appendix 
subserve  the  great  end  of  advancing  the  study 
and  knowledge  of  the  prophecies,  the  author 
may  be  encouraged,  when  more  at  leisure,  to 
enlarge  and  improve  the  work. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


The  prophecies  are  a  rich  and  copious  fund 
of  instruction,and  though  veiled  in  emhlematic 
drapery,  it  is  not  inaccessible  to  any  who  du- 
ly use  the  means  of  gaining  it.  Still  the  most 
attentive  do  not  gain  it  at  a  glance.  The  dis- 
coveries in  it  come,  like  tlie  views  in  the  vari- 
ous scenery  of  a  fine  engraving,  one  after  an- 
other to  the  close  observer,  while  they  escape 
his  notice  in  a  cursory  look.  Nor  is  it  beyond 
the  power  of  most  persons  to  gain  a  delight- 
ful acquaintance  with  this  part  of  the  living 
word,  it  it  is  duly  sought. 

An  apostle  affirms  that  "  all  scripture  "  is 
"  profitable."  But  to  be  profitable,  it  must  be 
understood,  and  to  be  understood,  it  must  be 
studied.  The  reader  is  invited  to  consider 
some  reasons  for  studying  the  prophecies. 


10     ,  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 

It  is  not  that  he  may  know  the  future,  for 
many  of  the  prophecies  are  so  given  as  net  to 
be  fully  understood  till  near  the  time  of  their 
fulfilment,  but  for  othei-  reasons. 

I.  This  study  enlarges  and  elevates  the 
mind.  It  does  this,  in  leading  to  an  intinate 
acquaintance  with  the  geography  of  those 
countries  which  are  the  theatres  of  events  pre- 
dicted, and  with  history  which  shows  us,  as  a 
telescope  the  distant  scenery,  the  events 
which  fulfil  the  predictions. 

Thus  the  mind  is  led  to  view  a  portion  of 
the  works  and  providential  government  not 
only,  but  also  the  truth, and  power,  and  pater- 
nal kindness  of  the  supreme  Ruler.  Surely 
the  mind  thus  employed  will  be  expanded 
and  ennobled. 

II.  This  study  will  guard  one  against  tliose 
errors  that  arise  from  a  misapplication  of  the 
prophecies. 

An  apostle  said  the  '  unlearned  wrest  the 
scriptures.'  They  doso  now,and  the  unleained 
in  the  prophecies  may  be  drawn  into  the  wild 
and  unscripturcil  notion  that  the  resurrection 
will  take  place  in  1843.  But  a  better  know- 
ledge of  the  prophecies  will  preserve  one  from 
such  errors  since  they  show  that  previous  to 
that   event   the    Jews  are    to   be   restored, 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  11 

*'  grafted  into  the  good  olive  tree"  and  the 
nations  of  the  world  enligiitened  and  blessed 
with  the  gospel.  The  world  thus  far,  has 
not  been  rescued  from  the  dominion  of  the 
malign  usurper.  "  It  still  liethin  wickedness." 
Hitherto,  the  great  pait  of  the  human  family 
have  passed  llirough  life  without  even  henring 
of  the  Savior.  But  the  Bible  teaclies  that  Je- 
sus, the  rightful  Lord,  having  conquered  the 
usurper,  though"strong"  and  "armed,"  is  to  be 
known  and  honored  as  King  by  all  nations,  and 
that  on  earth,  "  where  sin  has  abounded  grace 
w^ill  much  more  abound  "  in  the  triumph  of 
the  Prince  of  Life  over  the  combined  pow- 
ers of  hell. 

So  teaches  the  Bible,  and  whoever  under- 
stands the  prophecies  respecting  these  events 
will  not  be  misled  by  a  theory  that  excludes 
these  glorious  results  of  divine  power  and  love. 

in.  The  right  understanding  of  prophecy 
tends  to  confirm  our  belief  of  the  Bible,  and 
supply  us  W'ith  weapons  against  its  assailants. 

In  the  prophecies  are  very  many  events 
foretold  with  striking  minuteness  and  accura- 
cy. These  events  are  usually  such  as  no  hu- 
man foresight  could  discern  ;  many  of  them 
would  appear  lo  the  keenest  eye  highly  im- 
probable. Now  the  evidence  that  the  wri- 
ter of  these  predictions  was  guided  by  the 
divine  mind  is  in  j^iroportidn  to  the  impr6ba- 


IS!     Introductory  remarks. 

bility  of  the  event  and  minute  detail  of  cir- 
cumstances given  in  the  prediction.  The  as- 
tonishing exactness  of  the  fulfihnent  of  these 
predictions  is  a  standing  monument,  an  un- 
ansvver;ible  proof  of  the  divine  authority  of 
the  vvritingscontainingthem.  Let  the  mind  be 
familiar  with  the  fulfilment  of  these  many  pre- 
dictions, and  it  will  not  only  be  shielded  from 
the  assaults  of  infidels,  but  ulso  furnished  with 
effective  weapons  of  attack.  Thus  the  Bible 
fully  affords  convincing  proof  of  its  truth,  of 
its  being  the  Word  of  God. 

IV.  Another  reason  is  to  gain  the  most  ex-* 
alted  views  of  the  great  Governor  of  the  uni- 
verse. The  prophecies  declare  his  purposes 
of  favor  to  his  repenting  obedient  people  ;  of 
displeasure  to  transgressors.  The  events  of 
fulfilment  show  his  tender  care  and  forbear- 
ance and  faithfulness  to  his  people  on  the  one 
hand,  and  his  holy  abhorrence  of  sin,  and  just 
displeasure  towards  the  workers  of  iniquity, 
on  the  other.  Thus  his  truth  and  holi- 
ness, power  and  love  are  wonderfully  mani- 
fested to  man  through  the  prophecies  ;  and 
the  more  they  are  studied  the  more  these  at- 
tributes of  Jehovah  will  be  seen.  Thus  "  be- 
holding as  in  a  glass  the  glory  of  the  Lord, 
are  we  changed  into  the  same  image."  The 
direct  tdndenoy  of  such  vitws  is  to  elevate 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  13 

the  soul  in  piety,  and  assimilate  it  to  the  inef- 
fahle  Fountain  of  holy  enjoyment.  Such 
•was  the  influence  of  attention  to  the  prophe- 
cies on  Daniel.  Such  also  will  be  the  influ- 
ence on  others,  who,  like  him,  "  set  their 
face  to  seek  the  Lord. '' 

From  this  glance  at  some  reasons  for  study- 
ing the  prophecies,  let  us  now  turn  to  some 
of  the  reasons  for  the  hitherto  general  neglect 
to  study  them. 

1.  A  general  impression  that  they  are  not 
to  be  understood  till  the  time  of  their  fulfil- 
ment. 

Some  of  them  are  not  to  be  fully  under- 
stood until  this  time.  But  others  may  be 
long  before.  Did  not  Daniel  understand  the 
prediction  respecting  the  return  from  Baby- 
lon before  the  restoration?  And  could  not 
he,  or  any  other  captive  Hebrew,  have  un- 
derstoo^d  the  passages  of  the  prophets,  as  well 
fifty  years  before  ?  How  came  Andrew  lo 
say  ''We  have  found  the  Messiah  .f^"  How 
came  Philip  to  say,  "  We  have  found  him  of 
whom  Moses  in  the  lav/,  and  the  pro])hets 
did  write."  Plainly  it  was  because  they  had 
read  and  understood  the  predictions  respect- 
ing the  promised  Messiah.  Their  understand- 
ing of  the  predictions  prepared  them  lo  know 
and  welcome  their  Savior, 


14  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS* 

2.  An  impression  that  the  prophecies  were 
destined  for  those  only  to  who-m  they  were 
first  addressed,  and  were  shortly  fulfiled  in  the 
events  of  their  day. 

Those  wlio  take  tliis  view  overlook  ihe  grand 
and  alhimportant  feature  of  the  prophe- 
cies, i.  e.  their  liaving  a  primary  or  typical 
fulfilment  near  the  time  they  were  given,  hut 
their  chief  and  ultimate  completion  at  a 
subsequent  period.  Tt  is  worthy  of  remark 
that  a  continuous  series  of  events  occurring 
from  the  remote  ages  to  the  closing  scenes  of 
our  world,  is  given  in  the  prophecies.  By 
the  aid  of  history,  the  reader  can  see  the 
fulfilment  of  such  predictions  in  events  so 
clearly  marked  as  to  exclude  all  doubt.  Who 
can  suppose  that  a  time  so  marked  with 
mighty  changes,  as  the  present,  and  so  dis- 
tinguished by  an  unprecedented  activity  of 
the  mental  and  moral  powers  of  man,  has  not 
been  equally  marked  in  the  predictions  rela- 
ting to  this  time  ?  Let  Christians  '-discern 
the  signs  of  the  times,"  and  behold  the  w^oi'd 
of  the  Lord  spoken  of  these  days,  and  a 
blessed  influence  will  be  felt  over  the  church. 
Their  hearts  ''will  be  cheered  to  arise  and 
build,"  seeing  the  time  to  favor  Zion  has 
come.  It  will  be  to  them  as  the  discovery 
of  the  promised  restoration  of  the  Jews  fron* 
Babylon  was  to  the  captive  Daniel. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  15 

3.  Another  reason  is  the  influence  of  erra- 
tic men  in  applying  the  prophecies. 

When  men  of  lively  imagination,  but  of 
too  little  general  knowledge  to  hold  iheir  in- 
tellect in  equilibrio,  become  strongly  interes- 
ed  in  the  prophecies,  they  come  forward  with 
theoiies  so  extravagant  as  to  awaken,  in  many, 
prejudice  and  disgust.  Excited  by  their 
wild  fancy  they  suppose  most  of  the  prophe- 
cies are  fulfiled  in  the  events  of  their  own 
diy.  Under  the  stimulating  influence  of 
such  views,  they  acquire  a  morbid  sensitive- 
ness in  respect  to  every  thing  that  affects 
their  peculiar  notions,  and  a  proportionate 
insensibility  to  great  truths  which  have  no 
direct  relation  to  their  theory.  They  are 
full  of  ardor,  and  give  to  some  views  an  im- 
portance so  undue,  as  to  destroy  the  beautiful 
symmetry  of  the  system  of  revealed  truth. 
The  influence  of  these  men  on  some  may 
awaken  invesiigntion,but  on  most  it  is  the  re- 
verse, exciting  in  them  a  feeling  of  uncertainty 
as  to  the  meaning  of  these  parts  of  the  Divine 
Word,  and  leading  them  to  neglect  what 
they  view  as  having  no  ascertainable  meaning. 

A  state  of  the  public  mind  »hus  induced, 
opens  the  way  for  the  successful  introduction 
of  the  visionary  theories  that  have  recently 
been   in  circulation.     But  let  Christians  be 


16  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 

well  instructed,  and  such  theories  if  broached, 
would  soon  be  like  a  plant  without  water. 

A  clear  and  full  understanding  of  these  in- 
structive portions  of  the  Bible,  and  a  distinct 
view  of  the  events  exactly  completing  them, 
would  awaken  a  lively  interest  in  the  Chris- 
tian world.  It  would  be  like  frequent  com- 
munications from  the  Head  of  the  Church. 
Its  influence  upon  the  state  of  believers  would 
be  as  the  showers  of  spring  upon  the  verdant 
earth.  Nor  would  it  fail  to  influence  the 
considerate  skeptic.  No  doubt  many,  by  the 
evidence  of  the  divine  origin  of  the  Bible, 
seen  in  the  fulfilment  of  prophecy,  would  be 
convinced  of  its  truth,  and  seek  the  Savior 
whom  it  reveals.  To  exhibit  the  influence 
of  such  facts  already  operating,  take  the  case 
of  the  Jews  previous  to  the  captivity  in  Baby- 
lon. They  were  stronjily  inclined  to  idol- 
atry, from  which  the  most  marvellous  visible 
manifestationsof  divine  power  did  not  restrain 
them.  To  cure  them  of  this  sin,  God  sent 
them  into  Babylon,  among  vile  idolaters,  and 
said,  by  the  prophet  Ezekiel,  (xxxvi.  25,) 
*' From  all  your  idols  will  I  cleanse  you." 
Such  was  the  prediction.  Has  it  been  fulfill- 
ed ?  From  that  period  onward  the  Jews, 
with  but  few  individual  exceptions,  have  nev- 
pr  been  idolaters.     As  a  people,  and   almost 


INTRODUCTORY    KEMARKS-  17 

to  a  man  as  individuals,  they  have  shrunk  from 
idolatry  as  froin  the  plague.  Corrupt  and 
wicked  as  they  have  at  titnes  been,  yet,  when 
that  corruption  has  been  deepest  and  tliat 
wickedness  most  abominable,  sooner  than 
bow  down  to  idol  gods,  they  have  met  per- 
secution and  death  in  their  worst  fbrnis."^ 
From  the  day  of  their  restoration  from  Bab- 
ylon 10  this,  they  have  resisted  almost  to 
a  man,  and  with  the  constancy  and  inflexi- 
bility of  martyrs,  every  attempt  to  win  or  to 
drive  them  into  idolatry. 

■*  When  Plolemy  Philopater,  a  cruel  and  reven^prul  ty- 
rant, ImiI  CDniiuand  oi  I\g\|)t,  l>a\iiig  visiied  Jci  ii^alcm,  a'lu 
heinij;  denied  an  entiance  into  llie  temple,  lie  was  so  enrjigcd 
at  flie  Jews  that  ho  at  once  degraded  great  niiniliers  ol  tiieni 
at  Alexandria  to  the  condition  ofslaves.  The  only  cundition 
on  which  this  enark  of  degradation  and  slavery  l>y  a  hot 
iron  could  he  avoided,  m  as  to  ofler  sacrifice  to  his  gods. — 
Out  of  many  thunsands,  only  ihiee  hundred  yielded.  Tiiete 
were  at  once  excomnmnicated  by  llieir  lirelhren.  Upon 
which  Fhilopaler  was  so  enraged  that  he  purposed  to  ruin  the 
whole  nwtion,  beginning  with  those  of  Alexandria.  He  or- 
dered them  to  he  l)r(Jiight  into  the  hippodrome,  an  immense 
place  without  liie  citv  where  the  people  asseml.lefl  to  witness 
the  public  games,  and  CJinmanded  that  5C0  elephants  should 
be  let  loose  upon  them.  The  first  day,  in  conseqnense  of  a 
previous  debauch,  the  king,  who  was  to  be  present,  overrle|)t 
himsell,  and  they  were  not  let  l.:ose.  'JMie  second  day  a  simi- 
lar disapi-ointm'ent  occurred.  On  the  third  day  the  king 
c.-iine,  the  elephants  were  let  loose  upon  the  defenceless  Jews, 
but  by  a  wonderful  providence,  ihey  turned  upon  the  .=pecta- 
sors  and- soldiers  and  kilU<l  tjreat  numbers  of  them.  This 
with  other  circumstances  indmed  the  t) rant  to  abandon  h:3 
purpose  and  the  Jews  were  saved. 

2* 


18  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 

So,  at  other  times,  have  they  with  wonder- 
ful firmness,  withstood  the  cruel  measures 
to  coerce  them  into  the  very  sin  to  wliich 
they  had  before  their  captivity  been  so 
addicted.  The  change,  thus  wrought  in 
them  according  to  prophecy,  is  truly  aston- 
ishing. Even  the  skeptic  Gibbon  declares 
his  inability  to  account  for  it,  and  says  it  is 
"  in  contradiction  to  every  known  principle 
of  the  human  mind."* 


*  This  inflexil)le  perseverance,  which  appeared  so  odious  or 
so  ridiculous  to  the  ancient  world,  assumes  a  more  awful 
cliaracter.  since  Providence  has  deigned  to  reveal  to  ns  the 
mysterious  history  of  the  chosen  people.  But  the  devout  and 
even  scrupulous  attachment  to  the  Mosaic  religion,  so  con- 
spicuous among  the  Jews  who  lived  imder  the  second  temple, 
becomes  still  more  surprising  if  it  is  compared  with  the  stub- 
born incredulity  of  their  forefathers.  When  the  law  gi' en 
in  thunder  "from  moutit  Sinai;  when  tlie  (ides  of  the  ocean, 
and  the  course  of  the  planets  were  suspended  for  the  conve- 
nience of  the  Israelites;  and  when  temporal  rewards  and 
punishments  were  the  immediate  consequences  of  their  piety 
or  disobedience,  they  perpetually  relapsed  into  rebellion 
against  the  visible  majesty  of  their  Divine  King,  placed  the 
idols  of  the  nations  in  the  sanctuary  of  Jehovali,  and  imitated 
every  fantastic  ceremony  that  was  practised  in  the  tents  of 
the  Arabs,  or  in  the  cities  of  Phoenicia.  As  the  protection 
of  Heaven  was  deservedly  withdrawn  from  the  ungrateful 
race,  tlieir  faith  acquired  a  proportionable  degree  of  vigor 
and  purity.  The  contemporaries  of  Moses  and  Joshua  had 
beheld  with  careless  indiifrrence  the  most  amazing  miracles. 
Under  the  pressure  of  every  calamity,  the  belief  of  those  mir- 
acles has  preserved  the  Jews  of  a  later  period  from  the  uni- 
versal contagion  of  idolatry;  and  in  contradiction  to  every 
known  principle  of  liie  human  mind,  that  singular  people 
seems  to  have  yielded  a  stronger  and  more  ready  assent  lo  the 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  19 

4,  The  want  of  plain,  familiar  illustration. 
Many  can  unite  with  the  author  in  bearing 
witness  to  the  difficulty  felt  by  the  young 
reader  of  the  prophecies  given  in  symbolic 
language.  All  is  strange,  confused,  and  per- 
plexing ;  and  no  effort,  that  he  can  make, 
will  give  him  any  satisfactory  view.  As  he 
reads  the  sacred  word,  he  finds  the  solemn 
direction,  "  let  him  that  readeth  understand," 
but  he  responds,  "  how  can  I  understand  ex- 
cept some  one  guide  me?"  There  have  been 
several  large  and  valuable  works  writien  on 
this  subject,  but  they  are  not  at  hand,  or  re- 
quire too  much  time  for  this  class  of  readers. 
Besides,  they  do  not  give  the  ocular  rep- 
resentations so  much  needed  by  beginners  in 
this  interesting  field  of  research.  To  supply 
what  no  author  has  before  attempted,  is  the 
aim  in  this  little  work. 

The  reader,  who  wishes  to  pursue  his 
investigations  extensively  on  this  subject, 
may  find  much  to  interest  him  in  the  works 
of  Bis'iop  Newton,  Sir  Isaac  Newton,  Pri- 
deaux,(Connections)Keith,  Faberand  Smith, 
(Key  to  Revelation.) 

In  the  studies  of  children  and  youth  in  the 
Sabbath  School,  the  prophetic  parts  of  the 

traditions  of  their  remote  ancestors,  than  to  the  evidence  o 
their  own  senses.    Gibbon^s  Rome,  page  251. 


20  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 

Bible  ought  not  to  be  neglected.  With  due 
assistance  from  the  teacher,  the  pupils  may, by 
a  proper  attention  to  them,  be  shielded  against 
the  insidious  attacks  of  infidels,  and  preser- 
ved from  being  '-led  away  by  the  error  of  the 
wicked."  Although  the  note  below  contains 
some  of  those  sly  and  insidious  attacks  of  an 
infidel  upon  the  christian  faith  and  the  coming 
of  Christ's  kingdom,  yet  it  contains  one  well 
merited  rebuke  upon  the  doubtful  and  imper- 
fect faith  of  modern  ages.* 

From  the  prophecies,  as  well  as  from  other 
indications  in  the  rapid  advances  of  society, 

*  When  the  promise  of  eternal  hnppine?s  was  piopoFcd  to 
mankiiui,  on  condition  of  adopting  the  faith,  and  of  ohserv 
ing  the  precepts  of  ilie  gospel,  it  is  no  wonder  tlial  so  advan- 
tageous an  ofi'er  should  liave  been  accepted  by  great  nnnihers 
of  every  religion,  of  every  raihk,  and  of  every  province  in  the 
Roman  empire.  The  ancient  Christians  were  aiiiniated  by  a 
contemj)t  for  their  present  existence,  and  by  a  just  confidence 
of  inimortalii) ,  of  which  the  doubtlid  and  imperfect  faiih  of 
modern  ages  cannot  give  us  any  adequate  notion.  In  the 
primitive  church,  the  influence  of  truih  was  very  powerlully 
strengthened  by  an  opinion,  which,  however  it  may  deserve 
respect  for  iis  usehdness  and  antitjuity,  has  not  been  found 
agreeable  to  experience.  It  was  universally  believed,  that 
the  et\i\  of  the  worlo  and  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  were  at 
hand.  The  near  approach  of  this  wonderful  event  had  been 
predicted  by  tlie  aposilcs;  the  tradition  of  it  was  [)ieserved 
i)y  their  earliest  disciples,  and  those  who  understood  in  their 
literal  sense  the  discourses  of  Clirist  himself,  were  obliged  to 
expect  the  second  and  glorious  coining  of  the  Son  of  Man  m 
itie  clouds,  before  that  generation  was  totally  e.xtinguished, 
which  had  beheld  his  humble  condition  upon  earth,  and  which 
might  still  be  witne.ss  of  the  calamities  of  the  Jews  under 
Vespasian  or  Hadrian.  Gibbon's  Rome,  page  261,  262. 


INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS.  21 

we  have  reason  to  suppose  that  we  are  ap- 
proaching times  of  very  peculiar  interest.  A 
good  acquaintance  with  these  parts  of  Scrip- 
ture will  be  one  preparative  for  acting  well 
our  part. 

The  prophet  Daniel  says,  ''  Blessed  is  he 
that  waiteth  and  cometh  to  the  1335  days.'* 
Another  says  "  Blessed  are  they  that  keep 
those  things  which  are  written."  This  requires 
a  knowledge  gained  only  by  study,  and  other 
proper  means. 

Blessed  is  he  that  hath  part  in  the  first 
resurrection,  because  the  world  will  then  be 
under  the  administration  of  the  Prince  of 
Peace,  and  all  the  systems  of  despotic  oppres- 
sion and  debasing  wickedness  "will  be  carried 
away  as  the  chaff  of  the  summer  threshing 
floors,"  by  the  wind.  Then,  and  not  till  then, 
will  the  follower  of  Christ  know  the  full 
import  of  such  "  blessed  "  promises. 

Should  this  work  appear  to  any  one  too 
abundant  in  repetitions,  the  author  would  sug- 
gest that  he  is  aware  of  using  them  freely; 
nor  did  he  wish  to  depart  from  the  wise  course 
of  instruction  adopted  by  Him  who  gives  "  line 
upon  line,"  and  "line  upon  line."  He  has 
deliberately  followed  the  course  of  the  Proph- 
et who,  like  a  painter,  goes  over  the  ground, 
several  times,  first  drawing  the  outlines,  after- 


22  INTRODUCTORY    REMARKS. 

wards  filling  up  and  completing  the  represen- 
tation at  every  succee'ling  stroke,  until  you  see 
the  exact  picture.  The  prophets  have  userl 
many^  but  not  'vain'  lepetitions.  Jn  these 
illustrations  the  writer  has  aimed  to  follow 
them  and  learn  tluir  meaning,  not  to  correct 
their  style.  In  doing  this,  repetition  is  una- 
voidable, yet  useful.  The  attempt  to  avoid  it, 
or  rather  failing  to  notice  this  peculiarity  in 
the  writings  of  Daniel  and  John,  has  (ended 
not  a  little  to  involve  them  in  the  obscurity 
so  long  attending  them. 

A  case  of  this  is  found  in  Daniel,  who,  in 
giving  the  prophecies  of  the  morning  and 
evening  visions,  goes  over  the  ground  five 
times,  in  as  many  chapters,  with  only  a  sight 
variation  as  to  their  commencement  and  ter- 
mination. The  attempt  to  go  througli  this 
part  of  his  book  and  avoid  repetition,  would 
cause  utter  confusion.  The  same  remaik 
will  apply  to  a  part  of  ihe  Apocalypse,  with 
still  greater  force,  though  the  distinctions 
here  are  more  generally  recognized.  Such  is 
the  nature  of  the  subject  that  some  repetition 
renders  it  more  lucid.  By  first  drawing  the 
great  outlines,  and  then  filling  up  the  picture, 
tlie  reader  is  by  degrees  led  into  the  views  of 
the  subject  which  its  complexity  would  hardly 
allow  in  any  other  course.     So  that  aay  ar- 


INTRODCTORY    REMARKS.  23 

rangement  of  passages  out  of  the  order  adop- 
ted by  the  prophet,  repetitious  as  it  is,  would 
be  a  decided  disadvantage. 

When  this  work  was  planned,  the  author 
designed  to  reply  to  several  objections  urged 
by  some  modern  theorists  against  the  cheering 
Bible  doctrine  of  a  Millennium,  and  to  insert  a 
series  cf  articles  respecting  the  state  of  the 
church  and  the  world  during  this  period. 
But  the  limits  of  this  work  forbid  their  inser- 
tion. They  will  be  reserved  for  a  future  edi- 
tion. In  the  meantime,  as  some  may  wish 
to  know  the  topics  of  these  articles,  they 
are  here  given. 

T.  The  complete  and  universal  restoration 
of  man's  physical  powers  from  their  deprava- 
tion  consequent  to  transgression. 

II.  The  firm  health  and  longevity  of  man, 
resulting  from  a  knowledge  of  his  physical 
frame  and  the  causes  that  affect  it  ;  and  from 
such  powers  of  self-control  as  will  restrain 
from  those  violations  of  physical  laws  from 
which  most  diseases  originate. 

III.  The  improvement  of  intellect, resulting 
from  the  perfect  health  of  the  body  and  the 
di.e  subjugation  of  all  its  appetites. 

IV.  The  blessed  slate  of  society  when  the 
physical  and  moral  renovation  of  man  pre[>are9 
his  body  to  be  the  "temple"  of  the  Iloly 
Bpint. 


24  INTRODUCtORT    REMARKS* 

V.  The  influenceof  Christ's  administration, 
as  adapted  to  the  state  of  the  Church,  when 
the  purifying  tendency  of  opposition  and 
p'  rsecution  shall  cease. 

VI.  The  state  of  the  earth  as  to  temperature 
and  other  changes,  in  this  period,  desirable 
to  man,  probable  from  the  laws  of  matter, 
and  from  anology. 

VII.  The  vast  increase  of  facilities  for  inter- 
course resulting  from  human  industry  under 
the  direction  of  Science,  and  rendering  men 
10,000  miles  asunder  as  near  neighbors. 

Vlf  I.  The  great  change  that  will  be  wrought 
to  realize  the  apostle's  declaration  "All  shall 
know  the  Lord,  from  the  least  to  the  great- 
est." This  has  never  yet  been  the  fact. 
It  will  be. 


CONTENTS. 


SECTION  L 

Babylon.    The  enemy  of  Goil's  ppoole— Its  influence  on  the  peff- 

Me   of  God — Its  location,  tower,  fertility,  irriwtion,  and  ifreatness — 

Remarks  on  the  book  of  Daniel,  40 — Ncbochadnezzar's  image — The 

Babylonian  Empire,  Persian,  Grecian,  Roman.  37—48 

SECTION  II. 
Daniel's  Evening  Vision.  Four  beasts  seen  byDaniel  in  vision — 
The  lion. bear,  leopard, 54— the  "dreadful  and  terrible,"  symbolizing 
the  Babylonian,  Persian,  Grecian,  and  Roman  empires,  .56 — The  little 
horn  of  the  4th  beast — Ten  horns  in  note  56— Mode  of  computing:, 
62 — Distinction  between  the  evening  and  mornin?  visions,       49 — 63 

SECTION  III. 
Morning  Vision.  Theram— He  g:oat — Time  of  the  vision,  67— 
bear,68 — Reason  of  Alexander's  severity  towards  Persia— his  death, 
70— Division  of  his  empire,  71— The  little  horn  from  one  of  the  4  of 
the  <oat.  shown  to  be  Mohamedanism — Note  from  Scott,  72 — 
Note  From  Litch,75 — Policy  of  European  powers  towards  Turkey, 
75 — This  little  horn  not  the  same  as  the  one  of  great  beast,  before 
which  3  fell— Note  from  Miller,  78 — Wonderful  numberer,81  — 
Note  from  Scott,  82— Successors  of  Alexander,  87— Note  from 
Scott,  89— Extract  from  Koran,.92.  66—93 

SECTION    IV. 

Morning  Vision  continited*  70  weeks  date  of  the  edict  to  build 
Jeruaalom.  96— Notb  from  Miller,  96— Koii  TtOu  Buhop  New- 
tt^jT.99  9«— 101 


26  CONTENTS. 


SECTION    V. 

MoRNiNu  VisioNCONTiNUED.  Tlie  ati^el  g:ive3  Daniel  some  clieef- 
ing  facts— Vision  of  the  lam  and  he-tfoat  explained — Historical 
skc'tcli  from  Xerxes  to  Alexander,  107 — Alexander  t<»  Aiiliochus— * 
Antiochus  to  destruction  of  Jerusalem — xNote  from  Newton,  109, 
114,  IIG,  laO,  124,  132,  134— Note  from  Litch.  117,  132— Note,  orig- 
inal, Antiochus.  123 — Do  transition,  124 — Do  Prince  of  the  covenant, 
125 — Persian  and  Grecian  kings,  and  Jewish  High  Priests, 

102-137 


SECTION  VI. 

Morning  Vision  CONCLUDED.  Historical  facts  illustrative  of  the 
vision — Antiochus,  141 — R'»m:in^,  142 — Note  from  Newton — Trials 
cf  Christians — Do  Constantine's  elevation  to  the  throne — Do  146 — 
Oriu'infd  Note,  148— Letter  from  Smith,  149— '2,300  not  the  time 
of  Popery,  but  of  Alohameilanism — Note  from  Smith's  review  of 
Miller,  152— Desire  of  women,  note  from  Faber,  156 — Extracts  from 
Koran,  157,  159 — Do  Seott,  160 — Influence  of  Mohammed  on  the 
inind,  IGl — Conquests  of  the  Turks— Extract  from  Scott,  163 — 
Chan;<GS  in  Turkey,  165 — Haiti  Schcritf,  166 — remarks  of  iNoah  on  it, 
162 — Conflicts  of  nations — Downfall  of  the  Ottoman  throne,  169 — 
Note  from  Evening  Star,  by  Noah,  17 1-— Note  from  Buckharill's 
travels  in  Syria,  173 — Extract  from  Keith,  174,  do  from  Smith,  two 
expeditions  to  Palestine, 275— Miller's  chronoloery  as  to  past  events 
correct,  his  other  views  wrong — Time  of  judi^meninot  revealed,  183 
— Diagram  of  She  morning  vision,  185.  138 — lS5 


SECTION  VII. 

Captivity  of  the  Jews  "  seven  times,"  i.  e.,  2520  years.  Break- 
in?  of  Epliraim,'191 — Extract  from  Prideaux's  Connections— do  193 
— Repentance  and  restoration  of  kin?  Mannasseh,  196— Extract  from 
Pkideacx — The  picture  ofihe  prophet's  tile,  showinj;  the  siege  of  Je- 
rusalem, 193 — Extract  from  Prideavx — Invasion  of  Israel  under  Neb- 
uzaradin,200 — Diagram  of  the  captivity  and  restoration,  503 — tree 
seen  by  Nebuchadnezzar, 204 — Extract  from  Millennial  Tidings 
207— i:xtrnct  frOm  PaiDEAt;x,  21.')— Diagiam  ofthe  cnptiviiy,  &r.,217 
—Four  warnings  and  punishmcnPs/ 218— Summary  of  calculations. 

180-S71 


CONTENTS.  '  27 


SECSION  viir. 

Sabbaths  and  Jubilees.  Sabbath  instituted  on  the  seventh  day  of 
the  world— Use  of  the  number  7— Sabbath,  a  type  oJ  the  iMillenniiim 
—Extract  from  Scott.  222—234 

SECTION   IX. 

Return  of  the  Jews.  Objections  answered  by  facts— Recent 
movements  favorable — Original  Note,  will  return  unconverted — 40,- 
000  in  Palestine, 236 — Do,views  to  be  formed  from  analogy  as  to  their 
return — the  time — Original  Note,  their  strong:  regard  to  the  promised 
land,  239— Physical  renovation,  242,  The  truth  and  honor  of  God 
pledged  (or  their  return,  244.  Original  Note,  influence  ol  the  com- 
pletion of  Prophecy  in  their  return,  on  unbelievers,  246 — Visit  to 
Jewish  synagogues — Efl^oits  to  convert  them  to  the  Gospel  unsuc- 
cessful till  their  return,  248— Influence  of  Christian  sympathy  when 
in  their  Own  land— Remark  on  Jacob's  serving  Labsn,  250— Feeling 
of  Jews  in  Poland,  254.  235—257 

SECTION  X. 

Evening  Vision  concluded.  The  prophet  glances  at  the  closing: 
scenes  of  earih — 'I'ime  of  trouble,  259 — Misapplication  of  prophecies 
noticed  in  a  note,  261 — Notice  of  two  errors,  1st,  all  the  predictions 
ot  Daniel  were  completed  in  time  of  Antiochus,  2d,  all  were,  at  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem,  263 — Meaning  of  "seal  the  hook,"  "^64 — 
Evasion  of  Miller — 1260  years  applied  solely  to  the  evening  vision, 
266— This  is  the  time  allowed  to  mystical  Babylon— Ri?ht discrimina- 
tion ofthe  two  visions  needful  to  correct  computation,  268 — source  of 
prophetic  imagery,  270 — Note  from  "Millei  exploded" — 75  years  twi- 
light-Mode of  computing  time,  272— The  angel  who  conversed  with 
John  supposed  to  be  Daniel,  275 — Diagram  oflbe  evening  vision,  277. 

258—277 

SECTION  XL 

Revelation  of  John.  Introductor/  remarks  on  the  Revelation* 
278— Vision'  ofthe  throne,  280— Sea  of  glass,  282— Four',  living  crea- 
tures. 284.  278—286 


28  CONTENTS. 

SECTION  XII. 

The  Seven  Seals.    The  first  explained— The  white  horse,  290— . 

Second  ;  the    red  horse,292— Thiid  ;  the  blar-.ii  horse,  294— Fourth  ; 

the  pale  horse,  296— Filth  ;  persecution  by  Dioclesian,  298— Sixth  ; 

change  under  Constantine,300 — Seventh  ;  silence  in  heaven,  312. 

287—315 

SECTION  XUI. 

Seven  Trumpets.  The  first  trumpet  period;  fire, hail  and  blood, 
318 — Second  ;  burning  mountain  cast  into  the  sea,  319— Third  ;  great 
star  full  upon  the  rivers, 321— Fourth  ;  sun,  moon  and  stars  darkened, 
323 — Fifth,  and  first  wo  ;  star  fell  upon  the  earth,  and  had  the  key  of 
the  bottomless  pit,  326— Sixth  ;  four  angels  bound  on  the  Euphrates, 
loosed,  334 — Seventh  ;  Horses  with  breastplates  of  fire,  &c.,  336 — the 
mighty  angel  clothed  with  a  cloud,  &c.,  341.  316—343 

SECTION  XIV. 

The  TWO  Witnesses.  The  temple  measured,345— Who  the  wit- 
nesses are,  346 — by  what  typified — What  they  symbolize — They  are 
slain  and  lie  unburied,  349 — The  great  city,  earthquake,  and  lulling 
ol  a  tenth  part  ol  the  city.  344—353 

SECTION  XV. 

The  Dragon  wars  with  the  Woman.  The  red  dragon — How  he 
wars,  356— Who  is  the  nian-child--The  flood  from  the  dragon. 

354-361 

SECTION   XVI. 
The  ten-hofned  Beast  of  the  Sea.    Bnast  like  a  leopard,  hav- 
ing 7  heads  and  10  horns— Its  mighty  power.-  same  as  the  one  seen 
by  Daniel  366— Its  destination.  362—367 

Two  Horned  Beast.    His  two  horns,  image  and  number, 368 — 369 

SECTION  XVII. 

Reformation,  or  second  Sealing  Time.  144,000  with  the  Lamb 
— New  song,  whence  they  came,  370— The  missionary  angel,  with 
tba  everlasting  grospel- -The  destruction  of  anti-Christ,  372.  370—374 


CONTENTS.  29 


SECTION  XVIII. 

The  Harvest  of  the  Wicked.  The  sharp  sickle  thiust  in  to 
reap  the  carthj  378— The  wine  press  trodden;  a  sea  of  blood,  381. 

375—381 

SECTION  XIX. 

Seven  Last  Plagues.  Sea  of  glass  and  fire — seven  vials,  385 — 
The  first  poured  on  the  earth,  and  a  sore  fell  on  men---The  second; 
the  se.i  became  blood,  387— The  third ;  the  rivers  became  blood— The 
fourth  poured  on  the  sun;  men  scorched— The  fifth, poured  on  ^the 
seat  of  the  beast— The  sixth,  on  the  river  Euphrates,  which  was 
dried  op,  392— Three  onclean  spirits  gather  the  nations  to  battle- 
Mystery,  396.  382-39S 

SECTION  XX. 

r  The  woman  on  the  scaklet  colored  Beast.  The  angel  in- 
structs John  as  to  the  beast  of  seven  heads  and  .ten  horn.-i— Severs 
heads  explained, 399— One  not  yet— Its  short  duration  and  utter  ruin, 
— Mapriage  OF  THE  Lamb,  after  the  due  preparation  of  the  bride,. 
40G— Satan  bound  a  thousand  years,  408— The  first  resurrection — 
Short  season  of  apostacy— Go?  and  Magog,  409— Resurrection  aunfi 
final  judgment  of  the  wicked,  410. 


SYMBOLICAL  INDEX, 

OR  A  DIRECTION  TO  THOSE    DIVISIONS   OF  THE    APOCALYPSE    DENOTED 
BT  SEALS,  TRUMPETS,  AND    VIALS. 

In  giving  the  chronology  of  the  several  parts  of  the  Apocalypse,  as 
divided  into  seala,  trumpets,  and  viuls,  the  author  does  not  assume 
to  bo  always  perfectly  correct.  He  has  aimed  to  be  impartial, and 
would  gladly  be  corrected  in  any  mistake  which  may  occur  in  dates 
The  chronology  of  the  Apocalyptic  visions  of  John,  are  not  in  ul 
cases  so  easily  determined  as  the  evening  and  morning  visions 
of  Daniel.  With  the  great  outlines,  ho\ycver,  there  is  no  need 
of  mistak«. 


SYMBOLICAL  INDEX. 


31 


^:<:\\y''/'/-^^    First.  This  first  volume  or  division  of  the  Apocalj-p- 
S  E  AL:J  tic  book, extends  frein  A,  D.  about  TO.to  100,  page  290. 


■^  '^    Second. — Or  second  volume,  extends  from  A.  D. 

.SEAL'!  100,  to  138, 


Third.— From  A.  D.  138,  to  193, 


294. 


::n\\^  '//>^    Fourth,  embraces  a  period  from  193,  to  270,       296 

SEAL 


Sixth  a  period  from  304  to  350. 


300 


ri^'B'  a't^    Seventh,    extends    from  A.   D.  350,  to   tlie  end 
S  E  AI*  J  of  t|,e  world,  312, 


asf 


SYMBOLICAL  INDEX. 


The    first    trumpet    period,    extendi 
from  A.  D.  380,  to  4L0,  page  318^ 


Second   trumpet  period,  from   410  ta 
450,  319. 


Third   trumpet  period,   from  450,  to 
500»  3&L 


Fourth  tkumpet    period,  from  500  ta 
566,  323. 


First  Wo 


Fifth  trumpet  period,  from  566  to 
1Q81.  The  wo  <yf  this  crumpet,  from  612 
to  762,  826 


Second  Wo 


Sixth  trumpet  period,  from  1281  to  the 
downfaJl  of  popery.  The  wo  of  thistrum- 
pet,  from  1281  to  1672,  233 


THfRD    Wo 


Seventh  trumpet  period, from  the  down- 
fall of  popery,  to  the  end  of  the  world.  The 
woof  this  trumpet,  from  the  first  blast  to 
the  completion  of  the  harvest  and  vintage 
•f  thrwiekedr 


SYMBOLICAL  INDEX. 


33 


Ffirst    was  poured  upon  the  Roman  earth,  and 

\>^      exposed  the  ulcerous  diameter  of  the  papal  cliurch 

in  the    days  of  Leo  X.    and    Martin    Luther. — i^ec- 

tion  XIX  :  page  386 


Seond  was  poured  upon  the  Roman  Sea  during 
the  troublesome  times  subsequent  lo  the  Reform 
ation,  387 


Third  was  poured  upon  the  tributary  streams 
of  the  Roman  Sea  in  the  devastating  wurs  of  )he 
17th  century,  388 


Fourth  was  poured  upon  the  sun,  or  kingly 
authority  which  scorched  the  people  of  Europe  as 
with  fire,  during  the  early  part  of  the  18lh  cen- 
tury, 389 


Fifth  was  poured  upon  the  seat  of  the  Romish 
church,  and  produced  terror  and  darkness  in  he- 
councils  during  and  subsequent  to  the  French  Rev- 
olution, 390 


Sixth  was  poured  upon  the  proud  Ottoman,  and 
is  now  rapiilly  drying  up  his  b  uphraloun  power, 
which  will  soon  result  in  the  overthrow  of  Mo- 
hamedanisin,  391 


Seventh,  or  last  plague,  is  to  he  ponrod  into  the 
air,  not  local,  but  all  pervadins,  resulting  in  the  over- 
throw of  the  western  Ami-Christ,  39 


INDEX 


PICTURAL  ILLUSTRATIONS 

CONTAINED  IN  THIS  VOLUME. 

Nebuchadnezzar's  Visionary  Image,  page  42" 

The  symbolical  Lion  of  Daniel's  evenfng  Vision,  50 

The  Bear  and  three  ribs,  62 

The  Leopard  wiiii  four  heads  and  four  wings,  53 

The  "  dreadful  and  terrible  "  beabt  with  ten  horns,  56 

The  little  horn  which  plucks  up  three  of  the  first,  51 

The  symbolical  Ram  of  the  nrorning  Vision,  66 

The  hegoat  with  one  horn,  69 

Afterwards  four  horns,  70 

The  little  horn  arising  out  of  one  of  the  four,  71 

A  portrature  of  Jerusalem  besieged-,  198 

Nebuchadnezzar's  visionary  Tree,  204 

The  brazen  Sea  of  the  temple,  283 

The  sea  of  glass,  284 

The  four  living  creatures,  286 

The  white  horse,  291 

The  red  horse,  293 

The  black  horse,  295 

Death  and  the  pale  horse,  297 

The  sun  in  blackness,  300 

The  moon  turned  into  blood,  " 

Four  angels  on  the  four  corners  of  the  earth,  303 

First  flying  angel,  306 

Medal  of  Coastantine.  303 


TtCTURAL  INDEX.  ^§5 

Set-en  angels  wilh  seven  trumpets,  .313 

Angel  at  the  golden  altar,  314 

Casting  the  fire  into  the  earth,  315 

Seven  angels  prepared  to  sound,  315 

First  angel  sounds,  318 

Second  angel  sounds,  .3I9 

Third  angel  and  falling  star,  321 

Fourth  angol  and  the  sun  darkened^  323 

Second  flying  angel,  325 

Fifth  trumpet  and  fallen  star,  -326 

Opening  of  ihe  bottomless  pit,  328 

Swarms  of  Saracenic  locusts,                           ,  .339 

Sixth  trumpet — loosing  the  four  sultan  aHgeIs>  334 

Turkish  horseman,  336 

A  mighty  angel,  340 

The  two  witnesses,  .345 

Ascent  of  the  two  witnesses,  -360 

Seventh  angel  sounding,  352 

Red  dragon  with  seven  heads  and  ten  hornS'j  355 

Dragon  ready  io  devour  the  man-child,  357 

Conflict  of  Michael  wilh  the  dragon,  358 

The  dragon  wroth  with  the  woman,  SSn 

The  dragon  givmg  his  seat  and  power  to  the  beastj  363 

Wounded  head  of  the  beast  healed,  364 

'ihe  dragon  worshipped,  365 
The  blasphemous  beast  wilh  seven  heads  and  ten  hOTns,       366 

Imperial  image,  or  effigy  of  the  beastj  369 

The  missionary  angel,  371 

Third  flying  angel,  372 

Fourth  flying  ang«l,  373 

Fifth  flying  angel,  .375 

Angel  setting  on  a  ujjiie  cloud,  376 

Sixth  flying  angd,  377 

The  reapers,  378 


36  yiCTURAL  INDHX. 

Angel  with  a  sharp  sickle,  37^ 

Ang:el  from  the  ahar,  ?8(J 

Angel  gathering  the  vine  of  (he  earth,  381 

Seven  an°els  with  the  seven  vials,  3'  4 

Firil  angel  pours  out  his  vial  upon  the  earth,  386 

Second  angel  pours  out  his  vial  upon  ihe  sea,  387 

Third  angel  pours  out  his  vial  upon  the  founlains^  388 

Fourth  angel  pours  out  his  vial  upon  the  sun,  383 
Fifth  angel  pours  out  his  vial  upon  the  seal  of  the  beast,  390 
Sixth  angel  pours  out  his  vial  upon  the  river  Euphrates,       391 

The  dragon  issues  an  unclean  spirit  like  a  frog,  392 

The  beast  issues  his  unclean  spirit  like  a  frog,  393^ 

The  false  prophet  isssues  his  unclean  spirit  like  a  frog,  3Di 
The  last  angel  pours  out  his  vial  into  the  air,  395 

The  mother  of  harlots  and  abomination  of  the  earth,  3  '6 

Five  heads  of  ihe  beast  fallen,  one  is,  the  other  not  ^et,  39& 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


SECTION  I. 


BABYLON. 


Ancient  Babylon  is  the  great  depot,  or 
starting  point  of  a  twofold  series  of  events, 
important  in  their  bearing  on  the  destiny  ojf 
man.  First,  the  captivity  of  the  Jews  in 
Babylon,  the  very  first  link  of  an  unbroken 
chain  of  predicted  events  which  runs  through 
the  history  of  the  church  in  all  subsequent 
periods,  to  her  complete  emancipation  from 
all  earthly  encumbrances,  and  the  consumma- 
tion of  her  glorious  union  to  Christ,  to  whom 
she  has  so  long  been  betrothed.  (Rev. 
xix:  7,8.) 

The  other   series    of  events,   predicted, 

pertain  to  a  power  antagonist  to  Christ  and 

his  intended  bride,   aiming   to  prevent    the 

union  if  possible  by  seduction,  if  not,  perse- 

4 


38  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY* 

cution  unto  death.  This  chain,  unbroken- 
connects  the  government  of  ancient  Baby- 
Ion,  with  the  power  that  will  be  defeated  in 
the  last  "  battle  of  the  great  day  of  God  Al- 
mighty." From  the  last  link  in  these  hu- 
man governments,  arose  a  peculiar  sys- 
tem called  "  mystery i  Babylon  the  greats  the 
mother  of  harlots,"  by  whom  the  nominal 
church  was  seduced  from  Christ,  and  led 
into  "fornication  with  the  kings  of  the 
earth." 

If  Babylon  is  a  starting  point  for  such 
great  events,  it  is  important  to  trace  its  his- 
tory as  far  back  as  possible. 

In  Daniel,  1 :  2,  Babylon  is  said  to  be  sit- 
uated "in  the  land  of  Shinar.'  Any  type, 
or  analogy,  which  may  be  found  to  extend 
this  great  chain  of  providential  events  back 
as  well  as  forward,  is  important  to  the  sub- 
ject in  hand.  Whether  this  was  the  same 
plain  in  the  land  of  Shinar,"  (Gen.  x :  1  to 
9,)  on  which  were  built  the  great  city  and 
tower  of  Babel,  may  not  at  this  distant  day 
be  certainly  known.  Yet  the  coincidence 
in  name  and  location  render  it  probable. 
Historians  also  suppose  from  all  the  facts  in 
the  case,  that  the  tower  of  Belus  in  Babylon, 
was  the  remains  of  the  tower  of  Babel.  At 
any  rate,  Babel  with  all   its  attending  cir- 


BABYLON.  39 

cumstances  is  a  striking  type  and  illustration 
of  Babylon,  both  literal  and  mystical.  The 
derivation  and  signification  of  the  word  is  the 
same.  The  object  was  rebellion  against  the 
government  of  God,  and  the  assumption  of 
supreme  power  and  independence.  Baby- 
lon, ancient  as  well  as  modern,  literal  and 
mystical,  was  always  a  "  rebellious  city."  It 
always  persecuted  the  church  of  God,  enslav- 
ing her  or  driving  her  into  "  the  wilderness." 
"  Babylon  the  great"  is  to  "come  into  remem- 
brance before  God,"  and  "  receive  of  the 
plagues,"  due  for  her  crimes. 

The  literal  Babylon  was  situated  in  the 
land  of  Chaldea,  known  also  by  the  name  of 
Babylonia.  The  immense  fertility  of  Chaldea, 
corresponded,  if  that  of  any  country  could 
vie,  with  the  greatness  of  Babylon.  If  ever 
there  was  a  city  that  seemed  to  bid  defiance 
to  any  prediction  of  its  fall,  that  city  was 
Babylon.  Its  walls,  which  were  reckoned 
among  the  wonders  of  the  world,  appeared 
rather  like  the  bulwarks  of  nature  than  the 
workmanship  of  man.  The  temple  ofBe- 
lus,  supposed  by  some  to  be  the  remains  of 
the  Tower  of  Babel,  was  half  a  mile  in  cir- 
cumference and  a  furlong  in  height.  Baby- 
lonia was  one  vast  plain,  adorned  and  en- 
riched by  the  Euphrates  and  the  Tigris,  from 


40  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

tne  numerous  canals  that  intersected  the 
country  from  one  river  to  the  other,  water 
was  distributed  over  the  fields  by  manual  la- 
bor and  by  hydraulic  machines,  giving  rise  in 
that  warm  climate,  and  rich,  exhaustless  soil, 
to  an  exuberance  of  produce  without  a 
known  parallel,  over  so  extensive  a  region 
either  in  ancient  or  modern  times. 

BOOK  OF  DANIEL. 

The  first  chapter  of  Daniel  is  historical, 
giving  a  brief  account  of  his  capture  at  Jeru- 
salem by  the  king  of  Babylon,  607  years  be- 
fore Christ,  thus  furnishing  the  first  date  of 
that  noted  captivity  of  the  Jews  which  last- 
ed 70  years.  Daniel  was  about  20  years  old 
at  this  time.  The  second  chapter  contains 
the  prophetical  interpretation  of  Nebuchad- 
nezzar's dream.  The  four  succeeding  chap- 
ters are  historical,  written  with  a  spirit  and 
animation  highly  interesting,  enriched  with 
the  most  exalted  sentiments  of  piety  and  the 
finest  attestations  to  the  faithfulness  of 
God,  to  protect  and  bless  those  who  put  their 
trust  in  him.  The  six  first  chapters,  are 
therefore  mostly  historical,  down  to  the 
time  that  Daniel  was  cast  into  the  Lion's  den, 
just  70  years  from  the  commencement  of  his 
story.     The  last  six  chapters  being  entirely 


Nebuchadnezzar's  dream  4*1 

prophetical,  is  that  portion  of  the  book  of 
Daniel,  with  which  the  object  of  this  work  is 

concerned, including,  however,  that  portion  of 
the  second  chapter  interpreting  the  visionary 
image  of  the  king  of  Babylon,  The  proph- 
ecy is  written  part  in  Hebrew,  and  part  in 

Chaldea. 

IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 

The  interpretation  of  this  dream  was  giv- 
en 603  years  before  Christ,  while  Daniel 
was  yet  a  youth,  having  been  in  Babylon  but 
three  years,  being  about  67  years  before  he 
was  cast  into  the  Lion's  den. 

This  image  made  a  magnificent  appear- 
ance before  the  mind  and  imagination  of  a 
heathen  prince,  while  to  Daniel,  the  same 
events  are  afterwards  represented  under  the 
appearance  of  fierce  and  devouring  wild 
beasts.  And,  indeed,  the  monarchies,  de- 
noted by  these  emblems,  were  the  great  sup- 
porters of  idolatry,  tyranny,  and  persecution 
in  the  world,  down  to  the  destruction  of 
the '*  man  of  sin,"  by  the  "stone  cut  out 
without  hands, "^and  the  perfect  establish- 
ment of  Christ's  kingdom  which  will  "  fill 
the  whole  earth ;" — superceding  all  other 
kingdoms. 

4* 


42 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHFXV 


Baby 
Em 


Medes'and 
Em 


Gre 
Em 


Ro 

Em 


Ionian 
pi  re. 


Persian 
pire. 


cian 

pire. 


man 
pire. 


4a 


Chap.  II,  31.  Thou,  0  king,  sawest,  and  behold  a  great 
image.  This  great  image,  whose  brightness  was  excel- 
lent, stood  before  thee,  and  the  form  thereof  was  terrible. 

32  This  image's  head  was  of  fine  gold,  his  breast 
and  his  arms  of  silv^er,  his  belly  and  his  thighs  of  brass, 

33  His  legs  of  iron,  his  feet  part  of  iron  and  part  of 
clay. 

34  Thou  sawest  till  that  a  stone  was  cut  out  without 
hands,  which  smote  the  image  upon  his  feet  that  were 
of  iron  and  clay,  and  brake  them  to  pieces. 

35  Then  was  the  iron,  the  clay,  the  brass,  the  silver 
and  the  gold,  broken  to  pieces  together,  and  became  like 
the  chaff  of  the  summer  threshing  floors  ;  and  the  wind 
carried  them  away,  that  no  place  was  found  for  them  : 
and  the  stone  that  smote  the  image  became  a  great 
mountain,  and  filled  the  whole  earth. 

36  This  IS  the  dream ;  and  we  will  tell  the  interpre- 
tation thereof  before  the  king. 

37  Thou,  0  king,  art  a  king  of  kings  :  for  the  God  of 
heaven  hath  given  thee  a  kingdom,  power,  and  strength, 
and  glory. 

38  And  wheresoever  the  children  of  men  dwell,  the 
beasts  of  the  field,  and  the  fowls  of  the  heaven,  hath  he 
given  into  thy  hand,  and  hath  made  thee  ruler  over 
them  all.     Thou  art  this  head  of  gold. 


Thou,  0  king,  art  a  king 
of  kings.  Thou  art  this 
head  of  gold. 


The  whole  Chaldean  monarchy,  including 
a  succession  of  kings,  is  denoted  by  this  head 
of  gold,  but  as  Nebuchadnezzar  was  then 
reigning,  and  being  the  most  prominent 
king  of  the  succession,  it  was  proper  to  call 
him  "  this  head  of  gold."     ''The  head''  of 


44 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 


the  image,  (verse  32,)  being  the  emblem  of 
this  monarcljy,  seems  only  to  denote  its  pri- 
ority in  order  of  time,  for  the  term  of  its  con- 
tinuance was  far  shorter  than  that  of  any  of 
the  others. 

39  And  after  thee  shall  arise  another  kingdom  infe- 
rior to  thee,  and  another  third  kingdom  of  brass,  which 
shall  bear  rule  over  all  the  earth. 


And  after  thee  shall 
arise  another  kingdom 
inferior  to  thee. 


Here  we  have  the  direct  intimation,  that 
a  succession  of  princes  of  the  same  nation, 
and  not  individual  monarchs,  are  meant  by 
"  kings"  in  the  general  language  of  proph- 
ecy. In  this  verse  it  is  called  another  king- 
dom. This  other  kingdom,  which  was  to- 
succeed  the   Chaldean  monarchy,  was  the 


Nebuchadnezzar's  dream.  45 

united  power  of  the  Medes  and  Persians, 
and  we  may  date  its  establishment  in  power, 
about  the  year  538  before  Christ,  at  the  tak- 
ing of  Babylon.  This  monarchy  was  in  some 
respects  inferior  to  the  first,  as  silver  is  infe- 
rior to  gold ;  (verse  3*2,)  not  indeed  inferior 
in  strength  or  durability,  for  such  was  not 
the  fact ;  but  for  a  time  it  was  inferior  in 
wealth  and  splendor.  This  would  be  of 
more  importance  in  the  mind  of  Nebuchad- 
nezzar, than  in  the  estimation  of  Daniel. 


And  another  third  king- 
dom of  brass,  which  shall 
bear  rule  over  all  the  earth. 


The  third  kingdom,  represented  by  the 
belly  and  thighs  of  the  image  formed  of 
brass,  (verse  38)  was  the  united  Mace- 
donian and  Grecian,  which  succeeded 
the  Persian  empire  about  330  years  before 
Christ.  This  was  established  by  the  con- 
quests of  Alexander,  and  continued  under 
his  successor.     He  as  an  individual,  and  the 


46  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

division  of  his  empire  into  four  monarchies, 
will  be  particularly  described  in  a  subsequent 
prophecy. 

40  And  the  fourth  kingdom 
shall  be  strong  as  iron  ;  for- 
asmuch as  iron  breaketh  in 
pieces  and  subdueth  all 
ihmgs ;  and  as  iron  that 
breaketh  all  these,  shall  it 
break  in  pieces  and  bruise. 

41  And  whereas  thou  saw- 
est  the  feet  and  toes,  part  of 
potter's  clay,  and  part  of 
iron,  the  kingdom  shall  be 
divided  ;  but  there  shall  be  in 

it  of  the  strength  of  the  iron,j  ______      

forasmuch  as  thou  sawest  the  iron  mixed  with  the 
miry  clay. 

42  And  as  the  toes  of  the  feet  were  part  of  iron,  and 
part  of  clay,  so  the  kingdom  shall  be  partly  strong,  and 
partly  broken, 

43  And  whereas  thou  sawest  iron  mixed  with  miry 
clay,  they  shall  mingle  themselves  with  the  seed  of 
men  ;  but  they  shall  not  cleave  one  to  another,  even  as 
iron  is  not  mixed  with  clay. 

These  verses  describe  the  Roman  empire, 
which  succeeded  the  Greek  and  Macedon- 
ian, about  the  time  of  the  Caesars,  Julius, 
and  Augustus,  perhaps  we  may  reckon  about 
30  years  before  the  christian  era.  Augus- 
tus Coesar,  was  emperor  of  Rome  at  the  time 
of  Christ's  birth,  and  Tiberias  Caesar  at  the 
time  of  his  crucifixion.     It  was  strong  like 


xebuchadnezzar's  dream.  47 

iron,  and  "break  in  pieces  and  subdued  all 
things."  The  Romans  in  the  former  part  of 
their  prosperity,  were  remarkable  for  valor, 
hardiness,  frugality,  and  poverty,  of  which 
iron  is  a  proper  emblem.  The  two  consuls 
by  which  they  were  long  governed,  and  the 
eastern  and  western  empires,  into  which  their 
dominions  were  ultimately  divided,  may  be 
denoted  by  the  two  legs  and  feet  on  which 
the  image  stood;  and  the  ten  toes  into 
which  the  feet  are  divided,  represented  the 
ten  kingdoms  into  which  the  whole  empire 
was  afterwards  divided.  But  these  things 
will  be  more  fully  illustrated  in  a  subsequent 
part  of  the  book,  where  the  same  empire  is 
represented  as  a  beast  with  seven  heads  and 
ten  horns. 


44  And  in  the  days  of  these  kings  shall  the  God  of 
heaven  set  up  a  kingdom,  which  shall  never  be  destroy- 
ed ;  and  the  kingdom  shall  not  be  left  to  other  people, 
but  it  shall  break  in  pieces  and  consume  all  these  king- 
doms, and  it  shall  stand  forever. 

45  Forasmuch  as  thou  sawest  that  the  stone  was  cut 
out  of  the  mountain  without  hands,  and  that  it  brake 
in  pieces  the  iron,  the  brass,  the  clay,  the  silver,  the 
gold ;  the  great  God  hath  made  isnown  to  the  king  what 
shall  come  to  pass  hereafter  ;  and  the  dream  is  certain, 
and  the  interpretation  thereof  sure. 


Here  we  have  the  assurance  that  Christ's 


48  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

government  will  supercede  all  human  gov- 
ernments, establishing  that  kingdom  which 
is  righteousness,  peace,  and  joy  in  the  Holy 
Ghost.  This  part  of  the  prophecy  remains 
to  be  fulfilled ;  so  that  we  have  in  this 
dream  a  most  extraordinary  prophetical  ab- 
stract of  the  most  signal  events,  which  were 
to  take  place  through  all  succeeding  ages, 
down  to  the  millenial  reign  of  the  saints. 
Men  in  future  ages  will  rejoice  with  aston- 
ishment and  awe,  as  they  witness  this  stone 
"cutout  without  hands,"  destroying  the  re- 
mains of  this  image  ;  and  becoming  univer- 
sally triumphant!  The  interpretation  of  this 
dream  is  a  perfect  ouUine,  commencing  and 
ending  with  Daniel's  evening  vision  which 
follows,  (chap.  7)  It  is  one  of  the  paral 
lei  lines  or  tracts  of  that  vision 


SECTION  II. 


THE  EVENING  VISION  OF  DANIEL- 


Daniel  having  concluded  in  the  preceding 
six  chapters,  all  the  historical  records  which 
he  was  directed  to  transmit  to  posterity,  com- 
mences in  this  chapter  his  own  prophetical 
visions.  His  first  or  evening  vision  contains 
for  substance,  the  same  prophetical  intima- 
tions with  Nebuchadnezzar's  dream,  but 
under  different  allusions,  and  with  many  ad- 
ditional circumstances.  This  took  place  48 
years  after  Nebuchadnezzar's  dream,  555 
years  before  Christ,  and  18  years  before  Dan- 
iel was  cast  into  the  lion's  den. 

Chap.  vii.  In  the  first  year  of  Belshazzar  king  of 
Babylon,  Daniel  had  a  dream  and  visions  of  his  head 
upon  his  bed  :  then  he  wrote  the  dream,  and  told  the 
sum  of  the  matters. 

2  Daniel  spake  and  said,  I  saw  in  my  vision  by  night; 
and  behold,  the  four  winds  of  the  heaven  strove  upon 
the  great  sea. 

3  And  four  great  beasts  came  up  from  the  sea,  di- 
verse one  from  another. 

5 


50 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


'^  The  great  sea"  agitated,  is  a  fit  emblem, 
and  is  often  used  in  the  scriptiires  to  denote 
the  earth  and  its  inhabitants,  as  thrown  into 
perpetual  convulsions  by  ambitious  princes, 
who  amid  the  confusion  and  wild  uproar, 
usurp  dominion.  "  The  wicked  are  like  the 
troubled  sea  whose  waters  cannot  rest." 
The ''four  beasts"  signify  the  same  as  the 
four  parts  of  Nebuchadnezzar's  image. 
What  was  to  his  carnal  mind  splendid  em- 
pires, represented  by  a  magnificent  image, 
was  to  the  pious  mind  of  Daniel,  odious  and 
destructive  governments,  aptly  denoted  by 
wild  devouring  beasts. 

4  The  first  was 
like  a  lion,  and  had 
eagle's  wings  :  I  be- 
held till  the  wings 
thereof  were  pluck- 
ed, and  it  was  lifted 
up  from  the  earth, 
and  made  stand  up- 
on the  feet  as  a  man, 
and  a  man's  heart 
was  given  to  it. 

The  Babylonian  empire  which  rose  out  of 
the  tumultuous  sea  of  Assyria,  Chaldea,  and 
other  eastern  nations,  arrived  at  its  zenith  of 
glory  under  Nebuchadnezzar,  (B.  C.  603,) 
and  now  dechning  under  Belshazzar's  ad- 
ministration,  (B.  C.  555,)  was  intended  by 


EVENING    VISION, 


51 


this  beast.  The  "lion,"  was  an  emblem  of 
Nebuchadnezzar's  courage,  and  success,  in 
acquiring  dominion  over  liis  neighbors. 
The  "eagle's  wings"  denote  the  rapidity, 
and  vigor,  with  which  he  prosecuted  his  vic- 
tories. After  the  death  of  Nebuchadnez- 
zar "  the  wings  thereof  were  plucked." 


I  beheld  till  the  wings  thereof  were 
plucked,  and  it  was  lilted  up  from  the 
earth,  and  made  stand  upon  the  feet 
as  a  man,  and  a  man's  heart  was 
given  to  it. 


The  Chaldeans  made  no  more  conquests, 
several  of  the  subjected  nations  revolted,  the 
Medes  and  Persians  soon  began  to  straiten 
them,  till  at  length  Babylon  was  besieged,  and 
taken,  (Dan.  v.  30,)  and  this  monarchy  ter- 
minated. No  longer  was  this  beast  rapid  in 
conquest,  as  an  eagle,  or  courageous  and 
terrible,  as  a  lion.  Tiie  remaining  kings, 
after  Nebuchadnezzar,  were  cautious,  and 
instead  of  facing  the  Persian  •'  bear"  like  a 


52  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

"lion,"  was  timid  as  "  a  man,"  Belshazzar, 
shut  himself  up  in  Babylon,  not  daring  to 
meet  Cyrus  in  open  field,  and  the  signal 
manner  in  which  that  city  was  taken,  is  re- 
lated in  history,  som.e  account  of  which  is 
given  in  Dan.  chap.  5,  already   referred  to. 

5  And  behold  another 
beast,  a  second,  like  to  a 
bear,  and  it  raised  up  it- 
self on  one  side,  and  it 
had  three  ribs  in  the 
mouth  of  it  between  the 
teeth  of  it ;  and  they  said 
thus   unto   it,   Arise,  devour  much  flesh. 

After  the  lion  had  his  wings  plucked, 
and  became  timid  as  '^  a  man,"  ''another 
beast  like  to  a  bear,"  was  more  than  a  match 
for  him.  Such  is  the  rise  and  fall  of  em- 
pires. The  second  beast,  represented  the 
Medes,  and  Persians — a  bear,  appears  next  on 
the  bloody  stage  of  human  strife  and  ambit- 
ion. The  "  bear,"  also  arose,  out  of  the 
*' troubled  sea"  of  agitated  nations,  "whose 
waters  cast  up  mire  and  dirt."  The  bear, 
is  less  noble  and  courageous,  but  more  vora- 
cious and  savage,  than  a  lion.  This  beast, 
"  raised  up  itself  on  one  side."  This  may  de- 
note the  manner,  in  which  the  Medes  and 
Persians  extended  iheir  conquests  almost 
wholly  to  the  west  of  their  own   countries. 


EVENING    VISION.  53 

It  had  also  "  three  ribs  between  its  teeth/' 
which  is  interpreted  of  the  three  kingdoms 
of  Babylon,  Lydia  and  Egypt,  which  the 
Persians  conquered, and  grievously  oppress- 
ed. The  cruelty  of  the  Persian  kings,  ac- 
cording to  history  is  almost  without  a  paral- 
lel, and  this,  is  denoted  by  the  prophetic 
indication,  "  arise,  devour  much  flesh."  In 
their  conquests  of  the  world,  they  found 
nothing  to  impede  their  bloody  course,  un- 
til the  sun  of  their  empire  past  its  meridian, 
and  finally  set  amid  the  countries  of  Thrace^ 
Macedonia,  Greece,  and  other  European 
nations.  These,  in  their  turn,  were  preparing 
to  compete  with  the  oriental  nations,  for  uni- 
versal dominion.  History,  gives  astonishing- 
accounts,  of  the  immense  armies  which 
Xerxes  the  Great  marched  into  Greece,  some 
five  or  six  millions.  His  army  was  repulsed  by 
the  Greeks.  Millions  of  his  own  wretched 
subjects  perished  in  this  signal  defeat.  The 
Persian  beast,  it  may  be  truly  said,  "  de- 
voured much  flesh." 


6  After  this,  I  beheld, 
and  lo,  another,  like  a  leop- 
ard, which  had  upon  the 
back  of  it  four  wings  of  a 
fowl ;  the  beast  had  also 
four  heads  ;  and  dominion 
was  given  to  it. 


54     ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

This  extraordinary  leopard,  was  the  em- 
blem of  the  Greek  and  Macedonian  empire, 
which  became  one  of  the  most  renowned  in 
the  world.  It  was  erected,  by  Alexander 
the  Great,  on  the  ruins  of  the  Persam 
monarchy.  The  rapid  marching  of  this 
mighty  conqueror,  could  not  be  fully  repre- 
sented by  the  leopard,  without  giving  to  it, 
"  four  wings  of  a  fowl."  After  Alexander 
had  conquered  the  world,  and  died,  at  Baby- 
lon, (B.  C.  323,)  his  empire  was  divided 
into  four,  Egypt,  Syria,  Macedonia  and 
Thrace.  These  divisions  were  denoted  by 
the  four  heads  of  the  leopard,  which  will  be 
considered  more  fully  when  we  come  to  Dan- 
iel's morning  vision,  where  this  empire  is  de- 
noted by  the  he-goat,  with  first  one  and  then 
four  horns,  with  its  appropriate  little  horn, 
while  the  fourth  beast  which  is  next  to  be 
considered,  receives  a  similar  modification, 
by  Daniel's  description,  and  several  signifi- 
cant alterations  in  the  Apocalypse.  Here, 
as  will  be  seen  by  the  illustration  on  the  op- 
posite page,  he  has  feet  adapted  to  "stamp 
the  residue."  While  representing  Pagan 
Rome  he  has  a  tail,  for  casting  down  the 
stars,  c5'c.  (Rev.  xii :  4.)When  the  empire  be- 
comes nominally  christian,  its  character  par- 
takes of  the  peculiarities  of  the  three  empires 
we  have  just  been  considering.  (Rev.  xiii:2.) 


EVENING    VISION.  65 

7  And  after  this  I  saw  in  the  night  visions,  and  behold  a 
fourth  beast,  dreadful  and  terrible,  and  strong  exceed- 
ingly ;  and  it  had  great  irOn  teeth  :  it  devoured  and 
brake  in  pieces,  and  stamped  the  residue  with  the  feet  of 
it :  and  it  was  diverse  from  all  the  beasts  that  were  be- 
fore it  j  and  it  had  ten  horns.     . 


This  fourth  and  most  terrible  beast,  de- 
notes the  Roman  empire,  the  commence- 
ment of  which  may  be  dated,  before  Christ, 
about  30.  This  beast  accords  with  the  legs, 
feet,  and  toes,  of  Nebuchadnezzar's  image, 
(chap,  ii :  40-43.)  This  empire  far  exceed- 
ed, in  power,  fierceness,  and  destructive  rage, 
all  that  had  gone  before  it,  as  well  as  in  ex- 
tent, and  long  duration  of  its  dominion,  and 
no  animal  is  found,  so  terrible,  and  furious 


66         Illustrations  ob^  prophecy. 

as  to  lend  it  a  suitable  name.  This  fourth 
empire  was  governed  in  another  manner, 
and  by  other  maxims,  than  any  of  the  pre- 
ceding, and  in  process  of  time,  it  was  di- 
vided int©  ten  kingdoms. 

These  divisions  will  be  enumerated,  and 
illustrated,  when  we  come  to  John's  descrip- 
tion of  the  same  power,  with  its  different 
modifications.  (See  Rev.  xii :  3.)  "  A 
great  red  dragon  with  seven  heads  and  ten 
horns,  and  seven  crowns  upon  his  heads." 
(Also  Rev.  xiii:  1.)  A  beast  rises  out  of 
the  sea,  having  seven  heads  and  ten  horns, 
and  upon  his  horns,  ten  crowns,  and  upon 
his  heads  the  name  of  blasphemy."  As  this 
is  the  most  important  empire  of  the  four,  in 
its  connection  with  the  history  of  the  Church, 
and  has  so  direct  a  bearing  upon  the  unful- 
filled portions  of  prophecy,  it  will  be  well 
for  the  reader  to  recur  frequently  to  histor- 
ical facts.*  The  note  in  the  margin  will 
serve  for  comparison  and  reference  as  we 
proceed. 

*  "The  historian  Machiaval,  little  thinking  what  he 
was  doing,  reckons  up  the  ten  primary  kingdoms  as 
follows.  1.  The  Ostrogoths  in  Mesia.  2.  The  Visi- 
goths in  Pannonia.  3.  The  Sneves  and  Alans  in  Gas- 
goine  and  Spain.  4.  The  Vandals  in  Africa.  5.  The 
Franks  in  France.     6.  The  Burgundians  in  Burgundy. 


EVENING    VISION.  57 

8  I  considered  the  horns,  and  behold,  there  came  up 
among  them  another  little  horn,  before  whom  there  were 
three  of  the  first  horns  plucked  up  by  the  roots ;  and 
behold,  in  this  horn  were  eyes  like  the  eyes  of  man,  and 
a  mouth  speaking  great  things. 


This  "little  horn,"  points  out  the  power 
of  the  church  and  bishop  of  Rome,  which, 
from  small  beginnings  long  before  it  became 
a  temporal  dominion,  thrust  itself  up  among 
the  ten  kingdoms,  and  at  length  got  pos- 
session oi  three  of  them. 


7.  The  Herulia  and  Turingia  in  Italy.  8.  The  Saxons 
and  Angles  in  Britain.  9.  The  Huns  in  Hungary  ; 
and  10,  the  Lombards  at  first  upon  the  Danube,  after- 
wards in  Italy.     The   same  catalogue   is   exhibited  by 


58  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

9  I  beheld  till  the  thrones  were  cast  down,  and  the 
Ancient  of  daj-s  did  sit,  whose  garment  was  white  as 
snow,  and  the  hair  of  his  head  like  the  pure  wool :  his 
throne  was  like  the  fiery  flame^  and  his  wheels  as  burn- 
ing fire. 

.10  A  fiery  stream  issued  and  came  forth  from  before 
him  ;  thousands  ministered  unto  him,  and  ten  thousand 
times  ten  thousand  stood  before  him  ;  the  judgm,ent  was 
set,  and  the  books  were  opened. 

Ill  beheld  then  because  of  the  voice  of  the  great 
words  which  the  horn  spake  ;  I  beheld  even  till  the 
beast  was  slain,  and  his  body  destroyed,  and  given  to 
the  burning  flame. 

12  As  concerning  the  rest  of  the  beasts,  they  had  their 
dominion  taken  away  ;  yet  their  lives  were  prolonged 
for  a  season  and  time. 

13  I  saw  in  the  night  visions,  and  behold,  one  like 
the  Son  of  man  came  with  the  clouds  of  heaven,  and 
came  to  the  Ancient  of  days,  and  they  brought  him  near 
before  him. 

14  And  there  was  given  him  dominion,  and  glor)', 
and  a  kingdom,  that  all  people,  nations  and  languages, 
should  serve  him  ;  his  dominion  is  an  everlasting  do- 
minion, which  shall  not  pass  away,  and  his  kingdom 
that  which  shall  not  be  destroyed. 

These  verses  require  no  comment.  The 
reader  may  at  a  glance  perceive  their  im- 
port.    Thus  we  have  twice  commenced  at  a 

that  excellent  chronologer  Bp.  Lloyd,  who  adds  the  dates, 
when  these  ten  kingdoms  arose.  1.  The  Huns  about 
A.  D.  356.  2.  The  Ostrogoths,  377.  3.  The  Visigoths, 
378.  4.  The  Franks,  407.  5.  The  Vandals,  407. 
6.  The  Sueves  and  Alans.  407.  7.  The  Burgundians^ 
407.  8.  The  Heruli  and  Bugii,  476.  9.  The  Saxons 
476.     10..  Longobards  in    the   north  of  Germany,  483, 


EVENING    VISION.  59 

period  six  hundred  years  before  Christ,  and 
conducted  by  the  spirit  of  prophecy,  have 
travelled  down  by  a  continuous  chain  of 
providential  events  to  the  end  of  time.  The 
same  guide  will  conduct  us  over  important 
portions  of  the  same  ground,  with  certain 
variations  and  additions,  several  times  more. 
As  yet,  we  have  only  traced  in  period  marks, 
the  general  outlines,  but  in  every  subse- 
quent retracing,  the  lines  so  brighten  as  to 
enkindle  in  our  souls  the  flame  of  devout 
adoration,  as  we  behold,  in  the  detail  of  past 
and  future  events,  the  development  of  Messi- 


in  Hungary,  526.  These  then  upon  the  concurring  tes- 
timony of  an  historian  and  a  chronicler,  are  "  the  ten 
kingdoms,"  into  which  the  Roman  empire  was  origin- 
ally  divided  ;  and  consequently  they  are  the  first  "ten 
horns,"  of  which  we  are  in  quest." — Faber,  vol.  pp. 
170,  171. — The  western  empire,  was  at  first  divided 
into  ten  kingdoms  ;  as  the  regions  conquered  by  Alex- 
ander the  Great,  were  into  four  ;  and  whatever  altera- 
tions took  place  in  subsequent  ages  ;  the  one  still  con- 
tinued, in  the  language  of  prophecy,  the  ten  horns  of 
the  fourth  beast,  and  the  other,  the  four  heads  of  the 
third  beast.  The  western  empire  was  broken  into  ten 
kingdoms  ;  this  therelore  must  be  exclusively  hitended  : 
and  St.  John,  before  he  enters  on  the  state  of  the 
church  in  the  west,  during  the  reign  of  the  ten-horned 
beast  and  the  two  horned  beast,  gives  an  account  of 
the  eastern  empire,  and  the  subversion  of  it,  by  the 
Saracens  and  Turks,  in  a  distinct  chapter.  (Notes,  Rev. 
9  :  11 — 13.)    It  IS,  however,   certain,    that   the    Roman 


60  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

ah's  providential  and  mediatorial  reign ! 
Here  let  the  reader  pause  a  moment  and 
sympathize  with  Daniel  in  his  grief  of  spirit 
as  he  seeks  to  know  more  of  the  terrible 
calamities,  which,  he  apprehended,  were 
coming  on  the  Jewish  and  Christian  church- 
es through  the  agency  of  this  last,  and  name- 
less beast.  "  I  saw  in  the  night  vision"  &c. 
13th  verse.  Here  let  the  reader  take  notice 
what  Daniel  saw  at  the  close  of  his  ^'  night 
vision," — he  saw  nothing  of  the  kind  in  his 
tnorjiing  vision,  for  that  terminated  simply 
with  the  destruction  of  the  Ottoman  power, 
or  ''little  horn,"  from  one  of  the  four  divis- 
ions of  the  goat  or  Grecian  empire,  and  the 
restoration  of  the  Jews.   (See  chap,  viii :  25, 


empire  was  divided  into  leu  kingdoms  ;  and  though 
ihey  might  be  sometimes  more,  and  sometimes  fewer  ; 
yet  ihey  were  still  known  by  the  name  of  len  kingdoms 
of  the  western  empire,  \vhich  suffices  for  our  general 
purpose.  For,  though  ihe  Romans  subdued  those  coun- 
tries in  the  east,  which  had  successively  belonged  to  the 
Chaldeans,  the  Persians,  and  the  Macedonians  ;  yet  their 
empire  (or  the  body,  head,  and  horns  of  the  beast,)  was 
in  the  west.  '  All  the  four  beasts  are  still  alive,  though 
the  dominion  of  the  three  first  be  taken  away.  The 
nations  of  Chaldea  and  Assyria  are  still  the  first  beast. 
Those  of  Medeia  and  Persia  are  still  the  second  beast. 
Those  of  Macedonia,  Greece,  Thrace,  Asia  Blinor,  Syr- 
ia, and  Egypt  are  still  the  third  ;  and  those  of  Europe, 
on  this  side  Greece,  are  still  the  fourth.' — Sir  Isaac 
Newton. 


EVENING    VISION.  61 

26 — also  parallel  passages,  chap,  xi :  45.) 
In  every  instance  where  Daniel  brings  us  to 
the  close  of  the  outlines  of  his  evening  vis- 
ion, he  describes  the  general  Judgment,  and 
its  attendant  scenes,  which  he  saw  in  his 
night  vision.     (See  chap,  xii.) 

15  I  Daniel  was  grieved  in  my  spirit  in  the  midst  of 
my  body,  and  the  visions  of  my  head  troubled  me. 

16  I  came  near  unto  one  of  them  that  stood  by,  and 
asked  him  the  truth  of  all  this.  So  he  told  me,  and 
made  me  know  the  interpretation  of  the  things. 

17  These  great  beasts,  which  are  four,  are  four 
kings,  which  shall  arise  out  of  the  earth. 

18  But  the  saints  of  the  Most  High  sball  take  the 
kingdom,  and  possess  the  kingdom  forever,  even  for 
ever  and  ever. 

19  Then  I  would  know  the  truth  of  the  fourth  beast, 
which  was  diverse  from  all  the  others,  exceeding  dread- 
ful, whose  teeth  were  of  iron,  and  his  nails  of  brass; 
which  devoured,  brake  in  pieces,  and  stamped  the  resi- 
due with  his  feet  ; 

20  And  of  the  ten  horns  that  were  m  his  head,  and 
of  the  other  which  came  up,  and  before  whom  three 
fell ;  even  of  that  horn  that  had  eyes,  and  a  mouth  that 
spake  very  great  things,  whose  look  was  more  stout 
than  his  fellows. 

21  I  beheld  and  the  same  horn  made  war  with  the 
saints,  and  prevailed  against  them  ; 

22  Until  the  Ancient  of  days  came,  and  judgment 
was  given  to  the  saints  of  the  Most  High ;  and  the 
time  came  that  the  saints  possessed  the  kmgdom. 

23  Thus  he  said,  The  fourth  beast  shall  be  the  fourth 
kingdom  upon  earth,  which  shall  be  diverse  from  all 
kingdoms,  and  shall  devour  the  whole  earth,  and  shall 
tread  it  down,  and  break  it  in  pieces. 

24  And  the  ten  horns   out  of  this    kingdom  are  ten 

6 


62  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

kings  that  shall  arise  ;  and  another  shall  rise  after 
them ;  and  he  shall  be  diverse  from  the  first,  and  he 
shall  subdue  three  kings. 

25  And  he  shall  speak  great  words  against  the  Most 
High,  and  shall  wear  out  the  saints  of  the  Most  High, 
and  think  to  change  times  and  laws  ;  and  they  shall  be 
given  into  his  hand  until  a  time  and  times  and  the  di- 
viding of  time. 

26  But  the  judgment  shall  sit,  and  they  shall  take 
away  his  dominion  to  consume  and  to  destroy  it  unto 
the  end. 

27  And  the  kingdom,  and  dominion,  and  the  great- 
ness of  the  kingdom  under  the  whole  heaven,  shall 
be  given  to  the  people  of  the  saints  of  the  Most 
High,  whose  kingdom  is  an  everlasting  kingdom,  and  all 
dominions   shall  serve  and  obey  him. 

28  Hitherto  is  the  end  of  the  matter.  As  for  me 
Daniel,  my  cogitations  much  troubled  me,  and  my  coun- 
tenance changed  in  me  :  but  I  kept  the  whole  matter 
in  my  heart. 

''  Arose  out  of  the  earth,"  (17th  verse.) 
So  tliese  four  beasts  which  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  vision,  are  said  to  ''come  up 
from  the  sea,"  (3d  verse,)  are  here  said 
''to  arise  out  of  the  earth,"  so  that  one  fig- 
ure explains  another. 

"  Time,  times,  and  the  dividing  of  time," 
(verse  25.)  This  mode  of  computing  time 
is  famihar  to  all  readers  of  the  prophecies, 
and  all  commentators  are  agreed.*  ''  Time," 

*Single  men  are  not  the  subjects  of  this  prophecy,  but 
kingdoms.  The  '  four  kings  '  ver.  17,  are  not  four  sin- 
gle king*.,  but  kingdoms     and  so   the  -  tpn  horn-^.'  or 


EVENING    VISION.  63 

is  one  year,  ''times,"  two  years,  '^ dividing 
of  time,"  six  months.  Three  years  and  a 
half,  reckoned  12  months,  to  each  year,  and 
30  days  to  each  month,  agreeable  to  the 
Jews'  mode  of  reckoning  time,  makes  1260 
days.  "  I  have  appointed  thee  each  day  for 
a  year,"  (Ezekiel,  iv  :  6.)  1260  years.  The 
same  number  is  given,  in  Rev.  xi :  2,  refer- 
ing  to  the  same  persecuting  beasts — also  in 
Rev.  xii :  6,  it  is  given  in  days,  refering  to 
the  same  period,  while  the  church  was  in 
exile,  because  the  "  man  of  sin"  had  taken 
his  place  in  the  "  Temple  of  God.''  See  also 


kings,  ver.  24,  are  not  ten  single  kings,  but  kingdoms  ; 
and  so  likewise  the  'little  horn  '  is  not  a  single  king,, 
but  a  kingdom,  not  a  single  man,  but  a  succession  of 
men,  exercising  such  powers,  and  performing  such  ac-^ 
tions,  as  are  here  described.  We  must  thprefore  com- 
pute the  time  according  to  the  nature  and  genius  of  the 
prophetic  language.  'A  time,'  then,  and  'times  and  a 
half  a  time  '  are  three  5'ears  and  a  half  ;  and  the  an- 
cient Jewish  )''ear  consisting  of  twelve  months,  and 
each  month  of  thirt}^  days  '  a  time  and  times  and  a 
half  a  time,'  or  three  years  and  a  half,  are  reckoned  in 
the  Revelation,  xi.  2,  3.  xii.  6,  14,  as  equivalent  to  'for- 
ty and  two  months,  or  a  thousand  two  hundred  and 
three  score  days  : '  and  a  day  in  the  style  of  the  prophets 
is  a  year  ;  '  I  have  appointed  thee  each  day  for  a  year,' 
saith  God  to  Ezekiel ;  iv.  6,  and  it  is  confessed  that  the 
'  seventy  weeks '  in  the  nmth  chapter  of  Daniel  are 
weeks  of  years ;  and  consequently  1260  days  are  1260 
years. — Nev.-ton  on  the  Prophecies,  pp269.  Ed'gEd'n. 


64  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

verse  T,  of  the  xii  chapter  of  Daniel,  which 
is  properly  the  appendix  to  this  evening  vis- 
ion, and  will  be  so  considered  in  the  order 
in  which  it  is  introduced. 

It  must  be  so  obvious  to  the  mind  of  every 
reader  that  this  vision  of  Daniel  closes  with 
the  glorious  millennial  reign  of  the  saints,  that 
all  argumentative  remarks  would  be  super- 
fluous. But  as  the  writer  lays  much  stress 
upon  the  distinction  between  this  vision 
and  the  next,  a  distinction  which  most  if 
not  all  writers  upon  the  book  of  Daniel  have 
overlooked,  it  is  hoped  the  reader  will  pay 
critical  attention  to  this  point.  There  is 
properly  but  two  visions  in  the  prophecy  of 
Daniel,  the  great  outlines  of  one  are  drawn 
in  the  7th  chapter,  and  the  other  in  the  8th. 
The  12th  and  last  chapter,  is  the  appendix 
to  the  7th,  as  the  reader  will  see  in  the  pro- 
gress of  these  illustrations,  while  all  the  pro- 
phetical portion  of  the  remaining  chapters, 
commencing  with  the  8th  chapter  and  clos- 
ing with  the  11th,  all  belong  to  the  morning 
vision.  If  these  two  visions  arc  blended,  the 
whole  becomes  obscure  and  confused.  But, 
if  they  are  viewed  as  entirely  distinct,  tiie 
whole  is  delightfully  clear  and  instructive. 
The  numbers  and  dates,  as  it  regards  the 
commencement  and  termination  of  these  two 


EVENING    VISION.  65 

visions,  have  no  connexion  whatever.  They 
neither  commence  nor  end  together. 
The  number  1260  years,  which  has  just 
been  considered,  belongs  exclusively  to  the 
evening  vision,  which  terminates  with  the 
fourtli  and  western  beast  or  empire.  The 
1260  years,  is  given  repeatedly  by  Daniel 
and  John,  as  the  reader  will  see  by  consult- 
ing the  references  above,  and  always  refers 
to  the  "little  horn"  of  popery.  In  the  vis- 
ion on  which  we  next  enter,  the  morning 
vision,  there  is  but  one  number  given 
which  fixes  its  date  and  termination  2300 
years  .  The  490  years  being  that  portion 
which  was  completed,  with  the  crucifixion  of 
Christ.  The  whole  of  the  morning  vision 
terminates  with  the  fall  of  the  Mohamedan 
power,  and  the  return  of  the  Jews.  Each 
vision  has  a  distinct  location,  distinct  num- 
bers and  mode  of  computation,  distinct  ''lit- 
tle horns"  of  religious  imposture,  and  differ- 
ent and  distinct  periods  of  termination. 
The  eastern  power  falling  half  a  century 
before  the  western.  These  positions  are  thus 
assumed  at  the  outset,  because  the  writer 
feels  confident  of  success,  and  is  willing  to 
be  held  responsible  for  a  failure,  if  every 
point  is  not  proved  in  the  sequel. 
6* 


SECTION  III. 


MORNING  VISION  OF  DANIEL- 


The  outlines  of  this  vision  were  given  to 
Daniel  only  two  years  after  his  evening  vis- 
ion, in  chap.  7,  being  553  years  before  the 
christian  era,  50  years  after  his  interpreta- 
tion of  Nebuchadnezzar's  dream,  having  been 
in  captivity  53  years,  and  16  years  before  he 
was  cast  into  the  den  of  lions  for  his  fidelity 
to  God. 

Chap.  viii.  In  the  third  year  of  the  reign  of  king 
Belshazzar,  a  vision  appeared  unto  me,  even  unto  me 
Daniel,  after  that  which  appeared  unto  me  at  the  first. 

2  And  I  saw  in  a  vision  ;  and  it  came  to  pass,  when 
I  saw,  that  I  was  at  Shushan  in  the  palace,  which  is  m 
the  province  of  Elam  ;  and  I  saw  in  a  vision,  and  I  was 
by  the  river  of  Ulai. 

3  Then  I  lifted  up  mine  eyes, 
and  saw,  and  behold,  there  stood 
before  the  river  a  ram  which  had 
two  horns  ;  and  the  two  horns 
were  high  ;  but  one  was  higher 
than  the  other,  and  the  higher* 
came  up  last. 


MORNING    VISION.  67 

4  I  saw  the  ram  pushing  westward,  and  northward, 
and  southward;  so  that  no  beasts  might  stand  betbre 
him,  neither  was  there  any  that  could  deliver  out  of  his 
band ;  but  he  did  according  to  his  will,  and  became 
great. 


At  the  time  of  this  vision  Daniel  was  in 
Shushan,  or  Susa,  which  was  afterwards  the 
capitol  of  the  Persian  empire.  This  was 
about  15  years  before  that  empire  was  es- 
tabhshed  upon  the  ruins  of  the  Babylonian. 
Several  writers  have  supposed  the  reason 
why  Daniel  did  not  introduce  the  beast,  rep- 
resenting the  Babylonian  empire  in  his  morn- 
ing vision,  was  because  that  empire  was  so 
near  its  close.  But  the  fallacy  of  such  area- 
son  will  be  obvious  enough  to  any,  who 
consider  that  this  was  given  only  two 
years  subsequent  to  the  former  vision.  A 
far  more  satisfactory  reason  can  be  given. 
The  evening  vision  commenced  with  the 
Babylonian  empire  at  the  time  of  its  greatest 
glory,  600  years  before  Christ,  when  it  was 
like  a  "  lion  with  eagle's  wings,"  before 
it  had  degenerated  to  the  timid  "lion 
with  a  man's  heart."  Whereas,  the  morn- 
ing vision  did  not  take  its  date  till  the 
seventh  year  of  Artaxerxes,  king  of  Persia, 
(Ezra  vii :  7,)  or  as  he  is  called  elsewhere, 
Ahasueres,  (Esther  1  :  I,)  *'  the  king  which 


68  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF     PROPHECY 

reigned  from  India  to  Ethiopia,"  150  years 
after  the  time  of  Nebuchadnezzar.  Those  who 
could  gravely  assign  this  reason  why  the  morn- 
ing was  not  identical  with  the  evening  vision 
of  Daniel — that  the  Chaldean  power  was  two 
years  older  at  the  time  the  prophet  was  fa- 
vored with  a  second  heavenly  communcation, 
must  be  expected  to  confound  the  events  of 
the  two  visions  in  other  respects  when  the 
distinctions  are  most  palpable  !  No  wonder 
the  prophecies  have  remained  so  long  a 
"  sealed  book"  to  the  general  reader,  who 
is  too  much  inclined  to  receive  the  opinions 
of  his  superior  in  learning  upon  trust. 

A  voracious  bear,  with  three  ribs  in  his 
mouth  (Sec.  1,  page  52,)  aptly  described  the 
nature  of  the  Persian  monarchy,  but  the 
"  ram  with  two  horns,"  was  its  known 
ensign  in  those  countries,  as  the  eagle 
is  the  known  ensign  of  the  United  states,  or 
the  lion,  the  chosen  emblem  of  Great  Brit- 
ian.  One  horn  of  the  ram  was  higher  than 
the  other  (verse  3,)  and  the  higher  came  up 
last,  denoting  the  Medes  and  Persians,  who 
were  united  in  the  conquest  of  the  world, 
the  Medes  being  the  njore  ancient,  but  the 
Persian  becoming  the  most  powerful  and 
renowned. 


MORNING    VISION. 


69 


5  And  as  I  ,was  considering, 
behold,  a  he-goat  came  from  the 
west  on  the  face  of  the  whole 
earth,  and  touched  not  the  ground; 
and  the  goat  had  a  notable  horn 
between  his  eyes. 

Instead  of  the  leopard  with  four  wings  as 
a  fowl,  and  four  heads,  (Sec.  1 :  page  53,)  the 
Grecian  empire  is  represented  in  this  vision 
by  a  goat,  and  presented  first  as  having  one 
horn,  significant  of  Alexander  the  Great, 
with  his  family  princes  before  they  became 
extinct.  The  goat  was  also  the  miUtary  en- 
sign of  the  Macedonian  kings,  of  whom  Al- 
exander was  the  most  renowned.  The  lite- 
ral interpretation  of  these  emblems  given  in 
subsequent  verses,  supercedes  the  necessity 
of  remarks  here. 

6  And  he  came  to  the  ram  that  had  two  horns,  which 

I  had  seen  standing  before  the  river,  and  ran  unto  him    i 
in  the  fury  of  his  power. 

7  And  I  saw  him  come  close  unto  the  ram.  and  he 
was  moved  with  choler  against  him,  and  smote  the  ram, 
and  brake  his  two  horns  5  and  there  was  no  power  in 
the  ram  to  stand  before  him,  but  he  cast  him  down  to 
the  ground,  and  stamped  upon  him ;  and  there  was 
none  that  could  deliver  the  ram  out  of  his  hand. 


70  ILLUSTRATIONS     Ot^    PROPflECY. 

When  Ale.xander  menaced  Asia  with  an 
invasion,  Darius,  the  Persian  emperor,  treat- 
ed his  proposals  and  designs  with  the  most 
affronting  contempt,  and  afterwards  attempt- 
ed to  bribe  his  physician  to  poison  him. 
These  injuries,  with  others,  had  so  exasper- 
ated Alexander  and  his  troops,  that  they 
pursued  Darius  rather  as  an  assassin,  than  as 
a  competitor  for  honor  and  empire.  The 
he-goat  attacked  the  ram,  "  as  moved  with 
choler"  against  him. 


8  Therefore  the  he-goat  waxed 
very  great ;  and  when  he  was 
strong,  the  great  horn  was  brok- 
en ;  and  for  it  came  up  four  no- 
table ones  toward  the  four  winds 
of  heaven. 


After  the  Grecian  empire  had  acquired  ex- 
traordinary greatness  and  power,  Alexander 
suddenly  died  at  Babylon,  as  already  noticed, 
(page  54,)  at  an  early  age,  through  excessive 
intemperance,  and  licentiousness.  The  fil- 
thiness  of  the  goat,  was  emblematical  of  this 
trait  of  his  character.  In  a  few  years  after 
the  death  of  Alexander,  the  insignificant  re- 
mains of  his  family  were  extinct,  and  the 
great  and  notable  horn  of  the  goat  was  brok- 
en. His  general?,  then  established  four  king- 


MORNING    VISION. 


71 


doms,  which  became  ''  notable  ones"  and 
which  continued  through  a  regular  success- 
ion of  kings  for  a  series  of  years.  These 
have  already  been  enumerated,  (page  54.)  as 
Egypt,  Syria,  Thrace,  and  Macedonia,  with 
their  dependencies. 


one  oi'  tliera  came  forth  u  liUle  horru 


<a 


72  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

which  waxed  exceeding  great,  toward  the   south,  and 
toward   the  east,  and  toward  the  pleasant  land. 

10  And  it  waxed  great,  eveuto'the  host  of  heaven  ; 
and  it  cast  down  some  of  the  host  and  of  the  stars  to  the 
ground,  and  stamped  upon  them. 

11  Yea,  he  magnified  himself  even  to  the  prince  of 
the  host,  and  by  him  the  daily  sacrifice  was  taken 
away,  and  the  place  of  his  sanctuary  was  cast  down. 

12  And  a  host  was  given  him  against  the  daily  sacri- 
fice  by  reason  of  transgression,  and  it  cast  down  the 
truth  to  the  ground  ;  and  it  practised  and  prospered. 

Now  we  have  come  to  a  point  in  the  road, 
where  travellers  part,  taking  different  direc- 
tions. Sir  Isaac  Newton,  and  Bishop  New- 
ton, interpret  this  '-'little  horn"  of  the  goat, 
as  the  Roman  empire,  including  the  "  little 
horn"  of  popery.  Dr.  Scott,  followed  them 
in  the  first  editions  of  his  commentary,  but 
afterwards,  through  the  influence  of  Faber, 
corrected  his  error,  as  will  be  seen  by  a  note 
below.*   The  prophet,  here,  in  vision,  takes 


*With  this  interpretation  of  Sir  Isaac  Newton  and 
Bishop  Newton,  the  writer  of  this  comment  had  acqui- 
esced, though  not  with  full  satisfaction  ;  till  the  appear- 
ance of  Mr.  Fabar's  Dissertation  on  the  Prophecies. 
But  the  careful  examination  of  his  arguments  and  state- 
ments on  the  subject  has  convinced  him,  that  the  Mo- 
hamedan  delusion^  and  not  that  of  the  papacy,  is  here 
pointed  out.  The  copious  reasonings,  calculations,  and 
quotations  of  this  learned  writer,  cannot  possibly  be 
eren  condensed  into  so  small  a  compass,  as  to  be  here 
iMCrted  ;  and  the  reader  must  be  referred  to  the  work 


MORNING    VISION.  73 

a  longer  leap,  leaving  the  intermediate 
space  in  the  chain  of  events,  to  be  filled  up 
in  the  eleventh  chapter,  where  we  shall  find 
almost  a  literal  narrative. 

"  Out  of  one  of  them  came  forth  a  little 
horn,"  (verse  9,)  i.  e.  from  one  of  the  four 
divisions  of  the  Grecian  empire,  arose  a  vile 
religious  imposture,  always  denoted  by  the 
emblem  little  horn,  in  distinction  from  an 
ordinary  horn,  which  denotes  political  pow- 
er. Now,  let  the  reader  answer  the  quest- 
ion— from  which  of  the  four  kingdoms  of 
Alexander's  empire  did  such  an  impious 
power  arise,  and  become  established  ?  If  fa- 
miliar   with    history,    the    common    sense 

itself.  (Faber  on  the  Prophecies,  Vol.  I.  chap,  v.)  A 
few  hints,  however,  may  be  adduced. — It  seems  unnat- 
ural to  mike  the  '-little  horn"  of  the  he-goat,  or  the 
third  beast,  that  is  of  the  Macedonian  empire  exactly 
the  same  as  the  ''  fourth  beast,"  or  the  Roman  empire"; 
especially  in  a  prophecy,  in  which  the  fourth  beast  is 
not  once  mentioned  -.  an  1  the  arguments  above  deduc- 
ed, in  support  of  that  opinion,  are  by  no  mean  con- 
clusive. It  appears  to  me  unaccountable,,  on  mature 
reflection,  that  there  should  be,  in  these  concise,  yet 
most  comiirehensive  prophecies  of  Daiie!,  so  many 
repeated  and  parti'.'ulir  predictions  of  the  papal  delu- 
sion  in  the  w^s: ;  an  1  not  a  hint  of  the  Mohamedan 
delusion  in  the  ea.si,  the  progress,  and  effects  of  v/hich 
have  been  m.xst  extensively  mischievous,  and  are  espe- 
cially and  seperately  noted  as  such  by  St.  John.  (Notes, 
Rev.  9.)— Scorr  or.  Daniel  vrrr,  13. 


74  iLLUSTR4TI0XS     OT    PROPHECY. 

reader  can  decide  the  question  as  well  as 
any  expositor.  The  question  is  not  what 
political  empire  arose  out  ofone  of  the  horns 
of  the  goat,  for  such  a  question  involves  an 
absurdity,  which  will  require  but  little  dis- 
cussion in  this  place.  There  can  be  but 
one  intelligent  answer.  Lt  v.as  the  Moham- 
edan  delusion.  Syria  was  a  notable  horn 
of  the  goat,  and  that  kingdom  was  the  thea- 
tre on  which  was  first  acted  that  drama  of 
wickedness.  And  Syria,  including  Pales- 
tine, will  probably  be  the  last  strong  hold 
of  that  power  which  will  yield  the  contest. 

If  Syria  is  not  the  strong  hold  of  this  im- 
posture, it  is  a  central  point  of  its  influence, 
and  matter  of  dispute  between  the  Otto- 
man and  Egyptian  power  at  this  very  day. 
If  it  is  wrested  from  the  grand  Sultan,  and 
the  young  pacha,  Ibrahim,  pursues  his  pres- 
ent liberal  policy,  "the  way  of  the  kinojs  of 
the  east  may  be  prepared,"  at  once.  (Rev. 
xvi :  12.)  Indeed,  the  very  past  season,  a 
decisive  victory  has  been  gained  over  the 
Turkish  army,  near  the '•  Euphrates,"  which 
was  entirely  routed,  by  Ibrahim's  forces.  A 
few  more  such  advantages  on  the  side  of  the 
*'king  of  the  south,"  or  of  "the  north," 
would  dry  up  the  "  river  Euphrates," — the 
Ottoman  power,  or  influence.     Even  while 


MORNING    VISION.  76 

writing,  by  the  last  arrival  from  Europe,  we 
have  later  and  more  important  information 
respecting  the  condition  of  the  Ottoman 
power,  which  has  a  direct  bearing  upon  the 
fulfilment  of  this  prophecy.  It  seems  at  pres- 
ent to  be  the  determination  of  England,  Rus- 
sia and  Austria  to  maintain  the  integrity  of  he 
Ottoman  empire,  and  reduce  Mehemet  Ali 
to  obedience.  On  the  other  hand,  France 
has  declared  her  policy  to  support  Mehemet 
Ali  in  his  pretensions,  so  far  as  to  hold  pos- 
session of  Egypt,  Syria  and  Arabia.  Ibra- 
him, the  son  of  the  Pacha,  is  •'  pushing" 
toward  Constantinople,  but  whether  he  suc- 
ceeds in  that  expedition  or  not,  is  of  little 
consequence,  only  so  far  as  it  tends  to  the 
final  settlement  of  himself  and  father  in  the 
peaceable  possession  of  Syria  and  Egypt-* 


*  I  object  to  the  application  of  the  vision  to  the  Moham- 
edans,  1.  Because  it  is  not  true  that  they  came  out  ot 
one  of  the  four  kingdoms  imo  which  Alexander's  was 
divided.  Mohamed  was  an  Arabian.  The  Arabians 
have,  as  yet,  never  been  subdued  by  any  other  nation. 
''  Sesostris,  Cyrus,  Pompey.  and  Trajan,  all  endeavored 
to  conquer  Arabia,  hut  in  vain.  From  the  beginning 
to  the  present  day,  they  have  maintained  their  indepen- 
dence.''— Dr.  A.  Clakke.  I  object.  2.  Because  it  cannot 
be  shewn  that  any  one  of  the  four  kingdoms  into  which 
Alexander's  was  divided  after  his  death,  existed  as  one 
of  the  Macedonian  horns,  when  the  Arabian  imposture 
first  arose. — Litch,  on  tue  Skcond  Coimkng  of  Christ. 


16  ILLUSTHATIONS  OF   VROPHECY. 

The  idea  still  adhered  to  by  modern  writers 
that  this  "  little  horn"  includes  the  Roman 
beast,  with  ten  horns,  and  the  little  horn  of 
popery,  we  repeat,  in  view  of  history  and 
recent  occurrences,  is  too  great  an  absurdity 
to  be  entertained  for  a  moment.  It  is  also 
such  a  confusion  of  emblematical  represent- 
ations, that  if  once  admitted,  would  destroy 
all  certainty  of  interpretation  of  such  figura- 
tive language.  The  objection  to  its  being 
the  little  horn  of  Mohamedanism,  because 
it  is  said  Mohamed  was  born,  and  devised 
his  mischief  in  Arabia,  which  was  not  m- 
cluded  in  one  of  four  divisions  of  the  Grec- 
ian empire  is  too  trivial  to  deserve  conside- 
ration. It  is  of  no  consequence,  whether 
Mohamed  was  born  in  Arabia  or  China. 
Syria  was  the  grand  centre  of  his  operations. 
Syria  embraced  "  the  pleasant  land,"  the 
Jewish  "sanctuary"  which  was  to  be  '-'cast 
down,"  and  afterwards  "cleansed."  Syria 
contained  also  a  part  of  the  Christian  "host," 
some  of  which  he  was  to  "  cast  down,"  and 
whose  "daily  sacrifice"  was  to  be  "taken 
away," — which  was  effectually  done,  when 
their  churches  were  converted  into  mosques. 
Syria,  then,  is  one  of  the  horns  of  the  goat, 
and  the  identical  one  from  which  the  "  little 
horn"  of  Mohamedanism  arose.    "He  mag- 


MORNING    VISION.  77 

nified  himself  even  to  the  princes  of  the 
host."  Christ  is  the  "  prince  of  the  host," 
the  Head  of  the  Church.  Who  that  ever 
read  the  Koran,  or  quotations  from  it,  does 
not  know  that  Mohanied,  and  his  followers 
claim  for  him  superiority  to  Christ?  They 
allow  Christ  to  be  a  prophet,  but  deem  Mo- 
hamed  his  superior.  "  And  a  iiost  was  given 
him  against  the  daily  sacrifice  by  reason  of 
transgression,"  &c.  (verse  12.)  Had  not  the 
"  host"  or  the  Christian  churches  in  the  east, 
become  sadly  degenerate  and  corrupt,  an 
opposing  host,  like  the  Arabian  imposture, 
could  never  have  gained  a  permanent  foot- 
hold in  that  country.  The  success  of  error 
was  "  by  reason  of  transgresj^ion"  in  the 
Christian  church.  It  is  readily  conceded 
that  the  Roman  power  destroyed  the  literal 
"  sanctuary"  of  the  Jews.  But  this,  duly 
considered,  is  no  objection  to  the  foregoing 
views.  Syria  never  became  a  '  head,'  or  a 
*  horn'  of  the  Roman  beast.  Those  writers 
who  make  this  little  horn  denote  the  P».oman 
empire,  coming  out  of  one  of  the  divisions  of 
the  Grecian,  do  not  locate  one  of  tiie  ten 
horns  of  the  fourth  beast  in  any  portion  of 
the  Grecian  empire.  It  is  marvellous  that 
they  do  not  see  their  own  inconsistency. 
(See  note,  section  ii,  commencing  56.)  Even 
7* 


78  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Miller,  whose  whole  llieory  depends  on  the 
assumption  that  this  little  horn  is  the  whole 
Roman  empire,  popery  and  all,  does  not  lo- 
cate a  single  constituent  part  of  that  empire 
within  the  original  boundaries  of  the  third 
beast  or  Grecian  empire.  See  his  enumer- 
ation of  the  modern  ten  kingdoms  or '  horns' 
of  the  fourth  empire  in  the  note  below.  * 

Let  the  reader  therefore  constantly  keep 
in  mind  the  important  fact,  that  however 
much  success  might  have  attended  the  Ro- 
man arms,  within  the  Grecian  empire,  (we 
shall  have  occasion  to  consider  this  more 
hereafter,)  that  no  portion  of  the  Grecian 
empire  proper,  ever  became  any  part  of  the 
Roman  empire  proper.  This  is  a  remarkable 
fact.  It  was  not  so  with  the  Babylonian, 
Persian,  and  Grecian  empires,  for  they  sev- 
erally in  turn  occupied  much  of  the  same 
territory.  How  to  account  for  the  fact,  that 
when  this  destinction  is  the  most  palpable, 
and  important,  there  should  be  the  most 
confusion  and  error  among  writers,  is  not 
an  easy  matter. 

*Great  Eritian,  France,  Spain,  Portugal,  Austria, 
Naples  and  Tuscany,  Seven  Kingdoms  not  plucked  up 
by  the  little  horn.  Lombardy,  Ravenna,  and  Rome,  the 
three  originally  plucked  upby  the  litlle  horn,  are  now 
restored  under  the  name  of  Sardinia,  Sicily,  and  Italy. 
— 3I1LLER  ON  Cukist's  Second  Coming. 


MORNING    VISION.  79 

The  opposite  extreme  of  error  at  this 
point  in  the  vision,  which  some  of  the  old* 
est  expositors  embraced,  that  Antiochus 
Epiphanes,  was  this  "  Httle  horn,"  has  be- 
come so  entirely  exploded  by  the  dawning 
light  of  prophetic  fulfilment,  that  it  is  unnec- 
essary to  trouble  the  reader  further  than  to 
give  it  a  passing  notice.  That  vile  prince, 
by  his  persecution  of  the  Jews,  and  a  literal 
"taking  away  of  their  daily  sacrifice,"  for  a 
time,  became  a  type  of  this  little  horn, 
though  the  points  of  resemblance  in  other 
respects  are  few.  A  particular  account  of 
him  is  given  in  the  filling  up  of  this  vision 
in  the  parallel  verses  of  chap,  ix :  20,  &.c. 

"  Towards  the  south,  and  towards  the 
east,  and  towards  the  pleasant  land ;"  verse 
9.  Mohamedanism  has  ever  prevailed 
"  towards  the  south,"  in  Egypt  and  many 
parts  of  Africa,  "  towards  the  east,"  in  India 
and  Persia,  "  and  towards  the  pleasant  land," 
Palestine  of  course,  also  Syria  and  Turkey 
further  on. 

When  christian  churches  were  converted 
into  mosques,  the  "  daily  sacrifices"  might 
be  said  to  be  taken  away,  (verse  12,)  and 
the  multitudes  of  nominal  christians  thus 
led  to  apostatize,  and  some  real  christians 
and  ministers  who  perished  by  the  sword  of 


80  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

this  warlike,  persecuting  power,  fulfilled  the 
prediction,  that  "  he  cast  down  some  of  the 
host,  and  of  the  stars  to  the  ground,  and 
stamped  on  them."  This  expression,  of 
taking  away  the  "  daily  sacrifice,"  is  repeat- 
edly used  in  reference  to  the  Latin  church 
as  well  as  the  Greek,  and  with  equal  pro- 
priety. The  suppression  of  pure  Christian 
worship  in  these  great  sections  of  the  nom- 
inal Christian  Church,  and  the  establishment 
of  popish  image  worship  in  the  western  and 
Mohamedan  worship  in  the  eastern  branch, 
was  indeed  the  taking  away  of  the  '•  daily 
sacrifice,"  and  the  "setting  up  the  abomin- 
ation of  desolation,"  as  we  shall  see  hereaf- 
ter. The  figure  of  illustration  is  borrowed 
from  the  Jewish  temple  worship.  Antiochus 
Epiphanes,  did,  as  has  been  said,  suppress 
the  temple  worship  at  Jerusalem,  literally 
"taking  away  the  daily  sacrifice."  But  this 
literal  "  taking  away  of  the  daily  sacrifice"  in 
the  Jewish  church,  was  more  effectually  done 
at  the  destruction  of  the  temple,  by  a  Roman 
general,  40  years  subsequent  to  the  crucifix- 
ion of  Christ,  who  in  reference  to  that  event, 
(Matt,  xxiv :  15,)  quoted  this  very  passage 
in  Daniel. 

13  Then  1  heard  one   saint   speaking,   and   another 
saint  said  unto  that  certain   saint  which  spake,   How 


MORNING    VISION.  81 

long  shall  be  the  vision  concerning  the  daily  sacrifice, 
and  the  transgression  of  desolation,  to  give  both  the 
sanctuary  and  the  host  to  be  trodden  under  foot  ? 

14  And  he  said  unto  me,  Unto  two  thousand  and 
three  hundred  days ;  then  shall  the  sanctuary  be 
cleansed. 

The  word  here  rendered  '^  certain  saint," 
is  translated,  "The  wonderful  Numberer," 
a  term  very  significantly  applied.  This  two 
thousand  and  three  hundred  years  is  the  pe- 
riod of  the  morning  vision.  It  terminates 
the  power  of  the  "  little  horn"  of  Mohame- 
danism  and  the  restoration  of  the  Jews  and 
the  cleansing  of  their  '' sanctuary,"  which 
will  result  no  doubt,  in  their  conversion  to 
Christianity.  This  then  will  be  the  ter- 
mination of  the  morning  vision.  In  the  25th 
verse  of  the  next  chapt.  belonging  to  the 
same  vision,  we  have  measured  off  to  us,  by 
the  same  "  wonderful  Numberer,"  whom 
Daniel  saw  "  in  the  vision  at  the  beginning," 
490  years  of  the  first  part  of  the  vision,  ter- 
minating with  the  glorious  era  of  Messiah's 
death.  The  whole  vision  then,  is  to  con- 
tinue from  the  "going  fourth  of  the  com- 
mandment to  build  Jerusalem,"  not  only  till 
the  "  Messiah  be  cut  off,"  but  to  the  des- 
truction, of  the  "little  horn"  of  the  goat,  and 
and  till  the  "sanctuary  is  cleansed."  It 
was  not   the  "commandment  of  Cyrus  to 


82  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

build  the  temple,*  (see  Ezra  chap.  1,)  536 
years  before  Christ,  but  the  '-command- 
ment" of  Artaxerxes,  (Ez.  7 :  7,)  to  build 
again  the  walls  of  Jerusalem,  "  even  in  troub- 


*  There  are  four  edicts,  recorded  in  scripture,  to 
which  these  words,  (''the  going  forth  of  the  command- 
ment,-' &c.)  may  seem  applicable  ;  viz.  the  edict  in  the 
first  year  of  Cyrus,  (Ezra  i,  1.)  in  the  second  of  Darius, 
(Ezra  vi,  1.  Hag,  i,  1.)  in  the  seventh  of  Anaxerxes, 
(Ezra  vii,  7.)  and  in  the  twentieth,  (Neh.  i,  2.)  There 
are  some  things  in  the  prediction  wliich,  when  duly 
adverted  to,  give  good  ground  for  passing  by  the  two 
first  edicts.  And  as  to  the  two  last,  it  has  jDeen  well 
observed,  that  Christ's  death  happened  seventy  weeks 
of  solar  years  after  one  of  them,  and  as  many  weeks 
of  lunar  years  after  the  other.  The  two  first  edicts 
speak  only  about  the  rebuilding  of  the  temple,  ...  with- 
out one  word  about  rebuilding  the  city ;  whereas  the 
prediction  speaks  about  an  edict  for  "  rebuilding  the 
city,  and  the  walls  and  streets  of  it,"  without  one  word 
about  rebuildmg  the  temple  ;  though  in  foretelling  the 
second  destruction  of  the  city,  that  of  the  temple  is  also 
mentioned.  ...  But  the  third  edict,  that  of  the  seventh  of 
Artaxerxes,  though  it  does  contain  the  very  expressions 
of  Daniel's  prediction  ;  yet  it  contains  things,  to  Avhich 
these  expressions  are  applicable.  ...  Sir  Isaac  Newton 
justly  observes,  that  the  dispersed  Jews  became  a  peo- 
ple and  a  city,  when  they  returned  into  a  body  politic  ; 
and  that  was  in  the  seventh  year  of  Artaxerxes  Longi- 
manus  ;  when  Ezra,  by  the  king's  commission,  erect- 
ed magistrates  all  over  the  land,  to  govern  the  people 
according  to  the  law  of  God  and  of  the  king  ;  under 
Ezra  they  first  became  a  polity  or  city  by  a  government 
of  their  own. — Scott's  Notes  on  Daniel,  ix,  25 — 27. 


MORNING    VlStON.  83 

lous  times,"  79  years  afterwards,  457  years 
before  the  Christian  era.  If  this  is  a  correct 
calculation,  the  whole  vision,  2300  years,  will 
end  in  1843,  or  as  will  be  shown  hereafter, 
the  first  date  from  which  to  calculate  the 
return  of  the  Jews.  Although  the  morning 
vision  is  distinct  from  the  evenino^  vision,  still 
there  are  certain  incidences.  The  evening 
vision  is  computed  ''seven  times"  to  the 
Jews,  as  a  period  of  chastisement,  (see  Le- 
viticus xxvi:  18,  21,24,28,)  while  to  the 
degenerate  Christian  church,  it  is  only  three 
times  and  a  half,  (see  Dan.  vii :  25  and  xii : 
7,)  but  this  point,  which  is  exceedingly  inter- 
esting, will  be  dwelt  upon  more  at  large  at 
the  close  of  the  evening  vision,  in  the  I2th 
of  Daniel.  The  morning  vision,  which  re* 
fleets  all  the  light,  or  in  other  words,  pre- 
dicts all  the  prosperity  which  awaited  the 
Jews  during  their  long  night  of  captivity,  is 
measured  by  "jubilees"  and  sabbaths,  rather 
than  by  "times."  This  interesting  point, 
also,  will  be  more  fully  explained  in  the 
progress  or  filling  up  of  this  vision.  Every 
thing  relating  to  the  computation  of  time  in 
these  visions  comes  round  in  the  circle  of 
sevens,  nothing  is  completed  till  the  circle  is 
full.  This  is  one  coincidence  which  would 
seem  to  favor  the  translation  of  the  lxx,  who 


84  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROrHECY. 

compute  this  vision  2400  years.  This  would 
make  just  49  jubilees,  with  only  a  fraction  of 
one, — a  perfect  circle  of  7's,  whereas  2300 
years  make  only  47  jubilees,  an  imperfect 
circle  of  7's  ;  but  leaves  only  a  fraction  of  3. 
No  doubt,  if  the  Jews  commence  their  re- 
turn in  1843,  it  will  be  near  1943  before 
every  thing  will  be  perfected.  When  they 
returned  from  their  Babylonian  captivity, 
which  was  a  type  of  their  final  restoration, 
it  was  110  years  before  every  thing  was  com- 
pleted. And  by  the  other  mode  of  compu- 
tation, ''seven  times,"  which  belongs  to  the 
evening  vision,  if  dated  from  the  time  the 
last  remnant  of  the  Jews  were  carried  cap- 
tive into  Babylon,  and  the  temple  totally  des- 
ecrated, and  the  city  destroyed,  588  years 
before  Christ,  (2d  Chron.  xxxvi  :  18,19,) 
it  will  bring  us  to  1932.  If  the  reader  will 
note  these  things  carefully,  as  we  proceed, 
he  will  be  prepared  to  estimate  the  impor- 
tance of  these  wonderful  chronological  coin- 
cidences in  the  sequel. 

Thus  reader,  has  Daniel,  by  the  spirit  of 
prophecy,  led  us  down  the  third  time, 
through  a  long  chain  of  events,  but  not  to 
the  same  terminating  period  of  time.  First, 
in  his  interpretation  of  Nebuchadnezzar's 
dream,  and  then  in  his  ovi^n  evening  vision, 


MORNING    VISION.  85 

he  conducted  us  through  the  battle  of  the 
*'  great  day  of  God  ahiiighty,"  previous  to  the 
millennial  sabbath,  giving  a  short  descrip- 
tion of  the  condition  of  the  saints  on  earth, 
during  that  great  jubilee  of  which  all  others 
were  but  typical,  and  the  subsequent  resur- 
rection of  the  dead  and  general  judgment. 
Upon  this  he  enlarges  in  the  xii  chapter. 
In  this  vision,  the  outlines  of  which  we 
have  traced,  Daniel  has  left  us  at  Jerusalem, 
to  witness  the  destruction  of  the  Ottoman 
power, — the  return  ot  the  Jews,  and  the 
*•' cleansing  of  tlieir  sanctuary."  After  we 
return  with  him  and  enter  more  fully  into 
the  detail  of  events,  belonging  to  the  morn- 
ing vision,  giving  a  most  minute  and  almost 
a  literal  history  of  numerous  events,  he  will, 
as  we  said,  glance  more  particularly  at  the 
closing  scenes  of  the  evening  vision,  the 
winding  up  of  the  ''  little  horn"  of  the  west- 
ern empire^  computing  for  us  the  three  times 
and  a  half,  which  bounds  the  reign  of  the 
"  man  of  sin,"  and  predicts  the  cheering 
twilight,  which  precedes  the  rising  of  the  full 
orbed  sun  of  the  jubilee  morn.  But,  we  too 
often  digress,  being  tempted  by  such  glorious 
anticipations.  Let  us  listen  to  the  comment 
of  Gabriel,  on  this  vision,  in  the  remaining 
verses  of  this  chapter. 
8 


86  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY 

15  And  It  came  to  pass,  when  I,  even  I  Daniel, 'had 
seen  the  vision,  and  sought  for  the  meaning,  then  be- 
hold, there  stood  before  me  as  the  appearance  of  a  man. 

16  And  I  heard  a  man's  voice  between  the  banks  of 
Ulai,  which  called,  and  said,  Gabriel,  make  this  man  to 
understand  the  vision. 

17  So  he  came  near  where  I  stood,  and  when  he 
came,  I  was  afraid,  and  fell  upon  my  face  ;  but  he  said, 
Understand,  0  son  of  man,  for  at  the  time  of  the  end 
shall  be  the  vision. 

18  Now  as  he  was  speaking  to  me,  I  was  in  a  deep 
sleep  on  my  face  toward  the  ground  ;  but  he  touched 
me,  and  set  me  upright. 

19  And  he  said.  Behold,  I  will  make  thee  know  what 
shall  be  in  the  last  end  of  the  indignation  ;  for  at  the 
time  appointed  the  end  shall  be. 

*'  At  the  time  of  the  end  shall  be  the  vis- 
ion." (verse  17.)  "  Make  thee  know  what 
shall  be  in  the  last  end  of  the  indignation, 
for  at  the  time  appointed,  the  end  shall  be." 
(verse  19.)  That  is  the  termination  of  the 
2300  years,  for  Daniel  understood  this  vision 
as  having  a  peculiar  application  to  the  peo- 
ple of  the  Jews,  and  the  cleansing  of  their 
sanctuary. 

20  The  ram  which  thou  sawest 
having  two  horns  are  the  kings  of 
Media  and  Persia. 

21  And  the  rough  goat  is  the 
king  of  Grecia  ;  and  the  great 
horn  that  is  between  the  eyes  l5^ 
the  first  king.     (See  goat,  page  69.) 


MORNING    VISION.  87 

Greece  was  the  chief  province  of  the  sec- 
ond empire  denoted  by  the  goat,  of  which 
Macedonia  is  the  next  in  notoriety,  in  which 
Alexander  the  great  originated. 


22  Now  that  being  broken, 
whereas  four  stood  up  for  it,  four 
kingdoms  shall  stand  up  out  of 
the  nation,  but  not  in  his  power. 


Soon  after  the  death  of  Alexander  the  great, 
his  ''  kingdom  was  divided  towards  the  four 
winds  of  heaven,"  but  not  to  his  posterity. 
Four  of  his  generals,  Ptolemy,  Antigonus, 
Lysimachus,  and  Cassander,  reigned  over 
Egypt,  Syria,  Thrace,  and  Macedonia.  The 
kingdoms  of  Syria  and  Egypt,  became  af- 
terwards the  most  powerful.  They  subsist- 
ed as  independent  monarchies  for  a  longer 
period  than  the  other  two,  and  as  they  were 
immediately  connected  with  the  land  of  Ju- 
dea,  which  was  alternately  reduced  to  their 
dominion,  they  form  the  subject  of  the  suc- 
ceeding predictions. 


88 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    TROPHECY. 


23  And  in  the  latter  lime  of  tiieir  kingdom,  when 
the  transgressors  are  come  to  the  full,  a  king  of  fierce 
countenance,  and  understanding  dark  sentences,  shall 
.stand  up. 

24  And  his  power  shall  be  mighty,  but  not  by  his  own 
power :  and  he  shall  destroy  wonderfully,  and  shall 
prosper,  and  practice,  and  shall  destroy  the  mighty  and 
the  holy  people. 


25   And  through  his  policy  also  he   shall  cause  craft. 


MORNING    VISION. 


89 


to  prosper  in  his  hand  ;  and  he  shall  magnify  himself 
in  his  heart,  and  by  peace  shall  destroy  many  ;  he  shall 
also  stand  up  against  the  Prince  of  princes  j  but  he 
shall  be  broken  without  hand. 


An  explanation  has  already  been  given 
upon  this  part  of  the  vision.  (See  parallel 
part  of  morning  vision,  page  73.)  To  give 
the  reader  a  fair  opportunity  to  compare  the 
opinions  of  the  writer  with  the  old  and  able 
expositors  on  several  important  points, 
another  extract  from  Scott,  giving  his  views 
and  the  views  of  Faber  of  this  passage  ill 
Daniel,  is  thrown  into  the  margin  below  as  a 
note.  *  It  will  be  useful  as  a  reference  in 
future,  as  different  views  are  compared  for 


*  Daniel  informs  us,  that  he  heard  a  certain  saint 
inquiring  "  How  long  shall  be  the  continuance  of  this 
vision,"  which  treats  of  ''this  daily  sacrifice,"  taken 
away  by  the  little  horn,  "  and  this  transgression 
of  desolation,  to  give  both  the  sanctuary  and  the  host 
to  be  trodden  under  foot  ?  "  The  answer  made  to  this 
question  was,  ''Unto  2300  days,"  or,  as  the  LXX  read 
"  2400  days,"  or  as  certain  copies  mentioned  by  Jerome 
read,  "  2200  days,"  "  then  shall  the  sanctuary  be 
cleansed."  Bishop  Newton  doubts,  whether  these  pro- 
phetic days  are  to  be  calculated  from  the  establishment 
of  the  Persian  empire,  from  the  invasion  of  Asia  by 
Alexander,  or  from  the  beginning  of  the  history  of  the 
l^jUe  horn.  Whatever  doubt  there  may  be  upon  this 
pomt,  and  whatever  difficulty  there  may  be  in  ascertain- 


90  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

the  instiuction  of  readers.  Those  who  study 
the  prophecies  at  this  day,  possess  great 
advantages  over  the  most  distinguished  writ- 
ers of  the  past  century. 

These  writers,  it  will  bo  seen  by  the  ex- 
tract, make  a  proper  distinction  between  the 
"  little  horn"  of  the  Grecian  beast,  and  the 
"  little  horn"  of  the  Roman  beast,  but  not 
keeping  up  a  corresponding  distinction  be- 
tween the  evening  and  morning  visions 
throughout,  readers  of  prophecy  have  been 
needlessly  perplexed  and  confounded.  Par- 


ing whicli  of  the  three  readings  is  the  true  one ;  I  can- 
not but  think,  that  it  is  sufficiently  evident,  both  that 
the  1260  days  are  a  certain  part  of  the  2300  days,  and 
that  these  two  periods  exactly  terminate  together  in  the 
5>elf  same  year.  We  are  expressly  told  that  the  vision 
\Df  the  ram  and  the  he-goat,  whenever  it  begins,  reaches 
<o  "  the  time  of  the  end,"  or  "  the  last  end  of  the  indig- 
nation: "  (17,  19.)  and  we  are  no  less  expressly  inform- 
ed, that  to  the  end  of  the  wonders,  predicted  by  Daniel, 
there  shall  "be  three  times  and  a  half,  or  1260  days." 
{12  :  7,  9.)  Hence  it  necessaril}^  follows,  that  since  the 
period  of  2300  days,  and  the  period  of  1260  days,  both 
equally  reach  to  "the  time  of  the  end,"  or  to  "the  end 
of  the  predicted  wonders ;  they  both  exactly  terminate 
together.  Thus  it  appears  that  the  period  of  1260  days 
is  in  fact  the  latter  part  of  the  greater  period  of  2300 
days.  Faber,  Vol.  I.  pp.  207 — 211.  The  prophet  rep- 
resents the  two-horned  Medo-Persian  ram,  not  as  rising 
from  the  sea,  but  as  standing  by  his  river;  in  other 
words,  he  does  iiot  speak  of  the  origin  of  the  monarchy; 


MORNING    VISIONo  91 

ceiving  a  striking  coincidence  in  the  time 
and  the  manner  of  the  rise  and  development 
of  these  antichristian  powers,  most  commen- 
tators, have  supposed  they  must  terminate 
together;  whereas,  the  1260  years,  or  three 
times  and  a  half,  as  applied  to  the  reign  of 
popery  in  the  west,  as  has  already  been 
shown,  does  not  apply  to  the  Mohamedan 
power.  This  closes  its  career  with  the 
morning  vision,  2300  years,  be  it  a  longer 
or  shorter  period  after  the  rise  of  the  east- 
ern "  little  horn"  out  of  one  of  the  four  horns 
of  the  goat. 


but  of  some  period,  which  he  does  not  specify,  in  the 
course  of  its  regular  and  settled  government.  Now  the 
Medo-Persian  ram  rose  in  the  j^ear  A.  C.  536.  He  con- 
tinued standing,  ...  till  ...  A.  C.  330.  ...  It  appears  there- 
fore, that  the  date  of  the  vision  must  be  fixed  some- 
where between  the  3^ear  A.  C.  536  ...  and  the  year  A.  C. 
330.  Faber,  Vol.  228,  229.  If  the  1260  years,  so  often 
spoken  of,  began  A.  D.  606,  they  must  end  A.  D.  1866. 
And  2300  reckoned  backward  from  that  period,  will 
bring  us  to  the  year  A.  C.  334.  And  though  we  must 
not  place  too  much  confidence  in  the  exactness  of  such 
calculations,  yet  the  main  points  in  this  argument 
seem  unquestionable.  (Note,  23 — 25.)  It  may  perhaps 
be  worthy  of  notice,  that  it  is  now  about  two  thousand 
three  hundred  and  seventy  three  years,  since  Daniel 
had  this  vision  :  and,  no  doubt  the  end  of  the  two  thou- 
sand and  three  hundred  days,  or  years,  is  not  very 
distant. — Scott's  Notes  on  Daniel,  viii,  13,  14. 


92  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

"Dark  sentences,"  (verse  23,)  Biddies^ 
or  ejiigmas.  These  words  describe  the  ob- 
scure and  affected  sublimity  of  the  Koran.* 


*  The  word  Koran,  derived  from  the  verb  karra,  to 
yead,  signifies  properly  in  Arabic,  the  reading,  or  rather, 
that  which  ought  to  be  read  ;  by  which  name  the  Mo- 
hamedans  denote  not  only  the  entire  book  or  volume  of 
the  Koran,  but  also  any  particular  chapter  or  section  of 
it  5  just  as  the  Jews  call  either  the  whole  scripture,  or 
any  part  of  it,,  by  the  name  of  Karah^  or  Mikra,  words 
of  the  same  origin  and  import. 

"  The  general  design  of  the  Koran,"  (to  use  the 
Words  of  a  very  learned  person,)  "seems  to  be  this. — 
To  unite  the  professors  of  the  three  different  religions 
then  followed  in  the  populous  country  of  Arabia,  who 
for  the  most  part  lived  promiscuously,  and  wandered 
without  guides,  the  far  greater  number  being  idolaters, 
and  the  rest  Jews  and  Christians  mostly  of  erroneous 
and  hetrodox  belief,  in  the  knowledge  and  worship  of 
one  eternal  and  invisible  God." 

That  Mohamed  was  really  the  author  and  chief 
contriver  of  the  Koran,  is  beyond  dispute  ;  though  it  is 
highly  probable  that  he  liad  no  small  assistance  in  his 
design  from  others. 

There  being  some  passages  in  the  Koran  which  are 
contradictory,  the  Mohamedan  doctors  obviate  any 
objection  from  thence,  by  the  doctrine  of  abrogation  ; 
for  they  say  that  God  in  the  Koran  commanded  several 
things  which  were  for  good  reasons  afterwards  revoked 
and  abrogated. 

Passages  abrogated  are  distinguished  into  three 
kinds  :  tne  first,  where  the  letter  and  the  sense  are  both 
abrogated  ;  the  second,  where  the  letter  only  is  abroga- 
ted, but  the  sense  remains  ;  and  the  third,  where  the 
sense  is  abrogated,  though  the  letter  remains. — Sale's 
Pbeliminiry  Discourse  on  tkue  Koran. 


MORNING    VISION.  93 

26  And  the  vision  of  the  evening  and  the  morning 
which  Avas  told  is  true  ;  wherefore  shut  thou  up  the 
vision  ;   for  it  shall  be  for  many  days. 

"  The  vision  of  the  evening  and  the  morn- 
ing," although  they  relate  to  a  different 
chain  of  events,  in  many  respects,  and  are 
computed  by  different  numbers,  yet  both 
are  "true,"  and  will  certainly  be  fulfilled, 
"though  it'shall  be  f^r  many  days."  At  the 
close  of  the  great  outlines  of  the  evening 
vision,  (chap,  vii  ;  28,)  Daniel  says,  "  Hith- 
erto is  the  end  of  the  matter.  As  for  me 
Daniel,  my  cogitations  much  troubled  me, 
and  my  countenance  changed  in  me,  but  I 
kept  the  matter  in  my  heart."  And  in  clos- 
ing the  great  outlines  of  this,  the  morning 
vision,  after  declaring  them  both  true,  he 
says — 

27  And  I  Daniel  fainted,  and  was  sick  certain  days  ; 
after-Nvard  I  rose  up,  and  did  the  kin<^s  business  ;  I  was 
astonished  at  the  vision,  but  none  understood  it. 

We  will  now  pass  to  a  distinct  portion  of 
this  vision,  in  the  next  chapter,  beginning 
with  the  20th  verse. 


SECTION  IV. 


MORNING  VISION  CONTINUED. 


Chap,  ix,  20.  And  while  I  was  speaking,  and  pray- 
ing, and  confessing  ray  sin,  and  the  sin  of  my  people 
Israel,  and  presenting  my  supplications  before  the  Lord 
my  God,  for  the  holy  mountain  of  my  God  ; 

21  Yea,  while  I  was  speaking  in  prayer,  even  the 
man  Gabriel,  whom  I  had  seen  in  the  vision  at  the  be- 
ginning, bemg  caused  to  fly  swiftly,  touched  me  about 
the  time  of  the  evening  oblation. 

22  And  he  informed  me,  and  talked  with  me,  and 
said,  0  Daniel,  I  am  now  come  forth  to  give  thee  skill 
and  understanding. 

23  At  the  beginning  of  thy  supplications  the  com- 
mandment came  forth,  and  1  am  come  to  show  thee  ; 
for  thou  art  greatly  beloved  ;  therefore  understand  the 
matter,  and  consider  the  vision. 


"  The  man  Gabriel,"  the  same  angel  whichv 
explained  to  Daniel  another  part  of  the  same 
vision.  (See  chap  viii :  verse  16.)  The 
object  of  this  interview  seems  to  be  to  fix 
the  bounds  of  or   seal  the  vision  and  point 


MORNING   VISION.  95 

out  the  period  of  Christ's  crucifixion,  the 
literal  fulfihnent  of  which,  has  affixed  the 
"  seal"  of  certainty  to  all  remaining  portions 
of  the  vision.  Daniel  was  a  '-'man  greatly 
beloved,"  and  John,  the  writer  of  the  Reve- 
lations, was  "  the  disciple  whom  Jesus  lov- 
ed." It  was  not  accidental  that  sucn  men 
were  chosen  to  communicate  to  the  Jewish 
and  Christian  churches,  what  "  should  be 
hereafter." 

24  Seventy  weeks  are  determined  upon  thy  people 
and  upon  thy  holy  city,  to  finish  transgression,  and  to 
make  an  end  of  sins,  and  to  make  reconciliation  for  in- 
iquity, and  to  bring  in  everlasting  righteousness,  and 
to  seal  up  the  vision  and  prophecy,  and  to  anoint  the 
Most  Holy. 

Seventy  "  weeks  of  years,"  that  is,  490 
years  from  a  given  date,  which  Daniel  is 
now  to  have,  would  Christ  "  appear,  to  put 
away  sin  by  the  sacrifice  of  himself"  (Heb. 
ix  :  26.)  Numerous  passages  might  be  quot- 
ed to  show  the  application  of  such  a  predic- 
tion, to  the  character  of  Christ's  mission  to 
our  world,  but  it  is  too  clear  to  need  further 
illustration  here.  Seventy  weeks  of  years 
contain  ten  jubilees,  and  denote  the  bringing 
in  of  the  most  complete  jubilee,  or  grand 
^'year  of  release,"  to  individual  believers. 


96  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

25  Know  therefore  and  understand,  that  from  the 
going  forth  of  the  commandment  to  restore  and  to  build 
Jerusalem  unto  the  Messiah  the  Prince  shall  be  seven 
weeks,  and  three  score  and  two  weeks  ;  the  street  shall 
be  built  again,  and  the  wall,  even  in  troublous  times. 

26  And  after  threescore  and  two  weeks  shall  Messiah 
be  cut  oft',  but  not  for  himself;  and  the  people  of  the 
prince  that  shall  come  shall  destroy  the  cit}'-  and  the 
sanctuary  ;  and  the  end  thereof  shall  be  with  a  flood, 
and  unto  the  end  of  the  war  desolations  are  deter- 
mined. 

27  And  he  shall  confirm  the  covenant  with  many  for 
one  week  ;  and  in  the  midst  of  the  week  he  shall  cause 
the  sacrifice  and  the  oblation  to  cease,  and  for  the  over- 
spreading  of  abominations,  he  shall  make  it  desolate, 
even  unto  the  consummation,  and  that  determined  shall 
be  poured  upon  the  desolate. 

This  "  commandment  to  restore  and  build 
Jerusalem,"  as  has  already  been  noticed, 
(page  82)  was  issued  by  Artaxerxes  Longi- 
manus,  the  Persian  emperor,  in  the  7th  year 
of  his  reign,  B.  C.  457.  (See  Ez.  vii :  7, 
and  Esther  i:  1.)  The  application  of  these 
verses  are  so  obvious,  the  reader  can  hardly 
mistake  their  true  meaning.  Miller  *  in 
"  summing  up"  his  calculations  in  this  por- 
tion of  prophecy,  is  very  ingenious,  to  say 
the  least.     (See  note.) 


*  But  the  seventy  weeks,  of  which  we  are  more  par- 
ticularly speaking,  the  angel  Gabriel  has  told  us  when 
it  began ;  at  the  gomg   forth  of  the   commandment  to 


MORNING    VISION.  97 

We  come  next  to  a  series  of  predictions, 
filling  the  whole  outline  of  the  morning 
vision,  and  emphatically  denominated  the 
''things  noted  in  the  scripture  of  Truth." 
It  forms  a  complete  commentary  upon  many 
parts  of  the  morning  vision,  which  would 
otherwise  have  been  left  more  or  less  ob- 
scure. It  gives  a  condensed  but  precise  ac- 
count of  the  history  of  many  kings,  espec- 
ially those  of  Egypt  and  Syria,  as  connected 
with  the  history  of  the  Jews  from  Daniel  to 
Christ, —  marks  the  propagation,  the  perse- 
cution, the  establishment,  and  the  corrup- 
tions   of  Christianity, — and   which   while  it 


restore  and  build  Jerusalem,  &;c.  We  have  found  no 
command  that  will  apply  in  all  its  bearmgs,  but  the  one 
given  to  Ezra,  which  was  given  in  the  4o7th  year  be- 
fore the  birth  of  Christ,  and  33  years  afterwards  Christ 
was  crucified,  which  two  numbers,  if  added,  makes  490 
years,  exactly  seventy  weeks  of  years.  We  learn 
that  Gabriel,  in  order  to  make  the  vision  doubly  sure, 
divided  the  seventy  weeks  into  three  parts,  seven,  sixty- 
two,  and  one,  making  in  all  seventy.  He  then  tells  us 
plainly  what  would  be  accomplished  in  each  part  sep- 
arately. 

1st.  Seven  weeks.  "  The  street  shall  be  built  again, 
and  the  wall,  even  m  troublous  times."  No  man  can 
dispute  but  that  this  was_  accomplished  under  the  ad- 
ministration of  Ezra  and  Nehemiah.  And  it  is  very 
evident  that  these  two  were  governors  over  Jerusalem 
49  years,  which  makes'  the  seven  weeks  of  years,  and 
carries  us  down  the  stream  of  time  to  the  year  408  B.C. 

9 


98  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

commences  with  the  reign  of  Cyrus,  more 
than  five  hundred  years  before  Christ,  who 
•dehvered  the  Jews  from  their  first  captivity, 
•describes  with  the  utmost  precision,  tlie 
rise,  extent,  and  fall  of  the  Mohamedan  pow- 
er, which  was  to  possess  Judea  in  the  latter 
times,  previous  to  their  final  restoration, 
which  is  now  so  near  at  hand.  This  proph- 
ecy is  both  local  and  chronological.  It  is 
descriptive  of  the  government  of  the  same 
identical  region,  and  of  the  chief  facts  which 


2d.  Sixty-two  weeks.  "  Unto  the  Messiah  the  Prince." 
That  is,  unto  the  time  that  Jesus  was  anointed  with  the 
Holy  Spirit  and  power  to  preach  the  gospel,  either  in 
himself  or  forerunner  John.  See  Mark  i.  1.  Sixty- 
two  weeks  of  years  would  be  434  years.  This  would 
carry  us  down  to  twenty-six  years  after  Christ's  birth, 
and  brings  us  to  the  very  year  of  "  The  beginning  of 
the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  God."  Mark  i.  1. 

3d.  One  week.  "He  shall  confirm  the  covenant 
with  many  for  one  week."  One  week  would  of  course 
be  seven  years,  which,  added  to  the  twenty-six  would 
make  thirty-three  years  after  Christ.  Here,  too,  we 
find  an  exact  and  literal  accomplishment  of  the  angel's 
declaration :  The  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  preached  by 
John  three  and  a  half  years,  and  by  Christ  three  and  a 
half  years,  making  seven  years,  called  one  week,  and 
then  Messiah  cut  off,  and  not  for  himself,  Christ  cruci- 
fied, ends  the  seventy  weeks,  proves  Daniel's  prophecy 
true,  establishes  the  vision,  confounds  the  Jew,  confutes 
the  infidel,  and  ought  to  establish  the  mind  of  every 
believer  in  the  remainder  of  the  vision. — Miller  on 
Christ's  Second  Coming,  pp  67. 


MORNING    VISION.  99 

relate  to  it,  for  many  successive  centuries, 
and  the  events  follow  in  succession,  in  the 
exact  order  of  the  prediction.  This  proph- 
ecy includes  the  whole  of  the  11th  chapter, 
and  we  must  pass  over  it  rapidly.  If  the 
reader  will  have  reference  to  the  observations 
of  Sir  Isaac  Newton  on  this  part  of  Daniel's 
prophecy,  he  will  be  astonished  to  see  how 
perfectly  the  prediction  accords  to  a  circum- 
stantial detail  of  historical  events.  So  close 
is  the  coincidence  between  the  prophetic 
and  the  real  history  of  the  kings  of  Egypt 
and  Syria,  that  Porphyra,  one  of  the  earliest 
opponents  of  Christianity,  labored  to  prove 
its  extreme  accuracy,  and  alleged  from 
thence,  that  the  events  must  have  preceded 
the  prediction. 

The  reader  should  here  read  the  tenth 
chapter  of  Daniel,  as  prefatory  to  what  fol- 
lows in  the  eleventh.  A  portion  of  which  we 
transcribe.      The  note*  will  show  that  Bish- 


*  The  four  great  empires  of  the  world,  which  were 
shown  to  Nebuchadnezzar  in  the  form  of  a  great  image, 
were  again  more  particularly  represented  to  Daniel  in 
the  shape  of  four  great  wild  beasts.  In  like  manner,, 
the  memorable  events,  which  were  revealed  to  Daniel 
in  the  vision  of  the  ram  and  he-goat,  are  here  again 
more  clearly  and  explicitly  revealed  in  his  last  vision 
by  an  angel  ;  so  that  this  latter  prophecy  may  not  im- 


100  ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

op  Newton  considered  that  these  chap- 
ters were  a  continuation  or  explanation  of 
the  vision  of  the  8th  chapter. 


properly  be  said  to  be  a  comment  and  explanation  of 
the  former.  This  revelation  was  made,  x.  1.  '  in  the 
third  year  of  Cyrus  king  of  Persia,'  when  Daniel  was 
very  far  advanced  in  years.  For  the  third  year  of 
Cyrus  was  the  seventy  third  of  Daniel's  captivity ;  and 
beijig  a  youth  when  he  was  carried  captive,  he  cannot 
be  supposed  now  to  have  been  less  than  ninety  ;  and 
not  long  after  this,  it  is  reasonable  to  believe  that  he 
died.  Old  as  he  was,  he  '  set  his  heart  to  understand ' 
the  former  revelations  which  had  been  made  to  him, 
and  particularly  the  vision  of  the  ram  and  the  he-goat, 
as  I  thmk  we  may  collect  from  the  sequel ;  and  for  this 
purpose  he  prayed,  and  fasted  three  weeks.  His  fast- 
ing and  prayers  had  the  desired  eifect ;  for  an  angel 
was  sent,  and  said  unto  him,  ver.  12.  '  Fear  not  Daniel : 
for  from  the  first  day  that  thou  didst  set  thine  heart  to 
understand,  and  to  chasten  thyself  before  thy  God,  thy 
words  are  heard,  and  I  am  come  for  thy  words.' — New- 
ton ON  THE  Piiophec;es,  pp.  321.. 

Chap,  x,  14.  Now  I  am  come  to  make  thee  under- 
stand what  shall  befal  thy  people  in  the  latter  days  ; 
for  yet  the  vision  is  for  many  days. 

15  And  when  he  had  spoken  such  words  unto  me,  I 
set  my  face  toward  the  ground,  and  I  became  dumb. 

16  And  behold,  one  like  the  similitude  of  the  sons  of 
men  touched  my  bps  :  then  I  opened  my  mouth,  and 
spake,  and  said  unto  him  that  stood  before  me,  0  my 
lord,  by  the  vision  my  sorrows  are  turned  upon  mc, 
and  I  have  retained  no  strength. 

17  For  how  can  the  servant  of  this  my  lordtallc  wiih 
this  my  lord?  for  as  for  me,  straight  way  there  was  no 
strength  m  me,  neither  is  there  breath  in  mc. 


MORNING    VISION.  lOl 

18  Then  there  came  again  and  touched  me  one  like 
the  appearance  of  a  man,  and  he  strengthened  me, 

19  And  said,  0  man  greatly  beloved,  fear  not ;  peace 
be  unto  thee,  be  strong,  yea,  be  strong.  And  when  he 
had  spoken  unto  me,  I  was  strengthened,  and  said,  Let 
my  lord  speak  ;  for  thou  hast  strengthened  me. 

20  Then  said  he,  Knowest'  thou  wherefore  I  come 
unto  thee  ?  and  now  will  I  return  to  fight  with  the 
prince  of  Persia  ;  and  when  I  am  gone  forth,  lo  the 
prince  of  Grecia  shall  come. 

21  But  I  will  shew  thee  that  which  is  noted  in  the 
scripture  of  truth  ;  and  there  is  none  that  holdeth  with 
me  m  these  things,  but  Michael  your  prince. 


f::^  Let  it  be  constantly  born  in  mind  by  the  reader, 
that  the  whole  morning  vision,  beginning  with  the  8th, 
and  closing  with  the  11th  chapter,  relates  primarily  to 
the  Jews,  "  thy  people,"  (ver.  14.)  and  no  more  of  the 
history  of  other  nations  is  introduced  than  was  neces- 
sary to  render  clear  their  character  and  condition,  and 
what  ''  should  befal  them  m  the  latter  days."  Accord- 
ingly, from  the  cleansing  of  the  second  <'  sanctuary" 
by  the  << restored"  remnant  from  Babylon,  commences 
a  vision  which  will  terminate  with  the  destruction  of 
the  proud  Ottoman,  and  the  cleansing  of  the  millennial 
•"  sanctuary  "  by  the  restored  millions  who  are  to  be 
■^  brought  in  with  the  fulness  of  the  gentiles," 


9* 


SECTION  V. 


MORNING  VISION  CONTINUED. 


Chap.  xi.   Also  T,   in   the  first  year  of  Darius   the 
Mede,  even  I,  stood  to  confirm  and  to  strengthen  him. 


The  angel  here  continues  his  discourse. 
This  explanation  and  filling  up,  as  it  were, 
of  the  morning  vision,  was  given  several 
years  after  the  outlines  in  chapter  8, 
and  four  years  after  the  ten  jubilees,  or 
seventy  weeks  of  years,  in  chapter  9,  which 
ended  with  the  crucifixion  of  Christ. 

The  same  plan  precisely  is  pursued  in  the 
book  of  Revelation.  When  John  is  about 
to  predict  a  series  of  calamitous  events  on 
earth,  he   first  goes   over  the  ground  and 


MORNING  VISION.  103' 

points  out  all  the  encouraging  prospects  to 
the  church.  Thus  the  angel  in  all  similar 
circumstances,  cries,  "  hurt  not  the  earth, 
neither  the  sea,  nor  the  trees,  till  we  have 
sealed  the  servants  of  our  God."  (Rev.  vii : 
3.)  Noah  and  his  family,  must  have  their 
ark  prepared,  and  Lot  his  city  of  refuge, 
before  the  earth  or  the  sea  is  given  over  to 
the  judgments  of  heaven.  Thus  has  the 
angel  anticipated  the  glorious  advent  of  the 
Messiah,  before  disclosing  the  wars  and  ca- 
lamities of  this  chapter. 

What  added  much  to  the  grief  and  anxi- 
ety of  Daniel  at  this  time,  was,  the  interest- 
ing question  of  the  restoration  of  a  remnant 
of  his  people  from  their  70  years  captivity, 
which  was  then  before  the  Persian  court, 
and  hanging  in  suspense.  It  was  not  finally 
settled  till  the  death  of  Darius,  and  Cyrus 
reigned  alone. 


2  And  now  will  I  shew  thee  the  truth.  Behold,  there 
shall  stand  up  yet  three  kings  in  Persia ;  and  the  fourth 
shall  be  far  richer  than  they  all ;  and  by  his  strength 
through  his  riches,  he  shall  stir  up  all  against  the  realm 
of  Grecia. 


As  much  as  to  say,  "  I  will  show  thee  the 
succession  of  the  Persian  and  the  Grecian 
empire,  in  plain  naked  truth,  not  in  symbol- 


104  ILLirSTRATlONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

ical  or  figurative  repreisentations  as  on  three 
other  occasions,  (see  the  bear  and  leopard^ 
page  52,  and  the  ram  and  goat  page  69.) 
There  shall  yet  be  three  kings,  (in  the  Per- 
sian succession  more  prominent  than  all  the 
rest,  Cambyses,  Smerias,  the  Magian,  (Da- 
rius Hystaphis,)  and  the  fourth  (Xerxes) 
shall  be  far  richer  than  they  all,  and  by  his 
strength,  through  his  riches,  lie  shall  stir  up 
all  against  the  realm  of  Grecia.  And  a 
mighty  king  (Alexander  the  Great,)  shall 
stand  up  that  shall  rule  with  great  domin- 
ion. 

Reader,  are  you  not  becoming  familiar 
with  the  great  outline  of  events  predicted 
by  Daniel,  and  made  lucent,  in  the  couiseof 
Providence,  as  delineated  in  ancient  history  ? 
This  is  the  fifth  time  we  have  traced  this 
outline  since  we  commenced  the  book  of 
Daniel,  and  we  have  left  one  line,  the  vision- 
ary tree  of  Nebuchadnezzar,  (chap.  4,)  till 
we  come  to  the  finishing  strokes,  given  to 
the  evening  vision,  in  the  twelfth  chap- 
ter. Does  it  not  like  "  the  path  of  the 
just,"  shine  brighter  and  brighter  as  we 
approach  the  prospect  of  the  millennial  day  ^ 
Let  none  grow  weary  of  these  repititions 
of  the  prophet.  It  is  God's  method  to 
give  '^hneupon  line,  line    upon  line."     In 


MORNING    VISION.  105 

establishing  the  covenant  with  Abraham  he 
introduced  the  subject  at  one  time,  and  en- 
larged upon  it  at  another.  Our  Savior,  time 
after  time,  predicted  his  own  death,  and  the 
history  of  his  life  is  given  four  times,  though 
by  different  authors.  So  in  the  prophecies. 
He  first  gives  a  sketch,  then,  a  stronger  and 
fuller  delineation,  leading  the  attention  to 
various  events,  worthy  of  special  notice. 

Another  thing  in  this  line  of  the  vision  de- 
mands notice.  Nine  Persian  kings,  from 
Xerxes  to  Darius,  whom  Alexander  conquer- 
ed 150  years  afterv/ards,  is  passed  at  a 
stroke,  while  from  Alexander  to  Antiochus 
Epiphanes,  about  160  years  more,  the  pre- 
diction goes  into  minute  detail.  From  that 
point  to  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  by  the 
Roman  "  arms,"  240  years  is  passed  at  a 
glance.  From  thence,  566  years,  and  we 
behold  the  Arabian  Prophet,  whose  scorpion 
stinof  remains  'till  he  comes  to  his  end.'  v.  45. 

"  Stir  up  all  against  the  realm  of  Grecia." 
2d  verse.  Xerxes,  wealthy  beyond  calcu- 
lation, stirred  up  his  own  subjects  and  his 
allies  to  invade  Greece.  For  this  invasion  he 
collected  an  army  larger  than  any  other  men- 
tioned in  history,  consisting  of  more  than 
five  millions,  besides  the  Carthagenians  and 
others,  whom  he  excited  to   war  against  the 


106  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Grecians  in  other  quarters.  Notwithstand- 
ing this  tremendous  invasion  of  Greece,  yet, 
with  a  small  number  of  the  inhabitants  of  those 
stales  he  resisted,  and  routed,  the  Persian 
troops, — incredible  numbers  of  them  perish- 
ed, and  Xerxes  returned  home  in  disgrace, 
and  almost  unattended.  This  astonishing 
expedition,  gave  rise  to  those  long  wars,  and 
that  inveterate  hatred  between  the  Greeks 
and  Persians,  which  ended  in  the  subversion 
of  the  Persian  empire  by  Alexander.  The 
prophecy  touching  upon  these  most  promi- 
nent events,  glides  over  the  nine  subsequent 
Persian  kings,  from  Xerxfs  to  the  time  of 
Alexander,  62  years,  without  noticing  a 
single  event.  The  reader  must  sit  down  to 
his  history  and  fill  up  the  space.  From 
Cyrus  to  Alexander  was  204  years. 

3  And  a  mighty  king  shall  stand  up,  that  shall  rule 
with  great  dominion,  and  do  according  to  his  will. 

4  And  when  he  shall  stand  up,  his  kingdom  shall  be 
broken,  and  shall  be  divided  toward  the  four  winds  of 
heaven  ;  and  not  to  his  posterity,  nor  according  to  his 
dominion  which  he  ruled  ;  for  his  kingdom  shall  be 
plucked  up,  even  for  others  besides  those. 

The  manner  in  which  Alexander,  with  his 
forty  thousand  Macedonian  soldiers,  and  his 
pioneer  "  Phalanx,"  met  and  routed  Darius, 


MORNING    VISION. 


107 


the  last,  if  not  the  most  voluptuous  Persian 
king,  with  his  three  million  effeminate  troops, 
loaded  with  armor  of  gold  and  silver,  none 
but  those  familiar  with  history,  can  form  an 
adequate  conception.  Suffice  it  to  say  here, 
Alexander  "did  according  to  his  will."  But 
soon  after  his  death,  as  was  noted  in  another 
place,  (page  70)  ••'  his  kingdom  was  broken 
and  divided  towards  the  four  winds  of  heav- 


106  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

en,"  and  "not  to  his  posterity,"  but  to  four 
of  his  jCjencrals,  who  reigned  over  Egypt, 
Syria,  Thrace  and  Macedonia.  The  Egyp- 
tian and  Syrian  monarchies,  were  the  most 
prominent,  and  being  situated  north  and 
south  of  Jndea,  are  alone  noticed  in  what 
follows,  as  the  Jews  were  constantly  agitated 
by  the  contests  and  transactions  of  these  am- 
bitious and  belligerent  powers. 

5  And  the  king  of  the  south  shall  be  strong,  and  one 
of  his  princes :  and  he  shall  be  strong.above  hiin,  and 
have  dominion ;  his  dominion  shall  be  a  , great  do- 
minion. 

*'  The  king  of  the  south,".  Ptolemy  Lagus, 
of  Egypt,  would  soon  become  strong  as  one 
of  Alext^nder's  princes  and  Seleucus  Nicator, 
king  of  Syria,  another  of  them,  "  would  be- 
come strong  above  him." 

6  And  in  the  end  of  years  they  shall  join  themselves 
together  ;  for  the  king's  daughter  of  the  south  shall 
come  to  the  king  of  the  north  to  make  an  agreement; 
but  she  shall  not  retain  the  power  of  the  arm ;  neither 
shall  he  stand,  nor  his  arm ;  but  she  shall  be  given  up, 
and  they  that  brought  her,  and  he  that  begat  her,  and 
he  that  strengthened  her  in  these  times. 

Now  "commences  the  series  of  wars  be- 
tween   the    rival    kings.     Antiochus    Soter, 


MORNING    VISION.  109 

succeeded  Seleucus  Nicator,  and  was  suc- 
ceeded by  Antiochus  Theus,  in  Syria  '^  the 
north."  Ptolemy  Philadelphus,  succeeded 
his  father,  Ptolemy  Lagus,  in  Egypt.  They 
did  ''  at  the  end  of  years,"  make  a  treaty  of 
peace,  to  ratify  which,  Antiochus  agreed  to 
put  away  his  wife  Laodice  with  her  sons, 
and  to  marry  Berenice  the  daughter  of  Ptol- 
emy. Thus  ''  the  daughter  of  the  king  of 
the  south"  came  to  "  the  king  of  the  north" 
to  "  make  an  agreement"  with  him,  and 
brought  with  her  an  immense  dowry.  But 
this  wicked  alliance  did  not  succeed.  Anti- 
ochus afterwards  recalled  Laodice,  and  put 
away  Berenice,  but  Laodice  fearing  anoth- 
er change  in  the  feelings,  of  her  husband, 
poisoned  him  and  caused  Berenice  and  her 
attendants  to  be  murdered.* 


*  But  such  wickedness  should  not  pass  unpunished 
and  unrevenged.  '  But  out  of  a  branch  of  her  root 
shall  one  stand  up  in  his  estate,'  or  rather  as  it  is  trans- 
lated in  the  Vulgar  L?ttin,  'out  of  a  branch  of  her  root 
shall  stand  up  a  plant ;  and  he  shall  come  with  an 
army,  and  shall  enter  into  the  fortress,'  or  the  fenced 
cities  'of  the  king  of  the  north,  and  shall  deal,'  shall 
act  'against  them  and  shall  prevail  :  And  shall  also 
carry  captives  into  Egypt,  their  gods  with  their  princes,' 
or  rather  '  their  gods  with  their  moulten  images,  and 
with  their  precious  vessels  of  silver  and  gold,  and  he 
shall  continue  more  years  than  the  king  of  the  north,' 
10 


110  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

7  But  out  of  a  branch  of  her  roots  shall  one  stand 
up  in  his  estate,  which  shall  come  with  an  army,  and 
shall  enter  inio  the  fortress  of  the  king  of  the  north, 
and  shall  deal  against  them,  and  shall  prevail ; 

8  And  shall  also  carry  captives  into  Egypt  their  gods, 
with  their  princes,  and  with  their  precious  vessels  of 
silver  and  gold  ;  and  he  shall  continue  more  years  than 
the  kings  of  the  north. 

9  So  the  king  of  the  south  sha.ll  come  into  his  king- 


Appian  informs  us,  that  Laodice  having 
killed  Antiochus,  and  after  him  both  Bere- 
nice and  her  child,  Ptolemy,  the  son  of  Phil- 
adelphus,  to  revenge  these  murders,  invaded 
Syria,  slew  Laodice,  and  proceeded  as  far 
as  Babylon.  From  Polybius  we  learn,  that 
Ptolemy,  sirnamed  Euergetes,  being  greatly 
incensed,  at  the  cruel  treatment  of  his  sister 
Berenice,  marched  with  an  army  into  Syria^ 


or  more  literally  '  he  shall  continue  some  years  after 
the  king  of  the  north.  So  the  king  of  the  south  shall 
come  into  his  kingdom,  and  shall  return  into  his  own 
land,'  ver.  7,  8,  9.  '  This  '  branch,'  which  sprung  '  out 
of  the  same  root'  with  Bernace,  was  Ptolemy  Euer- 
getes her  brother,  who  no  sooner  succeeded  his  father 
Ptolemy  Philadelphus  in  the  kingdom,  than  '  he  came 
with  a  great  army,  and  entered  into  the  province  of  the 
king  of  the  north,' that  is  of  Seleucus  Calinicus,  who 
with  his  mother  Laodice  reigned  in  Syria  ;  and  he 
'acled  against  them,'  and   'prevailed'   so  far,  that  he 


MORNING    VISION.  Ill 

and  took  the  city  Selucia,  which  was  kept 
for  some  years  afterwards  by  the  garrisons 
of  the  king  of  Egypt.  Thus  did  he  ''  enter 
into  the  fortress  of  the  king  of  the  north." 

10  But  his  sons  shall  be  stirred  up,  and  shall  assem- 
ble a  multitude  of  great  forces  ;  and  one  shall  certainly- 
come,  and  overflow,  and  pass  through  ;  then  shall  he 
return,  and  be  stirred  up,  even  to  his  fortress. 

Seleucus  Ceraunus  and  Antiochus  the 
great,  sons  of  Seleucus  Colhnicus,  are  here 
referred  to,  and  were  "  stirred  up,"  to  fight 
against  Ptolemy  Euergetes,  king  of  Egypt, 
in  hopes  to  recover  the  territories  which  had 
been  taken  from  their  father,  Antiochus 
Theus.     But  Ceraunus  was  poisoned  by  one 


took  Syria  and  Cilicia,  and  the  upper  parts  beyond  Eu- 
phrates, and  almost  all  Asia.  And  when  he  had  heard 
that  a  sedition  was  raised  in  Egypt,  he  plundered  the 
kingdom  in  Selucus,  and  took  forty  thousand  talents 
of  '  silver,'  and  '  precious  vessels,'  and  'images  of  the 
Gods,'  two  thousand  and  five  hundred  ;  among  which 
were  also  those  which  Cambyses,  after  he  had  taken 
Egypt,  had  carried  into  Persia.  And  for  thus  restoring 
their  Gods  after  many  years,  the  Egyptians  who  were 
a  nation  much  addicted  to  idolatry^  complimented  him 
with  the  title  of  Euergetes  or  the  Benefactor.  This  is 
Jerome's  account,  extracted  from  ancient  historians  j 
but  there  are  authors  still  extant,  who  confirm  several 
of  the  same  particulars.     Appian  informs  us,  that  Lao- 


IIS  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

of  his  discontented  captains,  and  Antiochus 
was  left  to  prosecute  the  war  alone.  Ptole- 
my Euergetes,  had  also  died  by  this  time, 
and  was  succeeded  by  Ptolemy  Philopater,  so 
that  this  prince  was  "  the  king  of  the  south," 
and  Antiochus  Magnus,  or  the  great,  was 
"  king  of  the  north."  Antiochus  made  war 
upon  Philopater,  over-run  the  countries  that 
he  held  in  Asia,  and  spread  desolation  like 
a  flood,  whatever  regions  he  passed  through. 
Then,  making  a  truce  with  Ptolemy,  during 
which,  both  parties  treated  for  peace,  and 
"  prepared  for  war,'  according  to  modern 
maxims  and  policy.  Antiochus  then  return- 
ed to  attack  Ptolemy's  forces,  and  overcome 
them,  and  carried  the  war  even  to  the  bor- 
ders of  Egypt,   which  he   threatened  with 


dice  having  killed  Antiochus,  and  after  him  borli  Bere- 
nice and  her  child,  Ptolemy,  the  son  of  Philadelphus, 
to  revenge  these  murders,  invaded  Syria,  slew  Laodice, 
and  proceeded  as  far  as  to  Babylon.  From  Polybius 
we  learn,  that  Ptolemy  sirnamed  Euergetes,  bemg 
greatly  incensed  at  the  cruel  treatment  of  his  sister 
Berenice,  marched  with  an  army  into  Syria,  and  took 
the  city  of  Selucia,  which  was  kept  for  some  years  af- 
terwards by  the  garrisons  of  the  kings  of  Egypt.  Thus 
did  he  enter  into  the  fortress  of  the  king  of  the  north. — 
Newton  on  the  PKorHEciEs,  p.  330. 


MORNING    VISION.  113 

invasion.      This    exceedingly    exasperated 
Ptolemy. 

11  And  the  king  of  the  south  shall  be  moved  with 
choler,  and  shall  come  forth  and  fight  with  him,  even 
with  the  king  of  the  north  ;  and  he  shall  set  forth  a 
great  multitude  ;  but  the  multitude  shall  be  given  into 
his  hand. 

Ptolemy,  ''  king  of  the  south,"  marched 
against  Antiochus  "  king  of  the  north,"  with 
a  great  army,  and  Antiochus  with  numerous 
forces  gave  battle,  but  was  defeated  and 
obliged  to  retreat  to  Antioch,  (which  city 
had  become  the  capitol  of  Syria,  instead  of 
Selucia.)  and  from  thence  to  send  ambassa- 
dors to  treat  for  peace.  But  Ptolemy  did 
not  pursue  the  advantages  of  this  decisive 
victory,  for  being  elated  with  his  success,  he 
gave  himself  up  to  the  most  disgraceful  de- 
baucheries. 

12  And  when  he  hath  taken  away  the  multitude,  his 
heart  shall  be  lifted  up,  and  he  shall  cast  down  many 
len  thousands  ;    but  he  shall  not  be  strengthened  by  it. 

After  the  retreat  of  Antiochus,  Ptolemy 
visited  the  cities  of  his  Asiatic  dominions, 
and  Jerusalem  among  the  rest.  Here,  he 
was  with  great  difficulty,  restrained  from 
entering  into  the  ''  holy  of  holies,"  and  on 
10* 


114  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

account  of  this  restriction,  he  was  so  dis- 
pleased with  the  Jews,  that  he  destroyed, 
some  say  forty  thousand,  others  sixty  thou- 
sand of  his  Jewish  subjects  in  Egypt,  by  a 
most  furious  persecution.  Thus,  "  casting 
down  many  ten  thousands"  of  his  own  sub- 
jects, he  was  "  not  strengthened  by  it."* 

13  For  the  king  of  the  north  shall  return,  and  shall 
set  forth  a  multitude  greater  than  the  former,  and  shall 
certainly  come  after  certain  years  with  a  great  army 
and  with  much  riches. 

"  After  certain  years,"  that  is,  about  four- 
teen years  afterwards,  Aiitiochus  the  great, 


and  majesty,  he  consumed  his  days  in  feasting,  and  his 
nights  in  lewdness  ;  and  became  not  only  the  spectator, 
but  the  master  and  leader  of  all  wickedness.  And  what 
availed  it  to  have  conquered  his  enemies,  when  he  was 
thus  overcome  by  his  vices  ?  He  was  so  far  from  being 
strengthened  by  it,  that  even  his  own  subjects,  offended 
at  his  inglorious  peace,  and  more  inglorious  life,  rebel- 
led against  him.  But  the  prophet  in  this  passage  allud- 
ed more  particularly  to  the  case  of  his  own  countrymen. 
After  the  retreat  of  Antiochus,  Ptolemy  visited  the 
cities  of  CcEle-Syria  and  Palestine,  which  had  submitted 
to  him  ;  and  among  others  in  his  progress  he  came  to 
Jerusalem.  He  there  offered  sacrifices,  and  was  de- 
sirous of  entering  into  the  holy  of  holies,  contrary  to 
the  customs  and  religion  of  the  place,  being,  (as  the 


MORNING    VISION. 


115 


having  recovered  from  the  effects  of  his  de- 
feat, and  Ptolemy  Philopater  being  dead,  and 
succeeded  by  his  son,  Ptolemy  Epiphenes, 
or  the  illustrious,  who  was  only  four  or  five 
vears  of  age,  Antiochus  raised  a  greater  army 
than-  before,  and  having  amassed  large  sums 
of  money  to  defray  expenses,  he  hoped  to 
deprive  Ptolemy  of  his  dominions. 

14  And  in  those  times  there  shall  many  stand  up 
against  the  king  of  the  south  ;  also  the  robbers  of  thy 
people  shall  exalt  themselves  to  establish  the  vision  5 
but  they  shall  fall. 

Many  other  enemies  stood  up  against  the 


writer  of  the  third  book  of  Maccabees  says,)  greatly 
lifted  up  by  pride  and  confidence.  His  curiosity  was 
restrained  with  great  difficulty,  and  he  departed  with 
heavy  displeasure  against  the  whole  nation  of  the  Jews. 
At  his  return  therefore  to  Alexandria,  he  began  a  cruel 
persecution  upon  the  Jewish  inhabitants  of  that  city, 
who  had  resided  there  from  the  time  of  Alexander,  and 
enjoyed  the  privileges,  of  the  most  favored  citizens. 
'And  he  cast  down  many  ten  thousands  ; '  for  it  ap 
pears  from  Eusebius,  that  about  this  time  forty  thous- 
and Jews  were  slain,  or  sixty  thousand,  as  they  are 
reckoned  in  Jerome's  Latin  interpretation.  No  king 
could  be  strengthened  by  the  loss  of  such  a  number  of 
useful  subjects.  The  loss  of  so  many  Jew'S,  and  the 
rebellion  of  the  Egyptians,  added  to  the  male-adminis- 
tration  of  the  scate,  must  certainly  very  much  weaken, 
and  almost  totally  ruin  the  kingdom. — Newton  on  the 
Prophecies,  p.  335. 


116  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

king  of  Egypt  during  his  minority.  Those 
abandoned  ministers  who  now  governed  in 
his  name,  and  the  baseness  of  his  father's 
conduct,  had  disgusted  the  Egyptians  so 
that  they  were  ready  to  join  Antiochus  and 
Philip,  king  of  Macedon,  who  had  made  a 
league  together  against  the  infant  king.  The 
persecuted  Jews  also  became  refractory,  and 
broke  off  from  their  allegiance  to  the  king 
of  Egypt.  "  Robbers  of  thy  people."  Some 
render  it  revolters,  ''pestilent  ones  of  thy 
people."*  These,  exalting  themselves 
against  their  former  masters,  helped  to  "  es- 
tabhsh  the  vision." 

Here,  several  writers  leave  what  we  con- 


*  '  Also  the  robbers  of  thy  people.'  It  is  literally  '  the 
sons  of  the  breakers,'  the  sons  of  the  revolters,  the  fac- 
tious and  refractory  ones,  '  of  thy  people  ; '  for  the  Jews 
were  at  that  time  '  broken '  into  factions,  part  adhering 
to  the  king  of  Egypt,  and  part  to  the  king  of  Syria  ; 
but  the  majority  were  for  <  breaking  away  '  from  their 
allegiance  to  Ptolemy.  In  the  Vulgate  it  is  translated, 
'  the  sons  also  of  the  prevaricators  of  thy  people  ; '  in  the 
Septuagint,  '  the  sons  of  the  pestilent  ones  of  thy  peo- 
ple.' What  shall  they  do  ?  'shall  exalt  themselves  to 
establish  the  vision:'  shall  revolt  from  Ptolemy,  and 
thereby  shall  contribute  greatly,  without  their  knowing 
it,  toward  the  accomplishment  of  this  prophecy  concern- 
ing the  calamities,  which  should  be  brought  upon  the 
Jewish  nation  by  the  succeeding  kings  of  Syria. — New- 
ton, p.  338. 


MORNING    VISION.  117 

sider  the  strait  line  of  this  vision,  and  apply 
the  rest  of  this  chapter  to  the  Roman  em- 
pire. Miller,  and  Litch,*  of  our  own  coun- 
try take  this  ground.  The  European  writ- 
ers all  continue  on  the  tract  some  further. 
(See  diagram  in  quarto  appendix.)  The  read- 
er will  be  notified  where  others  leave,  one 


*  To  establish  the  vision.  To  this  sentence  I  wish 
to  call  particular  attention.  The  vision  of  the  eighth 
chapter  states  that  the  little  horn  "  waxed  great  "  and 
magnified  himself.  Also,  it  gives  the  time  when  that 
power  magnified  himself, — in  the  latter  part  of  the  four 
kingdoms  of  the  goat,  and  when  the  transgressors  were 
come  to  the  full.  This  was  now  the  case,  B.  C.  203  ; 
two  of  those  horns,  Syria  and  Macedonia,  or  their 
kings,  formed  the  base,  villanous  design  of  destroying 
the  dominion  of  a  helpless  infant  king,  [a]  Their  cup 
of  iniquity  was  now  full  and  "  the  king  of  fierce  coun- 
tenance "  stood  up  to  punish  them,  by  the  subversion  of 
their  own  kingdom. — Litch  on  the  Second  Coming  of 
Chkist,  p.  62. 

a  That  man  must  take  a  very  limited  view  of  what 
constitutes  the  climax  of  iniquity,  who  asserts  that  the 
mere  invasion  of  Egypt  during  the  minority  of  a  prince 
fills  up  the  cup  of  a  nations  guilt.  This  is  a  mere 
item  in  the  great  national  policy  of  all  human  govern- 
ments. Some  pretence  at  the  time  no  doubt,  rendered 
this  invasion  of  Egypt  a  popular  movement.  How 
would  such  an  act  as  this  compare  with  the  paramount 
wickedness  developed  in  the  person  of  Antiochus 
Epiphanes  !    The  reader  shall  see. 


118  ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

after  another.  All  writers  agree  thus  far, 
but  only  about  250  of  the  2300  years  of  the 
morning  vision  have  transpired  at  this  point, 
200  years  before  the  Christian  era. 

15  So  the  king  of  the  north  shall  come,  and  cast  up 
a  mount,  and  take  the  most  fenced  cities  ;  and  the  arms 
of  ihe  south  shall  not  withstand,  neither  his  chosen 
people,  neither  shall  there  he  any  strength  to  withstand. 

16  But  he  that  cometh  against  him  shall  do  according 
to  his  own  will,  and  none  shall  stand  before  him  ;  and 
he  shall  stand  in  the  glorious  land,  which  by  his  hand 
shall  be  consumed. 

The  revolters^  spoken  of,  were  soon  re- 
duced by  Ptolemy's  forces  who,  under  Sco- 
pus gained  many  advantages  against  those 
of  Antiochus,  and  recovered  possession  of 
Coelo-Syria  and  Palestine.  He  subdued  the 
Jews  in  the  winter  season,  while  Antiochus 
was  engaged  in  other  parts,  and  placed  a 
garrison  in  Jerusalem,  and  returned  with 
great  spoils  to  Alexandria,  for  he  was  noted 
above  all  men  for  his  avarice  and  rapacity. 
The  expression  of  Josephus  is  remarkable, 
that  '^  the  Jews  submitted  to  Scopus  by  force, 
but  to  Antiochus  they  submitted  willingly." 
The  presence  of  that  prince,  soon  turned 
the  scale  against  Scopus,  dispossessing  him 
of  all  he  had  gained  in  Palestine,  besieged 
and  took  the  strong  city,  Zidon,  and  others 


MORNING    VISION.  Il9 

of  Ptolemy's  best  fortified  cities.  So  the 
king  of  the  south  could  not  ''  stand  before 
him/'  even  with  his  choicest  troops,  and  An- 
tiochus  succeeded  in  his  designs,  established 
his  authority  in  the  land  of  Judah.  "  the  glo- 
rious land"  of  God's  chosen  people,  whose 
substance  was  "  consumed"  by  furnishing 
provisions  for  an  immense  horde  of  sold- 
iers. 

17  He  shall  also  set  his  face  to  enter  with  the 
strength  of  his  whole  kingdom,  and  upright  ones  with 
him ;  thus  shall  he  do,  and  he  shall  give  him  the  daugh- 
ter of  women,  corrupting  her  ;  but  she  shall  noi  stand 
on  his  side,  neither  be  for  him. 

Antiochus  next  set  himself  with  all  the 
strength  of  his  kingdom,  to  get  possession 
of  Egypt,  being  assisted  by  the  Jews,  called 
'^  upright  ones,"  so  denominated  to  distin- 
guish them  from  other  idolatrous  soldiers. 
Antiochus,  also,  attempted  to  circumvent 
Ptolemy  by  treaty,  for  which  he  gave  in 
marriage  his  daughter  Cleopatra,  whose  sin- 
gular beauty  is  supposed  to  be  intimated  by 
the  expression  "  the  daughter  of  women." 
He  thought  to  corrupt  his  daughter,  to  be- 
tray the  interests  of  her  husband,  but  the 
project  failed,  for  Ptolemy  was  aware  of  the 
artifice,  and  kept  upon  his  guard,  and  Cleo- 


120  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

patra  preferred  the  interests  of  her  husband, 
to  those  of  her  insidious  father,  and  even 
joined  in  an  embassy  to  the  Romans,  treat- 
ing for  protection  against  him." 

18  After  this  he  shall  turn  his  face  unto  the  isles,  and 
shall  take  many  :  but  a  prince  for  his  own  behalf  shall 
cause  the  reproach  offered  by  him  to  cease  ;  without 
his  own  reproach  he  shall  cause  it  to  turn  upon  him. 

19  Then  he  shall  turn  his  face  toward  the  fort  of  his 
own  land  :  but  he  shall  stumble  and  fall,  and  not  be 
found. 

Antiochus,  not  being  able  to  effect  the 
last  mentioned  project,  attacked  many  of 
the  isles  and  cities  bordering  on  the  Medit- 
erranean sea.  This  offended  the  Romans, 
who  proclaimed  war  against  him,  and  soon 


*  For  this  purpose  '  he  shall  give  him  the  daughter 
of  women/  his  daughter  so  called  as  being  one  of  the 
most  eminent  and  beautiful  of  women,  and  accordingly 
Antiochus  proposed  a  treaty  of  marriage  by  Encles  the 
Rhodian,  betrothed  his  daughter  Cleopatra  to  Ptolemy 
in  the  seventh  year  of  his  reign,  and  married  her  to 
him  in  the  thirteenth.  He  conducted  her  himself  to 
Raphia,  where  they  were  married ;  and  gave  in  dowry 
with  her  the  provinces  of  Coele-Syria  and  Palestine, 
upon  condition  of  the  revenues  being  equally  divided 
between  the  two  kings.  All  this  he  transacted  with  a 
fraudulent  intention,  ^  to  corrupt  her,'  and  induce  her 
to  betray  her  husband's  interests  to  her  father.  But  his 
designs  did  not  take  effect ;  '  she  shall  not  stand  on  his 


MORNING    VISION.  121 

drove  him  out  of  Europe,  pursued  him  into 
Asia,  deprived  him  of  a  great  part  of  his  do- 
minions, compelled  him  to  submit  to  hard 
and  dishonorable  terms,  and  he  finally  re- 
turned in  disgrace  to  Antioch.  Finding  it 
difficult  to  raise  the  very  large  sum  of  mon- 
ey which  the  Romans  exacted,  he  attempt- 
ed to  plunder  a  ricli  temple  of  Jupiter  Belus, 
in  the  province  of  Elymais,  where  he  was 
slain  by  the  enraged  inhabitants.  Thus  he 
*' stumbled  and  fell,  and  was  not  found." 


20  Then  shall  stand  up  in  his  estate  a  raiser  of  taxes 
in  the  glory  of  the  kingdom  ;  but  within  few  days  he 
shall  be  destroyed,  neither  in  anger,  nor  in  battle. 


Seleucus  Philopater,  who  succeeded  his 
father,  being  obliged  to  pay  a   large  annual 


part,  neither  be  for  him.'  Ptolemy  and  his  generals 
were  aware  of  his  artifices,  and  therefore  stood  upon 
their  guard :  and  Cleoptra  herself  affected  more  the 
cause  of  her  husband  than  her  father  ;  insomuch  that 
she  joined  with  her  husband  in  an  embassy  to  the  Ro- 
mans to  congratulate  them  upon  the  victories  over  her 
father,  and  to  exhort  them,  after  they  had  expelled  him 
out  of  Greece,  to  prosecute  the  war  in  Asia,  assuring- 
them  at  the  same  time  that  the  king  and  queen  of  Egypt 
would  readily  obey  the  commands  of  the  senate. — New- 
ton ON  THE  Prophecies  p.  343. 
11 


122  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

tribute  to  the  Romans,  performed  little  in 
his  short  reign,  except  levying  money  from 
his  subjects,  for  this  and  other  purposes. 
He  reigned  twelve  years,  and  was  slain  by 
Heliodorus,  whom  he  had  employed  to  rob 
the  temple  of  God  at  Jerusalem.  Thus  he 
was  destroyed,  ''neither  in  anger,  nor  in 
battle/'  but  by  treachery. 

21  And  in  his  estate  shall  stand  up  a  vile  person,  to 
whom  they  shall  not  give  the  honor  of  the  kingdom  ; 
but  he  shall  come  in  peaceably,  and  obtain  the  kingdom 
by  flatteries. 


Antiochus,  returning  from  Rome,  was  at 
Athens,  in  his  way  to  Syria,  when  his  broth- 
er Seleucus  was  slain,  and  "  the  honor  of  the 
kingdom  was  not  given  him,"  for  Heliodo- 
rus attempted  to  get  possession  of  it,  anoth- 
er party  declared  in  favor  of  Ptolemy  Philo- 
meter,  king  of  Egypt,  whose  mother,  Cleo- 
patra, was  the  daughter  of  Antiochus  the 
great,  and  sister  of  the  late  king  Seleucus ; 
neither  was  Antiochus  Epiphanes  the  right 
heir  to  the  crown,  but  his  nephew  Deme- 
trius, who  was  then  an  liostnge  at  Rome. 
However,  "  he  obtained  the  kingdom  by  flat- 
teries." He  flattered  Eumenes,  king  of  Per- 
gamus,  to  assist  him.    He  flattered,  also,  the 


MORNING    VISION.  123 

Komans,  and  sent  ambassadors  to  court  their 
favor,  paying  the  arrears  of  tribute,  and  send- 
ing besides,  presents  of  gold.  Thus  he  came 
"  in  peaceably,"  and  as  he  had  flattered  the 
Syrians,  they  flattered  him  in  return,  by  be- 
stowing on  him  the  title  EpipJtanes^  or  the 
illustrious.  But  the  epithet  of  the  prophet, 
"  a  vile  person,"  agreed  better  with  his  true 
character.*  Some  justly  called  him  Epim- 
ajies,  or,  the  madman.  However,  the  ex- 
pression of  the  angel  to  Daniel,  a  "  vile  per- 
son," a  despicable  mai>,  most  suited  him,  for 
his  frantic,  indecent,  and  contemptible  be- 
havior, in  many  respects,  proving  him  to  be 
all  which  can  be  implied  in  such  a  title. 

22  And  with  the  arms  of  a  flood  shall  they  be  over- 
flown from  before  him,  and  shall  be  broken  ;  yea,  also 
the  prince  of  the  covenant. 

23  And  after  the  lea.^ue  made  with  him  he  shall  work 


*  According  to  history,'  Antiochus,  called  Epiphanes, 
would  steal  out  of  the  palace  and  ramble  about  the 
streets  in  disguise,  would  mix  with  the  vilest  company, 
drink  and  revel  with(them  to  the  greatest  excess,  would 
put  on  the  Eornan  gown,  and  go  about  canvassing  for 
votes  in  imitation  of  the  candidates  for  office  at  Rome, 
(Americanism  truly,)  would  sometimes  scatter  money 
in  the  streets  among  his  followers,  and  sometimes  pelt 
them  with  stones,  would  wash  in  the  public  baths,  ex- 
posing himself  to  all  manner  of  ridiculous  and  indeli- 
cate gestures,  &c.  &;c. 


124     ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PKOPHECY. 

deceitfully;  for  he  shall  come  up,  and  shall  become 
strong  with  a  small  people.  * 

Antiochus  was  at  first  successful,  for  Helio- 
dorus  and  his  other  opponents,  whose  power 
seemed  ready  to  bear  all  before  it,  was  borne 
down,   "  overflown   before"    Antiochus  and 


*  It  is  beautiful  to  observe  the  sudden  transitions  of 
the  prophet  from  one  prominent  event  to  another  which 
is  perfectly  analagous,  that  is_.  from  the  type  to  the 
antitype.  But  it  is  a  disgusting  delbrqiity  or  distortion 
of  all  the  beauty  and  proportion  of  this  vision,  to  wan- 
der promiscuously  among  the  nations  to  hunt  for  events 
and  coincidences,  to  explain  the  several  points  to  suit 
a  favorite  theory.  Miller,  and  Litch,  as  has  been  no- 
ticed, leave  the  plain  track  and  direct  thread  of  the 
prophecy  of  this  chapter,  at  verse  14,  203  years  before 
Christ,  and  wander  round  the  Koman  history  till  they 
arrive  at  the  death  of  Tiberius  Ctesar,  40  years  after  the 
Christian  era,  and  come  to  a  halt  at  verse  22.  They 
then,  at  verse  23,  find  their  way  back  to  158  years  be- 
fore Christ,  and  commence  again  with  the  Roman  his- 
tory, and  at  verse  29  fix  upon  the  period  of  the  removal 
of  the  Imperial  Capitol  from  Rome  to  Constantinople, 
the  year  350  after  Christ.  (See  Diagram  ;  see  also 
Miller  on  the  Millenium  on  the  end  of  the  world  in 
1843,  and  Litch  on  the  Second  Coming  of  Christ.)  At 
verse  31  there  is  evidentl)''  a  sudden  transition  from 
Antiochus  Epiphanes,  the  type,  to  the  Roman  "arms," 
the  next  antitype,  or  analagous  event  to  the  Jewish 
nation,  in  the  destruction  of  their  temple.  But  this  is 
a  natural  transition,  and  the  only  one  which  can  be 
admitted  in  this  prophetic  nari'alive  without  encounter- 
ing serious  dilficulties. 


MORNING   VISION.  125 

destroyed.  "The  prince  of  the  covenant,"* 
that  was  Onias,  the  high  priest  of  Jerusalem, 
whom  he  removed,  and  put  Jason  in  his 
place,  who  had  given  him  a  large  sum  of 
money,  and  afterwards  put  wicked  Menelcms 
in  his  room,  who  had  offered  him  a  larger 
sum.  Thus  he  acted  '•  deceitfully"  in  the 
''league"  made  with  Jason. f  "He  shall 
come  up"  from  Rome,  where  he  had  been  a 


*  '' Prince  of  the  covenant,"  strictly  speaking,  is  ap- 
plicable only  to  Christ  himself,  yet  it  is  here  in  a  subor- 
dinate sense  applied  to  the  High  Priest.  The  Jews  were 
the  '  covenant '  people  of  God,  and  the  remnant  who 
returned  from  Babylon  ever  being  in  subjection  or  un- 
der tribute  to  some  one  or  other  of  the  idolatrous  gov- 
ernments around  them,  were  allowed,  notwithstanding, 
a  High  Priest,  and  he  was  the  only  visible  representa- 
tive of  God's  authority  among  them.  The  prophets  had 
ceased  their  testimony.  The  High  Priesthood  was  held 
in  great  estimation  among  the  Jews  as  sacred,  till  the 
destruction  of  their  Temple  by  the  Eomans.  The  High 
Priest  was  looked  upon  as  a  sort  of  a  prophet  as  well 
as  a  ruler  or  "prince."  When  the  Sanhedrim  was  in 
session  upon  the  question  of  Christ's  crucifixion,  '  Cai- 
phas  being  High  Priest  that  same  year,'  is  said  to 
prophecy,  as  a  consequence  of  his  office.  (John  xi :  51.) 
Even  in  the  worst  stage  of  the  Jewish  polity,  Paul, 
when  being  rebuked  for  reviling  '  God's  High  Priest/ 
replied  that  he  '  wist  not  that  he  was  the  High  Priest ; ' 
quotmg  the  scripture  which  says,  '  thou  shalt  not  speaH: 
evil  of  the  ruler  of  thy  people.'     (Acts  xxiii :  4,  5.) 

t  As  soon  as  Antiochus  was  seated  on  the  throne,  he 
11* 


126  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

hostage  for  the  payment  of  the  tax  laid  on 
his  father,  "  Become  strong  witli  a  few 
people,"  for  he  had  but  feio  to  espouse  his 
cause  when  he  arrived  at  Antioch,  the  peo- 
ple being  so  greatly  divided  by  the  many 
claimants  of  the  crown. 


removed  Onias  from  the  High  Priesthood,  and  preferred 
Jason  the  brother  of  Onias  to  that  dignity;  not  for  any 
crime  committed  against  him  by  the  former,  but  for  the 
great  sums  of  money  which  were  offered  to  him  by  the 
latter.  For  Jason  offered  to  give  him  no  less  than  "three 
hundred  and  sixty  talents  of  silver  for  the  High  Priest- 
hood, besides  eighty  more  upon  another  account ;  and 
good  Onias  was  not  only  displaced  to  make  way  for  a 
wicked  usurper,  but  after  a  few  years,  living  at  Anti- 
och, he  was  with  as  great  treachery  as  cruelty  murder- 
ed by  the  king's  deputy.  But  though  Antiochus  had 
made  a  league  w^ith  Jason  the  new  High  Priest,  yet  he 
did  not  faithfully  adhere  to  it,  but  acted  deceitfully. 
For  Menelaus  the  brother  of  Jason  being  sent  to  the 
Syrian  court,  with  a  commission  from  his  brother,  to 
pay  the  tribute  and  to  transact  some  business  with  the 
king ,  by  his  address  and  flattery  so  far  insinuated 
himself  into  the  royal  favor,  that  he  attempted  to  sup- 
plant his  elder  brolhei  Jason,  as  Jason  had' supplanted 
his  elder  brother  Onias  ;  and  proffered  to  give  three 
Imndred  talents  more  for  the  High  Priesthood  than 
Jason  had  given  for  it.  The  king  readily  accepted  the 
proposal,  and  issued  his  mandate  for  the  deposing  c-f 
Jason,  and  advancing  of  Manelaus  in  his  room  ;  but 
he  could  not  effect  the  change  without  an  armed  force, 
which  put  Menelaus  in  possession  of  the  place,  and 
compelled  Jason  to  fly,  and  take  shelter  in  the  land  of 
the  Ammonites. — ^Newton  on  tue  Pkopuecies,  p.  349. 


MORNING    VISION.  127 

24  He  shall  enter  peaceably  even  upon  the  fattest 
places  of  the  province  ;  and  he  shall  do  that  which  his 
fathers  have  not  done,  nor  his  fathers'  fathers  ;  he  shall 
scatter  among  them  the  prey  and  spoil,  and  riches  ;.  yea, 
and  he  shall  forecast  his  devices  against  the  strong 
holds,  even  for  a  time. 

25  And  he  shall  stir  up  his  power  and  his  courage 
against  the  king  of  the  south  with  a  great  army  ;  and 
the  kmg  of  the  south  shall  be  stirred  up  to  battle  with 
a  very  great  and  mighty  army  ;  but  he  shall  not  stand  ; 
for  they  shall  forecast  devices  against  him. 

26  Yea,  they  that  feed  of  the  portion  of  his  meat 
shall  destroy  him,  and  his  army  shall  overflow  5  and 
many  shall  fall  down  slain. 


Antiochus,  fixed  the  people  in  his  interests 
by  the  prolusion  of  his  gilts,  scattering  the 
prey  he  had  taken  from  hr's  enemies.  In 
this  way  he  gained  many  of  the  richest  prov- 
inces of  Egypt,  without  blood  shed,  "  peaca- 
ble,"  as  Cselo-Syria  and  Palestine,  thus  doing 
what  his  fathers,  or  his  fathers'  fathers  had 
not  done.  ^^  Forecast  devices."  By  his 
intrigues,  he  excited  discontent  and  rebell- 
ion among  the  Egyptians,  and  both  he  and 
Ptolemy  Philometer,  "  king  of  the  south," 
w^ere  "stirred  up  to  battle  with  very  great 
and  mighty  armies."  But  the  "king  of  the 
south  could  not  stand,"  Antiochus  prevailed, 
partly  through  his  ow-n  "  devices,"  and  partly 
through  the  fraudulent  counsels  and  treach  ; 
erous  conduct   of  Ptolemy's  partizans.     In 


128  ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

the  next  campaign,  Antiochus  had  still  great- 
er success, — routed  the  Egyptians — tookPe- 
lusium — ascended  as  far  as  Memphis,  and 
made  himself  master  of  all  Egypt  except 
Alexandria.  Ptolemy  Philometer's  troubles 
accumulated  rapidly  from  without  and  with- 
in his  own  territories,  for  the  Alexandrians 
seeing  his  distress,  renounqed  their  alleg- 
iance, took  his  younger  brother  Euergetes 
or  Physcon,  and  proclaimed  him  king  instead 
of  the  elder  brother.  "  They  that  fed  of  the 
portion  of  his  meat  destroyed"  his  interests. 

27  And  both  these  kings'  hearts  shall  be  to  do  mis- 
<;hief,  and  they  shall  speak  lies  at  one  table  ;  but  it 
shall  not  prosper  ;  for  yet  the  end  shall  be  at  the  time 
appointed. 

28  Then  shall  he  return  into  his  land  -with  great 
riches  ;  and  his  heart  shall  be  against  the  holy  cove- 
nant ;  and  he  shall  do  exploits,  and  return  to  his  own 
land. 

Antiochus  and  Ptolemy,  pretended  to  be 
amicably  disposed  to  enter  into  a  treaty,  and 
frequently  ate  at  the  same  council-board,  but 
they  were  both  bent  on  mischief,  and  told 
lies  to  each  other.  Antiochus  pretended  to 
take  care  of  his  nephew  Philometer's  inter- 
ests, and  promised  to  restore  to  him  the 
crown,  at  the  same  time  that  he  was  plot- 
ting his  ruin,  and  was  contriving  means  to 


MORNING    VISION.  129 

weaken  the  two  brothers  in  a  war  with  each 
other.  Antiochus  hoping  to  become  abso- 
lute master  of  Egypt  more  easily  by  the 
civil  war  between  the  two  brothers  than  by 
his  own  forces,  left  the  kingdom  for  a  while, 
and  returned  into  Syria.  He  did  indeed 
"  return  with  great  riches"  for  the  spoils 
which  he  took  in  Egypt  were  of  immense 
value. 

The  author  of  this  little  work  has  thus  far 
been  as  brief  as  possible,  in  pursuing  the 
chain  of  events  predicted  (in  the  11th  chap- 
ter of  Daniel,)  or  rather  related,  for  it  is 
given  almost  in  the  language  of  a  narrative. 
The  reader  must  have  recurrence  to  his- 
tory to  gain  an  entire  understanding  of  these 
events.  This  portion  of  prophecy  is  deemed 
very  important  by  the  intimate  relations  it 
sustains  to  immediate  coming  events.  The 
reader  will  do  well  to  bear  these  things  in 
mind,  and,  especially,  the  position  of  the 
Jewish  church  amid  all  these  conflicts  be- 
tween rival  princes.  These  things  are  in  no 
degree  accidental — it  is  strikingly  analagous 
to  the  position  of  the  Christian  church,  al- 
ways hitherto,  and  will  remain  so  till  Christ, 
our  "  elder  brother"  takes  the  government 
of  affairs  upon  his  ''own  shoulders."  The 
Christian  church  has  always  as  yet  been  per- 


130  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

secuted  by  the  state,  or  what  is  vvoise  and 
more  common,  as  in  modern  times,  she  lives 
in  an  ''  adulterous"  connection  with  the  civil 
power,  in  all  countries,  our  own,  even,  not 
excepted.  The  nominal  church  "has  com- 
mitted fornication  with  the  kings  of  the 
earth,"  (Rev.  xviii :  9,)  by  every  such  union 
of  civil  and  religious  interests.  For  future 
use,  the  writer  has  thrown  into  the  margin 
frequent  extracts  as  notes.  Let  the  reader 
mark  them.  Christ  will  find  on  earth,  a 
church  of  "virgin"  purity,  before  the  "mar- 
riage-supper of  the  Lamb"  will  be  celebrat- 
ed. 

But  to  return  from  this  digression.  As 
has  been  said,  when  Antiochus  "  returned 
into  his  own  land  with  great  riches,"  (verse 
28,)  his  heart  was  ''  against  the  holy  cove- 
nant." For  It  happened  while  he  was  in 
Egypt,  that  a  false  report  was  spread  of  his 
death.  Jason,  thinking  this  a  favorable  op- 
portunity for  him  to  recover  the  high  priest- 
hood, marched  to  Jerusalem  with  a  thou- 
sand men,  assaulted  and  took  the  city,  drove 
Menelaus  into  the  castle,  and  exercised 
great  cruelties  upon  the  citizens.  Antiochus, 
hearing  of  this,  concluded  that  the  whole  of 
the  nation  had  revolted,  and  being  informed 
that  the  people  had  made  great  rejoicings  at 


MORNING    VISION.  131 

the  report  of  his  death,  he  determined  ta 
take  a  severe  revenge,  and  went  up  with  a 
great  army  as  well  as  with  great  indignation 
anjainst  Jerusalem.  He  besieged  and  took, 
the  city  by  force  of  arms,  slew  forty  thou- 
sand of  the  inhabitants,  sold  as  many  for 
slaves,  polluted  the  temple  with  swine's  flesh, 
profaned  the  holy  of  holies  by  breaking  into 
it,  took  away  the  golden  vessels,  and  other 
sacred  treasures,  to  the  value  of  eighteen 
hundred  talents,  restored  Menelaus  to  his 
office  and  authority,  and  constituted  one- 
Philip,  by  nation  Phrygian,  in  manners  a 
barbarian,  governor  of  Judea.  This  account 
related  by  the  historian  Polybius,  accords- 
with  Josephus.  Jerome,  also  says,  the 
Greek  and  Roman  history  relates,  that  "after 
Antiochus  returned  from  Egypt,  he  came 
into  Judea,  [that  is, ''  against  the  holy  cove- 
nant,"] and  spoiled  the  temple,  took  away 
a  great  quantity  of  gold,  and  having  placed 
a  garrison  of  Macedonians  in  the  citadel,  he 
returned  into  his  own  land."  This  point  is 
dwelt  upon  not  only  to  show  the  relation  of 
God's  nominal  people  with  the  world,  but 
because  several  writers  have  applied  this 
part  of  Daniel's  vision  to  the  Romans,  and 
the  fourth  beast  or  empire. 


132  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

29  At  the  time  appointed  he  shall  return,  and  come 
toward  the  south  ;  but  it  shall  not  be  as  the  I'urmer,  or 
as  the  latter. 

30  For  the  ships  of  Cluttim  shall  come  against  him 
therefore  he  shall  be  grieved,  and  return,  and  have  in 
vdignation  against   the   holy  covenant ;  so  shall  he  do 
he  shall  even  return,  and  have  intelligence   with  them 
that  forsake  the  holy  covenant. 

After  ten  years,  ''  at  the  time  appointed," 
Antiochus,  finding  that  his  treachery  was 
detected,  and  that  the  two  brothers,  Philo- 
pater  and  Eiiergetes  had  united  their  council 
and  strength  for  their  mutual  defence,  he 
threw  ofT  the  mask,  collected  a  great  army 
early  in  the  spring,  and  passed  Caelo-Syria, 
entered  Egypt,  and  the  inhabitants  of  Mem- 
phis having  submitted  to  him,  he  came  by 
easy  marches  to  Alexandria.  But,  it  '•'  was 
not  as  the  former,"  success,  when  he  over- 
threw the  Egyptian  army  at  Pelusium, "  nor 
as  the  latter,"  when  he  took  Memphis,  and 
subdued  all  Egypt  except  Alexandria.  "  For 
the  ^hips  of  Chittim,"*  &-c.    Antiochus,  be- 


*  For  the  ships  of  Chittim  shall  come  against  him. 
The  Huns,  who  lived  on  the  north  of  the  Adriatic  Sea, 
a  place  which,  (says  Mr.  Miller)  was  anciently  called 
Chittim,  will  ravage  the  Roman  Empire  under  their 
leader  Attila.  [b]  — Litcu  on  Christ's  Second  Co.ming. 

b  A  far  more  satisfactory   and   general   explanation 


MORNING    VISION.  133 

ing  now  within  seven  miles  of  Alexandria, 
heard  that  ships  had  arrived  there  from 
Rome,  with  legates  from  the  Senate.  He 
went  to  salute  them.  They  delivered  to 
him  the  letters  from  the  Senate,  in  which  he 
was  commanded,  on  pain  of  the  displeasure 
of  the  Roman  nation,  to  put  an  end  to  the 
war  against  his  nephews.  Antiochus,  wish- 
ed time  to  consult  his  friends,  but  Popillius, 
one  of  the  legates,  drawing  a  circle  around 


of  the  terms,  'ships  of  Chittim,'  is  found  in  the  fol- 
lowing note  from  Bishop  Newton,  without  particular 
reference  to  this  passage. 

'  For  ships  shall  come  from  the  coast  of  Chittim,^and 
shall  afflict  Ashur,  and  shall  afflict  Eber,  and  he  also 
shall  perish  forever.'  Num.  xxiv.  ver.  24. 

Chittim  was  one  of  the  sons  of  Javan,  who  was  one 
of  the  sons  of  Japheth,  by  whose  posterity  the  isles  of 
the  Gentiles.  Gen.  x.  5,  were  divided  and  peopled,  that 
is  Europe^  and  the  countries  to  which  the  Asiatics  pass- 
ed by  sea,  for  such  the  Hebrews  called  islands.  Chittim 
is  used  for  the  descendants  of  Chittim,  as  Ashur  is  put 
for  the  descendants  of  Ashur,  that  is  the  Assyrians  ; 
but  what  people  were  the  descendants  of  Chittim,  or 
what  country  was  meantjjby  the  coasts  of  Chittim,  it  is 
not  easy  to  determine.  The  critics  and  commentators 
are  generally  divided  into|two  opinions,  the  one  assert- 
ing that  Macedonia,  and  the  other  that  Italy  was  the 
country  here  intended  j  and  each  opinion  is  recom- 
mended and  authorised  by  some  of  the  first  and  great- 
est names  in  learning ;  as,  not  to  mention  others,  Gro- 
tius  and  Le  Clerc  contend  for  the  former,  Bochart  and 

12 


134  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Antiochus,  demanded  a  deffinite  answer  be- 
fore he  crossed  tlie  line.  Antiochus,  intim- 
idated, submitted  to  the  Roman  Senate,  and 
in  a  few  days  commenced  his  return  to  Syria. 
"  Grieved"  and  disappointed,  Antiochus 
again  vented  his  rage  against  the  Jews,  "the 
holy  covenant,"  and  he  sent  his  general, 
Apollonius,  with  twenty-two  thousand  men 
against  Jerusalem,  plundered  and  set  fire  to 
the   city,   pulled    down    the    houses   round 


Vitringa  are  strenuous  for  the  latter.  But  there  "is  no 
reason  why  we  may  not  adopt  both  opinions  ;  and  es- 
pecially as  it  is  well  known  and  agreed  on  all  hands, 
that  colonies  came  from  Greece  to  Italy  ;  and  as  Jose- 
phus  saith,  that  all  islands  and  most  maratime  places 
are  called  Chethim  by  the  Hebrews  ;  and  as  manifest 
traces  of  the  name  are  to  be  found  in  both  countries  ; 
the  ancient  name  of  Macecodia  having  been  Macettia, 
and  the  Latins  having  before  been  called  Cetii.  What 
appears  most  probable  is,  that  the  sons  of  Chittim  set- 
tled first  in  Asia  Minor,  where  were  a  people  called  Ce- 
tei,  and  a  river  called  Cetium,  according  to  Homer  and 
Strabo.  From  Asia  they  might  pass  over  into  the 
island  Cyprus,  which  Josephus  saith  was  possessed  by 
Chethim,  and  called  Chethima  ;  and  where  was  also 
the  city  Cittium.  famous  for  being  the  birth-place  of 
Zeno,  the  founder  of  the  sect  of  the  Stoics,  who  was 
therefore  called  the  Cittiean.  And  from  thence  they 
might  send  forth  colonies  into  Greece  and  Italy.  This 
plainly  appears,  that  wherever  the  land  of  Chittim  or 
the  isles  of  Chittim  are  mentioned  in  scripture,  there 
are  evidently  meant  some  countries  or  islands  in  'the 
Mediterranean. — Niwton  on  the  Prophecies,  pp  81,  82. 


MORNING    VISION.  135 

about  it,  slew  much  of  the  people,  and  built 
a  castle  on  an  eminence  that  commanded 
the  temple,  and  slew  multitudes  of  the  poor 
people  who  had  come  up  to  worship, — pol- 
luted every  place,  so  that  the  temple  service 
was  totally  abandoned,  and  the  people  fled 
the  city,  till  it  was  forsaken  of  its  natives, 
and  became  a  habitation  of  strangers.  "  So 
shall  he  do,"  (verse  30.)  After  his  return  to 
Antioch,  he  published  a  decree,  which  oblig- 
ed all  persons,  upon  pain  of  death,  to  con- 
form to  the  rehgion  of  the  Greeks,  and  so 
the  Jewish  worship  was  abrogated,  and  the 
heathen  worship  was  set  up  in  its  stead,  and 
the  temple  itself  was  consecrated  to  Jupiter 
Olympius.  In  the  transaction  and  ordering 
of  these  matters,  he  ''had  intelligence  with 
them  that  forsook  the  holy  covenant,"  Men- 
elaus,  and  the  other  apostate  Jews  of  his 
party,  who  was  the  king's  chief  instigators 
against  their  religion  and  their  country. 

We  have  surveyed  the  course  of  events 
predicted  down  to  B.  C.  164. 

Bishop  Newton  the  venerable  pioneer  in 
unfolding  the  prophecies,  with  Sir  Isaac 
Newton,  Mede,  Scott,  Clarke,  Henry  and  the 
principal  English  writers,  except  Faber,  ap- 
plies Dan.  xi :  31,40,  to  events  transpiring 
in  the  western  empire.     They  object  to  the 


136  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

transition  from  the  kings  of  Syria,  to  the 
"little  horn"  of  Mohamedanism.  But  time 
may  show  that  they  have  made  a  more  sud- 
den and  unnatural  transition  in  passing  into 
the  west,  and  fixing  on  popery  as  the  proto- 
type of  Antiochus  Epiphanes.  The  views 
of  bishop  Newton  on  this  chapter,  thus  far, 
are  given  in  the  following  extract. 

'*'  It  may  be  proper  to  stop  here,  and  re- 
flect a  little  how  particular  and  circumstan- 
tial this  prophecy  is  concerning  the  king- 
doms of  Syria  and  Egypt,  from  the  death  of 
Alexander  to  the  time  of  Antiochus  Epiph- 
anes. There  is  not  so  complete  and  regular 
a  series  of  their  kings, — there  is  not  so  con- 
cise and  comprehensive  an  account  of  their 
affairs  to  be  found  in  any  author  of  their 
time.  The  prophecy  is  really  more  perfect 
than  any  history.  No  one  historian  hath  re- 
lated so  many  circumstances,  and  m  such 
exact  order  of  time,  as  the  prophet  hath 
foretold  them,  so  that  it  was  necessary  to 
have  recourse  to  several  authors,  Greek  and 
Roman,  Jewish,  and  Christian,  and  to  collect 
here  something  from  one,  and  there  some- 
thing from  another,  for  better  explaining  and 
illustrating  the  great  variety  of  particulars 
contained  in  this  prophecy." 


MORNING    VISION. 


137 


SUCCESSION  OF  PERSIAN  AND  GRECIAN  KINGS 
AND  JEWISH  HIGH  PRIESTS. 

Daruis, 
Called  Cyaxures  by  heathen  historians ;  Ahasuerus  amonjrthe  Jews. 

B.  C.  538. 
Cyrus,  .»       334. 

Camkyses, 
Smerdis  Magian, 
Darius  Hystaspis, 
Xerxes, 
Artaxerxes  Lo.xgimanus,  •'    460. 

"  The  man  Gabriel,"  (Dan.  xi :  2.)  passes  over  this  last  named 
kin^,and  eight  01  hers  in  Persia,  to  Alexander  the  Great,  first  kins  in 
the  Grecian  empire.  Josephusdoes  ihe  same,  and  for  similar  reasons, 
as  in  the  language  of  his  traiisl.itor:' — "  And  if  any  wonder  why  Joso- 
piius  wholly  omits  the  rest  of  the  kings  of  Persia  after  Artaxerxes 
]Vlnemon,till  he  came  to  their  last  king  Darius,  who  was  conquered 
by  Alexander  the  Great,  I  shall  give  tlicm  Vossius's  ard  Dr.  Hudson's 
answer,  though  in  my  own  words,  viz.  that  Josephns  did  not  do  ill  in 
omittini:  those  kings  of  Persia  with  whom  the  Jews  had  no  concern, 
becau  sc  he  was  giving  the  hislory  of  the  Jews  and  not  the  Pesians- 
He  justly  therefore  returns  to  the  Jewish  att'airs  alter  the  death  of 
Longinianus,  without  any  mention  of  Darins  JI .  before  Artaxerxes 
Wnenion,or  of  Ochus,  or  Oiotrus,  as  the  cannon  ol  Ptolemy  names 
them  after  him.  Nor  had  he  probably  mentioned  this  other  Artaxerx- 
es, unless  Bagosps,  one  of  the  koa  ernors  and  commanders  under  him, 
had  occasioned  the  pollution  of  the  Jewish  temple,  and  had  greatly 
distressed  the  Jews  upon  that  pollution," 

SYRIAN  KINGS.      HIGH  PRIESTS.      EGYPTIAN  KINGS. 


Alexander, 
Died  B.  C.  326. 

Seleucus  NrcAToR, 
Antiochus  Soter, 
Antiochus  Theus, 
Seleucus  Callinicus, 

{^ELEUCAS  CeRAUNUS, 

Antiohus  the  Great, 
Seleucus  Philopater, 
Antiochus  Epiphanes, 
Died  B,  C.  164. 


Ezra, 

Nehemiah, 

Eliashib, 

JrjDAs, 

John, 

JUDDUA," 

Eleazar, 
Manassah 


Ptolemy  Lagss, 
Ptolemy-Philadelphps, 


Ptolemy  Euergetes, 

Ptolemy  Philopater, 

Ptolemy  Epiphanes, 

Ptolemy  Philometer^ 

Ptolemy  Physcon. 


Onias, 

Ja,ox, 

JVIenelauS: 

Alcimus, 

Judas,       Died  B- C.156. 

jonavhan, 

Simon,' 

Hyrcanus.  *    "   "      74. 

*  Hero  ends  the  high  priesthood,  and  the  life  of  this  excellent  per- 
son; John  Hyrcunus  ;  and  together  with  him  the  holy  theocracy,  or 
divine  goveinnicnt  ot  the  Jewish  nation,  and  its  concomitant  oracle 
by  Urim.  Now  lollows  the  profane  and  tyrannical  Jewish  monarchy 
nrst  of  the  Asmoneas  or  Maccabees,  and  then  of  Herod  rhe  Great,  the 
Idumean,  till  the  comiDff  of  the  Messiah 

12** 


SECTION  VL 


MORNING  VISION  CONCLUDED. 


Most  English  writers  on  the  Prophecies, 
as  before  remarked,  consider  Daniel  xi:  31 
40,  as  predicting  events  which  would  be  ful- 
filled in  the  Roman  empire,  immediately  af- 
fecting Popery  which  was  symbolized  as  the 
"  little  horn."  The  former  part  of  the  chap- 
ter applying  with  so  much  minuteness  and 
certainty  to  the  kings  of  Syria  and  Egypt, 
can  be  mistaken  by  those  only  who  have  a 
favorite  theory.  But  Jlow  men  untrammeled 
by  theories  may  diifer  as  to  the  meaning  is 
not  so  clear.  Yet  the  straight  line  of  the 
morning  vision,  is  distinctly  tracablc,  how- 
ever sudden  the   transition  from  Antiochus 


MORNING    VISION,  139 

Epiphanes  to  some  great  persecuting  proto- 
type which  we  are  rationally  led  to  seek 
within  the  limits  of  other  scenes  foretold  in 
this  vision.  All  writers  admit  that  in  passing 
from  Xerxes  to  Alexander,  the  prophet 
makes  a  sudden  transition  gliding  over  150 
years  and  9  successive  Persian  monarchs. 
Equally  agreed  are  expositors  that  as  many- 
successive  kings  of  Syria  and  Egypt  occupy- 
ing much  less  time,  employ  the  prophet  from 
verse  3  to  the  14th,  and  nearly  all  of  them 
agree  in  applying  the  part  from  the  14th  to 
the  31st,  to  these  kings  until  the  time  of  An- 
tiochus  Epiphanes.  Now  pursuing  a  strict 
chronological  and  local  ord^^r,  the  next  prom- 
inent event  predicted  is  the  invasion  of  the 
Jews  by  the  Romans  under  Pompey,  and  the 
desecration  of  their  temple,  apd  the  subse- 
quent destruction  of  the  temple,  city,  and 
nation,  by  Titus. 

The  Roman  "  arms"  "  stand  on  the  part" 
of  the  great  oppressing  power.  Then  the 
prophet  proceeds  touching  the  most  impor- 
tant events  from  Antiochus  to  the  rise  of 
the  Arabian  imposture. 

In  the  prophecies  a  sudden  transition  from 
a  type  to  a  great  and  striking  event  anala- 
gous  is  very  common. 

So  in  predicting  the  destruction  of  Jerusa- 


140  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

lem  by  the  Romans,  Christ  passed  suddenly 
to  the  signs  and  calamities  which  were  to 
befal  an  ungodly  world  just  before  the  dawn- 
ing of  the  millenium.  However  great,  there- 
fore, the  difficulties  may  appear  in  this  the 
shorter  and  more  direct  rout,  they  are  nat- 
ural and  incidental ;  whereas,  if  we  leave  the 
location  of  the  eastern  for  the  western  rout, 
the  transition  is  sudden,  unnatural,  and  dis- 
torts the  beauty  of  the  whole  plan,  and  sub- 
jects the  traveler  to  unnecessary  embarass- 
ment.  Finding  this  section  of  the  road  so 
far  completed  as  to  be  passable,  let  us  com- 
mence and  proceed  cautiously  along,  being 
confident  that  the  path  will  become  brighter 
and  brighter  till  the  perfect  fulfillment  of 
the  morning  vision  which,  is  now  at  hand. 
Our  company,  though  small,  will  increase. 
We  shall  have,  for  a  part  of  the  way,  at 
least,  Faber,  Smith,  and  Dr.  Scott,  who  in 
the  last  editions  of  his  commentary,  coincid- 
ed with  Faber.  It  is  hoped  that  no  reader 
will  have  occasion  to  say  he  has  been  un- 
necessarily detained  at  this  important  depot. 
The  shifting  upon  different  tracks,  the  part- 
ing of  companies,  the  giving  of  reasons  for 
thus  parting  asunder,  must  necessarily  con- 
sume time.     It  is  due  to  all  parties  to  part 


MORNING    VISION.  141 

with  a  fair  understanding  of  the  matter.  (See 
diagram,  quarto  appendix.) 

Having  adjusted  these  things,  and  due  re- 
gard having  been  paid  to  all  past  able  writ- 
ers who  differ  from  the  author  in  the  plan 
marked  out  in  this  little  treatise,  the  thread 
of  remark  will  proceed  more  rapidly  than  on 
the  verses  previous  to  the  3 1st.  It  must  be 
obvious  to  every  careful  observer,  that  we 
are  not  led  beyond  the  limits  of  the  morning 
vision,  though  in  these  passages  we  have  so 
rapidly  glanced  at  events  which  befel  the 
Jews.  The  morning  vision  has,  in  no  case, 
conducted  us  beyond  the  boundaries  of  the 
third  or  Grecian  empire  as  a  locality  for  its 
developments.  Besides  the  utmost  limits  of 
this  vision  are  the  destiny  of  the  Jews  from 
their  restoration  from  the  Babylonian  cap- 
tivity, to  their  final  restoration  from  their 
present  dispersion.  The  30th  verse  led  us 
to  the  close  of  the  oppressive  reign  of  Anti- 
ochus  Apiphanes,  164  years  before  Christ. 
The  remaining,  lead  us  to  the  series  of  ca- 
lamities which  befel  that  stiff-necked  people, 
with  the  intimation  that  "  they  shall  be 
holpen  with  a  little  help."  (verse  34.)  Next 
after  the  abomination  of  Antiochus,  the  Ro- 
man "  arms  shall  stand"  on  the  "  part''  of 
their  oppressors,  and  pollute  the  *'  sanctuary 


142  ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

of  their  Strength."  (verse  31.)  Accordingly^ 
about  one  hundred  years  after  Antiochus,  or 
63  years  before  the  Christian  era,  Pompey, 
the  Roman  general,  took  Jerusalem,  and  en- 
tered into  the  "  holy  of  holies"  thus  pollut- 
ing their  sanctuary."  For  about  140  years 
after  this,  the  Jews  were  oppressed  by  the 
Romans  their  temple  and  city  being  destroy- 
ed by  Titus.  Thus  was  the  "daily  sacrifice" 
takeiiaway,  and  the  city  made  desolate,  un- 
til finally  in  the  year  132,  the  emperor  Adrian, 
caused  a  temple  to  be  erected  to  Jupiter 
Capitolinus,  on  the  very  spot  where  the  tem- 
ple of  God  before  stood,  and  banished  the 
remnant  of  Jews  ftom  Jerusalem  and  its 
neighborhood. 

31  And  arms  shall  stand  on  his  part,  and  they  shall 
pollute  the  sanctuary  of  strength,  and  shall  take  away 
the  daily  sacrifice,  and  they  shall  place  the  abomination 
that  maketh  desolate. 

Thus  the  abomination  that  maketh  deso- 
late was  literally  placed  in  the  "sanctuary 
of  strength  to  pollute  it."  This  was  done 
by  the  "  arms"  of  the  Romans,  not  then  act- 
ing as  the  ten-horned  beast,  for  Jerusalem 
was  not  an  integral  part  of  that  empire.  Nor 
was  it  done  by  the  "  little  papal  horn"  for 
Judea  afterwards  became  a  part  of  the  Greek 


MORNING    VISION.  143 

church,  not  of  the  Latin.  But,  these  events 
are  figures  of  the  corruptions  which  were  sub- 
sequently introduced  into  the  Christian 
church,  and  made  way  for  the  "  overspread- 
ing abominations"  of  the  Arabian  prophet.* 


*  We  have  the  authority  of  our  Lord  for  pronouncing, 
that  the  abomination  of  desolation,  mentioned  in  the 
31st  verse  of  the  11th  chapter,  is  to  be  referred  to  the 
sacking  of  Jerusalem  by  the  Romans.  Of  this  Bishop 
jSewton  is  sensible  ;  and  therefore  very  justly  applies 
the  following  verses  to  the  pagan  persecutions  of  the 
primitive  Christians.  "  The  Roman  magistrates  and 
officers,'  says  he,  'it  is  very  well  known,  made  use  of 
the  most  alluring  promises,  as  well  as  the  most  terrible 
threatenings,  to  prevail  upon  them  to  renounce  their 
religion,  and  offer  incense  to  the  statues  of  the  empe- 
rors and  images  of  the  gods.  Many  w^ere  induced  to 
comply  with  the  temptation  and  apostatized  from  the 
faith,  as  we  learn  particularly  from  the  famous  epistle 
of  Pliny  to  Trajan  ;  but  the  true  Christians,  the  people 
who  knew  their  God,  were  stroag  ;  remained  firm  to 
their  religion  ;  and  gave  the  most  illustrious  proofs  of 
the  most  heroic  patience  and  fortitude.  It  may  too  with 
strictest  truth  and  propriety  be  said  of  the  primitive 
Christians,  that  being  dispersed  every  where,  and 
preaching  the  gospel  in  all  parts  of  the  Roman  empire, 
they  instructed  many,  and  gained  a  great  number  of 
proselytes  to  their  religion  ;  yet  they  fell  by  the  sword, 
and  by  flame,  by  captivity,  and  by  spoil,  many  days  j 
for  ihey  were  exposed  to  the  malice  and  fury  of  ten 
general  persecutions,  and  suffered  all  manner  of  inju- 
ries, afflictions,  and  tortures,  with  little  intermission  for 
the  space  of  three  huudred  years.' — Bt.  Newton's  Dis- 
sertation XVII, 


144         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

32  And  such  as  do  wickedly  against  the  covenant 
shall  he  corrupt  by  flatteries;  but  the  people  that  do 
know  their  God  shall  be  strong,  and  do  exploits. 

33  And  they  that  understand  among  the  people  shall 
instruct  many  ;  yet  they  shall  fall  by  the  sword,  and 
by  flame,  by  captivity,  and  by  spoil,  many  days. 

34  Now  when  they  shall  fall,  they  shall  be  hoi  pen 
with  a  little  help  ;  but  many  shall  cleave  unto  them 
with  flatteries. 

These  are  not  only  descriptive  of  the  Jews 
amidst  their  persecutions  and  dispersion 
among  all  nations,  for  a  "  remnant  is  to  be 
saved  according  to  the  election  of  grace," 
but  also  of  the  persecutions  of  the  eastern 
Christians  before  the  establishment  of  the 
Arabian  imposture. 

Christians,  as  well  as  Jews,  are  yet  to  reap 
some  benefits  from  the  calamities  which  have 
fallen  upon  the  wretched  dominions  of  the 
Sultan,  in  which  they  have  suflered  by  "  the 
sword,"  ''  by  the  flame,"  "  by  captivity,"  and 
"  by  spoil,"  for "  so  many  days,"  "even  to  the 
time  of  end,  because  it  is  for  a  time  appoint- 
ed." This  appointed  time  is  near  at  hand, 
and  many  of  the  degraded  Greek  Christians^ 
and  of  the  gospel-rejecting  Jews,  will  be 
'purged  and  made  white."* 


*  The   tenth   and  last  general   I'iersecution   was  be- 
;ua  by  Diocletian ;    it   raged,    though   not  at  all  times 


MORNING    VISION.  145 

35  And  some  of  them  of  understanding  shall  fall,  to 
try  them,  and  to  purge,  and  to  make  them  white,  even 
to  the  time  of  the  end ;  because  it  is  yet  for  a  time 
appointed. 

It  is  observable,  that  in  this  verse  the  true 
church  is  represented  as  being  again  in  a 
state  of  persecution,  similar  to  that  she  had 
before  endured  from  the  fury  of  Paganism. 
She  not  only,  therefore,  received  but  "  little 
help,"  from  the  reign  of  Constantino,  but 
those  who  "  clave  to  them  by  flattery,"  dur- 


equally,  ten  years ;  and  was  suppressed  entirely  by 
Constantine,  the  first  Roman  emperor,  as  it  is  uni- 
versally known,  who  made  open  profession  of  Chris- 
tianity :  and  then  the  Church  was  no  longer  persecuted, 
but  was  protected  and  favored  by  the  civil  power.  But 
still  this  is  called  only  a  little  help  :  because,  though  it 
added  much  to  the  temporal  prosperity,  yet  it  con- 
tributed little  to  the  spiritual  graces  and  virtues  of 
Christians.  It  enlarged  their  revenues,  and  increased 
their  endowments  ;  but  proved  the  fatal  means  of  cor- 
rupting the  doctrine,  and  relaxing  the  discipline  of  the 
Church.  It  was  attended  with  this  peculiar  disadvan- 
tage, that  many  clave  to  them  with  flatteries.  Many 
became  Christians,  for  the  loaves  and  fishes  :  and  pre- 
tended to  be  of  the  religion,  only  because  it  was  the 
religion  of  the  Emperor.  Eusebius,  who  was  a  con- 
temporary writer,  reckons  that  one  of  the  reigning  vic- 
es of  the  time  was  the  dissimulation  and  hypocrisy  of 
men  fraudulently  entering  into  the  Church,  and  bor- 
rowing the  name  of  Christians  without  the  reality. — 
Bp.  Newton's  Dissertation  xvii, 

13 


146  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

ing  the  churches'  external  prosperity,  rapidly 
prepared  the  way  for  a  more  protracted  and 
inveterate  species  of  persecution,  for  "all 
who"  should  after  that,  "  live  godly  in  Christ 
Jesus."  This  was  as  true  in  the  history  of 
the  Greek,  where  we  now  stand  in  this  proph- 
ecy, as  in  the  Latin  church  of  the  west.* 

The  prophet  tells  us,  that  "  these  men  of 
understanding"  shall  continue  in  a  persecut- 
ed state  "  to  the  time  of  the  end,"  because 
their  trials  "are  yet  unto  the  time  appoint- 
ed." This  we  see  has  been  literally  fulfiled 
in  the  locality  of  this  vision.  The  sanctuary, 
(the  Jews,)  and  the  host,  (the  Greek  church,) 
have  been  '•'  trodden  under  foot''  by  the 
Mohamedan  powers,  which  is  now  a  visible 
matter  of  fact.      "The  time   of  the  end," 


*■  As  in  the  first  persecution,  they  that  understood;, 
were  to  instruct  many  ;  and  in  consequence  of  their 
zeal,  to  fall  by  the  sword,  and  by  flame,  by  captivity, 
and  by  spoil ;  so  in  this  second  persecution,  some  of 
the  men  of  understanding  are,  in  a  similar  manner,  to 
perish  in  attempting  to  bring  about  a  reformation  in 
the  now  degenerate  Christian  world.  Hence  it  is  evi. 
dent,  that  the  men  of  understanding,  must  in  both 
cases,  be  men  of  the  same  principles ;  that  is,  men 
professing  and  acting  up  to  the  pure  truths  of  the  Gos- 
pel, in  contradistinction  to  the  heathens  in  the  former 
instance,  and  to  corrupt  Christians  in  the  latter  in- 
stance.— Bp.  Newton's  Dissertation  xvn. 


MORNING    VISION.  147 

when  the  oppression  of  both  Jews  and 
Greeks  will  cease,  will  be  at  the  termin- 
ation of  the  2300  years. 

36  And  the  king  shall  do  according  to  his  will ;  and 
he  shall  exalt  himself,  and  magnify  himself  above  every 
god,  and  shall  speak  marvellous  things  against  the 
God  of  gods,  and  shall  prosper  till  the  indignation  be 
accomplished ;  for  that  that  is  determined  shall  be 
done. 

The  term  "  king,"  here,  refers  to  the  per- 
secuting power  whether  secular  or  rehgious. 
As  both  of  Daniel's  visions  are  local  as  well 
as  strictly  chronological,  we  are  to  look  for 
no  other  "  king"  than  the  Mohamedan  power 
in  this  place.*  The  little  horn  of  the  Greek 
empire  was  to  oppress  the  Jews  and  Greek 
Christians,  to  the  "  time  of  the  end,"  the  ter- 


*  About  1805,  as  before  remarked,  The  Rev.  George 
Stanley  Faber,  B.  D.  Vicar  of  Stockton-Upon-Tees, 
published  an  interesting  Dissertation  on  the  Prophecies, 
diftering  in  many  important  particulars  from  Sir  Isaac 
Newton,  Bishop  Newton,  and  all  who  have  followed 
their  track,  as  Clarke,  Scott,  and  others.  It  was  found 
that  Faber  was  more  correct  in  some  things,  having 
the  natural  advantage  of  all  modern  writers  over  those 
who  wrote  at  an  earlier  period  on  the  prophecies. 
It  may  however,  be  impossible  to  find  a  writer  wholly 
impartial,  i.e.  attaching  no  undue  importance  to  events 
in  Ids  own  time  and  country. 


148  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

mination  of  2300  years.  The  little  horn  of 
the  Roman  beast  is  to  "  wear  out  the  saints 
of  the  Most  High,"  three  times  and  a  half, 
or  1260  years,  from  the  commencement  of 
the  papal  reign. 


Mr.  Faber  wrote  about  seven  years  after  the  break- 
ing out  of  the  French  Revolution,  that  political  earth- 
quake, which  by  its  horrid  atheism,  and  terrible  destruc- 
tion of  human  life,  convulsed  all  EurojTe  and  even 
America.  In  casting  round  for  some  striking  predic- 
tion of  these  scenes,  Mr.  F.  siezed  upon  Dan.  xi : 
36—40. 

Mr.  Smith,  of  our  own  country,  who  about  the  same 
time  wrote  an  able  Dissertation  on  the  prophecies,  took 
nearly  the  same  view  of  this  part  of  the  eleventh  chap- 
ter of  Daniel. 

The  author  of  these  illustrations  not  being  able  to 
reconcile  Faber's  and  Smith's  exposition  of  this  portion 
of  Daniel,  with  other  parts  of  the  evening  and  morn- 
ing visions,  and  supposing  it  probable  that  time,  the 
best  of  all  interpreters  of  prophecy,  might  in  some 
measure  have  modified  the  vieAvs  of  Mr.  Smith,  ad- 
dressed to  him  a  note  to  which  the  following  is  his 
answer.  His  "Key  to  the  Revelations,"  recently  pub- 
lished, give  so  much  evidence  of  the  advantages  its 
author  had  derived  from  time  and  reflection^  that  it 
was  hoped  his  views  of  this  passage  might  have  been 
so  modified  as  to  reflect  a  clearer  light  upon  it.  But 
often  times  opinions  early  embraced  and  long  cherish- 
ed, yield  with  reluctance  even  to  increasing  light. 

This  writer,  deeply  versed  in  the  prophetical  scrip- 
tures, now  77  years  of  age,  is  yet  active,  and  able  to 
preach  regularly,  retaining  in  an  unusual  degree,  his 
ready  mental  faculties. 


MORNING    VISION.  149 

*'  King,"  not  only  denotes  a  dynasty,  but 
^  succession  of  rulers,  civil  or  ecclesiastical. 
That  it  arose  out  of  the  Grecian  empire  we 
may  readily  see,  by  looking  back  to  the  par- 
allel passages  in  the  morning  vision,  now  un- 
der consideration.  (Dan.  viii :  21,  25.)  This 
is  exactly  the  parellel  point  in  the  morning 
vision  in  which  we  stand,  only  on  a  third 
track  of  this  great  "  highway."  Dr.  Scott, 
as  we  said,  according  to  the  first  edition  of 
his  commentary,  was  thrown  off  his  track  by 


Roxbury  Dec.  16,  1839. 
Mr.  David  Cambell  :  My  Dear  Sir, — I  came  home 
Saturday  evening,  (13th  mst.)  and  found  your  letter 
relative  to  Daniel  11th  chap  &c.  My  views  of  Daniel 
11  are  the  same  which  I  published  in  the  Dij^sertation, 
viz.  that  the  object  of  this  last  vision  of  Daniel  was  to 
predict  the  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit,  as  in  Rev.  17. 
Of  this  he  says  in  Dan.  x  .  1,  "a  thing  was  revealed  to 
Daniel,  and  the  thing  was  true,  but  the  time  was  long." 
No  such  notice  was  hinted,  of  the  time  being  "long," 
when  the  great  eastern  monarchies  were  predicted  in 
chap.  2nd- ;  when  the  papal  horn  was  predicted  in 
chap.  7 ;  when  the  Mohamedan  horn  was  predicted  in 
chap.  8  :  nor  when  the  advent  of  Christ  in  the  flesh, 
and  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem,  in  chap.  9.  But  in. 
his  last  vision,  a  new  thing-,  and  far  subsequent  to  the 
rise  ol  the  papal  and  Mohamedan  pillars  of  Satan's 
kingdom,  was  to  be  predicted,  and  an  event  connected 
wdtii  the  battle  of  the  great  day  of  God,  and  thus  an 
event  of  these  last  days,  and  then  more  than  2000  years. 

13* 


150  ILLUSTRATIONS   OF    PROPHECY. 

bishop  Newton's  Dissertation,  at  verse  3J, 
but  was  set  on  again  by  Faber.  (See  his 
remarks  on  Dan.  viii :  23, 25,  stereotype  ed. 
See  also,  note,  page  72  of  this  work.)  Why 
he  should  here  again,  run  oft' the  track,  on 
the  very  next  trip,  is  very  strange.  (See 
diagram;  also,  period  of  Antiochus,  Dan.  1 1 : 
31.) 

For  whatever  power  is  predicted  by  ''  the 
king  of  fierce  countenance"  who  will  '^mag- 
nify himself  in  his  heart,''  as  in  Dan.    viii : 


future.  The  mode  of  his  introducing  this  event  was 
striking,  viz.  he  introduces  a  line  of  monarchs.  from 
near  his  ownpime,  down  to  the  noted  Antiochus  Epiph- 
anes,  monarch  of  Syria,  who  greatly  persecuted  the 
church  in  Judea,  and  was  the  last  monarch  described 
before  verse  36  of  chap.  11,  where  the  wilful  power,  (as 
Faber  calls  it,)  the  antitype  of  Antiochus  Epiphanes  is 
introduced.  The  vision' then  enters  upon  the  "thing 
revealed  to  Daniel,  which  was  true,  but  the  time 
appointed  was  long  " — and  gives  a  delineation  of  it, 
not  of  any  one  man,  but  a  system  of  infidelity  ;  such  as 
was  the  Voltaire  system,  which  gave  birth  to  the  French 
Revolution  of  1789,  which  occasioned  wars  most  terri- 
ble in  Europe  for  25  years  ;  (the  7  thunders  in  Rev.  10.) 
and  destroyed,  it  has  been  calculated,  about  ten  mil- 
lions of  the  human  race  ;  and  which  had  been  planted 
in  at  least  12  nations  in  Christendom,  and  deeply  plant- 
ed in  our  United  States.  This  system  was  perfected 
under  the  cover  of  Free  Masonry.  You  will  find  a 
good  delineation  of  these  monarchs  in  the  visions  down 
to  Antiochus,  and  to  verse  36  of  Daniel,  in  Henry,  Scott, 
and  the  Comprehensive  Commentary.    After  verse  36 


MORNING    VISION.  15 1 

23,  (Slc,  so  here,  precisely  the  same  power 
is  denoted  by  the  ''king doing  according  to 
his  will,"  and  "  magnifying  himself  above 
every  god."  (verse  36.)  Let  the  reader 
carefully  read  the  parallel  passages  in  their 
connection,  and  see,  if  he  can,  how  any  one 
familiar  with  prophecy  can  come  to  any 
other  conclusion.  Let  none  think  the  writ- 
er over  anxious  on  these  points.  For  once 
settle  the  simple  outhnes  and  true  distinct- 
ions in  the  visions  of  Daniel,  and  follow  out 
the  same  rule  in  the  Revelations  of  John,  as 
Smith,  in  a  good  measure,  has  done  in  his 


you  will  find  little  or  no  aid  from  these  Commentators, 
unless  a  hint  that  they  do  relate,  probably,  to  an  anti- 
type of  Antiochus.  It  is  a  clear  case  (in  my  mind)  that 
a  new  subject  is  introduced  in  verse  36,  as  has  been 
hinted.  All  that  precedes  this,  was  many  centuries 
back  of  the  rise  of  the  papal  and  the  Mohamedan  horns, 
in  chap.  7  and  8.  But  what  is  introduced  in  verse  36, 
was  many  centuries  future  of  the  introduction  of  those 
horns.  We  find,  here,  that  atheistical  system  clearly 
described,  to  the  close  of  the  first  dynasty  under  it,  in 
verse  40.  The  horrid  influence,  after  this,  continues  till 
it  ends  in  the  close  of  the  chap.,  and  commencement  of 
the  next  chap.,  in  the  battle  of  the  day  of  God,  in  which 
this  power,  and  popery,  go  into  perdition  :  as  in  Dan. 
7  :  11,  and  Rev.  19  :  19,  20,  and  many  other  prophecies 
upon  the  same  event. 

*  *  * 

I  am  Respectfully  Yours, 

Ethan  Smith. 


152         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

"  key,"  and  the  obscurity,  hitherto  resting  on 
the  page  of  prophecy  at  once  departs.  So- 
ber enquirers  after  truth  behold  its  cheering 
light ! 

The  same  argument  used  against  Miller's 
theory  at  the  parallel  point,  in  Daniel  8th 
chapter,  by  Mr  Smith,  may  be  fairly  turned 
against  his  own  views  of  the  36th  verse  of 
this  chapter.*  For  the  8th  and  9th  chap- 
ters are  identical  in  their  local  and  chrono- 
logical boundaries,  2300  years,  the  length  of 
the  vision,  and  the  Greek  empire  the  locality 
of  the  events  fulfiling  the  vision. 


*  One  fact  overturns  the  whole  of  his  scheme,  viz. 
this  number  (2,300)  on  which  he  rests  the  Whole  of  his 
fabric,  has  no  connection  with  popery,  but  is  found  con- 
nected with  Mohamedanism,  to  tell  when  that  shall  fall. 
Popery  is  predicted  in  Dan.  7  :  8,  as  the  little  blasphe- 
mous horn  of  the  secular  Roman  beast ;  as  all  agree. 
In  chapter  8  :  9,  another  little  horn  is  predicted  under 
the  Macedonian  goat,  which  shotild  fall  at  the  close  of 
2,300  years.  Mr.  M.  lakes  it  as  a  clear  case,  that  this 
second  little  horn  is  also  popery,  the  same  with  the  horn 
of  the  Roman  beast  in  chapter  7.  He  here  mistakes. 
This  horn  in  chapter  8,  is  the  delusion  of  Moharaed,  as 
is  evident  from  the  following  things. 

1.  It  is  a  horn  under  the  Macedonian  beast  ;  popery 
is  under  the  Roman  beast. 

2.  Popery  would  not  be  given  twice  in  Daniel,  in  two 
distinct  unions,  and  Mohamedanism  not  given  at  all, 
as  it  is  hot,  if  it  be  not  given  here. 


MORNING   VISION.  153 

Let  us  here  compare  the  character  of  the 


■fe    in 


this  chapter,  and  we  shall  find  that  their 
imagined  resemblance  will  rapidly  fade  away. 
"  The  king"  was  to  be  engaged  in  wars  with 
the  kings  of  the  i&out/i  and  the  North, 
Here  the  parallel  entirely  fails.  No  similar 
exploits  of  the  "man  of  sin"  are  predicted. 
This  "  king"  as  we  shall  see,  '*  comes  to  his 


3.  The  description  of  the  little  horn,  in  chapter  8,  9, 
exactly  applies  to  Mohamedanism,  but  not  at  all  to 
popery.  To  give  the  papal  horn,  chapter  7,  the  line  of 
powers  to  introduce  it,  comes  down  to  the  fourth,  the 
Roman,  where  popery  did  arise.  But,  in  chapter  8,  to 
introduce  the  horn  there,  the  line  is  given  only  to  the 
third,  the  Macedonian,  where  Mohamedanism  did  arise. 
The  four  quarters,  into  which  Alexander's  empire  was 
divided,  are  mentioned,  in  one  of  which,  this  second 
horn  was  to  arise  ;  and  here  Mohamedanism  did  arise, 
but  not  under  the  Roman  beast  as  did  popery.  The 
vision  hints  that  this  second  horn  was  to  arise  in  the 
southern  quarter,  which  included  Arabia  ;  for  it  says, 
"it  waxed  exceeding  great  toward  the  south,  and  to- 
ward  the  east,  and  toward  the  pleasant  land,"  (Pales- 
tine,) a  thing  true  of  Mohamedanism ;  but  not  true  at 
all  of  popery.  Nothing  is  said  of  this  second  horn's 
doing  any  thing  toward  the  west,  where  popery  was  ; 
but  in  the  south  and  east,  where  popery  was  not.  Mo- 
hamed  arose  in  Mecca,  in  Arabia,  in  the  south  of  Alex- 
ander's  empire  ;  and  his  scheme  waxed  great  where 
and  as  is  here  predicted ;  but  where  popery  did  not 
exist. — Smith's  Review  of  Miller's  Evidekces  of  the 
Secokd  CoMiKft  OF  Christ  in  1843. 


154  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

end"  at  the  close  of  this  chapter,  or  termin- 
ation of  2300  years  which  is  near  at  hand. 
The  "man  of  sin''  continues  till  the  revival 
of  the  imperial  head  of  the  Roman  beast, 
and  the  slaying  of  the  witnesses,  at  the  ter- 
mination of  the  1260  years,  a  point  of  time 
as  will  be  shown  much  more  distant.  With 
so  great  a  discrepance  of  character,  both 
chronological  and  circumstantial,  "the  man 
of  sin,"  cannot  represent  the  same  power  as 
this  "king." 

37  Neither  shall  he  regard  the  God  of  his  fathers, 
nor  the  desire  of  women,  nor  regard  any  god  j  for  he 
shall  magnify  himself  above  all. 

In  viewing  all  these  verses  applied  to  the 
Mohamedan  "little  horn,"  we  meet  but  one 
difficulty,  viz :  "  he  shall  not  regard  the  de- 
sire of  women,"  (verse  37.)  This  is  sup- 
posed to  apply  better  to  the  little  horn  of 
Romanism.  We  shall  not  leave  a  straight, 
and  hitherto  clear  path  for  one  difficulty  ; 
but  refer  the  reader  to  Faber's  notes.*  (See 
also  note  on  "  the  God  of  forces."  (verse  38.) 
For  an  account  of  the  terrible  and  desolating 


*  The  desire  of  women,  does  not  signify  the  desire 
to  have  women  or  wives  ;  but,  on  the  contrary,  that 
which  women  or  wives  desire  to  have.  That  such  is 
the  meaning  of  the  expression  is   sufficiently   manifest 


MORNING    VISION.  155 

wars  of  Mohamed  and  his  successors,  denot- 
ed by  these  predictions,  the  reader  must  have 
recourse  to  the  history  of  those  times. 

He  shall  exalt  himself,  and  magnify  him- 
self above  every  god,  and  shall  speak  mar- 
vellous things  against  the  God  of  gods,  &c. 
(2Gth  verse.)  This  is  deemed  by  some  as 
more  applicable  to  an  atheistical  power  than 
to  the  Mohamedan,  because  atheists  do  in  fact 
disclaim  against  all  idea  of  God.  But  even 
atheistical  France  deified  and  v^orshipped 
human  reason.  And  it  is  true  that  Mohamed 
magnified  "  himself  above  every  god"  and 
opposed  Christ  "  the  Lord  of  Lords." 


from  the  uniform  and  unvarying  phraseology  of  the 
whole  Hebrew  Scriptures  ;  at  least  I  have  not  been  able 
to  discover  a  single  passage  in  the  Old  Testament, 
wherein  the  word  debirc;  when  constructed  as  in  the 
expression  under  consideration,  ever  signifies  a  wish 
to  have  the  thing  imported  by  the  substantive  with 
which  it  is  so  constructed.  Thus  the  desire  of  Israel, 
does  not  mean  the  wish  to  have  Israel,  but  that  which 
Israel  wished  to  have,  namely,  Saul  for  a  kmg  ;  the 
desire  of  thy  soul,  is  not  the  wish  to  have  thy  soul,  but 
that  which  thy  soul  wishes  to  have  ;  the  desire  of  the 
heart  is  not  the  wish  to  have  the  heart,  but  that  which 
the  heart  wishes  to  have  ;  the  desire  of  the  wicked  is 
not  the  wish  to  have  the  wicked,  but  that  which  the 
wicked  wish  to  have  ;  the  desire  of  Ezekiel's  eyes  is 
not  surely  the  wish  to  have  his  eyes,  but  that  which 
his  eyes  desired,  namely,  his  wife  ;    and  thus,   not  to 


156         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

That  the  reader  may  see  that  Mohamed, 
although  an  apostate  Christian,  still  main- 
tained the  semblance  of  piety,  extracts  from 
the  Koran  with  notes,  from  the  English  and 


weary  the  reader  with  a  long  detail  of  instances,  the 
desire  of  all  nations,  is  not  the  wish  to  be  master  of  all 
nations,  but  that  which  all  nations  desire,  even  the 
promised  Messiah. 

The  original  prediction  of  the  promised  seed,  was 
delivered  specially  to  Eve.  It  was  her  seed,  that  was 
to  bruise  the  head  of  the  serpent,  not  Adam's.  To  the 
advent  of  this  seed  she  impatiently  looked  forward  ; 
and  such  was  her  eager  desire,  that  upon  the  birth  of 
her  first  child,  for  getting  that  Cain  was  '  Adam's  seed 
no  less  than  her  own,  she  exclaimed,  '  I  have  gotten  a 
man,  even  Jehovah  himself,"  I  hold  in  my  arms  the 
promised  Messiah.  To  the  subsequent  limitation  of 
this  promise  to  Abraham,  Isaac,  and  Jacob,  succes- 
sively, we  must  attribute  the  vehement  desire,  which 
Sarah,  Rebekah,  and  Rachel,  all  felt  to  have  children  ; 
and  the  same  cause  will  satisfactorily  account  for  the 
excessive  horror  which  all  the  Israelitish  women  enter- 
tained of  barrenness.  "  Let  me  go  up  and  down  the 
mountains,  and  bewail  my  virginity,"  was  the  mourn- 
ful language  of  Jepthah's  daughter,  when  doomed  by 
her  father's  vow  to  perpetual  celibacy  :  "the  Lord  hath 
taken  away  my  reproach  among  men,"  was  the  joyful 
exclamation  of  Rachel  and  Elisabeth  .  "hail  thou,  that 
art  highly  favored,  the  Lord  is  with  thee,  blessed  art 
thou  among  women,"  was  the  salutation  of  the  angel 
to  the  mother  of  the  Saviour  of  mankind  :  the  desire 
indeed  of  all  nations,  but  in  a  peculiar  and  mysterious 
sense,  the  desire  of  women,  inasmuch  as  he  was  to  be 
born  by  the  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost  of  a  pure  virgin. 
— Faber  on  the  Prophecies,  pp.  226,  227,  228. 


MORNING    VISION.  157 

French  translators  are  introduced  below.* 
Let  these  extracts  beco:npared  with  Faber's 
notes  on  the  passage  '-desire  of  women.'' 
Nothing  could  be  more  undesirable  to  wom- 
an than  polygamy,  so  freely  allowed  by  Mo- 
hamed.  The  extracts  which  have  a  bearing 
upon  what  is  generally  called  the  "  Mohame- 
dan  paradise,"  and  which  is  so  often  thrown 
in  the  flice  of  those  who  hold  to  a  millen- 
nial state  of  the  Christian  church  on  earth, 
will  be  attended  to  in  a  proper  place. 


*  Al  Koran,  Chapter  1,  Entitled  the  Preface,  or  Intro- 
duction a  ;  revealed  at  Mecca. 

In  the  name  of  the  most  merciful  God.  * 
Praise  be  to  God.  the  Lord  of  all  creatures  ;  the 
most  merciful,  the  king  of  the  day  of  judgment.  Thee 
do  we  worship,  and  of  thee  do  we  beg  assistance.  Di- 
rect us  in  the  right  way,  in  the  Avay  of  those  to  whom 
thou  hast  been  gracious ;  not  of  those  against  whom 
Ihou  art  incensed,  nor  of  those  who  go  astray,  b     p.  187. 

ain  Arabic,  al  Fiitihat.  This  cliaptf  r  is  a  prayer,  and  held  in  srreat 
veneration  hy  the  Mohamcddns,  who  ;five  it  several  other  honorable 
titles  ;  a*  the  cliapler  ol"  prayer,  of  praise,  of  thanksgiving,  of  treas- 
ure, <lk,c. 

*  This  formula  is  prefixed  to  all  the  chapters  (with  the  exception 
of  one.)  It  i-  expressly  reconimended  in  the  Koran.  'J"he  Mohame- 
dans  pronounce  it  whenever  ihey  slaut;hter  an  animal,  and  at  the 
commencenitinl  of  their  reading, and  ofall  important  actions.  It  is  with 
ihera  that  which  the  sign  of  the  cross  is  with  Christians. — Savary. 

b  This  last  sentence  contains  a  petition,  that  God  would  lead  the 
supplicants  into  the  true  religion  by  which  ia  meant  the  MoharaedaOt 
in  the  Koran  often  called  the  right  way. 

14 


158         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

38  But  in  his  estate  shall  he  honor  the  god  of  forces  ; 
and  a  god  whom  his  fathers  knew  not  shall  he  honor 
with  gold,  and  silver,  and  with  precious  stones,  and 
pleasant  things. 

I  have  already  endeavored  to  prove,  that 
the  two  ^'  Httle  horns"  were  designed  by  the 
spirit  of  God,  to  typify  the  Papal  and  Mo- 


Chapter  II,  Entitled  the  Cow  a  j  revealed  partly  at 
Mecca  and  partly  at  Medina. 

In  the  name  of  the  most  merciful  God. 

Al.  M.  There  is  no  doubt  in  this  book;  it  is  a  direc- 
tion to  the  pious,  who  believe  in  the  mysteries  b  of 
faith,  who  observe  the  appointed  times  of  prayer,  and 
distribute  alms  out  of  what  we  have  bestowed  on  them  ; 
and  who  believe  m  that  revelation,  which  hath  been 
sent  down  unto  thee,  and  that  which  hath  been  sent 
down  unto  the  prophets  before  thee,  c     p.  188. 

And  if  ye  fear  that  ye  shall  not  act  with  equity  to- 
wards orphans  of  the  female  sex,  take  in  marriage  of 
such  other  women  as  please  you,  two,  or  three,  or  four, 
and  not  more.  But  if  ye  fear  that  ye  cannot  act  equi- 
tably towards  so  many,  marry  one  only,  or  the  slaves 
which  ye  shall  have  acquired.  This  will  be  easier, 
that  ye  swerve  not  from  righteousness. — p.  263. 

Hast  thou  not  considered  those  to  whom  part  of  the 
scripture  hath  been  given  ?  They  believe  in  false  gods 
and  idols  ;  and  say  of  those  who  believe  not,  These  are 
more  rightly  directed  in  the  way  of  truth,  than  they 
who  believe  on  Mohamed. — p  273. 

a  This  title  was  occasioned  by  the  story  of  the  red  heifer. 

b  The  Arabic  word  is  ghcib,  which  properly  signifies  a  thing  that  is 
absent,  at  a  i?:reat  distance,  or  invisible. 

c  The  Mohatnedans  believe  that  God  eave  written  revelations  not 
only  to  Moses,  Jesus,  and  Mohamed,  but  to  several  other  prophets. 


MORNING    VISION.  159 

hamedan  apostacies,  and  that  the  latter  pow- 
er in  this  chapter,  is  again  predicted,  under 
the  character  of  "  the  king.'*'  The  local  and 
chronological  series  of  events  in  this  chapter 
have  shown  us,  almost  to  a  demonstration, 
thus  far,  that  this  formidable  power  cannot 
be  popery,  nor  the  atheistical  revolution  in 
France  as  supposed  by  Faber  and  Smith. (See 
diagram  on  the  local  boundaries  of  this 
chapter.) 

"  The  god  of  forces,"  in  this  verse,  is 
claimed  by  many  expositors  as  denoting  the 
worship  of  saints  and  angels,  or  tutelary 
gods  in  the  Romish  church,  but  it  is  appli- 
cable enough  to  the  religion  and  worship 
of   Mohamed.      As     some     interpret    the 


We  formerly  gave  unto  the  family  of  Abraham  a 
book  of  revelations  and  wisdom ;  and  we  gave  them  a 
great  kingdom.  There  is  of  them  who  belie veth  on 
him ;  and  there  is  of  them  who  turneth  aside  from 
him  J  but  the  raging  fire  of  hell  is  a  sufficient  punish- 
ment. Verily  those  who  disbelieve  our  signs,  we  will 
surely  cast  to  be  broiled  in  hell  fire  ;  so  often  as  their 
skins  shall  be  well  burned,  we  will  give  them  other 
skins  in  exchange,  that  they  may  taste  the  sharper  tor- 
ment ;  for  God  is  mighty  and  wise.  But  ihose  who 
believe  and  do  that  which  is  right,  we  will  bring  into 
gardens  watered  by  rivers,  therin  shall  they  remain  for- 
ever, and  there  shall  they  enjoy  wives  free  from  all 
impurity  ;  aud  we  will  lead  them  into  perpetual  shades. 
— Sale's  translation  of  the  Koran. 


160  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

word  it  may  refer  to  his  military  foitresses.* 

39  Thus  shall  he  do  in  the  most  strong  holds  with  a 
strange  god,  whom  he  shall  acknowledge  and  increase 
with  glory  ;  and  he  shall  cause  thern  to  rule  over  many, 
and  shall  divide  the  land  for  gain. 

This  still  further  illustrates  the  mannei  in 
which  the  "  strarge  god"  of  Mohamedan- 
istn  "  increased  with  gh>ry"  in  his  conquests, 
possessing  "  the  most  strong  iiolds,*'  "divid- 
ing the  lund  for  gain,"  and  causing  his  vo- 
taries to  "  rule  over  many." 

"  The  immediate  succe.^sors  ofMoharred," 
says  a  popular  writer,  "  conquered  all  of 
known  Africa ;  as  Moors  they  descended 
upon  Spain  and  established  the  magnificent 
court  of  Cordova.  The  victorious  standard 
of  the  crescent  was  raised  on  the  cold  moun- 
tains of  Tartary,  and   the   burning  sands  of 


*  "  For  together  with  God,  in  his  seat  shall  he  honor 
Mahuzzim  ;  even  together  with  that  God  whom  his  an- 
cestors knew  not,  shall  he  honor  (them)  wiih  gold,  and 
with  silver,  and  with  precious  stones,  and  with  pleasant 
things."  (Mede.  Marg.  and  Marg.  Ref.)  Mahuzzim  is 
the  plural  of  the  word  translated  a  fortress,  a  strong 
tower,  or  a  rock,  in  very  many  places  of  the  scripiure, 
and  in  this  very  chapter,  7,  lU,  19.  Heb.  True  Chris- 
tians, have,  with  David,  but  one  Mahoz,  the  "Mahoz 
of  salvation," — Notes  to  Scott's  Bible,  p.  695. 


MORNING    VISION.  161 

Ethiopia."  On  Mount  Lebanon,  and  by  the 
waters  of  Babylon;  under  the  pyramids  of 
Egypt,  and  to  Mozambique  and  Madagascar 
the  standard-sheet  of  Mohamed  was  unfurl- 
ed. 

"  Under  the  auspices  of  the  Abassides,  and 
in  Bagdad  on  the  Tigris,  they  were  destined 
to  sustain  the  cause  of  civilization.  While 
Europe  had  not  emerged  from  the  shades  of 
barbarism,  the  court  of  the  Arabian  princes 
was  glowing  with  the  glory  of  art  and  refine- 
ment, eloquence,  poetry  and  science. 

"  Mohamed  had  taught  a  weak  and  effemi- 
nate people  the  great  art  of  thinking  and 
acting.  The  effect  was  like  fire  to  their  in- 
tellects. They  studied  medicine :  they  com- 
municated, if  they  did  not  originate,  algebra ; 
they  cultivated  a  taste  for  song  and  romance. 
Much  of  this  stream  of  hterary  taste  and  cul- 
tivated refinement  flowed  out  upon  Europe, 
and  stimulated,  if  it  did  not  create,  the  re- 
vival of  learning. 

^^  Such,  in  a  short  space  of  time,  was  the 
progress  and  the  vast  results  of  Mohamedan- 
ism.  Of  this  empire,  the  Turkish  dominion 
was  but  a  part.  The  Turks  were  originally 
a  Tarter  tribe,  which  first  appeared  in  history 
as  independent,  under  their  chief  Othman, 
who  assumed  th«  title  of  Sultan.  They  com- 
14* 


162  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECT. 

menced  their  career  from  the  Euphrates  tow- 
ard the  Danube.  They  took  possession  of 
Syria,  Egypt,  Servia,  Greece,  Cyprus, 
Rhodes,  and  finally,  in  1453,  Mohamed  the 
third,  took  Constantinople,  and  established 
the  Sultinate  on  the  throne  of  Justinian. 
Henceforward  the  Turks  "encamped  in  Eu- 
rope." 

Mohamedanism  was  more  emphatically 
propagated  by  the  sword,  than  Romanism. 
The  Saracens,  and  Turks  made  rapid  pro- 
gress, and  many  countiies  were  "divided'' 
for  "  gain,"  Syria,  Palestine,  Egypt,  Ethiopia 
and  many  other  partsof  Africa  and  Asia  and 
no  small  part  of  Europe.  All  the  countries 
of  the  Greek  church,  except  Russia,  were 
overrun  by  tnis  imposture,  when  Constan- 
tinople became  the  capitol  of  tiie  Ottoman 
empire. 

"  Divide  the  land  for  gain."  Mr  Mede 
and  bishop  Newton  seem  to  have  forgotten 
a  very  material  word  in  this  part  of  the 
prophecy.  The  land  was  not  only  to  be  di- 
vided, but  it  was  to  be  divided  for  a  price. 
Our  translation  reads  for  gain,  but  in  the 
margin  it  retains  the  proper  import  of  the 
original,  for  a  price.  Now,  in  whatever 
manner  the  Pope  might  contrive  to  divide 
the  land  among  his  adherents,  he  certainly 


MORNING    VISION.  163 

did  not  divide  it  among  them /or  a  price,  or 
especially  as  a  conquering  warrior.  He  in- 
duced tlie  laity  to  make  large  grants  of  their 
lands  to  the  church  as  a  sort  of  charity. 
But  Mohamed,  and  his  successor  in  power, 
took  by  force  the  "  most  strong  holds,"  and 
divided  the  land  among  those  generals  who 
would  pay  most. 

In  preceding  notes  we  have  allowed  Fa- 
ber  and  Smith  to  correct  Newton,  and  other 
commentators,  who  apply  different  portions 
of  this  chapter  previous  to  the  36th  verse,  to 
the  western  empire  and  the  Pope.  Now 
vi^ith  equal  propriety  and  force,  will  Scott 
and  others  correct  Faber  and  Smith  for 
claiming  the  36th  to  the  40lh  verses  as  ap- 
plicable to  the  French  Revolution.* 


*  This  interpretation,  however,  may  be  objected  to, 
as  making  the  grand  subject  of  this  last  vision  of  Dan- 
iel, in  great  measure  to  coincide  with  those  before 
stated  in  the  seventh  and  eighth  chapters  ;  especially 
in  respect  of  the  fourth  beast,  and  the  little  horn  of  the 
fourth  beast.  But  if  the  angel  interpreted  to  the  proph- 
et, in  plain  language,  what  had  before  been  shewn  him 
under  emblems,  and  more  obscurely,  as  it  is  manifest 
he  did  in  the  former  part  of  the  chapter,  why  may  he 
not  be  supposed  to  proceed  in  the  same  way  in  the  latter 
part?  This  does  indeed,  as  here  expounded,  enter  into 
particulars,  and  mention  circumstances,  not  before  ad- 


164  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF     PROPHECY. 

40  And  at  the  time  of  the  end  shall  the  king  of  the 
south  push  at  him;  and  the  king  of  the  north  shall 
come  against  him  like  a  Avhirlwind,  with  chariots,  and 
with  horsemen,  and  with  many  ships  ;  and  he  shall  en- 
ter into  the  countries,  and  shall  overflow  and  pass  over. 

"  At  the  time  of  the  end."  Here  then,  we 
must  all  meet  together  again.  For  to  the 
Ottoman  power,  "  the  time  of  the  end"  has 
arrived.  The  sixth  vial  is  nearly  emptied  of 
its  contents,  the  bitter  dregs  only  remain. 
The  remaining  five  verses  of  this  chapter 
therefore,  refer  to  the  'present  and  future, 
not  the  past. 

As  the  2300  years  in  this  vision  are  so 
nearly  expired,  and  the  present  time  ap- 
proaches so  near  to  the  time  of  the  end  of 
the  Ottoman  power,  (verse  40,)  it  is  proper 
to  speak  with  caution,  for  time  will  disclose 
the   full   meaning    of  passages   relating  to 


duced,  especially  as  including  the  corruptions  of  the 
eastern  church  also,  but  the  grand  outhne  is  the  same. 
What  may  hereafter  unexpectedly  follow  from  the  par- 
oxysm of  continental  Atheism,  the  French  Revolution, 
the  usurpation  of  Napoleon  Bonaparte,  and  his  dynasty, 
we  cannot  say,  but  present  appearances  in  no  degree 
favor  the  opinion,  that  these  things  separately  or  con- 
jointly are  here  predicted ;  and  as  to  the  rest,  our  pos- 
terity will  be  most  competent  to  judge  ;  and  probably 
will  discover,  that  we  have  all  been  mistaken  more  or 
less. — Scott's  Ngces  on  Dan.  xi,  39. 


MORNING    VISION.  165 

events  not  yet  transpired.  Yet  the  aspect  of 
the  horizon  betokens  changes  not  far  dis- 
tant. Durino"  the  last  summer,  "  the  king 
of  the  south,"  the  Pacha  of  Egypt,  has 
*'  pushed  at  him,"  (the  Sultan  of  Turkey,) 
very  effectually  too,  dej-troying  his  entire 
army  near  the  Euphrates,  and  is  now  actual- 
ly "  pushing"  at  the  capitol,  and  the  king  of 
the  north,  (Russia,)  may  soon  come  "  like  a 
whirlwind,"  though  he  now,  from  policy, 
feigns  friendship.  For  surely,  Russia  has 
always  been  a  natural  enemy  of  the  Ottoman 
power  because  it  has  invaded  and  oppressed 
a  great  part  of  the  Greek  church,  has  long 
held  as  the  seat  of  empire,  the  city  in  which 
the  patriarchs  of  the  eastern  church  have 
always  resided. 

Among  the  various  indications  of  change, 
we  consider  the  recent  "  Hatti  Scheriff,^^ 
or  proclamation  ol  die  young  Sultan  of  Tur- 
key the  most  extraordinary,  not  only  as 
completely  changing  the  civil  policy  and 
immemorial  usages  of  that  empire,  but  em- 
bracing, at  once,  all  the  cardinal  doctrines  of 
Christian  governments,  and  changing  by  a 
single  decree,  an  absolute  monarchy  to  a 
republic  of  laws  and  equal  rights.  The  fol- 
lowing is  part  of  what  may  be  called  the 
Turkish  Declaration  of  Independence : 


166  ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

*'  It  is  most  important  to  fix  the  rate  of 
taxes.  Fortunately  for  the  people,  sometime 
back  they  have  been  delivered  from  the  vex- 
atious system  of  monopolies — those  bad 
sources  of  revenue.  As  bad  a  source  of  rev- 
enue still  subsists,  in  the  venal  concession 
of  offices.  Each  region  is  delivered  up  to 
the  arbitrary  will  of  one  man  ;  that  is,  to  the 
most  violent  and  greedy  passions. — It  is 
henceforth  requisite  that  each  Ottoman  sub- 
ject should  pay  a  certain  sum  of  taxes  pro- 
portioned to  his  fortune  and  faculties.  It  is 
also  requisite  that  special  laws  should  fix 
and  limit  the  expenses  of  the  military  and 
naval  force. 

"  There  ought  to  be  laws  to  fix  the  contin- 
gent of  each  locality,  and  limit  to  four  or 
five  years  the  term  of  a  military  service.  It 
is  dealing  a  mortal  blow  to  agriculture,  as 
well  as  an  injustice  in  itself,  to  take  more 
hands  from  districts  than  they  can  fairly 
spare;  and  it  is  to  reduce  soldiers  to  despair, 
and  to  depopulate  the  country,  to  retain 
them  all  their  life  in  service. 

''Without  such  laws  as  these,  of  which 
the  necessity  is  felt,  there  can  be  neither 
empire,  nor  force,  nor  riches,  nor  happiness, 
nor  tranquility.  All  these  blessings  may  be 
expected  from  new  laws.  Henceforth,  more- 


MORNING    VISION.  167 

over,  every  accused  person  shall  be  publicly 
tried,  according  to  the  Divine  law,  after  act 
and  examination  ;  and  no  power  shall,  se- 
cretly or  otherwise,  cause  any  one  to  per- 
ish by  poison,  or  by  any  other  means,  until 
a  regular  judgment  has  been  passed.  Na 
one  shall  hurt  another's  honor,  and  each 
shall  possess  his  property  with  liberty,  and 
in  fear  of  no  one.  The  innocent  heirs  of  a 
condemned  person  shall  inherit  his  property, 
nor  shall  the  goods  of  the  criminal  be  con- 
fiscated. 

"  These  imperial  concessions  extend  to  all 
our  subjects,  of  every  religion,  without  ex- 
ception. Perfect  security  is  accorded  to  all 
the  inhabitants  of  the  empire  in  life,  honor, 
and  fortune,  as  wills  the  text  of  our  laws. 

''  All  venality  and  traffic  of  offices  shall  be 
abolished  as  the  great  cause  of  the  decad- 
ence of  the  empire. 

"  These  dispositions,  being  a  revocation 
of  old  usages,  shall  be  published  at  Constan- 
tinople and  throughout  our  empire,  and  com- 
municated officially  to  the  ambassadors  res- 
ident there." 

Moreover  the  Autocrat  of  Russia  has  al- 
ready humbled  the  pride  of  the  Turk,  other- 
wise the  Greek  Republic  could  never  have 
sustained  their  cause  and  establish  their  in- 


168  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

dependence.  "Many  ships."  The  English 
and  French  fleets  are  aheady  in  the  Mediter- 
ranean watcliing  every  movement,  and  if 
they  adopt  for  a  time,  a  moderate  policy 
towards  the  waning  crescent,  they  will  pur- 
sue it  no  longer  than  to  adjust  the  balance 
of  power,  and  secure  their  own  national  in- 
terests. 

The  young  Sultan  during  the  last  year  a 
short  time  subsequent  to  the  death  of  the 
old  Sultan  his  father,  offered  his  rival  foe,  the 
Pacha  of  Egypt,  the  entire  management  of 
the  empire.  To  this  the  Russian  emperor  and 
his  allies  would  not  consent.  It  is  doubt- 
ful too  whether  Russia  will  favor  the  reform 
spirit  which  the  young  Sultan  has  imbibed. 

M.  Mordicai  Noah,  a  Jew,  the  editor  of 
the  New  Yoik  Star,  remarking  upon  this 
subject,  says — 

*'  The  effect  of  these  new  doctrines  will  be 
felt  throughout  every  part  of  Turkey,  in 
Asia  and  Europe,  and  will  make  a  deep  im- 
pression upon  the  subjects  of  Mehemet  Ali ; 
also  throughout  Persia,  and  in  every  country 
where  Islamism  prevails.  "Life,  liberty, 
and  the  pursuit  of  happiness,"  according  to 
the  Hatti  Scheriff',  are  conferred  on  "  every 
religion  without  exception,"  and  this  at  once 
raises  to  the  degree  of  citizen  and  freemen, 


MORNING    VISION.  169 

four  millions  of  Jews,  many  of  whom  inhabit, 
as  captives,  the  land  of  their  heritage. 

"Dispensmg  to  each  equal  liberty  and 
equal  law,  if  honestly  carried  out,  is  the 
most  important  step  in  the  restoration  of  the 
Jews,  which  has  been  taken  since  their  dis- 
persion, and  may  be  deemed  a  wonderful 
and   significant  sign  in  the  east." 

It  is  becoming  more  and  more  evident  that 
the  downfal  of  the  Ottoman  power  and  the 
overthrow  of  Mohamedanism,  will  prove  an 
occasion  of  fierce  conflicts  between  the  jeal- 
ous powers  of  Europe  and  Asia.  However 
fortunate  the  Jews  may  consider  these  ch^mg- 
es  as  favoring  their  long  looked  for  restora- 
tion, they  will,  no  doubt,  be  much  involved 
in  these  desolating  wars. 

"  At  the  time  of  the  end"  as  we  are  as- 
sured by  Joel,  (chapter  3,)  loar  shall  be 
sanctified,  that  is,  war  shall  be  waged  under 
a  religious  pretence.  The  spirit  of  war 
when  combined  with  religious  enthusiasm 
and  superstition  is  dreadful  beyond  concep- 
tion. The  impious  wretches,  who  thus  dare 
to  profane  the  holy  name  of  religion  shall 
perish  "  between  the  seas."  The  crusades 
or  "  holy  wars"  were  typical  of  this  last 
struggle  of  Mohamedanism  with  other  false 
schemes  of  religion,  and  took  place  in  Pales- 
15 


170  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

tine,  between  the  Dead  sea  and  the  Mediter- 
ranean. Daniel,  Joel,  and  Zacheriah,  all 
concur  in  affirming  that  this  will  be  a  time 
of  unexampled  trouble  to  the  Jews  about 
the  time  of  their  restoration.  Such,  indeed, 
is  the  declaration  of  all  the  ancient  prophets^ 
and  it  is  perfectly  analagous  to  the  events 
attendant  on  their  first  entrance  into  Ca- 
naan. And,  at  their  partial  restoration  from 
Babylon,  their  '^  city  was  built  in  troublous 
times."  Almost  every  intimation,  of  the  res- 
toration of  the  Jews,  in  the  Bible,  alludes  also 
to  the  terrible  calamities  which  will  befal  the 
wicked  in  Palestine.  John,  in  the  Revela- 
tion, lays  the  scene  of  the  last  great  battle 
in  the  eastern  empire,  at  Megiddo,  or  Ar- 
mageddon, which  is  a  town  in  Palestine, 
situated,  agreeable  to  Daniel's  prediction, 
"  between  the  seas."  The  sixth  vial,  as  we 
shall  have  occasion  to  notice  in  the  sequel, 
is  rapidly  accomplishing  its  appropriate  work 
in  that  part  of  the  world. 

The  pronoun  ''  him"  and  "  he"  so  often 
used  in  this  chapter,  and  especially  in  these 
few  remaining  verses,  refers  us  to  the  soul  or 
presiding  genus  of  the  eastern  Anti-Christ. 
*•'  He  shall  enter  into  the  countries,  and  shall 
overflow  and  pass  over."  (verse  40.) 
Whether  ''he"   is   applied  to   the    Sultan,, 


MORNING    VISION.  171 

rallying  his  energies  for  his  death  strug- 
gle, the  Autocrat  of' the  north,'Mhe  jeal- 
ous powers  of  Europe,  or  all  these  connbined, 
time  will  soon  disclose.*  ''Three  unclean 
spirits  like  frogs,"  coming  "  out  of  the  mouth 
of  the  dragon,"  [Pagan  Rome,]  out  of  the 
mouth  of  the  beast,"  [nominal  Christian 
Rome,]  "  and  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  false 
prophet,"  [Hierarchal  Rome,]  are  ere  long 
to  be  combined  in  the  great  death  struggle 
of  the  fourth  beast  or  w  estern  empire.  Per- 
haps they  will  begin  their  work  by  destroy- 
ing the  eastern  or  third  beast  with  its  little 
horn  of  Mohamedanism.  Faberand  Smith, 
as  is  well  known,  expect  a  revival  of  the 
European  infidel  power,  personified  by  some 


*  Turkey  has  lost  all  her  possessions  in  Greece — Ah 
Pacha  became  a  rebel  years  ago,  and  despoiled  the  Sul- 
tan of  Egypt  and  Syria — the  Regencies  in  the  Barbary 
States  forgot  their  allegiance,  and  the  Sultan,  beset  by 
Russia  and  abandoned  by  Pachas  and  Governors,  was 
compelled  to  fall  back  within  the  Bosphorus  and  con- 
centrate his  power  and  resources.  The  present  Sul- 
tan  is  too  young  to  take  the  management  of  public 
affairs — The  last  Hatti  Scheriff,  to  which  we  have 
referred,  comes  from  the  Divan,  and  most  of  the  prom- 
inent members  of  that  cabinet  have  been  Embassadors, 
and  attentive,  skilful,  discerning  Embassadors  at  the 
general  European  Courts,  and  have  all  seen  the  neces- 
sity of  a  reform,  and  it  has  been  at  length  made,  which 


J  72  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

great,  leader,  to  do  this  work,  and  to  be  here 
denoted  "by  the  pronoun  •'  he''  and  "him." 
But  as  we  now  have  to  do  with  matters  of 
fact,  theories  are  of  less  consequence.  The 
downfal  of  the  eastern  Anti-Christ  will  set- 
tle all  the  difference  among  expositors,  and 
show  more  clearly,  the  approaching  fate  ot 
the  fourth  and  last  beast. 

41  He  shall  enter  also  into  the  glorious  land,  and 
many  countries  shall  be  overthrown  5  but  these  shall 
escape  out  of  his  hand,  even  Edom,  andMoab,  and  the 
chief  of  the  children  of  Ammon. 

The  followers  offthe  Arabian  impostor 
have  held  dominion  over  "  the  glorious  land" 
of  Judea,  amid  the  many  centuries   which 


places  Turkey  side  by  side  with  the  civilized  nations 
of  the  world.  A  change  in  the  religion  of  a  people  so 
devoted,  and  so  numerous,  cannot  be  expected,  but  the 
new  civil  regulations  will  of  necessity  produce  great 
reforms  in  the  practical  operations  and  influence  of 
their  religion,  and  we  may  now  see  the  Mosque  the 
Chapel  and  the  Synagogue,  alike  tolerated  and  tran- 
quilly sustained  under  the  laws  in  the  city  of  Constan- 
tine,  and  wherever  the  cresent  floats.  These  are 
changes  which  siljently,  but  securely  bring  about  great 
events — events  which  have  been  predicted  and  await 
their  alloted  time.  We  live  in  a  wonderful  age,  and 
wonderful  revolutions  are  at  work. — New  York  Eve. 
Star  of  Jan.  11,  1840. 


MORNING    VISION.  173 

they  have  overrun,  the  Greek  empire.  From 
prophecy,  it  is  evident  that  this  "  land"  is  to 
be  the  theatre  of  the  last  conflict,  before  the 
Jews  shall  be  re-instated  in  the  land  of  their 
fathers,  in  full  and  permanent  peace. 

"  Edom,"  "  Moab,"  and  ''  Ammon"  now 
supposed  to  be  incorporated  with  the  Ish- 
maelites  and  Midianites,  is  a  most  remarkable 
instance  of  definite  prophecy  exactly  fulfil- 
ed.  They  have  always  remained  independ- 
ent. Even  the  Mussleman's  power  has  never 
been  able  to  subjugate  them.  The  Ottoman 
Sultan  even  now  pays  the  Arabs  an  annual 
pension  of  .forty  thousand  crowns,  for  the 
safe  passage  of  the  pilgrims  and  caravans  to 
Mecca.     Yet  they  are  often  plundered. 

"  Ammon"  was  to  be  delivered  to  be  a 
spoil  to  the  heathen.* 


*  Ammon  was  to  be  delivered  to  be  a  spoil  to  the 
heathen — to  be  destroyed,  and  to  be  a  perpetual  desola- 
tion. "All  this  country,  formerly  so  populous  and  flour- 
ishing, is  now  changed  into  a  vast  desert."  Ruins  are 
seen  in  every  direction.  The  country  is  divided  be- 
tween the  Turks  and  the  Arabs,' but  chiefly  possessed 
by  the  latter.  The  extortions  of  the  one  and  the  depre- 
dations of  the  other  keep  it  in  perpetual  desola- 
lion,  and  make  it  a  spoil  to  the  heathen.  "  The  far 
greater  part  of  the  country  is  uninhabited,  being  aban- 
doned to  the  wandering  Arabs,  and  the  towns  and  vil- 
lages are  in  a  state  of  total  ruin."  (Burckhardt's  Trav- 
els in  Syria.) 

15* 


174  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

In  accordance  with  these  old  standing  and 
characteristic  immunities,  the  south  eastern 
Arabs,  in  Arabia  Fehx,  will  doubtless  escape 
the  general  conflict,  as  being  far  out  of  the 
line  of  the  marches  of  those  conflicting  pow- 
ers. 


42  He  shall  stretch  forth  his  hand  also  upon  the 
countries  ;  and  the  land  of  Egypt  shall  not  escape. 

43  But  he  shall  have  power  over  the  treasures  of 
gold  and  silver,  and  over  all  the  precious  things  of 
Egypt  ;  and  the  Libyans  and  the  Ethiopians  shall  be 
at  his  steps. 


"  The  land  of  Egypt  shall  not  escape"  the 
"  overthrow"  of  this  desolating  conflict. 
The  very  success  which  now  attends  the 
arms  of  the  Egyptian  Pacha  and  his  son  in 


The  land  of  Moab  lay  to  the  east  and  south  east  of 
Judea,  and  bordered  on  the  east,  north  east,  and  partly 
on  the  south  of  the  Dead  Sea.  Its  early  history  is 
nearly  analagous  to  that  of  Ammon ;  and  the  soil, 
though  perhaps  more  diversified,  is  in  many  places, 
where  the  desert  and  plains  of  salt  have  not  encroached 
on  its  borders,  of  equal  fertility. 

Idumea,  or  Edom,  was  situated  to  the  south  of  Ju- 
dea and  of  Moab  ;  it  bordered  on  the  east  with  Arabia 
Petraea,  under  which  name  it  was  included  in  the  latter 
part  of  its  history,  and  it  extended  southward  to  the 
eastern  gulf  of  the  Red  Sea.-r-KEiTH  on  the  Evidences 
OF  Prophecy. 


MORNING    VISION.  175 

Syria  and  Asia  Minor,  is  doubtless  prepar- 
ing the  way  for  a  general  expedition  of  the 
combined  powers  into  their  country  in  re- 
turn. Mr  Smith,  in  his  Dissertation,  thinks 
there  will  be  two  expeditions  of  the  infidel 
power  into  the  east,  with  some  distances  of 
time  between  them.  Facts  begin  to  show 
that  what  he  calls  "  infidel  power'  as  refer- 
red to  the  French  revolution  will  be  some- 
thing else.  But  whatever  combined  power 
it  may  be,  "  he"  will  destroy  the  eastern 
Anti-Christ.  It  is  very  probable  there  will 
be  more  than  one  expedition  before  the  con- 
quest is  complete.*  If  "  the  king  of  the 
north"  comes  down  upon  Turkey  in  Eu- 
rope, '^  Hke  a  whirlwind,"  and  having  "  over- 
flowed and  passed  over"  the  ancient  Helles- 


*  That  this  passage  in  Dan.  xi,  from  the  40th  verse 
to  the  end,  predicts  two  expeditions  of  the  infidel  power 
into  Palestine,  and  at  some  distance  of  time  from  eacti 
other,  I  trust  will  appear  very  evident  from  collateral 
prophecies,  which  will  come  into  viev/  in  (he  course  of 
this  Dissertation.  This  concise  prophecy  in  Daniel 
makes  no  mention  of  this  Power's  crossing  the  Mediter- 
ranean, to  return  home  from  his  first  expedition  ;  or  of 
any  events,  after  he  subdues  Egypt,  and  has  the  Eihe- 
opians  and  Libians  at  his  steps  :  till  the  tidings  out  of 
the  east  and  oat  of  the  north  trouble  him,  and  call  him 
again  to  Palestine.  But  we  cannot  infer  from  this,  that 
he  returns  to  Palestine  from  Egypt ;  or  that  the  event 


176  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

pont  into  Asia  Minor,  he  enters  Palestine^ 
from  the  "  north,"  laying  all  the  Tuikish 
provinces  at  his  feet,  he  beats  his  way  round 
into  Egypt,-  and  finds  access  to  whatever 
*^  treasures"  and  "  precious  things"  a  subdu- 
ed people  may  have  in  their  possession, — 
then  ^'the  Libyans  and  Ethiopians,"  (the 
Arabian  and  the  Barbary  states  subject 
to  the  Turks,)  "  shall  be  at  his  steps."  This 
would  no  doubt  finish  the  most  extensive 
expedition,  and  probably  empty  the  contents 
of  the  sixth  vial  in  drying  up  the  Euphrat- 
ean  river  of  the  Ottoman  power,  and  prepare 
the  way  of  the  return  of  the  Jews. 

Dr  Scott  says,  the  things  spoken  of  here, 
(verses  42  and  43,)  are  long  subsequent  to 
the  expression..  "  time  of  the  end,"  fixes  the 


takes  place  immediately,  or  before  he  returns  home 
from  his  first  expedition.  The  contrary  of  this  will 
appear  to  be  the  fact.  This  first  expedition  prepares 
the  way  for  the  restoration  of  Israel,  by  the  subversion 
of  the  Ottoman  empire  ;  as  I  trust  will  appear.  And 
the  return  of  God's  ancient  people,  their  conversion  to 
Christianity,  and  the  preparmg  of  the  way  for  the  last 
coalition  against  them,  must  occupy  some  time  ;  as 
long  a  time,  I  apprehend,  as  the  space  between  the 
sixth  and  seventh  vials.  For  I  believe  it  will  appear, 
that  the  first  expedition  of  this  infidel  Power  will  fulfil 
the  sixth  vial ;  and  that  the  second  will  open  the  way 
for  the  fulfilment  of  the  seventh. — Smith  on  Dan.  xi. 


MORNING    VISION.  177 

period  pointed  out  by  this  prophecy  to  later 
ages  than  those  of  the  Saracens  or  even  the 
Turks,  the  things  spoken  of  (verses  40,  41,) 
being  still  future  and  therefore  he  will  not 
even  conjecture  who  is  meant  by  "the  king  of 
the  north  or  the  south."  Some  of  these  things, 
future  in  the  day  of  Dr.  Scott,  are  now  past, 
or  taking  place.  The  Turkish  princes  have 
heretofore  "stretched  forth  their  hands" 
(verses  42  and  43,)  to  grasp  these  countries, 
have  seized  their  treasures  and  used  them 
to  strengthen  their  own  power.  The  plun- 
der now  remains  for  others  besides  the  Turk. 


44  But  tidings  out  of  the  east  and  out  of  the  north 
shall  trouble  himj  therefore  he  shall  go  forth  with 
great  fury  to  destroy,  and  utterly  to  make  away  many. 

45  And  he  shall  plant  the  tabernacles  of  his  palace 
between  the  seas  in  the  glorious  holy  mountain  ;  yet  he 
shall  come  to  his  end,  and  none  shall  help  him. 


These  verses  relate,  no  doiiht,  to  events 
still  future,  for  the  most  part,  though  doubt- 
less soon  to  take  place.  Persia  lies  eastward 
and  Russia  northward  of  the  claimed  domin- 
ion of  the  Sultan,  lie  has  v/ithin  the  last 
twenty  years  had  serious  difficulties  with 
both.  These  may  be  viewed  as  an  earnest 
of  the  entire  fulfilment  of  the  prediction  of 
his  overthrow.  Indeed  it  is  but  a  few  months 


178  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

since  his  eastern  army  was  completely  over- 
thrown near  the  Euphrates,  wiiich  must  have 
been  "  tidings  out  of  the  east"  to  "  trouble 
him." 

But  with  far  more  propriety  this  language 
will  apply  to  the  power  which  is  to  over- 
throw the  Turks,  finally.  Whatever  power 
this  is,  their  interest  will  be  extremely  affect- 
ed by  the  return  of  God's  ancient  people. 
These  facts  will  prove  "  tidings  out  of  the 
east  and  out  of  the  north,"  which  will 
"  trouble"  all  Infidel  and  Anti-Christian 
powers.*  To  have  such  an  influence  set  up 


*  These  tidings  may  be  said  to  be  out  of  the  east 
and  out  of  the  north,  as  they  will  relate  to  the  collec- 
tion of  the  Jews  and  Israel  from  eastern  and  northern 
regions,  to  the  Holy  land.  Repeatedly  the  restoration 
of  the  Jews  is  predicted  as  being  from  the  land  of  the 
north.  See  Jer.  xvi,  14,  15,  and  xxiii,  7,  8.  The  infidel 
Power  will  therefore  be  excited  to  collect  "the  kings  of 
the  earth,  and  of  the  world,"  for  a  new  expedition  into 
Palestine  :  and  to  unite  in  a  vast  confederacy  for  the 
utter  extirpation  of  the  new  church  of  God  in  Jerusa- 
lem. The  seventh  vial  finds  him  there,  in  Armaged- 
don, at  the  head  of  his  vast  coalition  of  the  kings  of 
the  earth,  and  of  the  false  prophet ;  and  it  plunges  hira 
in  ruin ;  (Rev.  xvi,  from  the  'l3lh' verse  to  the  end; 
and  xix,  19,  20,  21.)  Here,  under  the  most  signal  judg- 
ment of  the  great  Head  of  the  church,  he  comes  to  his 
end,  and  none  shall  help  him. — Smith  on  Dan.  xi. 


MORNING    VISION.  179 

in  favor  of  the  Christian  religion  in  these 
times  of  skepticism  and  infidehty,  would  pro- 
duce a  tremendous  excitement  throughout 
the  world. 

How  long  the  present  Sultan  will  be  able 
to  continue  the  humiliating  peace  now  ex- 
isting between  him  and  "the  king  of  the 
north,"  time  will  show.  "  Tidings"  from  that 
quarter,  also,  may  soon  *'  trouble  him."  He 
will  then  go  forth  to  his  death  struggle,  with 
great  fury  to  destroy  and  "  make  away 
many."  Palestine,  the  scene  of  unnumber- 
ed conflicts  is  to  become  the  field  of  desola- 
tion and  blood  once  more  at  least,  before 
the  "sanctuary"  is  "  cleansed."  It  is  a  con- 
solation to  be  assured  that  "where  sin  has 
abounded  grace  shall  much  more  abound." 
From  the  early  settlement  of  Canaan, 
and  through  all  the  wars  of  the  Jews,  Assyr- 
ians, Babylonians,  Persians,  Greeks,  Egyp- 
tians, Syrians,  Romans,  Saracens,  Turks, 
Crusaders,  Musslemen  and  robbers,  and  in 
the  present  war  between  the  Pacha  of  Egypt 
and  the  Sultan,  Palestine,  the  "glorious 
holy  mountain"  has  been  made  the  great 
arena  of  battle  and  slaughter.  Surely 
"  the  sanctuary"  needs  to  be  "  cleansed"  af- 
ter being  so  long  "trodden  under  foot  of  the 
Gentiles." 


180  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY, 

We  have  now  gone  through  the  morning 
vision,  and  in  a  few  years  more,  may  witness 
its  entire  fulfihnent.*  (See  diagram  in  the 
quarto  appendix.)  Thus  much  for  Daniel's 
prophecy  respecting  the  Ottoman  power. 
The  9th  chapter  of  Revelations  is  devoted 
to  a  more  particular  prediction,  of  the  rise, 
progress  and  fall  of  this  eastern  Anti-Christ, 
and  will  require  a  corresponding  particular 
notice  in  its  appropriate  place. 

Mr  Miller's  chronological  calculations  re- 
specting the  Ottoman  power,  and  events  in- 
cidental to  the  downfal  of  that  empire,  were 


*  The  following  extracts  from  Miller's  Lectures  on 
the  Second  Coming  of  Christ,  are,  from  his  stereotype 
edition,  just  published. 

"Whoever  lives  until  the  year  1839  will  see  the  final 
dissolution  of  the  Turkish  empire,  for  then  the  sixth 
trumpet  will  have  finished  its  sounding,  which,  if  I  am 
correct,  will  be  the  final  overthrow  of  the  Ottoman 
power.  And  then  will  the  seventh  trump  and  last  woe 
begm,  under  which  the  kingdoms  of  the  earth  and  the 
anti-Christian  beast  will  be  destroyed,  and  the  powers 
of  darkness  chained,  the  world  cleansed,  and  the 
church  purified. — p. 134. 

"  When  the  four  angels,,  who  are  now  holding  the  four 
winds,  that  it  blow  not  on  the  sea  nor  on  the  land,  shall 
cease  their  holding  ;  when  the  angel,  standing  on  the 
sea  and  land,  shall  lift  his  hand  to  heaven  and  swear 
by  him  that  liveth  forever  and  ever,  that  time  shall  be 
no  longer,  that  is,  God  would  wait  no  longer  for  repent- 


MORNING    VISION.  181 

published  ten  years  ago.  The  events  which, 
have  transpired  in  Europe  and  Asia  the  past 
year,  have  thus  far  nearly  fulfilled  his  antici- 
pations, which  go  to  confirm  him  in  other 
parts  of  his  theory.  But  these  things  are  far 
from  proving  him  correct  on  any  other  point. 
I  am  satisfied  he  mistakes  in  nearly  every 
other  calculation,  and  shall  hazard  nothing 
in  attempting  to  prove  it.  It  is  most  readily 
seen  that  his  correct  calculations  as  to  the 
time  of  predicted  changes  in  Turkey,  will  con- 
firm multitudes  in  all  the  errors  of  Mr  Miller, 
who  are  not  discriminating  in  their  views,  or 
sufficiently  read  on  the  prophecies,  unless 
timely  instruction  is  given.     With  this  class 


ance,  no  longer  to  be  gracious  ;  but  his  spirit  would 
take  its  flight  from  the  world,  and  the  grace  of  God 
would  cease  to  restrain  men.  He  that  is  filthy  let  him 
be  filthy  still.  Mankind  will,  for  a  short  season,  give 
loose  to  all  ihe  corrupt  passions  of  the  human  heart. 
No  laws,  human  or  divine,  will  be  regarded  ;  all  au- 
thority will  be  trampled  under  foot ;  anarchy  will  be 
the  order  of  governments,  and  confusion  fill  the  world 
with  horror  and  despair.  Christians  will  be  persecuted 
unto  death,  and  dens  and  caves  of  the  earth  will  be 
their  retreat.  All  things  which  are  not  eternal  will  be 
shaken  to  pieces,  that  that  which  cannot  be  shaken 
may  remain.  And  this,  if  I  am  right  in  my  calcula- 
tions, will  begin  on  or  before  A.  D.  1839. — p.  109 

Then  if  the  two  witnesses  are  the  Old  and  New  Tes- 
tament, we  are  certain  the  third  woe  is  coming  quickly, 
16 


182  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

of  persons,  the  views  which  are  given  in  Mr 
Miller's  lectures  are  calculated,  and  probably 
will,  produce  the  most  tremendous  excite- 
ment this  country  ever  witnessed. 

It  is  a  most  singular  feature  in  Mr  Miller's 
theory,  that  with  the  downfal  of  Mohame- 
danism,  the  day  of  grace  closes,  (which  he 
says  will  take  place  the  llth  of  next  Au- 
gust,) the  resurrection  of  the  righteous  to 
take  place,  and  the  destruction  of  the  world 
with  the  wicked  follow,  in  1843.  He  denies 
the  idea  of  a  general  restoration  of  the  Jews, 
and  siezes  upon  the  earliest  promised  date 
of  their  return  as  the  end  of  all  things.  The 
next  section  will  show  the  fallacy  of  such 
calculations. 


and  the  seventh  trump  must  shortly  begin  to  sound,  as 
I  have  already  proved  in  my  lecture  on  the  trumpets,  in 
the  year  1839.— p.202. 

Note  by  Mr  Miller. — The  author  wishes  to  state 
that  Lecture  VIII.  in  this  work  was  written  twelve 
years  since  ;  and  that  the  authorities  he  then  consulted 
fixed  the  rise  of  the  Turkish  empire  at  1298.  He  is 
now  satisfied,  by  the  examination  of  other  authorities 
on  the  subject,  that  the  foundation  of  that  empire  was 
laid  in  1299.  Hence  the  thmgs  mentioned  in  Lecture 
VII.  (p.  109,)  relative  to  persecutions,  &c.,  and  to  the 
coming  of  the  third  woe,  as  mentioned  in  Lecture  XIII. 
(p.  202,)  which  he  supposed  would  take  place  in  1839, 
according  to  the  [first  computation,  will  not  be  realized 
until  the  year  1840.— p.  300. 


MORNING    VISION.  183 

There  appears  to  be  a  peculiar  proneness 
in  Mr  Miller,  to  seize  upon  the  commence- 
ment of  an  important  predicted  series  of 
events  and  changes,  as  the  entire  consum- 
mation, and  to  expect  in  one  year,  what 
necessarily  requires  a  succession  of  years. 
For  instance,  while  historians  differ  one  year 
in  their  chronological  calculations  respecting 
the  establishment  of  the  Turkish  empire, 
Mr  Miller  uses  the  earliest  possible  date, 
and  calculated  its  fall  in  1839.  He  now 
has   to   vary  his  calculations. 

This  is  one  of  the  least  of  his  errors.  The 
restoration  of  the  Jews,  the  overthrow  of 
Mohamedanism  and  of  Anti-Christ,  and  the 
introduction  of  the  millennial  reign  of  Messi- 
ah, are  events  to  take  place  at  specified  pe- 
riods, given  in  mystical  numbers  it  is  true,  but 
none  the  less  understood.  The  exhortation  in 
reference  to  this  mode  of  computation  is, 
''Here  is  wisdom  let  him  that  readeth  un- 
derstand." 

But  of  the  end  of  the  world  we  have  in  the 
Bible  no  definite  information.  Our  Savior 
very  plainly  shows,  that  it  was  not  to  be 
known  by  any  man,  but  He  treated  the  en- 
quiry as  He  treated  all  other  questions  of 
aiere  idle  curiosity. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  DIAGRAM  ON  THE  OPPO- 
SITE   PAGE. 

This  crude  illustration  of  the  chronolog- 
ical outline  of  the  morning  vision  of  Daniel, 
as  drawn  in  the  11th  chapter,  is  designed 
for  these  who  have  not  the  quarto  diagrams, 
belonging  to  this  work,  at  hand.  The  differ- 
ence of  opinion  among  writers,  is  more 
strikingly  detected  in  this  chapter,  than  in 
almost  any  other  portion  of  prophecy.  The 
wandering  of  expositors  after  events  to  ful- 
fil the  several  verses  of  this  chapter,  is  par- 
ticularly illustrated  in  the  quarto  appendix, 
where  the  local,  as  well  as  the  chronological 
boundaries  are  given. 

At  verse  14,  fulfilled  208  B.  C,  Miller, 
followed  by  Litch,  leaves  the  straight  track 
of  this  outline,  to  find  events  in  the  history 
of  Rome,  A.  D.  40,  as  the  fulfilment.  They 
then  return  and  are  found  within  the  locality 
of  this  vision  from  the  23d  to  the  29th  ver- 
ses, B.  C.  164,  w^hen  they  leave  again  for 
the  Roman  history,  and  are  found  at  Con- 
stantinople, A.  D.  350. 

Newton,  and  several  others  who  follow 
him,  leave  the  direct  outline  at  verse  31, 
B.  C.  164,  for  the  Roman  history,  and  the 
development  of  popery  in  particular.  Faber 
followed  by  Smith,  leaves  at  verse  36,  A.  D. 
about  606,  and  find  events  in  the  French 
Revolution,  about  1790,  which  in  their  view 
is  predicted  from  verse  36  to  40, 


Geo 
^00 


^1 

•  o 


CO 


6 

c 

K 

£ 

•- 

^C 

s- 

<u 

J3 

a 

fc- 

<^ 

i 

c; 

p 

"C; 

E 

5 

•;; 

o 

p^ 

c 

Pi 

o 

u- 

o 

Ci 

^ 

o 

c 

0} 

> 

JJ 

5 

_, 

o 

c£ 

v: 

„ 

1= 

•>,' 

C 

_S 

0) 

2: 

c: 

c 

hJ 

—  c 


ooo 


16* 


SECTION  VIL 


THF  "  SEVEN  TIMES"  CAPTIVITY  OF  THE 

JEWS. 


In  the  26th  chapter  of  Leviticus,  the 
phrase,  "  seven  times,"  peculiar  to  the  pro- 
phetical mode  of  computation,  is  four  times 
repeated,  in  verses  18,  21,  24  and  28, 
meaning  the  same  in  every  instance.  The 
Lord  assured  the  Israelites  that  if  they 
pursued  a  course  of  disobedience,  he  would 
chasten  them  "  seven  times,"  i.  e.  according 
to  the  settled  principles  of  interpretation, 
2520  years.  (See  observations  and  note  on 
page  62  and  63,  respecting  the  three  times 
and  a  half.) 

Let  the  reader  turn  to  the  26th  chapter 


CAPTIVITY  or  THE  JEWS.  \^^ 

of  the  book  of  Leviticus,  and  see  what  heavy 
judgments  the  Lord  denounces  against  his 
chosen  people  if  they  should  rebel  against 
him,  and  in  the  eighteenth  verse  he  will 
come  to  this  first  remarkable  threatening. 

18  And  if  ye  will  not  yet  for  all  this  hearken  unto 
me,  then  I  will  punish  you  seven  times  more  for  your 
sins. 

This  threatening  comes  after  and  in  ad- 
dition to  all  the  minor  chastisements  upon 
Israel,  and  was  to  be  the  crowning  punish- 
ment after  special  means  of  reform  utterly 
failed.  The  history  of  this  people 
from  the  time  they  left  Egypt  till  the 
Babylonian  captivity,  furnishes  a  long  list  of 
inflicted  chastisements  before  the  Lord  gave 
them  over.  In  addition  to  the  terrible  pun- 
ishment threatened  in  this  chapter,  the  28th 
chapter  of  Deuteronomy  contains  a  most 
fearful  catalogue  of  which  the  following  is  a 
specimen,  Deut.  xxviii. 

22  The  Lord  shall  smite  thee  with  a  consumption, 
and  with  a  fever,  and  with  an  inflammation,  and  with 
an  extreme  burning,  and  with  the  sword,  and  with 
blasting,  and  with  mildew  5  and  they  shall  pursue  thee 
until  thou  perish. 

23  And  thy  heaven  that  is  over  thy  head  shall  be 
brass,  and  the  earth  that  is  under  thee  shall  be  iron. 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF    PROPHECY. 

24  The  Lord  shall  make  the  rain  of  thy  land  powdei' 
and  dust  ;  from  heaven  shall  it  come  down  upon  thee, 
until  thou  be  destroyed. 

25  The  Lord  shall  cause  thee  to  be  smitten  before 
thine  enemies ;  thou  shall  go  out  one  way  against 
them,  and  flee  seven  ways  before  them  ;  and  shall  be 
removed  into  all  the  kingdoms  of  the  earth. 

26  And  thy  carcase  shall  be  meat  unto  all  fowls  of 
the  air,  and  unto  the  beasts  of  the  earth,  and  no  man 
shall  fray  them  away. 

27  The  Lord  will  smite  thee  w4th  the  botch  of  Egypt, 
and  with  the  emerods,  and  v\ith  the  scab,  and  with  the 
itch,  whereof  thou  canst  not  be  healed. 

28  The  Lord  shall  smite  thee  with  madness,  and 
blindness,  and  astonishment  of  heart ; 

29  And  thou  shalt  grope  at  noon-day,  as  the  blind 
gropeth  in  darkness,  and  thou  shalt  not  prosper  in  thy 
ways  ;  and  thou  shalt  be  only  oppressed  and  spoiled 
evermore,  and  no  man  shall  save  thee. 


Let  the  whole  chapter  be  read.    Still  it  is 
repeated  in  Leviticus  xxvi. 


21  And  if  ye  walk  contrary  unto  me,  and  will  not 
hearken  unto  me,  I  will  bring  seven  times  more 
plagues  upon  you  according  to  your  sins. 


Nothing  was  ever  perfected  with  the  He- 
brews, either  in  cmsing  or  blessing,  without 
the  number  seven.  Three  times  and  a  half, 
as  we  have  seen,  and  shall  consider  more  at 
length  by  and  by,  is  the  measure  of  punish- 
ment to  a  degenerate  Gentile  church.  In 
going  on  with  this  catalogue,  we  come  to  a 


CAPTIVITY    OP    THE   JEWS.  189 

third  repetition  of  this  threatened  displeasure 
of  God  against  his  chosen  but  stiff-necked 
people  in  the  23d  and  24th  verses. 


23  And  if  ye  will  not  be  reformed  by  me  by  these 
things,  but  will  walk  contrary  unto  me  ; 

24  Then  will  I  also  walk  contrary  unto  you,  and  will 
punish  you  yet  seven  times  for  your  sins. 


f  It  need  not  be  said  here,  that  Israel  and  Ju- 
dah  did  '*  walk  contrary"  unto  the  Lord,  and 
were  7iot  "  reformed"  by  all  the  means  used, 
to  remind  them  of  their  duty  by  the  frequent 
oppression  from  surrounding  heathen  tribes. 
And  now  the  fourth  time  this  fearful  and 
significant  threatening  is  repeated. 


27  And  if  ye  will  not  for  all  this  hearken  unto  me, 
but  walk  contrary  unto  me  ; 

24  Then  I  will  walk  contrary  unto  you  also  in  fury ; 
and  I,  even  I,  will  chastise  you  seven  times  for  your 
sins. 


If  now  we  can  trace  out  the  time  when 
Israel  was  cast  off,  we  shall  find  the  epoch 
from  which  to  calculate  these  "  seven  times," 
the  period  of  Israel's  degradation.  And  to 
ascertain  this,  there  is  no  difficulty,  if  histor- 
ical facts  and  scriptural  analogy  is  our  cho- 
sen guide  instead  of  fancy  or  conjecture. 


190  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Instead  of  one  epoch  there  are  several, 
which  instead  of  rendering  the  subject  ob- 
scure, gives  it  the  symmetry,  proportion,  and 
beauty,  which  runs  through  all  God's  plans 
of  operation.  It  is  man's  folly  which  dis- 
torts, what  is  otherwise  intended  to  be  beau- 
tiful. 

We  will  first  consider  the  epoch  of  the  full 
execution  of  these  predicted  curses,  upon  the 
ten  tribes,  who  have  generally  been  consid- 
ered as  lost,  but  that  it  will  be  found, 
the  Lord  has  reserved  a  tenth,  even  of  them, 
for  the  final  restoration. 

After  the  revolt  of  the  ten  tribes,  from  the 
house  of  David,  they  were  generally  called 
Ephraim,  and  the  other  two  tribes,  Judah. 
Jerusalem,  the  capitol  of  one  kingdom,  was 
within  the  land  of  Judah,  and  Samaria,  the 
capitol  of  the  other  kingdom,  lay  in  the  land 
of  Ephraim.  In  the  first  year  of  Ahaz  king 
of  Israel,  Isaiah  prophecied  against  Ephraim 
in  this  manner — (Isaiah,  chap,  vii.) 

8  For  the  head  of  Syria  is  Damascus,  and  the  head 
of  Damascus  is  Rezin  ;  and  within  threescore  and  five 
years  shall  Ephraim  be  broken,  that  it  be  not  a  people. 

9  And  the  head  of  Ephraim  is  Samaria,  and  the 
head  of  Samaria  is  Remaliah's  son.  If  ye  will  not  be- 
lieve, surely  ye  shall  not  be  established. 

Ahaz  began  his  reign,  B.  C.  742,  and  65 


CAPTIVITY    OF    THE    JEWS.  191 

years  from  this,  if  Isaiah  is  correct,  the  ten 
tribes  were  broken  and  have  never  since 
been  a  people.  Jttst  65  years  after  this,  in 
the  22d  year  of  the  reign  of  Manasseh,  king 
of  Judah,  Esarhaddon,  king  of  Assyria, 
marched  into  the  land  of  Israel,  and  carried 
captive  from  thence  into  Babylon  all  those 
who  were  the  remains  of  former  captivities, 
so  that  the  land  became  utterly  desolate, 
until  a  motley  mass  of  other  tribes  of  idola- 
ters were  brought  to  dwell  in  the  cities  of 
Samaria.^  This  was  the  last  remnant  of 
the  revolted  ten  tribes — 677  B.  C.  (See  2 
Kings  xvii :  2,  also  Ezra  iv  :  10.)     Ephraim 


*  The  nations,  which  Esarhaddon  had  brought  to 
dwell  in  the  cities  of  Samaria  instead  of  the  Israelites, 
who  had  been  carried  thence,  being  on  their  settling  m 
that  country,  much  infested  with  lions,  and  the  king  of 
Babylon  being  told  that  it  was  because  they  worship- 
ped not  the  God  of  the  country,  he  ordered  that  one  of 
the  Priests  which  had  been  carried  thence,  should  be 
sent  back,  to  teach  these  new  inhabitants  how  to  wor- 
ship  the  God  of  Israel.  But  they  only  took  him  hereon 
into  the  number  of  their  former  deities,  and  worshipped 
him  jointly  with  the  gods  of  the  nations,  from  whence 
they  came.  And  in  this  corruption  of  joining  the 
worship  of  their  false  gods  with  that  of  the  true,  they 
continued  till  the  building  of  the  Samaritan  Temple  on 
Mount  Gerizim  by  Sanballat. — Pride aux's  Connec- 
tions, p.  46. 


192  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECT. 

is  no  longer  to  have  a  name,  yet  a  tenth,  as  a 
remnant  is  to  be  restored  with  the  Jews ;  for 
such  is  the  promise,  in  Isaiah,  chap,  vi :  9-13. 

9  And  he  said,  Go,  and  tell  the  people,  Hear  ye  in- 
deed, but  understand  not ;  and  see  ye  indeed,  but  per- 
ceive not.  * 

10  Make  the  heart  of  the  people  fat,  and  make  their 
ears  heavy,  and  shut  their  eyes  ;  lest  they  see  with 
their  eyes,  and  hear  with  their  ears,  and  understand 
with  their  heart,  and  convert  and  be  healed. 

11  Then  said  I  Lord,  how  long  ?  And  he  answered, 
Until  the  cities  be  wasted  wichout  inhabitants,  and  the 
houses  without  man,  and  the  land  be  utterly  desolate, 

12  And  the  Lord  have  removed  men  far  away,  and 
there  be  a  great  forsaking  in  the  midst  of  the  land. 

13  But  yet  in  it  shall  be  a  tenth,  and  it  shall  return, 
and  shall  be  eaten  ;  as  a  teil-tree,  and  as  an  oak  whose 
substance  is  in  them,  when  they  cast  their  leaves  j  so 
the  holy  seed  shall  be  the  substance  thereof. 

Here  then  commences  the  2520  years  of 
the  long  threatened  desolation,  to  the  land 
of  Israel,  so  far  as  it  relates  to  the  remnant 
of  the  ten  tribes,  of  whom  there  is  a  tenth 
to  be  restored.  *'  Seven  times"  from  677 
B.  C.  terminates  A.  D.  1843.  This,  as  we 
have  seen,  is  the  end  of  the  Morning  vision 
of  2300  years,  if  commenced  with  the  going 
forth  of  the  commandment,  by  Ahazuerus, 
to  restore  and  build  Jerusalem.  But  this  can 
only  be  the  earliest  possible  date  of  Judah's 
restoration,  although  it  is  the  fulness  of  the 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  193 

time  to  the  remnant  of  Ephraim.*  It  was 
93  years  from  the  time  Ephraim  was 
broken,  till  the  last  remnant  of  Judah  was 
carried  into  captivity.  (See  Jer.  lii :  30.) 
We  may  expect,  according  to  this  computa- 
tion, the  remnant  of  Israel  to  return  with  the 
first  companies  of  Judah  in  1843,  but  must 
wait  93  years  longer  for  the  perfect  year  of 
Jubilee,  or  for  the  full  establishment  of 
Christianity  to  the  entire  nation. 

There  is  another  computation  ot  time 
which  goes  to  connect  the  last  gleaning  of 
Ephraim  with  this  final  desolation  of  Judah. 
Probably  there  were  a  few  Israelites  remain- 
ing in  Judea,  93  years  after  the  desolation 
of  Samaria.    If  so,  it  will  favor  the  idea  that 


*In  the  twenty  second  year  of  Manasseh,  Esarhad- 
don,  after  he  had  now  entered  on  the  fourth  year  of  his 
reign  in  Babylon,  and  fully  settled  his  authority  there, 
began  to  set  his  thoughts  on  the  recovery  of  what  had 
been  lost  to  the  empire  of  the  Assyrians  in  Syria  and 
Palestine  on  the  destruction  of  his  father's  army  in 
Judea. 

After  he  had  possessed  himself  of  the  land  of  Israel, 
he  sent  some  of  his  Princes  with  part  of  his  army  into 
Judea  to  reduce  that  country  also  under  his  subjection, 
who  having  vanquished  Manasseh  in  battle,  and  taken 
him  hid  in  a  thicket  of  thorns,  brought  him  prisoner  to 
Esarhaddon,  who  bound  him  in  fetters  and  carried  him 
to  Babylon. — Pkideaux's  Connections,  pp.  42,  44. 

17 


194  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

the  tenth  of  Israel  are  mingled  with  the 
Jews  in  their  dispersion  and  to  be  restored 
by  the  same  gradual  process.  Ezekiel  in  the 
4th  chapter,  commencing  with  the  4th  verse, 
is  commanded  thus — 

4  Lie  thou  also  upon  thy  left  side,  and  lay  the  in- 
iquity of  the  house  of  Israel  upon  it  ;  according  to  the 
number  of  the  days  that  thou  shalt  lie  upon  it  thou 
shalt  bear  their  iniquity. 

5  For  I  have  laid  upon  thee  the  years  of  their  iniqui- 
ty, according  to  the  number  of  the  days,  three  hundred 
and  ninety  days  :  so  shah  thou  bear  the  iniquity  of  the 
house  of  Israel. 

6  And  when  thou  hast  accomplished  them,  lie  again 
on  thy  right  side,  and  thou  shalt  bear  the  iniquity  of 
the  house  of  Judah  forty  days  :  I  have  appointed  thee 
each  day  for  a  year. 

It  was  exactly  three  hundred  and  ninety 
years  from  the  revolt  of  Jeroboam  and  the 
ten  tribes  from  the  house  of  David,  to  the 
final  desolation  of  the  whole  land  by  Neb- 
uzaradan,  in  the  twenty-third  year  of  Neb- 
uchadnezzar, B.  C.  584.  And  from  the  18th 
year  of  Josiah,  (-2  Chron.  xx.xiv :  29,31,) 
when  the  house  of  Judah  entered  into  sol- 
emn covenant  with  God  to  walk  wholly  in 
his  ways,  to  the  same  period,  was  just  40 
years.  So  long  God  bore  "  their  walking 
contrary  unto  him." 

This  must  suffice  for  the  commencement 
of  Ephraim's  captivity,  but  we  are   not  yet 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  195 

done  with  Judah.    The  Lord  bore  long  with 
them.     In  Kosea  vii,  He  says — 


4  0  Ephraim,  what  shall  I  do  unto  thee?  0  Judah, 
what  shall  I  do  unto  thee  ?  for  your  goodness  is  as  a 
morning  cloud,  and  as  the  early  dew  it  goeth  away. 

5  Therefore  have  I  hewed  them  by  the  prophets  ;  I 
have  slain  them  by  the  w^ords  of  my  mouth  j  and  thy 
judgments  are  as  the  light  that  goeth  forth. 


Again,  He  exclaitried  by  the  mouth  of  his 
prophet  Hosea,  xi  :  8, — "  How  shall  I  give 
thee  up  Ephraim  ?  How  shall  I  deliver  thee 
Israel?  How  shall  I  make  ihee  as  Admah? 
How  shtill  I  set  tliee  as  Zeboam  ?  Mine 
heart  is  turned  within  me  "  Moved  by  ten- 
der compassion^  God  sent  his  prophets  to 
warn  his  people  of  their  doom,  before  their 
utter  destruction.  Of  those,  Isaiah,  Jeremi- 
ah, and  Ezekiel  are  conspicuous,  giving 
many  interesting  statements  of  time  and  cir- 
cumstances, some  of  which  have  already 
been  introduced.  This  little  work  can  ad- 
mit of  only  a  lew  more,  and  such  only  as  go 
to  confirm  and  illustrate  general  chronolog- 
ical points.  The  agreement  of  all  the  proph- 
ets on  these  points,  with  the  apostle  John 
is   truly  wonderful,  and  strongly  invites  to 


J  96  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Various  means  were  used  to  show  the 
degenerate  people  of  God,  the  ruin,  and  wo 
to  which  they  were  hastening,  if  not  avert- 
ed by  speedy  repentance  and  reformation. 

The  same  year  in  which  Ephraim  was  ab- 
solutely "  broken  to  be  no  more  a  people,'^ 
was  Judah  brought  under  subjection  to  the 
king  of  Babylon  and  Manasseh  the  king, 
carried  captive,  having  been  a  very  wicked 
prince.  While  in  Babylon,  he  became  sin- 
cerely penitent,  and  the  Lord  softened  the 
heart  of  the  Assyrian  king,  who  consequent- 
ly permitted  Manasseh  to  return  to  Jerusa- 
lem, and  that  city  enjoyed  a  respite  of  70 
years. 

In  the  third  year  of  Jehoiakim,  (607)  Neb- 
uchadnezzar carried  the  second  portion  of 
Judah  captive  to  Babylon,  among  whom 
was  Daniel  and  his  three  friends,*  (Dan.  i 
1,    2.  Chron.,34.)       Jehoiakim  was  slain, 


*  In  the  third  year  of  Jehoiakim,  Nabopollasar  king' 
of  Babylon,  finding  that  on  Necho's  taking  of  Carche- 
mish  all  Syria  and  Palestine  had  revolted  to  him,  and 
that  he  being  old  and  infirm,  was  unable  to  march 
thither  himself  to  reduce  them,  he  took  Nebuchadnez- 
zar,  his  son,  into  partnership  with  him  in  the  empire, 
and  sent  him  with  an  army  into  those  parts,  and  from 
hence  the  Jewish  computation  of  the  years  of  Nebu- 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  1  9T 

and  Jehoiakin  his  son,  reigned  a  Tew  years 
in  his  stead,  and  was  carried  into  Babylon. 
The  third  prominent  period  in  which  Ju- 
dah  was  carried  into  captivity,  we  find,  was 
in  the  eleventh  year  of  Zedekiah's  reign, 
688,    (2   Kings  XXV ;  2  Chron.   xxxvi:   17.) 

4  And  the  city  was  broken  up.  and  all  the  men  of  war 
fled  by  night  by  the  way  of  the  gate  between  two  walls, 
which  is  by  the  king's  garden  :  (now  the  Chaldees 
were  against  the  city  round  about :)  and  the  king  went 
the  way  toward  the  plain. 

5  And  the  army  of  the  Chaldees  pursued  after  the 
king,  and  overtook  him  in  the  plains  of  Jerico  5  and  all 
his  army  were  scattered  from  him. 

6  So  they  took  the  king,  and  brought  him  up  to  the 
king  of  Babylon  to  Hi  blah  5  and  they  gave  judgment 
upon  him. 

7  And  they  slew  the  sons  of  Zedekiah  before  his 
eyes,  and  put  out  the  eyes  of  Zedekiah,  and  bound  him 
with  fetters  of  brass,  and  carried  him  to  Babylon. 

To  give  a  vivid  impression  of  the  wretched 
condition  of  Jerusalem  at  this  time,  Ezekiel 


chadezzar's  reign  begins,  that  is  from  the  end  of  the 
third  year  of  Jehoiakim.  For  it  was  about  the  end  of 
that  year  that  this  was  done,  and  therefore  according  ta 
the  Jews  the  fourth  year  of  Jehoiakim  was  the  first 
year  of  Nebuchadnezzar.  But  according  to  the  Babylo- 
nians his  reign  is  not  reckoned  to  begin  till  after  his 
father's  death,  which  happened  two  years  afterwards, 
and  both  computations  being  found  in  scripture,  it  is 
necessary  to  say  so  much  here  for  the  reconciling  of 
them. — Prideaux's  Connections,  p.  86. 

17* 


198 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 


was  direcled  to  draw  on  a  tile  the  represen- 
tation of  a  besieged  city.  In  this,  we  have 
high  authority  for  pictorial  illustrations.  See 
Ezekiel,  chapter  iv. 


Thou  also,  son  of  man,  take  thee  a  tile,  and  lay  it 
before  thee,  and  pourtray  upon  it  the  city,  even  Jeru- 
salem ; 

2  And  lay  siege  against  it,  and  build  a  fort  against 
it^  and  cast  a  mount  against  it ;  set  the  camp  also 
against  it,  and  set  battering  rams  against  it  round 
about. 

3  Moreover  take  thou  unto  thee  an  iron  pan,  and 
set  It  for  a  wall  of  iron  between  thee  and  the  city  :  and 
set  ihy  face  against  it,  and  it  shall  be  besieged,  and 
thou  shalt  lay  siege  against  it.  This  shall  be  a  sign  to 
the  house  of  Israel. 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS. 


199 


The  captives  in  Babylon,  as  well  as  the 
remaining  Jews  in  their  own  land,  vainly- 
hoped  that  Jerusalem  would  be  preserved. 
But  Ezekiel  by  this,  a  most  expressive  sign, 
was  commanded  to  show  them  to  the  con- 
trary. This  sign  was  given  at  the  same  time 
that  the  prophet  lay  390  days  on  one  side  and 
40  on  the  other,  already  noticed.  On  the 
tile,  or  large  brick,  the  prophet  probably 
drew  a  rude  map  of  the  city,  like  the  fore- 
going cut  with  his  iron  pan  and  battering 
rams  placed  around  it.  Or  he  might  have 
designed  a  representation  of  the  remaining 
portion  of  the  houses  in  the  following  man- 
ner. 


7  Therefore  thou  shalt  set  thy  face  toward  the  siege 


200  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PKOPHECY. 

of  Jerusalem,  and  thine  '  arm  shall  be  uncovered,  and 
thou  shall  prophecy  against  it. 

8  And  behold,  I  will  lay  bands  upon  thee,  and  thou 
shalt  not  turn  thee  from  one  side  to  another,  till  thou 
hast  ended  the  days  of  thy  siege. 

This  must  have  been  a  painful  experi- 
ment to  the  prophet  to  lay  so  long  on  one 
side,  but  the  Lord  would  sustain  him  in  the 
way  of  obedience  to  his  command.  The 
temple  and  city  were  at  this  time  set  on  fire 
and  entirely  destroyed. 

Still  there  was  a  remnant  of  Judah  left  in 
the  land,  who  continued  their  wickedness, 
and  four  years  afterwards,  (584,)  Nebuzara- 
dan,  captain  of  Nebuchadnezzar's  guards, 
invaded  Judah,  fell  on  the  poor  remains  of 
that  miserable  people,  siezing  and  carrying 
captive  to  Babylon  all  who  liad  not  fled  to 
Egypt,  which  amounted  to  no  more  than 
seven  hundred  and  forty-five  persons.* 


*  While  Nebuchadnezzar  lay  at  the  siege  of  Tyre, 
Nebuzaraden  the  captain  of  his  guards  being  sent  out 
by  him  with  part  of  his  army,  invaded  the  land  of  Is- 
rael, to  take  revenge,  as  it  may  be  supposed,  for  the 
death  of  Gedaliah,  there  being  no  other  reason,  why  he 
should  fall  on  the  poor  remains  of  those  miserable  peo- 
pie,  whom  he  himself  had  left  and  settled  there.  In 
which  expedition  Nebuzaradan  seizing  upon  all  of 
the  race  of  Israel  that  he  could  meet  with  in  the  land 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  201 

Thus  were  the  judgments  four  times  pre- 
dicted in  the  31st  chapter  of  Leviticus,  in- 
flicted on  Israel  and  Judah  at  four  different 
periods,  at  least.  The  fact  that  there  was 
93  years,  between  the  first  and  last  of  these 
judgments,  will  receive  further  corroboration 
as  we  proceed.  A  small  diagram  on  the  next 
leaf,  will  relieve  the  reader,  until  after 
the  introduction  of  another  strong  chain  of 
corroborative  predictions,  relative  to  the 
seven  times  captivity  of  the  Jews,  found  in 
the  4th  chapter  of  Daniel,  under  the  emblem 
of  a  remarkable  tree. 


made  them  all  captives,  and  sent  them  to  Babylon. 
By  this  last  captivity  was  fully  completed  the  desola- 
tion of  the  land,  no  more  of  its  former  inhabitants  be- 
ing now  left  therein.  And  hereby  were  also  completed 
the  prophecies  of  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  and  other 
Prophets  relating  hereto,  and  particularly  that  of 
Ezekiel,  wherein  God's  forbearance  of  the  House  of 
Israel  is  limited  to  390  days,  and  his  forbearance  of  the 
House  of  Judah  to  40  days.  For,  taking  the  days  for 
years,  according  to  the  prophetic  style  of  scripture, 
from  the  apostacy  of  Jeroboam  to  the  time  of  this  last 
captivity  there  will  be  just  390  years,  and  so  long  God 
bore  the  idolatry  of  the  House  of  Israel.  And  from 
the  18th  3'-ear  of  Josiah,  when  the  House  of  Judah  en- 
tered into  covenant  with  God  to  walk  wholly  in  his 
ways,  to  the  same  time  will  be  just  40  years,  and  so 
long  God  bore  their  walking  contrary  to  the  covenant. — 
Prideaux's  CojN'kections,  pp.  124,  125. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  DIAGRAM  ON  THE   OPPO- 
SITE   PAGE. 

This  diagram  shows  the  exact  order  of 
time  in  w  hich  Judah  was  carried  captive 
from  the  breaking  of  Ephraim  "to  be  no  long- 
er a  people,"  677  B.  C,  till  the  last  remnant 
of  the  Jews  were  carried  into  Babylon,  £3 
years  afterwards.  If  these  chronological 
points  are  correctly  settled,  the  reader  v\ill 
see  at  a  glance  when  to  commence  the  long 
captivity  of  2520  years,  and  precisely  when 
that  period  will  terminate.  At  the  two  ex- 
tremities of  the  rule  marks  stand  the  dates 
of  the  beginning  and  end.  The  order  in 
which  a  remnant  of  Judah  returned  from 
Babylon,  after  70  literal  years,  for  the  fulfil- 
ment of  the  purposes  of  the  70  weeks  is 
shown  on  page  217.  Even  this  remnant 
during  the  space  of  70  weeKs,  or  490  years, 
were  under  bondage,  alternately,  to  the  four 
idolatrous  empires,  and  were  utterly  driven 
from  Jerusalem  by  the  fourth.  So  that  the 
fact  of  a  remnant  sojourning  in  Judea  490 
years,  under  tribute  to  the  same  four  em- 
pires necessarily  abates  nothing  from  the 
entire  captivity  of  the  2520.  It  was  on  the 
same  principle  of  the  temporary  respite  of 
70  years  granted  Jerusalem,  on  the  repent- 
ance of  Manasseh  and  partial  reformation  of 
the  house  of  Judah. 


o 

O 


©2 

<3  O 


(=>d 


•  GO 


<  ^^ 


Co 


1 

50 


02 


O 


.CD 


204 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


The  tree  grew,  and  was 
strong,  and  the  height  thereof 
reached  unto  heaven,  and  the 
•ight  thereof  to  the  end  of  all 
the  eaxth.—Dan.  iv.  11. 


' .  .  .  leave  the  stump  of  tha 
roots  thereof  in  tlie  earth,  even 
with  a  band  of  iron  and  brass 
till  seven  times  pass  over  him 
^Dan.  iv.  16—23,  25—32. 


fTTXrf 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  205 

Dan.  iy:  9.  0  Belteshazzar,  master  of  the  magicians, 
because  I  know  that  the  spirit  of  the  hol}^  gods  is  in 
thee,  and  no  secret  troubleth  thee,  tell  me  the  visions 
of  my  dream  that  I  have  seen,  and  the  interpretation 
thereof. 

10  Thus  were  the  visions  of  my  head  in  my  bed  ;.  I 
saw,  and  behold  a  tree  in  the  midst  of  the  earth,  and 
the  height  thereof  was  great. 

24  This  is  the  interpretation,  0  kmg,  and  this  is  the 
decree  of  the  Most  High,  which  has  come  upon  my 
lord  the  king ; 

25  That  they  shall  drive  thee  from  men,  and  thy 
dwelling  shall  be  with  the  beasts  of  the  field,  and  they 
shall  make  thee  to  eat  grass  as  oxen,  and  they  shall 
wet  thee  with  the  dew  of  heaven,  and  seven  times  shall 
pass  over  thee,  tilithou  know  that  the  Most  High  ruleth 
in  the  kingdom  of  men,  and  giveth  it  to  whomsoever 
he  will. 


And  ^^  seven  times  shall  pass  over  thee." 
This  notable  expression  is  repeated  also,  in 
verses  16,  23  and  32, — ^just  four  times,  as  in 
Leviticus  xxvi:  18,  21,  24  and  28.  "Seven 
times,"  which  is  four  times  repeated  in  those 
two  chapters,  2520  years,  constitutes  the 
entire  boundary  of  Daniel's  evening  vision. 
It  commences  with  the  captivity  of  the  Jews 
in  Babylon,  and  terminates  with  their  gen- 
eral restoration  from  among  all  nations.  The 
stump  and  roots  of  Nebuchadnezzar's  vis- 
ionary tree,  which  was  the  root  of  the  four 
great  empires,  remain,  "even  with  a  band  of 
iron  and  brass,"  during  precisely  the  same 
18 


206  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

period.     It  is  true,  the  branches  and  leaves 
of  this  great  tree,  (Dan.  iv  :  14,  15,)  denoted 
the  splendor  of  Nebuchadnezzar's  empire, 
and  the  cutting   down  of  the  tree,  referred 
to  the  remarkable  manner  in  which  the  king 
of  Babylon   was   driven    into   exile  "  seven 
times,"  or  seven  literal  years ;  but  even  this 
also  very  strikingly  accords  with  the  period  of 
the    Jews    dispersion    during  the    mystical 
^seven  times,'  which  equals  2520  literal  years. 
"  The  stump  and  roots"    of  the  tree  re- 
main in  the  ground  until  "  seven  times  pass 
over  it."     This  clearly  connects  the   three 
succeeding    empires   with    the  Babylonian, 
which    are   to  continue    precisely    ''  seven 
times"  before  the    "  stone  cut   out  without 
hands"  is  to  demohsh   them.     Half  of  this 
period,  that  is,  three  times  and  a  half,  is  as- 
signed for  the  captivityof  the  Gentile  church 
in  mystical  Babylon,  and  will  be  considered 
in  its  proper  place. 

Literal  Babylon  fell  gradually,  just  in  pro- 
portion as  the  Jewish  captives  were  liberat- 
ed, but  was  not  utterly  destroyed  until  the 
last  company  left,  so  will  this  tree,  with  mys- 
tical Babylon  at  its  head  be  destroyed,  body 
and  branch,  stump  and  roots,  just  in  pro- 
portion, and  just  as  soon  as  the  Jews  are 
gathered  from  their  long  dispersion,  and  the 


CAPTIVITY    OF    THE  JEWS.  207 

Gentile  church   becomes  purified  from  the 
harlotry  of  Rome. 

This  tree,  as  before  remarked  in  its  prima- 
ry signification,  certainly  exhibits  the  punish- 
ment of  the  Babylonian  Monarch,  but  it 
contains,  also,  a  more  deep  and  comprehen- 
sive meaning.  The  four  great  empires  of 
which  Babylon  was  the  first,  form  a  perfect 
parallel  line  with  the  period  of  Israel's  cap- 
tivity 2520  years.  They  both  commenced 
together  and  will  terminate  together.  The 
rise  of  these  empires  was  gradual  and  the 
fall  of  Ephraim  and  Judah,  as  we  have  scen^ 
was  gradual.  The  downfal  of  the  last  of 
these  empires  and  the  liberation  of  the  Jews 
will  be  gradual,  as  we  shall  see  hereafter. 
This  emblem  agrees  most  perfectly,  with  the 
history  of  the  house  of  Israel,  as  described 
in  all  other  parts  of  scripture.  A  modern 
writer,*  gives  this  emblem  another  interpre- 


*  "  Thou  hast  brought  a  vine  out  of  Egypt ;  thou 
hast  cast  out  the  heathen  and  planted  it ;  the  hills  were 
covered  with  the  shadow  of  it,  and  the  boughs  thereof 
were  like  the  goodly  cedars  ;  she  sent  out  her  houghs 
unto  the  sea,  and  her  branches  unto  the  rivers,"  (com- 
pare  Jer.  ii.  21  ;  Tsa.  v. ;  and  Ezek.  xix.  10.  )  where  the 
description  of  Israel  strikingly  agrees  with  that  given 
in  Nebuchadnezzar's  dream  ;  ^'  Like  a  vine  she  was 
fruitful,  and  full  of  branches  j   her  stature  was  exalted 


208         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

tation,  and  identifies  it  with  the  "vine 
brought  out  of  Egypt."  (Psahw  80.)  To 
this  the  author*^does  not  assent  though  the 
points  of  resemblance  may  hold  good  in 
some  respects. 

Daniel  and    Nebuchadnezzar  were    both 
troubled  at  this  vision,  but  it  is  by  no  means 


among  the  thick  branches ;  and  she  appeared,  m  her 
height  with  the  multitude  of  her  branches."  And 
what  emblem  can  more  beautifully  represent  the  fallen 
and  outcast  condition  of  Israel,  than  this  same  tree 
after  the  Watcher  and  the  Holy  One  has  sent  forth  his 
mandate  ;  "  Hew  down  the  tree  and  cut  ofl.^  the  branch- 
es  ;  shake  off  his  leaves  and  scatter  his  fruit ;  let  the 
beasts  get  away  from  under  it,  and  the  fowls  from  un- 
der his  branches  ;  nevertheless,  leave  the  stump  of  his 
roots  in  the  earth,  even  w^ith  a  band  of  iron  and  brass." 
The  tree,  though  denuded  of  its  leaves,  stripped  of  its 
branches,  and  deprived  of  its  fruit — to  all  appearance 
a  dry  and  withered  stump — was  yet  to  retain  within 
itself  a  principle  of  vitalii)',  by  which,  at  the  appointed 
season,  it  was  again  to  shoot  forth  with  renewed  vigour. 
So  the  house  of  Israel,  though  scattered  and  peeled  ; 
an  astonishment,  a  proverb,  and  a  bye-word ;  without 
king,  without  priest,  without  sacrifice  ;  ground  down  to 
the  earth  with  the  iron  bands  of  oppression  ;  still  con- 
tinues in  existence,  though  exposed  to  the  storms  of 
many  centuries ;  and  this  withered  stump  shall  yet 
again  shoot  forth  with  new  strength,  and  beauty ;  and 
Israel  shall  yet  again  blossom  and  bud,  aud  fill  the  face 
of  the  world  with  fruit. — Millenial  Tidings  No.  4. 
pp.  13,  14. 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  20^ 

to  be  supposed  that  either  of  them  ever  un- 
derstood its  deep  and  extensive  meaning.  It 
was  designed  for  ages  far  future  to  them. 
Daniel  sat  one  hour  in  astonishment,  and 
"  his  thoughts  troubled  him"  as  the  typical 
interpretation  was  revealed  to  him.  (verse 
19.)  This  had  a  direct  bearing  upon  the 
person  of  the  Babylonian  monarch.  Nebu- 
chudnezzar,  for  his  pride  and  arrogancy 
against  God,  one  year  after  the  vision,  was 
driven  from  among  men,  and  his  dwelling 
was  among  the  beasts  of  the  field,  and  he  was 
made  to  eat  grass  like  oxen  until  seven 
times,  or  seven  literal  years  passed  over  him 
and  until  he  learned  that  the  Most  High 
ruled.  This,  as  a  matter  of  history,  was 
fulfilled  in  seven  years,  but  as  a  beautiful  al- 
legory, it  requires  seven  prophetic  times  to 
be  fulfilled  on  a  proud  and  degenerate  peo- 
ple. God  warned  them  repeatedly  by  Mo- 
ses and  the  prophets,  that  if  they  "would 
walk  contrary  unto  him,"  and  "  would  not 
be  reformed  by  him"  they  should  be  driven 
among  the  beasts,  that  is  the  kings  of  the 
earth,  and  be  punished  seven  times  for  their 
sins. 

This  is  a  long  and  dreary  captivity  to  the 
Jewish  church,  the  last  half  of  which  a  degen- 
erate Christian  church  suffers  with  her  elder 
18* 


SlO  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

sister  the  Jewish  church,  in  mystical  Babylon. 
But  some  few  there  are  who  have  not  "  de- 
filed their  garments,"  and  who  have  gone 
through  the  firey  furnace  of  persecution 
without  the  smell  of  fire  upon  their  garments, 
though  the  furnace  has  been  heated  "  one 
seven  times  hotter  than  it  was  wont  to  be 
heated,"  like  the  three  Hebrew  captives 
they  came  out  unhurt.  Daniel,  too,  stands 
as  a  representation  of  all  true  believers  dur- 
ing this  captivity,  or  in  the  words  of  proph- 
ecy, while  driven  among  the  beasts  of  the 
earth,  the  lion's  mouths  are  closed  and 
harmless. 

In  Jeremiah  v:   14,  we  have  this  remark- 
able prediction. 


14  Wherefore  thus  saith  the  Lord  God  of  hosts,  be- 
cause ye  speak  this  word,  behold,  I  will  make  ray 
words  in  thy  mouth  fire,  and  this  people  wood,  and  it 
shall  devour  them. 


How  long  shall  they  burn  ?     Ezekiel  an- 
swers, xxxix :  9. 


9  And  they  that  dwell  m  the  cities  of  Israel  shall  go 
forth,  and  shall  set  on  fire  and  shall  burn  the  weapons, 
both  the  shields  and  the  bucklers,  the  bows  and  the 
arrows,  and  the  handstaves,  and  the  spears,  and  they 
shall  burn  them  with  fire  seven  years. 


CAPTIVITY  OF    THE  JEWS.  211 

A  long  trial  of  2520  prophetic  days,  for  the 
Lord  said  to  Ezekiel,  I  have  appointed  thee 
a  day  for  a  year.  Therefore  this  consuming 
fire  is  to  last  2520  years.  This  would  be 
heating  the  furnace  "  one  seven  times  hotter 
than  it  was  wont  to  be  heated."*  Yet  the 
Jews  will  come  out  of  it,  and  a  wicked  world 
will  exclaim  with  an  astonished  Nebuchad- 
nezzar, (Dan.  vi :  25,)  Lo,  I  see  four  men 
loose,  walking  in  the  midst  of  the  fire,  and 
they  have  no  hurt:  and  the  form  of  the 
fourth  is  like  the  Son  of  God. 

Yes,  the  Jews  when  they  return  from 
their  long   captivity    will  be  seen  walking 


*  And  the  word  of  the  Lord  came  unto  me,  saying, 
son  of  man,,  the  house  of  Israel  is  to  me  become  dross  ; 
all  they  are  brass,  and  tin,  and  iron,  and  lead,  in  the 
midst  of  the  furnace  ;  they  are  even  the  dross  of  silver. 
Therefore  thus  saith  the  Lord  God,  because  ye  are  all 
become  dross,  behold  therefore  I  will  gather  you  into 
the  midst  of  Jerusalem.  As  they  gather  silver,  and 
brass,  and  iron,  and  tin,  into  the  midst  of  the  furnace, 
to  blow  the  fire  upon  it,  to  melt  it :  so  will  I  gather  you 
in  mine  anger  and  in  my  fury,  and  I  will  leave  you 
there,  and  melt  you.  Yea,  I  will  gather  you,  and  blow 
upon  you  in  the  fire  of  my  wrath,  and  ye  shall  be  melt- 
ed in  the  midst  thereof.  As  silver  is  melted  in  the 
midst  of  the  furnace,  so  shall  ye  be  melted  in  the  midst 
thereof:  and  ye  shall  know  that  I  the  Lord  have  pour- 
ed out  my  fury  upon  you. — Ezekiel  xxii.  17 — 22. 


212  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

with  one  -'like  the  Son  of  God."  Ezekiel 
says,  as  quoted  above,  ''  they  that  dwell  in 
the  cities  of  Israel  shall  go  forth/"'  and  Jere- 
miah, chapter  14,  says. 


2  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  if  they  say  nnlo  thee, 
whither  shall  we  go  forth  ?  then  thou  shalt  tell  theni; 
Thus  saith  the  Lord  ;  Such  as  are  for  death,  to  death  j 
and  such  as  are  for  the  sword,  to  the  sword ;  and  such 
as  are  for  the  famine,  to  the  famine  ;  and  such  as  are 
for  the  captivity,  to  the  captivity. 

3  And  I  will  appoint  over  them  four  kinds,  saith  the 
Lord  ;  the  sword  to  slay,  and  the  dogs  fo  tear,  and  the 
fowls  of  the  heaven,  and  the  beasts  of  the  earth  to 
devour  and  destroy. 

9  Thus  saith  the  Lord  of  hosts,  They  shall  thorough- 
ly glean  the  remnant  of  Israel  as  a  vine  ;  turn  back 
thy  hand  as  a  grape-gatherer  into  the  baskets. 


Thus  did  the  Lord  make  thorough  work 
in  executing  the  punishment  predicted  in 
the  26th  chapter  ot  Leviticus.  Now  let  the 
question  be  decided,  when  did  the  2520 
years  commence  with  Judah  ?  There  is 
no  doubt  about  the  time  of  Ephraim's 
captivity,  neither  should  there  be  with  regard 
to  Judah.  Those  who  afhrm  that  it  com- 
menced B.  C.  677,  at  the  time  Ephraim  was 
utterly  broken,  found  their  argument  on  the 
following  verses  of  the  45th  chapter  of  Jere- 
miah, referring  to  Judah. 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  213 

Then  said  the  Lord  unto  me,  though  Moses  and 
Samuel  stood  before  me,  yet  my  mmd  v,'ould  not  be 
toward  this  people  ;  cast  them  out  of  my  sight,  and  let 
them  go  forth. 

4  And  I  will  cause  them  to  be  removed  into  all 
kingdoms  of  the  earth,  because  of  Manasseh  the  son  of 
Hezekiah  king  of  Judah,  for  that  which  he  did  in  Jeru- 
salem. 

5  For  who  shall  have  pity  upon  thee,  0  Jerusalem  ? 
or  who  shall  bemoan  thee  ?  or  who  shall  go  aside  to 
ask  how  thou  doest  ? 


Read  also  Jeremiah,  chapter  21st  to  29th, 
and  Ezekiel  from  the  1st  chapter  to  the 
29th,  and  compare  them  with  Leviticus  26th. 
But  all  this,  as  is  now  abundantly  shown, 
only  goes  to  prove  that  the  first  date  of  Ju- 
dah's  captivity  was  synchronical  with  the 
last  date  of  Ephraim's,  and  that  it  was  93 
years  afterwards  before  the  remnant  of  Ju- 
dah, was    "  thoroughly  gleaned  as  a  vine.'' 

The  question  then  is  answered.  If  the 
"  tenth''*  of  Israel  with  a  portion  of  Judah 
commence  their  return  in  1843,  it  will  be 
93  years  afterwards,  or  1936  before  their  en- 
tire land  will  be  cleansed,  the  Christian 
sanctuary  established,  and  the  general  na- 
tional jubilee  celebrated. 

But  the  evidence  is  not  all  given  in  yet. 
It  is  a  remarkable  fact,  worthy  of  notice,  as 
corroborative  of  these  calculations,  that  the 


214  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

remnant  of  Judah  which  returned  from  Bab- 
ylon, as  an  earnest  of  their  final  restoration, 
returned  at  four  different  periods,  corres- 
ponding to  the  four  periods  in  which  they 
were  carried  into  Babylon,  and  occupied  the 
same  time,  93  years.  As  the  return  of  this 
remnant,  after  70  years,  was  the  earnest  of 
the  great  final  restoration  at  the  expiration 
of  the  "seven  times,"  so  the  manner  of  this 
restoration  goes  to  establish  a  precedent  by 
which  to  calculate  the  last  gathering  in  of 
the  harvest.  The  "gleaning"  must  be  some 
time  after  the  gathering  of  the  "  first  fruits.' 

From  the  time  Manasseh  was  carried 
captive,  677,  (  2  Chronicles  xxxiii :  9 — 13,) 
till  Jehoiakim  was  subdued  and  the  second 
company  was  carried  captive,  (307,  was  just 
70  years.  (  Dan.  i:  1.)  This  seventy  years 
respite  was  granted  in  consequence  of  the 
repentance  of  Manasseh  and  the  partial  re- 
formation of  Jerusalem.  Yet  the  awful 
wickedness  of  the  early  part  of  Manasseh's 
reign  was  not  forgotten. 

From  Jehoiakim's  subjugation,  607,  to  the 
edict  of  Cyrus  for  the  return  of  the  Jews  to 
rebuild  the  temple,  was  just  70  years. 
(Ezra  i :  1,  2  Chronicles  xxxvi :  22.)  From 
the  time  Zedekiah  was  carried  captive,  590, 
to  the  edict  of  Darius,  (Ezra  vi,)  was  70  years. 


/ 

CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  215 

And  from  the  last  carrying  away  of  all,  (Jer. 
lii :  30,)  to  the  first  dedication  of  the  second 
temple,  was  also  70  years.  So,  also,  as  we 
have  said,  the  prophecies  of  the  destruction 
of  old  Babylon,  were  fulfilled  in  accordance 
with  these  several  steps.*  The  diagram  on 
the  next  leaf  illustrates  these  points. 


*Bat  about  two  years  after  Cyaxares  dying,  and 
Cambyses  being  dead  in  Persia,  Cyrus  returned  and 
took  on  him  the  whole  government  of  the  Empire,  over 
which  he  reigned  seven  years.  His  reign  is  reckoned, 
from  his  first  coming  out  of  Persia  with  an  army  for 
the  assistance  of  Cyaxares  to  his  death  to  have  been 
thirty  years,  and  from  his  being  sole  monarch  of  the 
whole  empire  after  the  death  of  Cyaxares  and  Camby- 
ses seven  years.  Tully  reckons  by  the  first  account, 
Ptolomy  by  the  second,  and  Xenophon  by  the  third. 
And  the  first  of  these  seven  years  is  that  first  year  of 
Cj'i'us  mentioned  in  the  first  verse  of  the  book  of  Ezra, 
wherin  an  end  was  put  to  the  captivity  of  Judah,  and 
a  license  given  them  by  a  public  decree  of  the  king's 
again  to  return  into  their  own  country.  The  seventy 
years  which  Jeremiah  had  prophecied,  should  be  the 
continuaDce  of  this  captivity,  were  now  just  expired. 

For  therein  after  the  taking  of  Babylon,  and  the 
death  of  Belshazzar,  Darius  the  Mede  is  named  in  the 
succession  before  Cyrus  the  Persian,  and  the  seven 
years  of  the  reign  of  Cyrus  are  not  there  reckoned,  till 
the  years  of  the  reign  of  Darius  had  ceased,  and  there- 
fore according  to  scripture  the  first  of  Cyrus  cannot  be 
till  after  the  death  of  Darius. — Prideaux's  Connections, 
pp.  183,  184  185. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  DIAGRAM  ON  THE  OPPO- 
SITE   PAGE. 

This  Diagram  illustrates  the  order  of  time 
in  which  p]phraim  was  "  broken  to  be  no 
longer  a  people,"  and  the  several  periods  and 
process  by  which  Judah  was  carried  captive 
until  he  also  was  gleaned  from  the  land  of 
his  inheritance.  The  gradual  and  uniform 
process  by  which  the  remnant  of  Jews  re- 
turned from  Babylon,  is  here  seen  at  a  glance. 
That  it  should  be  just  70  years  from  one 
prominent  event  to  another,  gives  us  a  war 
rant  to  expect  a  corresponding  fulfilment  of 
God's  threaten] ngs  and  promises  in  refer- 
ence to  the  seven  times  captivity.  The 
mind  of  every  believer  should  rest  with  en- 
tire confidence  in  the  expectation  that  Judah 
and  the  tenth  of  Israel  will  be  finally  restor- 
ed in  a  similar  gradual  manner,  at  the  expir- 
ation of  the  2520  years. 

The  last  line  on  the  page,  represents  the 
beginning  and  end  of  the  70  weeks,  or  490 
years,  which  was  so  exactly  fulfilled,  com- 
mencing with  the  edict  of  Artaxerxes,  B.  C. 
457,  (  Ezra  vii :  7,)  and  terminated  A.  D. 
33,  when  the  '^  Messiah  was  cut  off."  (See 
section  4,  page  95.) 

For  a  more  full  illustration  of  these  points 
gee  diagram  of  the  chronological  outlines  of 
the  70  weeks,  in  the  quarto  appendix,  on 
the  morning  vision. 


'^  g 
o  ^ 

«       CO 

Co   i- 

f.  CO 

>^ 

6^ 


CO 

O 


>> 


CQCO 


CQ 


00 


19 


218         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF   PROPHECY. 

Before  proceeding  to  sum  up  this  whole 
matter,  the  reader's  patience  and  attention 
is  called  to  the  consideration  of  a  few  more 
striking  coincidences,  relative  to  the  exact 
order  of  predicted  punishment  and  its  inflict- 
ion on  Ephraim  and  Judah. 

God's  first  threatening  (Leviticus  xxvi:  18) 
"I  will  punish  you  seven  times  for  your 
sins,"  began  its  execution  on  Ephraim  and 
Judah  conjointly,  in  the  year  B.  C.  677.  The 
length  of  the  captivity  was  typically  fulfilled 
in  Nebuchadnezzar  s  banishment  among 
the  beasts,  (Dan.  iv  :  16,)  "let  seven  times 
pass  over  him,"  and  received  its  earnest  of 
accomplishment  by  the  70  years  respite  on 
the  penitence  of  Manasseh  and  reforma- 
tion of  Jerusalem,  and  will  be  finally  consum- 
mated A.  D.  1843. 

Second  prediction.  (Lev.  xxvi:  21.) 
"  I  will  bring  seven  times  more  plagues  upon 
you  according  to  your  sins." — Executed  on 
Judah  and  Jerusalem  in  the  reign  of  Jehoa- 
kim,  607,  (2  Chronicles  36,)  typically  ful- 
filled, (Daniel  iv :  23,)  "  till  seven  times 
pass  over  him," — received  the  earnest  of  its 
termination  in  the  first  edict  of  Cyrus,  (Ezra 
i:  1,)  537,  B.  C.  and  will  be  consummated 
A.  D.1913. 

Third  prophetical  warning.     (Lev.  xxvi : 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  219 

24.)  "  I  will  punish  you  yet  seven  times 
for  your  sins,"  commenced  its  execution,  B. 
C.  590,  (2  Chron.  xxxvi :  17,  18,)  on  Zede- 
kiah  and  another  portion  of  Judah  with  the 
destruction  of  the  temple — typically  ful- 
filled, (Dan.  iv  :  25,)  "  seven  times  shall  pass 
over  him" — earnest  of  its  termination,  decree 
of  Darius,  (Ezra  iv,)  B.  C.  520 — fully  con 
summated  1930. 

Fourth  and  last  predicted  judgment. 
(Lev.  xxvi :  28.)  "And  if  ye  will  not  for  all 
this  hearken  unto  me,  but  walk  contrary 
unto  me,  then  I  will  walk  contrary  unto  you 
also  in  fury  ;  and  1,  even  I,  will  chastise  you 
seven  times  for  your  sins."  This  last  threat- 
ening commenced  its  fearful  execution  B.C. 
584,  (Jer.  lii  :  30,)  when  the  remnant  of  Ju- 
dah ''was  thoroughly  gleaned  as  a  vine," 
like  Israel  93  years  before,  (Jer.  xv  :  9,)  by 
the  Babylonians  who  "  turned  back  the  hand 
as  a  grape-gatherer  into  the  baskets."  The 
allegorical  fulfilment  of  this  is  also  described, 
(Dan.  iv:32,)-'seven  times  shall  pass  over  thee 
until  thou  know  that  the  Most  High  ruleth," 
and  received  its  embryotic  consummation  in 
the  twentieth  year  of  Artaxerxes,  (Nehemi- 
ah  ii,)  when  the  last  party  of  the  cap- 
tives returned  with  Nehemiah  445,  and  will 
receive  its  final  and  glorious  consumnmationin 


220  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

iheir  great  Sabbatical  jubilee  about  1936. 
The  crowning  year  of  release,  which  was  to 
the  Gentile  slave  what  the  jubilee  was  to 
the  Hebrew,  comes  as  we  shall  see, 
about  A.  D.  2000. 

Now  we  are  prepared  for  a  summary,  ap- 
proaching to  a  mathematical  demonstration. 
Let  the  view  be  as  familiar  as  possible. 
Take  the  time  that  "  Ephraim  was  broken 
that  he  be  not  a  people,"  and  Manasseh  car- 
ried captive,  B.  C.  677,  from  the  whole  pe- 
riod of  the  punishment  2520 

677 


And  we  have  for  the  first  date,  A.  D.    1843 

Next  take  from  the  seven  times  2520 

The  date  of  Jehoiakim's  captivity,  607 

Which  brings  us  to  A.  D.  1913 

This  period  would  show  a  great  progress 
in  the  state  of  society,  and  perhaps  be  sig- 
nalized for  having  passed  the  second  en- 
gagement of  the  great  battle  of  Armegeddon, 
— the  final  termination  of  Mohamedanism, 
and  other  forms  of  error. 
Thirdly,  take  from  the  seven  times  2520 
The  period  of  Zedekiah's  captivity,         590 

Which  brings  us  to  A.  D.  1930 


CAPTIVITY  OF  THE  JEWS.  221 

By  this  time  the  Jews  must  begin  to  un- 
derstand fully  the  spiritual  nature  ofChrist's 
kingdom,  and  nothing  will  ever  bring  them 
to  such  an  understanding  but  the  fulfilment 
of  Joel  ii :  28,  29. 


28  And  it  shall  come  to  pass  afterward,  that  I  will 
pour  out  my  Spirit  upon  all  flesh  ;  and  your  sons  and 
your  daughters  shall  prophecy,  your  old  men  shall 
dream  dreams,   your  young  men   shall  see  visions ; 

29  And  also  upon  the  servants  and  the  handmaids  in 
those  days  will  I  pour  out  my  Spirit. 


The  first  fruits  of  this  was  realized  at  Je- 
rusalem, A.  D.  33,  by  Jews  and  Israelites 
*'  out  of  every  nation  under  heaven."  [See 
Acts  ii.)  That  was  a  token  of  the  glorious 
harvest,  this  will  be  the  final  consummation. 

Fourthly  and  lastly  take  from  the  period 
of  the  captivity  2520 

The  period  of  the  gleaning  of  the 
last  remnant  of  Judah,  B.  C.     584 


And  we  are  brought  down  to  A.  D.  1936 
the  grand  year  of  jubilee, — the  millennial 
'^day  of  pentecost  fully  come"  to  the  Jewish 
branch  of  the  Christian  church. 


19* 


SECTION  VIIL 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES. 


Having  devoted  one  section  to  a  consid- 
eration of  the  captivity  of  the  Jews,  a  short 
section  will  be  devoted  to  an  examination  of 
the  evidence  of  their  final  restoration.  Be- 
fore proceeding,  however,  it  may  be  well  to 
dwell  a  few  moments  to  illustrate  more  par- 
ticularly that  mode  of  computing  time 
so  universally  common,  and  so  peculiar  to 
the  Bible. 

The  creationof  our  world  was  finished  dur- 
ing the  mystical  number  seven,  or  a  Sabbath, 
and  will  doubtless  end  soon  after  the  seventh 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES.  223 

millennium.*  The  Jews  celebrated  six  Sab- 
baths, but  the  seventh  Sabbath  of  which  all 
the  others  were  but  typical,  has  never  yet 
been  celebrated  on  earth,  but  "  remaineth 
for  the  people  of  God." 

It  is  maintained  by  some  writers  that  all 
great  events  in  the  history  of  our  world  have 
occurred  in  the  perfect  circle  of  sevens. 
Such,  for  instance,  as  the  exodus  out  of 
Egypt — the  return  of  the  remnant  from 
Babylon,  and  the  death  and  resurrection  of 
Christ.  It  is  certain  that  this  last  event  oc- 
curred in   the  year  of  jubilee,   ten  jubilees 


*  The  fact  of  the  early  institution  of  the  seventh  day 
Sabbath  is  generally  admitted,  however  little  its  use 
and  typical  meaning  is  understood. 

And  God  saw  every  thing  that  he  had  made,  and  be- 
hold, it  was  very  good.  And  the  evening  and  the  morn* 
ing  were  the  sixth  day.  Thus  the  heav^ens  and  the 
earth  v/ere  finished  and  all  the  host  of  them.  And 
on  the  seventh  day  God  ended  his  work  which  he  had 
made  ;  and  he  rested  on  the  seventh  day  from  all  his 
work  which  he  had  made.  And  God  blessed  the  sev- 
enth day  and,  sanctified  it ;  because  that  in  it  he 
rested  from  all  his  work  which  God  created  and  made. 
—Gen.  li :  31— i :  1,  2,  3. 

In  Lev.  xxiii,  where  we  have  the  institution  of  the 
sixth  several  Sabbaths,  the  Lord  says  to  the  Israelites, 
"  from  even  unto  even  shall  ye  celebrate  your  Sab- 
baths."   «  Seven  sabbaths  shall  be  complete." 


S24         ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

from  the   cleansing  of  the   second  Jewish 
sanctuary.* 

According  to  Hales'  chronology,  the  first 
jubilee  celebrated  by  the  Israelites,  was  1589 
B.  C.  and  the  seventieth  jubilee  from  that 
would  reach  to  1841,  A.  D.  about  the  expira- 
tion of  seven  times  after  the  breaking  of 
Ephraim.  72  jubilees  would  reach  to  A.  D. 
1939,  about  the  expiration  of  seven  times 
after  the  gleaning  of  Judah.  This  compu- 
tation does  not  include  the  years  of  release, 
but  reckons  by  Sabbaths  of  jubilees,  i.  e.  49 
years.     If  the  years  of  release  be  added,  it 


*The  first  account  of  the  institution  of  the  year  of 
Jubilee  is  given  in  Lev.  xxv,  3.  It  is  completed  like 
all  other  institutions  in  its  primary  constitution,  by  the 
seventh  Jubilee  or  seven  Sabbaths  of  years,  so  that  the 
49th  year  was  in  fact  the  Jubilee.  Some  say  the  fif- 
tieth year  was  the  Jubilee  because  it  wsls  kept  sacred. 
But  that  was  the  year  of  Release.  The  land  indeed 
had  two  years  of  rest  at  the  completion  of  the  seventh 
Jubilee,  and  the  objections  which  unbelief  would  sug- 
gest of  consequent  want  are  met  as  follows. 

And  if  ye  shall  say,  what  shall  we  eat  the  seventh 
year  ?  behold,  we  shall  not  sow  nor  gather  in  our  in- 
crease ;  Then  I  Avill  command  my  blessing  upon  you 
in  the  sixth  year,  and  it  shall  bring  forth  fruit  for  three 
years.  And  ye  shall  sow  the  eighth  year,  and  eat  yet 
of  old  fruit  until  the  ninth  year  ;  until  her  fruits  come 
in  ye  shall  eat  of  the  old  store.— Lev.  xxv.  20  -21,  22, 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES.  225 

carries  us  down  to  about  2000,  A.  D.,  which 
is  the  period  of  the  fulness  of  tlie  Gentiles, 
when  the  whole  creation  will  revert  back 
into  the  hands  of  its  rightful  owner,  and  the 
"  saints  inherit  the  earth." 

As  we  said,  the  Israelites  celebrated  but 
six  Sabbaths,  which  was  an  imperfect  num- 
ber. In  every  other  respect  their  cursmgs 
or  blessings  were  completed  by  sevens.'*^ 
Their  Sabbaths  were  as  follows — viz  : 

1.  Sabbath  of  days. 

2.  Sabbath  of  weeks. 

3.  Sabbath  of  feasts. 

4.  Sabbath  of  months. 

5.  Sabbath  of  years. 

6.  Sabbath  of  jubilees. 

It  will  be  profitable  to  dwell  a  little  on 
each  of  these  Sabbaths  separately,  as  it  not 
only  serves  to  corroborate  all  other  correct 
modes  of  computing  time  by  the  prophecies, 
but  furnishes  the  best  analogy  whereby  to 
judge  of  the  coming  prosperity  of  the  church. 
The  reader  is  referred  first  to  Leviticus  xxiii. 


*  If  there  was  a  famine  it  lasted  seven  years,  if  a 
season  of  plent)^,  seven  years.  Their  final  captivity 
seven  times.  Jacob  must  serve  an  i delator  seven  years 
for  a  wife.  The  firey  furnace  must  be  heated  seven 
times  hotter  than  usual.  Gold  be  "seven  times  purified." 


226         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

2  Speak  unto  the  children  of  Israel,  and  say  unto 
them,  concerning  the  feasts  of  the  Lord,  Avhich  ye  shall 
proclaim  to  be  holy  convocations,  even  these  are  my 
feasts. 

3  Six  days  shall  work  be  done  ;  but  the  seventh  day 
is  the  sabbath  of  rest,  a  holy  convocation  ;  ye  shall  do 
no  work  therein  ;  it  is  the  sabbath  of  the  Lord  in  all 
your  dwellings. 

This  was  the  Sabbath  of  days,  the  lowest 
denomination,  or  the  unit  of  these  beautiful 
and  significant  numerical  emblems.  It  bears 
the  same  relation  to  the  great  Sabbatical  day 
of  this  lower  creation,  that  figure  1  does  to 
9  in  the  Arabic  characters. 

Second — Sabbath  of  weeks — 


15  And  ye  shall  count  unto  you  from  the  morrow 
after  the  sabbath,  from  the  day  that  ye  brought  the 
sheaf  of  the  wave-offering:  seven  sabbaths  shall  be 
complete ; 

16  Even  unto  the  morrow  after  the  seventh  sabbath 
shall  ye  number  fifty  days  :  and  ye  shall  ofler  a  new 
meat-offering  unto  the  Lord. 


''  Seven  Sabbaths  shall  be  complete,"  i.e. 
the  Sabbath  of  Sabbaths  here  typified, 
"  shall  be  complete." 


*  Heb.  iv,  9.  There  remaineth  therefore  a  rest  to  the 
people  of  God.    Or  as  it   is   rendered   in  the   margin, 
'  there  remaineth  a  keeping  of  a  sabbath  "   to  the  peo- 
ple of  God. 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES.  227 

Third.     Sabbath  of  Feasts. 

There  were  seven,  and  were  completed  in 
the  seventh  month.  "  These  are  the  feasts 
of  the  Lord."     (verse  4.) 

1.  Feast  of  the  Passover,  (verse  5.) 

2.  Feast  of  unleavened  bread,  (verse  6.) 

3.  Feast  of  Harvest,  (verse  10.) 

4.  Feast  of  weeks  or  Pentecost,*(verse  21.) 

5.  Feast  of  Trumpets,  (verse  24.) 

6.  Feast  of  Atonement,  (verse  27.) 

7.  Feast  of  Tabernacles,  (verse  34.) 
Fourth.     Sabbath  of  months. 


5  In  the  fourteenth  day  of  the  first  month  at  even  is 
the  Lord's  passover. 

38  Besides  the  sabbaths  of  the  Lord,  and  besides 
your  gifts,  and  besides  all  your  vows,  and  besides  all 
your  free-willofferings  which  ye  give  unto  the  Lord. 

39  Also  in  the  fifteenth  day  of  the  seventh  month, 
when  ye  have  gathered  in  the  fruit  of  the  land,  ye  shall 
keep  a  feast  unto  the  Lord  t,even  days  :  on  the  first 
day  shall  be  a  sabbath,  and  on  the  eighth  day  shall  be 
a  sabbath. 


This   completed  the  Sabbath  of  months. 


*  This  was  fifty  days  after  the  Passover,  and  the  first 
fruits  of  the  barley  harvest.  The  wheat  harvest  was 
commenced  at  this  "  feast  of  weeks  "  or  Pentecost.  It 
was  one  sabbath  of  weeks  from  the  departure  of  Israel 


228  ILLTISTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

In  the  first  month  they  commenced  the 
convocation  on  the  14th  day  at  even,  and  on 
the  15th  day  of  the  seventh  month  was  cel- 
ebrated the  crowning  period  of  harvest. 
Thus  will  the  harvest  of  the  world  be  the 
7th  Sabbath. 

Fifth. — Sabbath  of  years. 


Lev.  XXV,  2.  Speak  unto  the  children  of  Israel,  and 
say  unto  them.  When  ye  come  into  the  land  which  I 
give  you,  then  shall  the  land  keep  a  sabbath  unto  the 
Lord. 

3  Six  years  thou  shalt  sow  thy  field,  and  six  years 
thou  shalt  prune  thy  vineyard,  and  gather  in  the  fruit 
thereof; 


out  of  Egypt  to  the  giving  of  the  Law  on  Mount  Sinai, 
and  it  was  just  a  sabbath  of  weeks  from  the  resurrec- 
tion of  Christ  to  the  pouring  out  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  as 
we  find  in  Acts  ii.  1,  2. 

And  when  the  day  of  Pentecost  was  fully  come,  they 
were  all  with  one  accord  in  one  place.  And  suddenly 
there  came  a  sound  from  heaven,  as  of  a  rushing 
mighty  wind,  and  it  fi.lled  all  the  house  where  they 
were  sitting. 

This  memorable  event  and  the  feast  of  weeks  was 
long  celebrated  in  the  Christian  church.  The  apostle 
of  the  Gendles  regarded  it  with  much  interest,  as  we 
find  in  Acts  xx,  16.  For  Paul  had  determined  to  sail 
by  Ephesus,  because  he  would  not  spend  the  time  in 
Asia  ;  for  he  hasted,  if  it  were  possible  for  him,  to  be 
at  Jerusalem  the  day  of  Pentecost. 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES.  229 

4  But  in  the  seventh  year  shall  be  a  sabbath  of  rest 
unto  the  land,  a  sabbath  for  the  Lord  :  thoa  shall  nei- 
ther sow  ihy  field,  nor  prune  thy  vineyard. 


Here  is  the  Sabbath  of  the  land  of  Israel, 
which  the  Lord  declared  should  have  its 
Sabbaths.  These  Sabbaths  were  observed, 
more  or  less  till  about  the  time  Saul  become 
king  of  Israel,  after  which  they  were  neg- 
lected altogether  until  the  Babylonian  cap- 
tivity, 490  years.  Seventy  Sabbaths  were 
then  due  to  the  land  of  Israel,  and  its  inhab- 
itants were  driven  out  of  it  just  70  years  to 
give  it  rest. 

This  Sabbatical  year  was  highly  typical  of 
the  great  jubilee  Sabbath  which  awaits  the 
*'  whole  creation."  At  the  close  of  the  sixth 
millennium  there  will  be  a  thousand  Sabbat- 
ical years  due  to  our  earth,  for  hitherto  the 
whole  creation  has  groaned,  being  in  bond- 
age to  its  wicked  inhabitants. 

Sixth.     Sabbath  of  jubilees. 


8  And  thou  shalt  number  seven  sabbaths  of  years 
unto  thee,  seven  times  seven  years  :  and  the  space  of 
the  seven  sabbaths  of  years  shall  be  unto  thee  forty  and 
nine  years. 

9  Then  shalt  thou  cause  the  trumpet  of  the  jubilee 
to  sound,  on  the  tenth  day  of  the  seventh  month  ;  in 
the  day  of  atonement  shall  ye  make  the  trumpet  sound 
throughout  all  your  land. 

20 


230  ILLUSTRATIONS    Of    PllOfHEGY. 

This  was  the  last  Sabbath  given  to  the 
Israelites.  But  there  remaineth  for  them  the 
crowning  Sabbath  when  "  tfie  fulness  of  the 
Gentiles  be  come  in,"  for  without  them  they 
^'  could  not  be  made  perfect."* 

Immediately  following  the  Trumpet  which 
ushers  in  the  great  Sabbatical  millennium, 
will  commence  earth's  grand  year  of  release, 
typified  by  the  fifteenth  year. 


10  And  ye  shall  hallow  the  fiftieth  year,  and  pro* 
claim  liberty  throughout  all  the  land,  unto  all  the  in- 
habitants thereof ;  it  shall  be  a  jubilee  unto  you  ;  and 
ye  shall  return  every  man  unto  his  possession,  and  ye 
shall  return  every  man  unto  his  family. 


*  All  which' was  typified  by  the  sacrifices  accompa- 
nying these  sabbaths  was  fulfilled  in  Christ  by  the  sa- 
crifice of  himself.  But  the  great  consummation  of  all 
which  was  typified  by  this  mode  of  computing  time  re- 
mains to  be  fulfilled.  The  terrors  of  Sinai  and  the 
literal  blowing  of  Jubilee  trumps  has  ceased.  "  For  ye 
are  not  come  unto  the  mount  that  might  be  touched, 
and  that  burned  with  fire,  nor  unto  blackness,  and  dark- 
ness and  tempest,  and  the  sound  of  a  trumpet,  and  the 
voice  of  words  ;  which  voice  they  that  heard,  entreated 
that  the  word  should  not  be  spoken  to  them  any  more  ; 
(and  so  terrible  was  the  sight,  that  Moses  said,  I  ex- 
ceedingly fear  and  quake  ;)  but  ye  are  come  unto  mount 
Sion,  and  unto  the  city  of  the  living  God,  the  heavenly 
Jerusalem,  and  to  an  innumerable  company  of  angels." 
_Heb.  XII,  18—22. 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES.  231 

11  A  jubilee  shall  that  fifieth  year  be  unto  you  ;  ye 
shall  not^sow,  neither  reap  that  which  groweth  of  itself 
in  it,  nor  gather  the  grapes  in  it  of  thy  vine  undressed. 

12  For  it  is  the  jubilee  ;  it  shall  be  holy  unto  you  ; 
ye  shall  eat  the  increase  thereof  out  of  the  field. 

13  In  the  year  of  this  jubilee  ye  shall  return  every 
man  unto  his  possession. 

Where  is  the  sceptical  professor  of  Christ- 
ianity who  doubts  that  earth's  inhabitants 
will  one  day  go  free  ?  If  tliere  is  any  truth 
in  the  Bible,  or  any  significancy  in  its  typical 
Sabbaths  and  jubilees,  "  there  remaineth  a 
keeping  of  a  Sabbath  to  the  people  of  God." 
Here  is  evidence  all  but  demonstration — it 
can  be  no  more  perfect  till  faith  gives  place 
to  actual  vision. 

Before  the  Christian  church  can  expect 
to  enter  upon  her  Canaan  of  rest,  the  walls 
of  the  great  Jericho,  of  Satan's  empire  must 
be  thrown  down.  This  will  be  effected 
"not  by  might  nor  by  power,"  but  by  the 
Spirit  of  God.  Those  who  bear  the  jubilee 
trumpets  of  the  Gospel  need  only  to  surround 
the  walls  of  the  great  city,  always  remem- 
bering to  give  the  '•'  trumpet  a  certain  sound." 
Joshua  has  given  them  an  example,  chap.  vi. 


3  And  ye  shall  compass  the  city,  all  ye  men  of  war, 
and  go  round  about  the  city  once  :  thus  shall  thou  do 
six  days. 


232  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 


4  And  seven  priests  shall  bear  before  the  ark  seven 
truinpets  of  ram's  horns  ;  and  the  seventh  day  ye 
shall  compass  the  city  seven  times,  and  the  priests 
shall  blow  with  the  trumpets. 

5  And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  that  when  they  make  a 
long  blast  with  the  ram's  horn,  and  when  ye  hear  the 
sound  of  the  trumpet,  all  the  people  shall  shout  with  a 
great  shout  ;  and  the  wall  of  the  city  shall  fall  down 
flat,  and  the  people  shall  ascend  up  every  man  straight 
before  him. 


Scott  says  the  words  translated  "  ram's" 
horn,  may  be  rendered  trumpets  of  jubilees, 
that  is,  such  as  were  blown  in  the  year  of 
jubilee.  The  entering  of  Israel  into  the 
promised  land  was  a  jubilee  to  them.  In- 
stead of  the  dreadful  trumpet  of  war,  they 
were  commanded  to  sound  the  trumpet  of 
joy,  as  already  conquerers. 

Here  again  the  number  seven  is  used  to 
perfection.  Seven  priests,  seven  trumpets, 
seven  days,  and  seven  times  on  the  seventh 
day.  This  last  day  must  ^have  \  been  the 
seventh  day   of  the   week,   the    Sabbath.* 


*The  repeated  prescriptions  of  the  number  seven 
must  not  pass  unnoticed  .  "  Seven  priests,"  "  seven 
trumpets,"  ''seven  days;,"  and  ''seven  times  on  the 
seventh  day."  (Lev.  xxv,  9.)  This  attention  to  the 
number  seven,  in  scripture,  probably  had  reference  to 


SABBATHS  AND  JUBILEES.  233 

This  no  doubt  typified  the  seventh  or  Sab- 
batical millennium  when  nothing  will  be  done 
inconsistent  with  the  solemnities  of  a  Sab- 
bath. ''  Holiness  to  the  Lord"  will  be  in- 
scribed upon  every  employment.  The  dis- 
ciple's employment  will  be  as  sacred  as  his 
master's,  who  said  in  reference  to  the  Sab- 
bath, "  my  Father  worketh  hitherto,  and  I 
work."     John  v  :   18. 

If  there  is  any  meaning  in  the  emblems 
which  God  has  chosen  to  typify  future  bless- 
ings to  his  people,  and  if  there  is  any  signif- 
icancy  in  the  most  complete  system  for  com- 
puting time,  every  one  may  understand 
enough  of  the  future  for  all  practical  pur- 
poses. 


the  creation  of  the  world  in  six  days,  and  the  Lord's 
resting  on  the  seventh,  which  completed  the  first  week  ; 
this  was  the  first  reason  assigned  for  the  sanctification 
of  the  sabbath,  and  occasioned  the  measuring  of  time 
by  the  periodical  return  of  the  seventh  day,  in  most 
ages  and  nations  ever  since.  (Notes,  Gen.  ii,  2,  3.) 
One  of  these  seven  days  must  have  been  a  sabbath- 
day  ;  the  Jews  say,  that  it  was  the  last,  on  which  the 
city  was  taken  ;  and  as  they  were  doing  the  work  of 
God,  for  his  glory,  no  objection  arises  against  it  from 
the  fourth  commandment  ;  any  more  than  against  the 
man's  carrying  his  bed  on  the  sabbath-day,  in  honor  of 
Christ  who  had  healed  him. — Scott's  Notes  on  Joshua 
yi.  3—5. 

20* 


234         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

If  the  world  exists  seven  millenniums  from 
the  creation,  it  will  complete  just  140  jubi- 
lees, including  the  years  of  release, — one 
thousand  Sabbatical  years, — twelve  thousand 
Sabbaths  of  months, — fifty-one  thousand  one 
hundred  Sabbaths  of  weeks,  and  three  hun- 
dred and  sixty-five  thousand  Sabbaths  of 
days. 

Such  is  the  interesting  analogy  which  runs 
through  the  old  Testament  in  the  use  of 
emblems.  How  few  discover  their  full  sig- 
nificancy !  The  bloody  sacrifices  prefigured 
the  death  of  our  Savior,  and  ceased  after 
that  event.  The  avenging  sword  is  permit- 
ted, by  such  as  look  to  Christ  for  defence,  to 
remam  "in  its  sheath,"  or  "be  beaten  into 
ploughshares."  But  time  has  not  ceased, 
nor  will  it,  till  the  Sabbaths  and  Jubilees 
are  consummated  in  the  grand  anti-type. 
Then  will  the  Angel  "lift  up  his  hand  and 
swear  that  time  shall  be  no  longer." 


SECTION  IX. 


RETURN  OF  THE  JEWS, 


It  was  the  design  of  the  writer,  when  the 
plan  of  this  work  was  first  proposed,  to  de- 
Vote  a  separate  portion  of  the  book  to  the 
return  of  the  Jews,  and  answer  some  of  the 
more  common  objections  urged  against  that 
doctrine.  But  of  this  the  limits  of  the  book 
will  not  allow.  Besides,  their  return,  in  ef- 
fect, having  already  commenced,  and  prep- 
arations in  such  an  advanced  state  for  their 
entire  emancipation,  (seepage  165,)  it  seems 
untimely  to  argue  the  matter,  and  idle  to 
answer  objections.  When  Cyrus  issued  the 
decree  to  emancipate  the  Jews  from  captiv- 
ity in  Babylon,  their  way  was  not  more  open 
than  it  now  is  by  a  recent  declaration  of  the 


^36  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPilECY. 

Turkish  Sultan.  (See  page  165.*)  It  may 
require  a  few  years  to  carry  out  the  new 
law  in  its  various  bearings ;  as  it  doubtless 
did  the  decree  of  Cyrus.  After  the  declara- 
tion of  independence  by  the  American  Col- 
onies in  1776,  it  was  about  six  years  before 
this  declaration  was  confirmed,  and  the  new 
states  duly  acknowledged,  and  it  may  be 
some  years  before  the  new  law  of  the  Sultan 
will  receive  the  sanction  of  the  great  powers, 


*  Respecting  the  return  of  the  Jews  to  the  land  giv- 
en to  their  fathers,  opinions  are  various,  of  course 
some  must  be  wrong.  The  most  common  error  M-orthy 
of  remark  is  that  they  must  first  be  converted  to  Chris- 
tianity. They  will  return  as  they  are  the  moment 
all  obstacles  are  removed.  Their  attachment  to 
the  country  is  strong  enough  with  the  present 
facilities  for  removal  to  fill  up  the  land  in  a  very  short 
time.  We  may  suppose  the  circumstances  of  their 
return,  the  striking  fulfilment  of  prophecy,  ihe  sympa- 
thy and  good  will  of  all  nations,  instead  of  the  hatred 
and  oppression  hitherto  endured,  will  awaken  their 
sympathies  in  return,  and  arouse  in  their  softening 
hearts,  inquiry  after  truth  and  susceptibilities  to  its 
influence.  The  Jews  were  not  converted  from  their 
wickedness,  before  their  return  from  captivity  in  Baby- 
lon. That  return  was  a  type  of  their  final  restoration. 
Through  the  hberality  of  Mehemet  AH,  the  Pacha  of 
Egypt,  forty  thousand  Jews  have  already  onticipated 
"their  re-settlement  in  Talestine  by  a  return,  while  we 
have  no  evidence  that  any  one  has  yet  been  converted 
to  the  Christian  faith. 


RETURN  OF  THE  JEWS.  237 

and  produce  its  full  efiects.  Possibly  it  may 
arouse  the  war  spirits,  and  lead  to  the  great 
conflict  at  Armegeddon.  The  people  of  the 
United  States  date  their  national  existence 
from  1776,  tiiough  some  years  after  this  were 
required  to  obtain  peace  and  independence, 
so  may  the  Jews,  though  agitated  by  war 
for  a  while,  date  their  emancipation  from  the 
Hatti  Scherift',  issued  at  Constantinople  in 
1839. 

Taking  it  for  granted  that  the  Jews  will 
be  restored,  the  reader's  attention  will  be 
called  merely  to  some  general  calculations 
respecting  the  time  of  their  return,  and  some 
of  the  predictions  of  that  event.* 


*  The  restoration  of  the  Jews  is  repeatedly  predicted 
m  various  forms  of  expression.  The  manner  of  their 
return  is  not  so  fully  , disclosed  ;  but  sacred  history 
furnishes  us  with  a  beautiful  and  instructive  chain  of 
events,  from  which  we  may  form  our  views  of  the  fu- 
ture from  the  past, on  the  general  principles  of  analogy. 
We  need  not  greatly  mistake,  then,  if  we  will  allow 
imagination  its  appropriate  work,  restraining  its  ten- 
dency to  overleap  its  bounds. 

Those  who  have  witnessed  the  services  of  the  Jews 
in  their  synagogues  of  the  large  cities,  (even  in  this 
country)  where  we  might  suppose  they  would  lose  more 
of  their  peculiarities  than  in  almost  any  other,  because 
they  enjoy  greater  privileges  here  and  so  become  more 
assimilated  to  our  citizens,  yet  even  here  those  who 


'238  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

It  may  be  expected  that  great  numbers  of 
Jews  will  be  establi^^lied  in  the  land  of  their 
fathers,  in  1843.  Several  reasons  for  this 
belief  has  been  shown  already  in  another 
place.  The  2300  years  from  "  the  going 
forth  of  the  commandment  to  restore  and 
build  Jerusalem,"  the  length  of  the  morning 
vision  extends  to  1843.  The  events  of  this 
vision  occupy  the  time  from  "  the  cleansing 
of  the  second  sanctuary"  to  the  first  return 
of  this  long  dispersed  people.  Another  rea- 
son for  this  belief.  The  evening  vision,  or 
whole  period  of  their  captivity  is  1!520  years  ; 
from  this  take  677   B.  C,  the  beginning  of 


witness  their  feeling  expressed  in  their  solemn  assem- 
blies cannot  doubt  that  they  or  their  children  will  re- 
turn to  the  land  of  the  prophets.  In  their  forms  of 
worship,  all  their  religious  feeling  is  associated  with 
Jerusalem,  Zion,  the  sepulchres  of  the  kings  and 
prophets.  They  can  never  be  assimilated  m  their 
habits,  feelings  and  interests,  to  people  of  any  other 
country.  Another  1800  years  would  not  efl'ect  this 
change.  And  what  a  standing  miracle  is  such  a  fact, 
what  an  evidence  visible  to  every  one  of  the  truth  of 
the  Bible,  and  of  the  certain  fulfilment  of  all  its  pre- 
dictions.  "What  will  their  restoration  and  subsequent 
conversion  be  "  but  life  from  the  dead  "  to  the  Genlile 
world  ?  "For  if  the  casting  away  of  them  has  been 
the  riches  of  theGentiles  how  much  more  their  fulness." 


RETURN     OF  THE  JEWS.  239' 

their  captivity,  and  you  have  1843,  the  ear- 
liest time  of  return. 

This  is  a  coincidence  worthy  of  remark. 
The  evening  vision  (covering  the  space  of 
2520  years,  calculated  from  its  earliest  date 
comes  out  at  1843,  the  morning  vision  cov- 
ering the  space  of  2300  yearrs  from  the  only 
date  for  its  commencement  given,  comes 
out  also  precisely  1843.  The  evening  vis- 
ion, however,  is  not  completely  fulfilled  to 
the  Jews  until  93  years  afterwards,  and  to 
the  fulness  of  the  Gentiles,  75  years  beyond 
that  period.      (Dan.  xii :  12.) 

The  restoration  of  the  Jews  after  their 
long  and  dreary  dispersion  will  be  an  event 
of  no  small  influence  in  the  world's  redemp- 
tion. 

After  the  declaration  of  God's  displeasure, 
so  fearfully  manifested  against  this  people 
in  their  unparalelled  sufferings,  it  will  be 
grateful  to  the  reader  to  dwell  a  moment  on 
the  promises  of  favor  and  restoration  which 
will  stand  out  in  honor  of  divine  truth,  wherr 
they  shall  return  and  quietly  enjoy,  **  the 
pleasant  land."* 


*  As  already    remarked,   the   strong  regard  of  the 
Jews  to  the  land  of  their  fathers,   is,  in  their  present 


240  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

The  following  passages  are  collected  as 
convenient  for  reference  and  profitable  for 
reflection. 


IsA.  XI,  12  And  he  shall  set  up  an  ensiga  for  the  na- 
tions, and  shall  assemble  the  outcasts  of  Israel,  and 
gather  together  the  dispersed  of  Jadah  from  the  four 
corners  of  the  earth. 


state  of  unbelief,  sufficient  to  draw  millions  to  that 
country  as  soon  as  the  repelling  power  ceases.  Their 
attachment  to  the  countries  in  which  they  now  reside  is 
very  weak.  They  are  a  race  of  money  brokers  and  ped- 
lars among  the  nations,  and  are  rich  enough  to  remove 
when  they  please,  being  so  situated  as  to  prepare  for  a 
removal  in  a  short  time.  When  the  Lord  has  fulfilled 
his  purposes  in  ovcruling  such  motives  as  these  to  exe- 
cute his  designs,  other  motives  may  begin  to  operate. 
How  would  the  love  and  sympathy  of  Christians  flow 
out  to  them  as  soon  as  the  way  is  opened  for  their  re- 
turn to  Jerusalem  !  The  wicked  may  be  used  by  God 
to  promote  his  designs.  How  was  it  with  the  Egyp- 
tians when  the  Hebrews  were  ready  for  their  first 
march  to  the  "land  of  promise"?  They  poured  out 
their  riches,  and  loaded  down  the  Hebrews  with  pres- 
ents. How  was  it  when  they  returned  from  their  cap- 
tivity in  Babylon?  The  same  facilities  were  afforded. 
Cyrus  furnished  them  with  money  and  an  escort ;  and 
sent  orders  to  his  merchants  at  Tyre  to  supply  them 
with  every  thing  needful  in  rebuilding  their  temple. 
He  also  directed  the  keepers  of  Mount  Lebanon  to  tur- 
nish  the  timber,  and  ordered  his  soldiers  to  guard  them 
from  the  hostile  and  jealous  inhabitants.  These  are  some 
of  the  facts  in  former  cases,  and  from  analogy  we  may 
infer  that  similar  thmgs  may  again  be  done. 


RETURN  OF  THE  JEWS.  241 

13  The  envy  also  of  Ephraim  shall  depart,  and  the 
adversaries  of  Jadah  shall  be  catolT;  Ephraim  shall 
not  envy  Jiidah,  and  Jadah  shall  not  vex  Ephraim. 

"  An  ensign"  will  indeed  be  set  up,  In 
view  of  the  whole  world,  when  Judah  and  a 
"tenth  of  Israel"  return  to  Palestine. 


IsA.  II,  2  And  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  last  days, 
that  the  mountain  of  the  Lord's  house  shall  be  estab- 
lished ir\  the  top  of  the  mountains,  and  shall  be  exalted 
above  the  hills  ;  and  all  nations  shall  flow  into  it, 

3  And  many  people  shall  go  and  say,  come  ye,  and 
let  us  go  up  to  the  mountain  of  ihe  Lord,  to  the  house 
of  the  Grod  of  Jacob  ;  and  he  will  teach  us  of  his  ways, 
and  we  will  walk  m  his  paths  ;  for  out  of  Zion  shall 
go  forth  the  law,  and  the  word  of  the  Lord  from  Jeru- 
salem. 

4  And  he  shall  judge  among  the  nations,  and  shall 
rebuke  many  people,  and  they  shall  beat  their  swords 
into  plough-shares,  and  their  spears  into  pruning-hooks  j 
nation  shall  not  lift  up  sword  against  nation,  neither 
shall  they  learn  war  any  more. 


This  mountain  is  the  same  that  Daniel 
calls  the  "  stone  cut  out  without  hands," 
which  became  "  a  great  mountain  and  filled 
the  whole  earth."  Mountain  in  prophecy 
denotes  a  kingdom. 

IsA.  Lx,  2 ""For  behold  darknes  sshall  cover  the  earthy 
and  gross  darkness  the  people  ;  but  the  Lord  shall  arise 
upon  thee,  and  his  glory  shall  be  seen  upon  thee. 
21 


^42         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

3  And  the  Gentiles  shall  come  to  thy  light,  and  kings 
to  the  brightness  of  thy  rising. 

15  Whereas  thou  hast  been  forsaken  and  hated,  so 
that  no  man  went  through  thee,  I  will  maKe  thee  an 
-eternal  excellency,  a  joy  of  many  generations. 


That  the  second  verse  has  been  literally 
and  completely  fulfilled  no  one  can  doubt, 
but  the  3d  and  15th  remain  unfulfilled  as 
yet. 


IsA.  Liv,  18  But  be  ye  glad  and  rejoice  for  ev^er  in 
that  which  I  create  ;  for  behold,  I  create  Jerusalem  a 
rejoicing,  and  her  people  a  joy. 

19  And  I  will  rejoice  in  Jerusalem,  and  joy  in  ray 
people ;.  and  the  voice  of  weeping  shall  be  no  more 
heard  in  her,  nor  the  voice  of  crying. 

20  There  shall  be  no  more  thence  an  infant  of  days, 
nor  an  old  man  that  hath  not  filled  his  days  :  for  the 
child  shall  die  a  hundred  years  old  ;  but  the  sinner  be- 
ing a  hundred  years  old  shall  be  accursed. 


These  verses  also  remain  unfulfilled,  ex- 
cept as  a  mere  earnest  of  these  blessings 
have  been  shed  down  upon  individuals  as 
the  first  fruits  of  the  promised  harvest.  A 
great  physical  renovation  is  promised  here, 
so  that  bodily  health  will  be  as  universal  as 
personal  holiness.  Indeed  it  would  be 
mockery  to  call  the  abused  and  diseased 
bodies  now   found   within   the  pale  of  the 


RETURN    OF    THE  JEWS.  243 

church,  "  temples  of  the  Holy  Ghost."* 
Christ's  complete  kingdom  on  earth  will  be 
made  up  of  subjects  "  without  blemish,"  in 
body  or  soul,  "without  spot  or  wrinkle  or 
any  such  thing,"  being  "  sanctified  wholly," 
in  their  "  whole  spirit,  and  soul,  and  body." 
There  will  be  no  cause  therefore  for  "the 
voice  of  weeping  in  the  new  Jerusalem  state 
of  the  church,  to  Jew  or  Gentile — there  will 
none  be  cut  off  in  their  "infant  of  days." 
Nor  any  thing  like  dotage  overtake  a  "man 
that  hath  not  filled  his  days."  If  an  indi- 
vidual saint  die  at  one  hundred,  it  will  be 
like  dying  in  childhood,  (verse  20,)  but  if 
a  man  dies  a  sinner  at  that  age  he  dies  "  ac- 
cursed." This  certainly  indicates  long  life 
to  the  Christians  of  that  day.  "  For  as  the 
days  of  a  tree  are  the  days  of  my  people." 


*  All  ihe  blessings  promised  and  all  the  curses  threat- 
ened to  Israel  were  of  a  temporal  nature.  The  real 
blessings  and  curses  were  held  in  a  figure  and  perceiv^ed 
only  by  an  eye  of  faith.  The  really  obedient  in  heart 
perceived  the  substance  through  the  shadow.  But  no 
where  are  we  warranted  to  reverse  this  order  so  tar  as 
to  exclude  the  idea  of  a  literal  return  of  the  Jews  from 
their  present  dispersion.  Formerly  the  lesser  blessing- 
implied  the  greater,  now  the  greater  blessing  promised 
includes  the  lesser,  i.  e.  their  promised  gathering  in 
Christ  includes  their  literal  return  to  the  land  of  Judea. 


S44  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF    PROPHECY. 

"  And    the  inhabitant  shall   not  say,  I  am 
sick." 


EzEK.  XXXVI,  21  But,  I  had  pity  for  my  holy  name, 
which  the  house  of  Israel  had  profaned  among  the 
heathen,  whither  they  went. 

22  Therefore,  say  unto  the  house  of  Israel,  Thus 
saith  the  Lord  God ;  I  do  not  this  for  your  sakes  0 
house  of  Israel,  but  for  my  holy  name's  sake,  which  ye 
have  profaned  among  the  heathen,  whither  ye  went. 

23  And  I  will  sanctify  my  great  name,  which  was 
profaned  among  the  heathen,  which  ye  have  profaned 
in  the  midst  of  them  ;  and  the  heathen  shall  know  that 
I  am  the  Lord,  saith  the  Lord  God,  when  I  shall  be 
sanctified  in  you  before  their  eyes. 

24  For  I  will  take  you  from  among  the  heathen,  and 
gather  you  out  of  all  countries,  and  will  bring  you  into 
your  own  land. 

If  this  prophecy  has  not  been  fulfilled  it 
gives  the  best  reason  for  believing  in  the 
return  of  the  Jews,  as  well  as  the  reason  for 
their  conversion.  God's  truth  and  honor 
are  here  concerned.  For  illustration,  sup- 
pose a  king  should  sentence  a  thousand 
criminals  to  the  penitentiary  for  seven  years, 
and  they  suffer  this  time  in  prison,  would 
not  his  honor  and  truth  require  their  release 
at  the  end  of  this  time?  Suppose,  further, 
that  these  citizens  were  the  special  favorites 
of  the  king  but  were  banished  for  disloyalty, 
would  not  their  conduct  dishonor  their  sov- 


RETURN    OF    THE    JEWS.  S45 

6reign  wherever  they  were  known  ?  Now 
should  they  repent  and  be  restored  to  favor 
it  would  wipe  off  the  dishonor  which  their 
misconduct  had  cast  upon  their  king.  So 
will  it  be,  when  the  repenting  Jews  return 
to  inherit  the  '^  glorious  holy  mountain." 
Their  hearty  allegiance  will  honor  their 
rightful  king. 


Jer.  xyi,  14  Therefore  behold,  the  days  come,  saith 
the  Lord,  that  it  shall  no  more  be  said,  the  Lord  liveth 
that  brought  up  the  children  of  Israel  out  of  the  land 
of  Egypt  ; 

15  But,  the  Lord  liveth,  that  brought  up  the  children 
of  Israel  from  the  land  of  the  north,  and  from  all  the 
lands  whither  he  had  driven  them ;  and  I  will  bring 
them  again  into  their  land  that  I  gave  unto  their  fathers. 


The  meaning  of  these  verses  is  perfectly 
obvious.  The  deliverance  of  Israel  out  of 
Egypt  had  been  celebrated  throughout  all 
their  generation  as  the  great  song  of  deliver- 
ance. If  this  does  not  predict  the  general 
restoration  of  the  Jews  from  among  all  na- 
tions, language  cannot  express  such  an  idea. 
If  it  is  said  that  the  expression  "  from  the 
land  of  the  north,"  referred  to  the  restoration 
from  the  Babylonian  captivity  it  must  be 
said,  also,  in  reply,  that  they  are  to  be  gath- 
ered *'  from  all  lands  whither  he  had  driv- 
21* 


S46  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

en  them."*     The   restoration  of  a  remnant 
from    Babylon  was  indeed  an  earnest  and 
type  of  the  final  restoration. 
We  read  again  in 


Jer.  xxiii,  7  Therefore,  behold,  the  days  come,  sailh 
the  Lord,  that  they  shall  no  more  say.  The  Lord  liveth, 


*  Many  reject  the  idea  of  a  literal  return  of  the  Jews. 
Sut  they  may  as  well  reject  the  facts  that  they  are  lit- 
erally dispersed  among  the  nations,  and  yet  remain  a 
distinct  people.  Should  they  not  return,  some  objec- 
tions of  infidels  to  the  truth  of  the  scriptures  on  the 
score  of  unfulfilled  prophecy  would  remain  unanswered. 
But  their  return  would  silence  those  objectors,  and 
cover  their  faces  with  confusion.  It  would  set  forth  a 
triumphant  proof  of  the  scriptures.  The  prophet  in- 
forms us  that  there  shall  be  signs  and  wonders  in  the 
latter  day,  but  what  signs  can  be  more  wonderful  or 
more  convincing  than  the  exact  fulfilment  of  prophecy. 
It  is  equal  to  a  demonstration  in  geometry. 

Some  have  abandoned  the  idea  of  their  return  be- 
cause the  eccentric  Wolffe,  a  converted  Jew,  after 
much  labor  and  travel  among  the  Jews,  has  given  up 
the  idea.  His  views  are  of  small  weight  against  a 
^'  Thus  saith  the  Lord."  He,  "with  a  well  disposed  but 
unequally  ballanced  mind,  having  ''run  before  he  was 
sent,"  or  fainted  before  the  ripened  harvest,  turned 
back  in  despair.  He  doubtless  found  very  little  encour- 
agement from  the  present  state  of  "  his  kindred."  But 
what  if  Moses  had  exercised  as  little  faith  and  perse 
verance  ?  Perhaps  he  did  at  first,  when  seeing  the 
feeling  of  his  brethren  he  left  them  40  years.  But  after 
that  his  active  labors  for  them  are  well  known. 


RETURN  OF  THI^  JEWS.  247 

which  brought  up  the  children  of  Israel  out  of  the  land 
of  Egypt  ; 

8  But,  the  Lord  liveth^  Avhich  brought  up  and  which 
led  the  seed  of  the  house  of  Israel  out  of  the  north 
country,  and  from  all  countries  whither  I  had  driven 
them-  and  they  shall  dwell  in  their  own  land. 

*'  And  they  shall  dwell  in  their  land." 
Who  will  presume  that  these  predictions 
have  been  fulfilled  ?  Or  who  will  dare  say 
they  never  will  be  fulfilled  ?  How  will 
skepticism  ever  be  silenced  if  such  predict- 
ions as  these  are  not  fulfilled.*  This  won- 
derful restoration  of  the  Jews  after  their  dis- 
persion all  the  world  over,  will  so  far  exceed 
the  miracle  which  God  wrought  in  their  de- 
liverance out  of  Egypt,  that  that  event  will 
not  deserve  to  be  compared  or  mentioned 
with  their  final  restoration. 


*  The  quotation  from  Jeremiah  xvi.  15,  repeated 
xxiii.  8,  has  a  primary  allusion,  Avithout  doubt,  to  the 
short  respite  of  a  remnant  of  the  Jews  from  the  Baby- 
lonian captivity.  A  respite  of  70  weeks  or  490  years. 
But  those  predictions  will  only  receive  their  complete 
fulfilment  when  the  Jews  are  gathered  "  from  all  coun- 
tries whither  the  Lord  has  driven  them."  On  their 
safe  exodus  out  of  Egypt  they  sung  the  ^'  song  of 
Moses,"  but  on  their  final  restoration  to  their  own  land 
they  will  learn  the  '*  Song  of  the  Lamb,"  who  will 
deliver  them  out  of  the  north  country,  and  out  of  all 
thecoimtries  whither  he  had  driven  them. 


248  ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 

2  Cor.  hi,  15  But  even  unto  this  day,  when  Moses  is 
read,  the  vail  is  upon  their  heart. 

16  Nevertheless,  when  it  shall  turn  to  the  Lord,  the 
vail  shall  be  taken  away. 


How  true  is  this  of  Israel  at  this  timef 
Not  less  than  when  written  by  the  apostle 
1800  hundred  years  ago.*  What  a  stand- 
ing miracle  are  the  Jews,  showing  in  many 
respects  to  all  men  the  truth  of  the  Script- 
ures. Have  they  been  preserved  a  distinct 
people  in  vain  ?  Will  they  never  '^  turn  to 
the  Lord"  and  have  the  *'  vail  taken  away?" 
The  first  generation  of  Jews  which  return  to 
Judea,  will  realize  as  little  of  the  great  pur- 
pose for  which  the  Lord  gathers  them 
from    among   all   nations,    as    the    multit- 


*  During  the  last  summer  the  writer  visited  three 
Synagogues  of  Jews  in  New  York  to  witness  their  cer- 
emonies and  learn  their  real  sentmients  and  feelings. 
His  strong  emotions  while  there  are  not  easily  ex- 
pressed. Let  any  man  who  disbelieves  in  the  return  of 
the  Jews  before  their  conversion  remov'e  if  he  can  the 
vail  from  their  hearts.  During  1800  years  this  vail  has 
become  more  and  more  immoveable.  Nor  can  we 
suppose  it  will  be  taken  away  until  they  behold  the  ful- 
fulment  of  prophecy  respecting  their  fmal  restoration, 
and  meet  Christ  as  the  multitude  from  all  nations  on 
the  day  of  Pentecost.  Then  and  not  till  then  will  the 
vail  be  removed.  All  attempts  to  convert  them  in 
other  lands  may  be  expected  to  prove  abortive.  Noth- 
ing but  the   out-pouring  of   the  Spirit   on  the  day  of 


RETURN  OF  THE  JEWS.  249 

udes  which  came  out  of  Egyptian  bondage, 
understood  the  purpose  of  their  settlement 
in  Canaan.  They  will  have  a  zeal  for  God 
but  not  according  to  knowledge,  until  this 
vail  is  removed. 

It  is  highly  probable  that  many  of  them 
will  be  active  in  the  terrible  conflicts  which 
are  to  precede  the  ushering  in  of  their  pen- 
tecostal  state,  and  no  doubt  many  of  the 
present  generation  are  from  long  established 
habits  better  adapted  to  such  a  work,  than 
to  enter  into  the  rest  of  the  peaceful  king- 
dom of  Christen  Mount  Zion.  Most  of  them 
will  return  with  this  vail  upon  the  heart  and 
mistake  the  nature  of  the  kingdom  which 
their  Messiah  will  erect,  sitting  on  the 
throne  of  David  and  reigning  till  "  all  his 
enemies  are  put  under  his  feet."  Nor  would 
such  a  mistake  be  more  strange  than  some 
made  by  the  apostles,  even  after  the  resur- 


Pentecost  was  sufficient  to  remove  the  long  cherished 
and  deep  seated  prejudice  from  the  chosen  and  privi- 
leged twelve.  And  what  can  be  expected  from  a  hard- 
ness which  has  been  accumulating  eighteen  hundred 
years?  The  Jews  are  now  as  blind  to  spiritual  things, 
and  as  hostile  to  Christ,  as  were  ihose  who  sav/  his 
works,  but  combined  to  destroy  him.  They  are  as  far 
from  apprehending  his  first  mission  as  at  the  time  of 
Tiberius  Cassar. 


250  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY* 

rection,  when  they  inquired,  ''Lord  wilt  thou 
at  this  time  restore  the  kingdom  unto  Is- 
rael?" 

HosEA.  XII,  12  And  Jacob  fied  into  the  country  of  Sy- 
ria, and  Israel  served  for  a  wife,  and  for  a  wife  he  kept 
sheep. 

13  And  by  a  prophet  the  Lord  brought  Israel  out  of 
Egypt,  and  by  a  prophet  was  he  preserved. 

14  Ephraim  provoked  him  to  anger  most  bitterly  ; 
therefore  shall  he  leave  his  blood  upon  him,  and  his 
reproach  shall  bis  Lord  return  unto  him. 

Jacob  served  a  Syrian  idolater  2520  days 
for  the  mother  of  Judah  and  as  long  for  the 
mother  of  Ephraim.  Why  does  the  proph- 
et allude  to  this  fact.^  Plainly  because  Ju- 
dah and  Ephraim  carried  into  captivity,  were 
to  serve  idolaters  as  many  years.  As  in  the 
case  of  Ezekiel,  the  Lord  said,  son  of  man, 
T  have  appointed  thee  a  day  for  a  year. 
(Ezekiel  iv  :  6.)  But  Jacob  returned  from 
this  long  service  and  the  Lord  met  him  with 
a  blessing  and  surnamed  him  Israel.  This  is 
a  type  of  the  restoration  of  Judah  and 
Ephraim  after  they  fulfil  their  time  of  ser- 
vice. Moreover,  by  a  prophet,  the  Lord 
brought  Israel  out  of  Egypt  (verse  13,)  and 
of  this  prophet  Moses  says,  "  the  Lord  will 
raise  you  up  a  prophet  like  unto  me,''  &c. 
This  prophet  is  Christ,  "  the  captain  of  the 


RETURN  OF  THE  JEWS.  251 

Lord's  host,"  who  will  deliver  the  seed  of 
Abraham,  his  friend,  from  a  bondage  worse 
than  Egyptian,  after  they  have  borne  the 
reproach  deserved  for  their  sins  the  appoint- 
ed times,  (verse  14.)  Ephraim  and  Judah 
will  ^'  fulfil  their  v,^eek"  of  times,  as  Jacob 
"  fulfilled  his  week,"  of  years,  before  they 
receive  their  complete  discharge  from  the 
Laban  of  oppression. 

20  And  Jacob  served  seven  years  for  Rachel  ;  and 
they  seemed  unto  him  but  a  few  days,  for  the  love  he 
had  to  her. 

21  And  Jacob  said  unto  Laban,  Give  me  my  wife 
(for  my  days  are  fulfilled)  that  I  may  go  in  unto  her. 

26  And  Laban  said,  It  must  not  be  so  done  in  our 
country,  to  give  the  younger  before  the  first  born. 

27  Fulfil  her  week,  and  we  will  give  thee  this  also, 
for  the  service  that  thou  shalt  serve  with  me  yet  seven 
other  years. 

Here  the  time  (Genesis  xxix,)  which  Ja- 
cob served  Laban  is  computed  three  differ- 
ent ways,  first  years,  "seven  years" — then 
by  days,  "  for  my  days  are  fulfilled,"  (25-20) 
and  thirdly,  weeks,  "  fulfil  her  week,"  a 
week  of  years.  In  the  same  manner,  a  day 
denoted  a  year  as  we  find  in  Numbers,  xiv : 
34. 

After  the  number  of  the  days  in  which  ye  searched 
the  land,  even  forty  days  (each  day  for  a  year)  shall  ye 
bear  your  iniquities,  even  forty  years,  and  ye  shall 
know  my  breach  of  promise. 


252  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Also,  as  \VG  have  seen,  Nebuchadnezzar 
was  driven  to  the  society  of  the  beasts  of  the 
field  and  deprived  of  his  reason  "seven 
times,"  or  2520  days,  when  being  humbled, 
he  was  restored  to  his  former  exaU3d  sta- 
tion, and  worshipped  the  tree  God,  so  as  if 
for  type  of  their  own  banishment  among  the 
beasts,  or  idolatrous  heathen  rulers,  was  he 
set  forth  to  the  sons  of  Jacob  for  an  example, 
as  in  the  case  of  the  prophet  Ezekiel,  suffer-  , 
ing  "  a  day  for  a  year,"  even  so  the  Jews, 
driven  out  among  the  "beasts"  of  the  earth, 
after  an  exile  of  2520  years,  shall  return  to 
their  former  inheritance,  and  become  "kings 
and  priests  unto  God." 

As  Jacob  returned  from  his  service  of  the 
idolatrous  Laban,  he  was  met  in  the  way  by 
the  Angel  of  the  Covenant,  who  blessed  him 
and  called  him  by  a  "  new  name."  (Gen. 
xxxii :  28.)  So  with  the  returning  Jews^ 
Christ  will  meet  and  bless  them,  and  "  call 
his  people  by  another  name,"  But  they 
must  expect  to  "  wrestle"  with  many  diffi- 
culties. It  has  been  suggested  in  the  fore- 
going pages  that  the  Jews,  as  a  body,  will 
return  in  their  impenitence  as  they  did  from 
Babylon,  and  as  the  Hebrews  went  up  out 
of  Egypt.  Like  those  manner  too,  there 
will  undoubtedly  be  some  really  pious  pray- 


RETURN  OF  THE  JEWS.  253 

ing  souls  like  Daniel,  Ezra,  Nehemiah,  &,c. 
To  such,  Solomon's  piophetic  prayer  will 
apply.  It  is  recorded  in  2  Chronicles  vi: 
37,  38. 


37  Yet  if  they  bethink  themselves  in  the  land  whith- 
er they  are  carried  captive,  and  turn  and  pray  unto 
thee  in  the  land  of  their  captivity,  saying:,  We  have 
sinned,  we  have  done  amiss,  and  have  dealt  wickedly; 

38  If  they  return  to  thee  with  all  their  heart  and 
with  all  their  soul  in  the  land  of  their  captivity,  whither 
they  have  carried  them  captives,  and  pray  toward  their 
land  which  thou  gavest  unto  their  fathers,  and  toward 
the  city  which  thou  hast  chosen,  and  toward  the  houso 
which  I  have  built  for  thy  name. — 


^'  Then  hear  thou,"  &c.  the  39th  verse 
continues.  The  objector  may  say  this  pre- 
diction and  implied  promise  had  reference 
only  to  the  restoration  from  the  Babylonian 
captivity.  But  such  an  objection  is  answer- 
ed in  Isaiah  xi :    11,  12. 


11  And  it  shall  come  to  pass  in  that  day,  that  the 
Lord  shall  set  his  hand  again  the  second  time  to  re- 
cover the  remnant  of  his  people,  which  shall  be  left, 
from  Assyria,  and  from  Egypt,  and  from  Pathros,  and 
from  Cush,  and  from  Elam,  and  from  Shinar,  and  from 
Hamath,  and  from  the  islands  of  the  sea. 

12  And  he  shall  set  up  an  ensign  for  the  nations, 
and  shall  assemble  the  outcasts  of  Israel;  and  gather 
together  the  dispersed  of  Judah  from  the  four  coraers 
of  the  earth. 

22 


254         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

Something  like  a  spirit  of  penitence  like 
that  breathed  forth  in  this  prayer  of  Solo- 
mon is  beginning  to  possess  the  hearts  of 
many  of  the  Jews  abroad.  In  an  article  in 
a  late  number  of  the  London  Quarterly  Re- 
view the  writer  speaks  of  the  increasing  in- 
terest manifested  in  the  Holy  Land,  by  the 
whole  body  of  the  Jews.*  They  no  longer 
conceal  their  hope,  and  their  belief,  that  the 
time  is  not  far  distant  when  '*  the  Lord  will 
set  his  hand  again  the  second  time  to  recover 
the  remnant  of  his  people." 

The  writer  justly  adds,  "this  is  no  new 
sentiment  among  the  children  of  the  disper- 


*  In  Poland,  the  great  focus  of  the  Hebrew  people, 
the  sentiment  is  most  rife  that  the  time  is  near  at  hand 
for  the  turning  of  their  captivity ;  often  times  they 
meet  together  in  their  synagogues  for  humiliation  and 
fasting  ;  and  falling  on  their  knees,  like  Daniel,  (5,  10,) 
with  their  faces  towards  Jerusalem,  offer  these  beau- 
tiful and  touching  petitions — 

"We  are  more  sinful  than  any  other  people,  we 
ought  to  be  ashamed  more  than  any  nation  ;  the  joy  of 
the  Lord  is  gone  from  us,  our  hearts  are  wounded. 
Why? — because  we  have  sinned  against  the  Lord. 
The  temple  is  destroyed  ;  there  is  no  Shechina  abiding 
among  US;  we  are  despised  and  trodden  down  by  all 
people.  The  words  of  the  prophet  are  luUilled,  that 
Israel  is  burned  on  every  side,  yet  he  layeth  it  not  to 
heart.    But  now,  Lord,  look  down  from  heaven,  Thy 


KETURN  OP  THE  JEWS.  255 

sion.  The  novelty  of  the  present  day  does 
not  lie  in  the  indulgence  of  such  a  hope  by 
that  most  venerable  people,  but  in  their 
fearless  confession  of  the  hope,  and  in  the 
approximation  of  spirit  between  Christians 
and  Hebrews,  to  entertain  the  same  behef 
of  the  future  glories  of  Israel,  to  offer  up  the 
same  prayer,  and  look  forward  to  the  same 
consummation." 

After  alluding  to  the  alteration  in  the  dis- 
position of  modern  Gentiles  towards  them 
and  the  benevolent  enterprises  which  have 
been  originated  by  Christians  in  later  years 
to  improve  their  condition,  the  writer  pro- 
ceeds,  '^Encouraged  by  these  proofs  of  a 
bettered  condition,  and  the  sympathy  of  the 
Gentiles  who  so  lately  despised  them,  the 
children  of  Israel  have  become  far  more  open 
to  Christian  intercourse  and  reciprocal  inqui- 
ry.    Both  from   themselves  and  their  con- 


holy  habitation,  and  cause  the  Messiah,  son  of  David, 
speedily  to  appear,  and  according  to  thine  own  prom- 
ise,  sprinkle  clean  water  upon  us,  and  cleanse  us  from 
all  our  filthiness  and  from  all  our  idols." 

What  a  marvellous  thing,  that  this  despised  and  de- 
graded  people,  in  their  suffering  and  baseness  should 
yet  be  minutely  observant  of  the  royal  supplication 
which  fell  from  the  lips  of  Solomon  in  the  palmy  days 
of  Jerusalem. 


256  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

verted  brethren  we  learn  much  of  their  do- 
ings, much  of  their  hopes  and  fears,  that  a 
few  years  ago  would  have  remained  in  se- 
cret.* 

*'  Already,"  says  Mr  M'Neil,  in  his  excel- 
lent lectures  on  Jewish  prophecy,  "  as  we 
have  heard  from  an  eye  witness  of  the  inter- 
esting scene,  some  of  thein  assemble  on  the 


*  One  of  them,  who  lately,  in  the  true  spirit  of 
Moses,  went  a  journey  into  Poland  "unto  his  brethren, 
and  looked  on  their  burdens,"  (Ex.  ii.  11,)  informs  us 
that  "several  thousand  Jews  of  that  country  and  of 
Russia,  have  recently  bound  themselves  by  an  oath, 
that,  as  soon  as  the  way  is  open  for  them  to  go  up  to 
Jerusalem,  they  will  immediately  go  thither,  and  there 
spend  their  time  in  fasting  and  praying  unto  the  Lord 
until  he  shall  send  the  Messiah."  ''Large  bodies, 
moreover,"  he  continues,  "  have  acted  on  this  impulse  ; 
■we  state,  on  the  authority  of  another  gentleman,  him- 
self a  Jewish  Christian,  that  the  number  of  Jews  in 
Palestine  has  been  multiplied  twenty  fold  ;  that,  though 
within  the  last  forty  years,  scarcely  two  thousand  of 
that  people  were  to  be  found  there,  they  now  amount  to 
upwards  of  forty  thousand  ;  and  Ave  can  confirm  this 
Btatemenl  from  other  sources,  that  they  are  increasing 
in  multitude  by  large  annual  additions. 

For  many  years  past  this  desire  has  prevailed  among 
the  Hebrews  ;  old  Sandys  has  recorded  it  in  his  account 
of  Palestine  ;  but  it  has  been  reserved  for  the  present 
day  to  see  the  wish  so  amply  gratified.  In  all  parts  of 
the  earth  this  extraordinary  people,  whose  name  and 
sufferings  are  in  every  nation  under  heaven,  think  and 
feel  as  one  man  on  the  great  issue  of  their  restoration. 


RETURN    OF    THE    JEWS.  257 

eve  of  their  Sabbath,  under  the  walls  of  Je- 
rusalem, where  the  "abomination  of  desola- 
tion standelh,"  and  chant  in  mournful  melo- 
dy the  lamentations  of  their  own  Jeremiah,  or 
sing  with  something  like  a  dawn  of  hope, — 

"^Lord,  build — Lord,  build — 

Build  Thy  house  speedily. 
In  haste!    in  haste  !    Even  in  our  days, 

Build  Thy  house  speedily. 
Lord  build— Lord,  build — 

Build  Thy  house  speedily. 
In  haste  !  in  haste  !  Even  in  our  days, 

Build  Ttiy  house  speedily. 
In  haste !  m  haste!  Even  in  our  days, 

Build  Thy  house  speedily." 

Scriptural  passages  going  to  prove  the  lit- 
eral return  of  the  Jews,  are  too  numerous 
even  to  be  referred  to  here,  much  less  to  be 
quoted.  The  objection  that  all  the  promises 
imply  spiritual  blessings,  no  more  prove  that 
there  willbe  noliteial  restoration  of  the  Jews 
to  their  own  land,  than  it  proves  that  the 
moment  a  man  is  born  into  Christ's  kingdom 
on  earth,  he  shall  no  longer  possess  a  "  liter- 
al" body. 


22* 


SECTION  X. 


EVENING  VISION  CONCLUDED. 


Having  in  the  1 1th  chapter  witnessed  the 
close  of  the  nnorning  vision  of  Daniel,  in  the 
destruction  of  the  little  horn  of  the  goat,  or 
the  eastern  Anti-Christ,  and  the  consequent 
return  of  the  Jews,  to  commence  the  cleans- 
ing of  the  sanctuary,  we  come  now  in  the 
11th  chapter,  to  consider  the  predicted 
close  of  all  earthly  affairs.  In  the  several 
chapters  which  predict  the  events  of  the 
morning  vision,  Daniel  no  where  alludes  to 
the  millennial  reign  of  Christ,  or  the  scenes 
of  the  judgment  or  general  resurrection. 
But  these  are  all  brought  to  view  in  the  ii, 
vii,  and  xii  chapters  which  belong  to  the  eve- 
ning vision.  It  has  been  already  abundantly 


EVENING   VISION.  259 

proved  that  the  prophecies  of  Daniel  are  ar- 
ranged under  two  great  divisions,  the  first 
embracing  the  four  great  empires,  covering 
the  whole  time  of  25'20  years,  the  other  em- 
bracing the  two  middle  empires,  in  their 
several  stages  and  modifications,  existing 
2300  years.  The  first,  includes  the  whole 
period  of  the  Jew's  dispersion,  the  other  em- 
braces only  the  period  from  the  cleansing  of 
the  second  temple,  'to  the  first  preparation 
for  the  cleansing  of  the  millennial  sanctuary. 
There  is  no  intimation,  therefore,  given  by 
Daniel,  that  the  fulness  of  the  Gentiles  will 
come  in  at  the  end  of  the  2300  years,  but  at 
the  end  of  the  three  times  and  a  half  and 
the  destruction  of  the  papal  horn  of  the 
fourth  beast  and  empire.  He  clearly  pre- 
dicts that  event,  as  we  have  seen,  in  the 
2d  and  7th  chapters,  and  shall  now  see  in  the 
12th. 

Chap.  xii.  And  at  that  time  shall  Michael  stand  up, 
the  great  prince  which  standeth  for  the  children  of  thy 
people  ;  and  there  shall  be  a  time  of  trouble,  such  as 
never  was  since  there  was  a  nation  even  to  that  same 
time  ;  and  at  that  time  thy  people  shall  be  delivered, 
every  one  that  shall  be  found  written  iu  the  book. 

This  time  of  trouble  will  be  general,  both 
to  Jews  and  Christians,  and  will  probably 
continue,  more  or  less,  from  the  destruction 


260  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

of  the  eastern  Anti-Christ,  to  the  slaying  of 
the  witnesses,  and  the  downfall  of  the  papal 
Anti-Christ.^  We  are  every  where  taught 
in  the  prophecies,  that  unparalleled  troubles 
await  the  wicked  world  just  before  the  mil- 
lennial reign  of  the  saints,  and  also  at  the 
close  of  the  millennium,  just  before  the  gen- 
eral resurrection  and  judgment  day,  wicked 
men  and  devils  will  have  a  short  time  to 
manifest  their  opposition  to  Christ.  These 
two  periods  of  trouble  are  in  this  verse  view- 
ed at  a  single  glance,  together  with  the  res- 
urrection and  judgment  of  the  righteous  and 
the  wicked. 

Michael  signifies    "  who   is   like    God  ?" 


*  Some  writers  assume  that  tlie  "  lime  of  (rouble  "  spoken 
of  here  was  entirely  fulfilled  upon  the  Jews  at  the  destruction 
of  Jerusalem.  Christ  said  to  his  disciples  in  reference  to  that 
event — Wiien  ye,  therefore,  shall  see  the  abomination  of  deso- 
lation, spoken  of  by  Daniel  the  prophet,  stand  in  the  holy 
Klace.  (whoso  readeth  lei  him  understand,)  then  let  them  which 
e  in  Judea  flee  into  the  mountains  ;  for  then  shall  be  great 
tribulation,  such  as  was  not  since  the  beginning  of  the  world 
to    this  lime,  no,  nor  ever  shall  be. — Mall,  xxiv  :  15,  16.  21. 

This  is  strong  language  certainly,  and  is  quoted  from  Dan- 
iel almost  verbatim.  But  it  presents  no  diflficulty  to  the  liberal 
minded  reader  who  is  familiar  with  the  prophetical  scriptures. 
We  are  only  to  keep  in  mind  the  fact  so  often  alluded  to  in 
these  illustrations,  that  prophecy  receives  a  fulfilment  in  the 
type  as  well  as  a  consummation  in  the  anti-type.  To  under- 
stand the  force  of  the  language  of  Christ  in  reference  to  Jeru- 
salem, the  reader  must  turn  to  the  account  of  the  destruction 
of  that  city,  by  Josephus. 


EVENING    VISION.  261 

And  this  name,  with  the  title  of  the  "great 
Prince  who  stands  for  the  children  of  thy 
people,"  clearly  points  out  Christ,  who  is 
the  judge  of  quick  and  dead. 


2  And  many  of  them  that  sleep  in  the  dust  of  the 
earth  shall  awake,  some  to  everlasting  life,  and  some 
to  shame  and  everlasting  contempt. 

3  And  they  that  be  wise,  shall  shine  as  the  brightness 
of  the  firmament  ;  and  they  that  turn  many  to  right- 
eousness, as  the  stars  for  ever  and  ever. 


The  meaning  of  these  passages  is  so  per- 
fectly obvious,  as  to  require  no  comment. 
The  general  resurrection  ends  the  series  of 
events  predicted  from  the  time  of  Daniel  to 
the  close  of  the  millennial  reign  of  the  church 
on  earth.* 


*  A  very  recent  writer  applies  these  verses,  together  with 
the  whole  of  the  12ll)  chapter,  to  the  period  of  Antiochus 
Epiphanes.  Several  writers  of  past  centuries  apply  the  lllh 
chapter  of  Daniel  to  the  persecutions  of  that  vile  prince.  Few 
will  believe  that  "  when  the  tribulalicns  of  the  Jews  were  re- 
moved by  the  death  of  Antiochus  and  the  victory  of  ftlacha- 
beus,  they  came  up  out  of  llie  dust,  into  which  they  had 
been  crushed,"  and  were  thus  "raised  to  everlasting  life  ; " 
and  that  those  who  had  yielded  in  llie  time  of  trouble  and 
temptation,  "  came  forth  to  everlasting  shame  and  contempt." 
— IMiLLER    Overthrown,  p.  79. 

Nor  will  those  writers  deceive  many,  who  assert  that  all 
this  was  fulfilled  at  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  !  Christ  did 
not  quote   this  language  as  applicable   to   the  destruction  of 


262  ILLUSTRTIONS    OT    PROPHECY. 

After  the  termination  of  the  fourth  king- 
dom, as  Daniel  tells  us,  in  chap,  vii :  18, 
the  "saints  of  the  Most  High  shall  take  the 
kingdom,  and  possess  the  kingdom  for  ever, 
even  for  ever  and  ever.'*  This  was  not  done 
at  the  termination  of  the  third  beast  with 
Mohamedanism,  but  will  be  done  immediate- 
ly after  the  destruction  of  the  fourth.  Also 
chap,  ii :  44,  when  the  first  outline  of  this 
vision  was  closed,  at  the  destruction  of  the 
in^age,  it  is  said,  "  And  in  the  days  of  these 
kings,  shall  the  God  of  heaven  set  up  a  king- 
dom, which  shall  never  be  destroyed,  and  the 
kingdom  shall  not  be  left  to  other  people, 
but  it  shall  break  in  pieces  and  consume  all 
other  kingdoms,  and  it  shall  stand  forever." 


Jerusalem  in  the  24th  chapter  of  Matthew,  but  he  used  lan- 
guage of  similar  import,  which  can  be  uiicierstood  upon  no 
other  principles  of  interpretation  but  that  of  describing  the 
events  of  the  type  and  the  antitype  at  a  glance. 

Immediately  after  the  tribulation  ol  those  days,  shall  the 
sun  be  darkened,  and  the  moon  shall  not  give  her  light,  and 
the  stars  shall  fall  from  heaven,  and  the  powers  of  the  heavens 
shall  be  slinkrn  ; 

And  ihon  shall  appear  the  sign  of  the  Son  of  man  in 
heaven  •  and  then  shall  all  the  tribes  of  the  earth  mourn,  and 
they  shall  see  the  Son  of  man  coming  in  the  clouds  of  heaveu 
with  power  and  great  glory. 

And  he  shall  send  liis  angels  with  a  rrreat  sound  of  a 
trumpet,  and  they  shall  gather  together  his  .;loct  from  the  four 
winds,  from  one  end  of  heaven  to  the  other. 


EVENING   VISION*  263 

The  nature,  therefore,  of  this  millennial 
kingdom  of  Christ  will  be  everlasting,  and 
not  "given  to  other  people"' — it  will  not 
change  hands  like  the  four  great  empires 
just  described,  but  being  established  overall 
the  inhabitants,  (as  the  "  mountain  is  to  fill 
the  whole  earth,")  it  will  embrace  the  gene- 
ral resurrection  and  judgment,  and  stand 
forever  after  the  earth  is  renovated  by  fire. 
The  resurrection  of  those  who  are  not  the 
subjects  of  this  kingdom,  will  be  only  to 
"  shame  and  everlasting  contempt,"  while 
the  eternal  felicity  of  those  vvho  have  "  turn- 
ed many  to  righteousness"  is  denoted  by  the 
most  beautiful  figure, — "They  shall  shine 
as  the  brightness  of  the  firmament,  and  as 
the  stars  forever  and  ever."* 


*  Two  recent  works  on  the  subject  of  prophecy,  productions 
of  the  Boston  Press,  are  matters  of  some  ruriosity.  The  first 
is  entitled  "  Miller  Overthrown,  or  the  False  Prophet  con- 
founded," written  by  one  who  styles  himself  A  Cositfnpo- 
LITK,  a  Roman  Catholic  in  sentiment.  The  other  is  entitled 
"  Miller's  Theory  Utterly  Exploded."  written  by  Otis  A. 
SiciNAfKR.  a  Universalist  preacher.  The  first  holds  that  afl 
the  prophecies  of  Daniel  were  fulfilled  in  Antiochus  Epiplmnes, 
the  other,  that  all  the  prohecies  of  both  the  Old  and  INew  Testa- 
ment were  completcdy  fulfilled  at  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem. 
After  they  have  "  overthrown  "  and  "exploded''  Mr.  Miller 
and  his  theory,  which  by  the  way  will  be  no  great  task,  they 
will  hare  nothins^  to  do  but  to  "  explode  "  one  another.  Some 
instruction  can  be  derived,  even  from  such  works  as  these. 


264         ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

4  But  thou,  0  Daniel,  shut  up  the  words,  and  seal 
the  book,  even  to  the  time  of  the  end  ;  many  shall  run 
to  and  fro,  and  knowledge  shall  be  increased 

The  sealing  of  this  book  of  prophecy  may 
have  a  double  allusion.  It  may  mean  mak- 
ing it  sure,  and  certain  of  fulfilment,  or  it 
may  mean  that  it  reaches  so  far  into  futurity 
as  to  become  an  unknown  or  sealed  book  to 
the  reader  in  the  early  days  of  the  church, 
little  of  which  would  be  understood  "  till  the 
time  of  the  end,"  i.  e.  the  time  of  fulfilling 
the  predictions.  In  the  Revelation,  events 
about  to  take  place  are  represented  as  con- 
tained in  a  "  book  sealed  with  seven  seals, 
and  none  was  found  worthy  to  loose  the 
seals  thereof,"  but  Christ,  the  same  great 
personage  who  now  "standeth  for  the  chil- 
dren of  thy  people."  (verse  1.)  We  have 
arrived  so  near  "  the  time  of  the  end"  that 
many  begin  to  ^'  run  to  and  fro,"  and  the 
facilities  for  so  doing  are  rapid,  and  general 
intercourse  among  men,  as  is  now  seen,  can- 
not escape  the  notice  of  those  who  duly  re- 
gard the  signs  of  the  times. 

If  any  through  indolence,  or  any  other 
motive  interpret  these  words  of  Daniel  as 
a  command  to  ''  seal  up  the  book"  and  not 
read  or  investigate  the  subject  of  the 
prophecies,  they  are  referred  to  Rev.  xxii  :10, 


EVENING    VISION.  265 

where  the  command  is  to  them  repealed  and 
a  new  one  given,   "  Seal  not  the  sayings  of 
the  prophecy  of  this  book  for  the  time  is  at 
hand."=* 

5  Then  I  Daniel  looked,  and  behold,  there  stood 
other  two,  the  one  on  this  side  of  the  bank  of  the  river, 
and  the  other  on   that   side   of  the    bank  of  the  river. 

6  And  one  said  to  the  man  clothed  in  linen,  which 
was  apon  the  waters  of  the  river,  How  long  shall  it  be 
to  the  end  of  these  wonders  ? 

7  And  ]  heard  the  man  clothed  in  linen,  which  was 
upon  the   waters   of  the   river,   when   he  held  up  his 


*  Here  again  those  writers  who  contend  that  all 
prophecy  was  fulfilled  at  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem, 
assert  that  John  wrote  the  Revelation  before  that  city 
was  destroyed,  and  that  all  was  fulfi^Ued  in  that  event. 
Hence  the  language  "  the  time  is  at  hand."  But  toDan- 
iel  ''seal  up  the  book  even  to  the  end."  Such  writers 
quote  also  oar  Savior's  words.  Matt.  xxiv.  34,  35. — 
"  Verily  I  say  unto  you,  this  generation  shall  not  pass 
till  all  these  things  be  fulfilled.  Heaven  and  earth 
shall  pass  away,  but  my  word  shall  not  pass  away." 

Miller  says  that  "  this  generation  "  here  means  all 
the  children  of  God  in  all  succeeding  generations  on 
earth,  but  such  an  evasion  of  the  difficulty,  if  not 
equally  absurd  with  that  of  the  other,  is  equally  fanci- 
ful.  The  only  principle  of  interpretation  which  will 
harmonize  all  these  seeming  difficulties  is  this  again, 
all  the  calamities  which  Christ  pronounced  upon  an 
ungodly  world  in  all  ages  was  typically  fulfilled  on  that 
wicked  generation  of  Jews.  At  the  destruction  of  their 
city  it  is  estimated  that  11  millions  perished,  and  the 
remainder  were  carried  into  captivity  ! 

23 


^60  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PllOPHECY.     ' 

right  hand  and  his  left  hand  unto  heaven,  and  sware 
by  him  that  liveth  for  ever,  that  it  shall  be  for  a  time, 
times  and  a  half;  and  when  he  shall  have  accomplish- 
ed to  scatter  the  power  of  the  holy  people,  all  these 
things  shall  be  finished. 

Daniel  here  discovers  two  angels,  one  on 
each  side  of  the  river  Tigris,  one  of  which 
inquired  of  the  representative  of  our  spot- 
less High  Priest ''clothed  in  linen,"  how  long 
shall  it  be  to  the  end  of  these  wonders?  The 
answer  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  period  as  in 
(Dan.  vii :  '25,)  which  was  a  drawing  of  the 
second  outline  of  the  evening  vision.  "Time, 
times,  and  a  half  i.  e.  1260  years.  This  num- 
ber is  applied  solely  to  the  evening  vision, 
and  gives  the  time  during  which  the  west- 
ern little  horn  "the  man  of  sin,"  which 
arose  out  of  the  Latin  church,  was  to  con- 
tinue. It  is  never  named  in  the  morning 
vision.  The  1260  years  from  the  rise  of  this 
"  little  horn"  extend  to  the  dawn  of  the 
millennium.* 

*  The  OVERTHROWER  of  Mr.  Miller  considers  these 
1260  days  fulfilled  from  the  lime  that  the  fire  of  sacri- 
fice was  taken  from  the  temple  to  the  selling  up 
of  the  image  of  abominaiion  by  Antiochas. — JMiller 

OVERTIIOWN,  p.  82. 

The  EXPLODER  of  Mr.  Miller,  assumes  that  these  1260 
days  were  accomplished  at  the  destruction  of  the  tem- 
ple by  the  Romans,  and  also  that  the  2300  days  and 
the  70  weeks  of  the  morning  vision  came  out  just  at 
the  same  time. — Miller  Exploded,  p.  209. 


EVENING    VISION.  267 

This  is  the  period  when  the  Gentile  por- 
tion of  God's  people  are  to  come  out  of  cap- 
tivity, where  they  have  been  in  mystical 
Babylon,  three  times  and  a  half.  This  point 
has  been  sufficiently  dwelt  upon  in  connect- 
ion with  the  seven  times  captivity  of  the 
Jews.  The  "  scattering  of  the  holy  people," 
therefore,  (verse  7,)  will  be  accomplished 
when  the  Jews  are  restored  from  their  seven 
times  captivity,  and  Christians  from  their 
three  times  and  a  half. 

8  And  I  heard,  but  I  understood  not  ;  then  said  I,  O 
my  Lord,  what  shall  be  the  end  of  these  things  ? 

9  And  he  said.  Go  thy  way,  Daniel :  for  the  words 
are  closed  up  and  sealed  till  the  time  of  the  end. 

iO  Many  shall  be  purified,  and  made  white,  and 
tried  ;  but  the  wicked  shall  do  wickedly ;  and  none  of 
the  wicked  shall  understand ;  but  the  wise  shall  under- 
stand. 

The  answer  was  wholly  unintelligible  to 
Daniel,  and  he  repeats  the  inquiry  and  was 
assured  it  was  not  designed  for  his  instruct- 
ion, but  for  those  who  live  near  "  the  time  of 
the  end,"  and  even  then  none  of  the  wicked 
shall  understand,  but  the  wise  shall  under- 
stand. 

How  far  Christians  at  this  day  are  excusable 
for  their  ignorance  of  the  prophecies  is  a  fear- 
ful question.  None  but  the  wicked  will  mis- 


268  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF    PROPHECY. 

understand.  At  "  the  time  of  the  end," 
many  shall  be  purified  and  made  white." 
Simdar  language  to  that  used  at  the  close  of 
the  other  vision  showing  that  similar  troub- 
les to  those  which  are  to  precede  the  fall  of 
the  eastern  ''  little  horn"  will  also  precede 
the  fall  of  the  western,  and  that  these  troub- 
les will  exert  a  purifying  influence  upon 
Christians,  while  "  the  wicked  shall  do  wick- 
edly," ''  waxing  worse  and  worse,"  none  of 
them  understanding  the  indications  of  the 
remarkable  events.* 

It  is  easy  to  conceive  of  these  troubles 
which  are  to  come  upon  the  righteous  during 
the    unparalleled  commotion   of  a   wicked 


*  Rightly  to  understand  and  apply  the  different  num- 
bers ''■  to  the  times  of  the  end  "  given  in  the  Book  of 
Daniel,  the  reader  by  this  time  cannot  but  see  and  ap- 
preciate the  distinction  between  the  Mornins:  and  Eve- 
nin°:  Visions.  Mr.  Austin,,  in  Skinner's  "  Explosion  " 
of  ''Miller's  Theory,"  page  206,  says,  "It  is  contended 
by  some  commentators,  that  Daniel's  2300  days  or 
years,  refer  to  the  four  great  monarchies  of  the  world." 
Now  it  is  readily  seen  that  the  folly  of  ''  some  com- 
mentators," running  into  such  an  error,  prepares  the 
way  for,  and  gives  more  or  less  plausibility  to  others 
still  more  absurd.  For  Austin  says,  It  is  contended 
with  much  plausibility,  that  it  should  commence  at  the 
founding  of  the  Babylonian  empire,  of  which  the 
prophet'  had  been  speaking.    This  empire  was  estab- 


EVENING   VISION.  269 

world  when  all  kingdoms  are  demolished, 
(Dan.  ii :  45,)  to  make  way  for  the  '•  God  of 
heaven  to  set  up  his  kingdom."  Although 
the  righteous  will  not  be  destroyed  with  the 
wicked,  yet,  like  the  disciples  who  fled  from 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  "into  the 
mountains  of  Judea,"  trials  and  privations 
await  them. 

11  And  from  the  time  that  the  daily  sacrifice  shall 
be  taken  away,  and  the  abomination  that  maketh  deso- 
late set  up,  there  shall  be  a  thousand  two  hundred  and 
ninety  days. 

We  have  seen  that  the  dawn  of  the  mil- 
lennium will  be  the  downfall  of  popery  1260 
years  from  its  maturity.  We  are  here  tauaht 
to  what  period  to  look  for  its  maturity,  viz  : 

lished  by  Nimrod,  2234  years  before  the  birth  of  Christ. 
Sixty-six  years  after  the  birth  of  Christ,  Titus,  the  Re 
man  general,  surrounded  Jerusalem  wdth  his  armies, 
and  commenced  a  siege,  w^hich  resulted  in  the  entire 
destruction  of  that  city  and  people.  Now  add  these  66 
years  to  the  2334  years,  and  we  have  just  2300  years 
from  the  founding  of  Babylon  by  Nimrod,  to  the  siege 
of  Jerusalem.  This  construction  of  the  23U0  years, 
appears  to  me  much  more  plausible  than  that  of  Mr. 
Miller."  Now  it  has  been  abundantly  proved  in  pre- 
ceding sections  of  these  illustrations  that  the  2300  years 
do  not  apply  to  the  four  great  monarchies,  but  to  only 
two  of  them — second  and  third.  The  four  were  to 
exist  2520  years,  and  Daniel  is  here  speaking  of  the 
last  half  of  that  period. 

23* 


270  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

"the  taking  away  of  the  daily  sacrifice," 
M'hich  was  done  when  pure  Christian  wor- 
ship in  the  western  church  gave  place  to  the 
abominations  of  popery,  which  made  "  deso- 
late" every  thing  which  bore  the  slightest 
analogy  to  the  "daily  sacrifice"  in  the  Jew- 
ish temple  while  Jehovah  was  worshipped 
there.  Most  of  the  representations  in  proph- 
ecy relating  to  the  Christian  church  are  bor- 
rowed from  the  temple  w-orship,  and  the  sup- 
pression of  true  worship  in  the  Christian 
church,  the  establishment  of  popery,  "the 
man  of  sin  sitting  in  the  temple  of  God," 
and  the  church  "  driven  into  the  wilderness," 
are  events  so  fully  analagous  to  the  abolit- 
ion of  the  true  worship  of  God  in  the  Jewish 
temple,  as  clearly  to  fix  the  date  of  this  1260, 
if  an  impartial  appeal  be  made  to  historical 
facts.* 


*  The  writer  quoted  in  a  previous  note,  makes  no 
remarks  upon  the  numbers  given  in  this  "Vision,  but 
seems  to  rest  satisfied  after  having  "  utterlj^  exploded 
Miller's  theory,"  of  having  applied  the  2300  years  to 
the  four  monarchies  of  the  world,  and  then  adopts  the 
same 'Mheory,"  if  2300  years  can  be  made  to  com- 
mence with  Nimrod.  He  says,  ''  Seventy  weeks  are 
determined  upon  thy  people,"  &c.  "  The  evident 
meaning  of  this  passage  is,  that  70  weeks  from  the 
time  of  the  going  forth  of  the  commandment  to  rebuild 


EVENING    VISION.  271 

In  the  parallel  passages  in  the  Revelation 
of  John,  these  points  in  history,  are  more 
fully  considered.  For  the  present,  the. pe- 
riod of  "  taking  away  the  daily  sacrifice,'' 
as  the  proper  date  of  the  three  times  and  a 
hnlj\  will  be  placed  in  the  centre  of  the 
seven  times,  the  whole  outline  of  this  vision. 
So  the  reader  will  find  it,  in  the  miniature 
diagram  at  the  close  of  this  section,    and  in 


Jerusalem,  and  the  2300  years  should  end,  and  the 
sanctuary  and  host  should  be  trodden  under  foot.  Now 
these  70  weeks,  or  490  years,  almost  all  commentators 
allow,  ended  at  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem, — conse- 
quently  the  2300  years  terminated  at  that  time  also  !  ". 
He  then  goes  on  to  show  how  the  12th  chapter  of 
Daniel  also  was  fulfilled  at  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem. 
For  instance,  page  209 — "In  reference  to  the  lioolc 
of  Daniel,  the  angel  thus  declared  to  the  prophet :  "And 
when  he  shall  have  accomplished  to  scatter  the  power 
of  the  holy  people,  all  these  things  (these  prophecies) 
shall  be  finished  !  '•  Who  were  the  holy  people  ? — the 
Jews.  When  was  their  power  scattered  ?  At  the  des- 
truction of  their  city,  when  11,000,000  perished,  and  the 
remainder  were  carried  into  captivity!  Then,  accord- 
ing to  this  solemn  declaration  of  God's  holy  angel,  who 
consecrated  his  word  by  an  oaih,  or  asseveration,  at  the 
overthrow  of  that  ill-fated  people,  all  the  prophecies  of 
Daniel  were  accomplished  and  finished  !  The  2300 
days,  or  years,  and  the  70  weeks,  came  to  an  end, — 
those  that  were  figuratively  asleep  in  the  dnst,  awoke, 
— some  to  shame,  and  some  to  "  shine  as  the  brightness 
of  the  firmament." — Miller  Exploded,  p.  209. 

These  extracts  are  made  to  show  the  advantages  of 
truth  when  contrasted  with  error. 


272  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

the  quarto  diagram  of  the  chronology  of  this 
vision,  in  the  appendix. 

Thirty  years,  the  reader  will  perceive,  was 
added  to  the  1260,  inverse  11.  This  must 
be  the  dawn  of  better  times  to  those  who 
live  during  the  ''  time  of  trouble,"  spoken  of 
in  the  first  verse. 

12  Blessed  is  he  that  waiteth,  and  cometh  to  the 
thousand  three  hundred  and  five  and  thirty  days. 

Here  45  years  more  are  added  which  ex- 
tends the  twilight  of  that  glorious  millen- 
nial day  to  75  years.  That  is,  after  the 
close  of  the  1260  years  from  the  time  "the 
man  of  sin"  took  his  scat  in  the  "  temple  of 
God,"  (2d.  Thes.)  will  be  an  intervening 
period  of  75  years,  before  the  full  orbed  Sun 
of  righteousness  ushers  in  the  perfect  mil- 
lennial day.*     This  day  of  a  thousand  years 


*  It  is  so  evident  that  a  day  stands  for  a  year  in 
prophecy,  from  the  many  examples  given  thus  far  in 
these  illustrations,  that  little  more  need  be  said  on  that 
subject.  A  recent  Lecturer  on  the  prophecies,  slated 
that  in  the  books  of  Moses,  Ezekicl,  Daniel,  and  John, 
a  day  stands  for  a  year  in  the  prophetical  parts  of" 
their  writings,  and  that  in  other  portions  of  the  Bible, 
days  and  years  were  given  literally.  This  may  not  be 
taken  for  granted  without  examination.  How  M'as  it 
in  the  prophecy  of   Jonah  ?    He  prophecied  that  the 


EV^ENING    VISION.  273 

is  then  to  be  preceded  by  a  proportionate 
twiliglit  of  75  years,  and  at  its  close  also 
when  "  Satan  shall  be  loosed  out  of  his  pris- 
on." (Rev.  XX :  8.)  There  musi  be  a 
giadual  diminishing  of  the  glory  of  llintday, 
before  he  can  raise  the  spirits  of  wicked  per- 
secutors in  sufficient  numbers,  to  compose 
his  army;  to  "go  up  on  the  breadth  of  the 
earth  to  compass  the  camp  of  the  saints." 
It  needs  no  argument  to  show  that  it 
would  be  more  "  blessed"  for  those  who 
"  wait''  and  come  to  the  full  orbed  day, 
than  to  hve  at  its  dawn  amidst  the  moral 
convulsions  and  earthquakes  which  "lead 
on  the  dreadful  day"  to  the  wicked.  This 
75  years  will  bring  us  to  the  first  or  mystical 
resurrection.     (Rev.    xx:  6.)      John    says 


Lord  would  destroy  Ninevah  in  forty  days,  but  the  city 
stood,  according  to  history,  forty  years.  The  same 
Lecturer  admits  that  in  other  prophets  a  day  sometimes 
stands  for  a  thousand  years,  as  Hosea  vi .  2,  and  Peter, 
"  one  day  is  with  the  Lord  a  thousand  years,"  &c. 
He  must  admit  also  that  in  the  first  named  prophets, 
years  are  sometimes  given  literally,  as,  for  instances, 
the  70  years  captivity  in  Daniel,  the  iOOO  years  reign 
of  the  saints,  and  the  binding  of  saian  1000  years,  as 
we  find  in  Revelation.  These  diff'erent  modes  of  com- 
putation are  to  be  determined  by  their  connections. 
"  Let  him  that  readeth  understand." 


274  ILLTTSTRA.TIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

"  blessed  and  holy  is  he  that  hath  part  in  the 
first  resurrection,"  the  same  period  of  which 
Daniel  says,  "  blessed  is  he  that  vvaiteth  and 
Cometh  to  the  2335  days."*  The  reader  is 
referred  to  another  curious  extract  below. 

13  But  go  thou  thy   way   till   the  end  be  ;    for  thou 
shalt  rest;  and  stand  in  thy  lot  at  the  end  of  the  days. 

Angels  are  "  ministering  spirits"  to  the 
^'  heirs  of  salvation,'*  and  why  should  not 
such  saints  as  Moses,  Elijah  and  Daniel, 
"  stand  in  their  lot  at  the  end  of  these  days" 


*  "And  they  shall  be  given  into  his  hand  until  a 
time,  times,  and  the  dividing  of  time  ;  "  that  is,  until 
the  judgment  shall  sit.  Hence  he  also  says,  "  And 
from  the  time  the  daily  sacrifice  shall  be  taken  away, 
and  the  abomination  that  maketh  desolate  setup,  there 
shall  be  1290  days."  That  is,  the  siege  shall  continue 
so  long.  And  history  assures  us,  thai  such  was  the 
case  ;  that  from  the  time  the  Roman  army  surrounded 
Jerusalem,  to  the  time  of  its  destruction,  was  about 
three  and  a  half  years.  Therefore  it  is  said,  "  Blessed 
is  he  that  waiteth  and  cometh  to  the  thousand  three 
hundred  and  five  and  thirty  days."  Dan.  xii,  12.  Why 
were  those  blessed  that  waited  till  that  time  ?  Because 
they  should  no;  be  hurt  of  the  second  death  ;  because 
judgment  should  not  fall  on  them  ;  because  they  should 
have  a  place  at  the  right  hand  of  the  judge;  because 
then  should  the  kingdom  be  given  to  them,  and  they 
should  possess  it,  and  enjoy  it  in  peace. — "Miller's 
Theory  Utterly  Exploded,"  !!  p.  138. 


EVENING    VISION.  275 

and  witness  the  glorious  triumph  of  the  gos- 
pel on  earth  ?  Moses  and  Elijah  did  meet 
and  confer  with  Christ  on  the  mount  of  trans- 
figuration, (Matt,  xvii :  3,)  and  John  was  in- 
formed by  his  attending  guide  at  the  close 
of  the  communications  to  him,  "I  am  thy 
fellow  servantand  of  thy  brethren  the  proph- 
ets and  of  them  which  keep  the  sayings  of 
this  book."  (Rev.  xxii :  9.)  Which  of  the 
prophets  was  this  so  likely  to  be  as  Daniel  ? 
So  identical  were  their  characters  and  so 
connected  were  their  prophecies. 

Thus  reader  have  we  gone  through  with 
the  visions  of  Daniel,  giving  brief  chronolog- 
ical outlines  of  a  few  other  prophets,  having 
a  bearing  upon  the  captivity  and  final  restor- 
ation of  the  Jews.  The  candid  reader  is  left 
to  judge  whether  the  writer  has  pursued  a 
straight  and    independent    course    or   not. 

The  views  of  writers  holding  various  opin- 
ions have  been  freely  represented  in  notes. 
Among  these,  none  are  more  extraordinary 
than  that  disclosed  by  the  last  quotation.  If 
'  Miller's  Theory'  can  be  ignited  and  "utterly 
exploded"  by  such  a  "match,"  we  will  leave 
the  instrument  to  its  own  "friction"  and  an 
"explosion"  must  soon  follow  by  "spon- 
taneous combustion." 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  DIAGRAM  ON  THE  OPPO- 
SITE   PAGE. 

The  chronological  period  represented  by 
the  figures  on  tne  left,  and  first  column  of 
figures  on  the  riglit  extremities  of  the  long- 
est rule  marks,  are  shown  in  the  diagram, 
page  '203.  The  short  rule  marks  here  repre- 
sent the  three  times  and  a  half,  or  126  )  years, 
supposed  to  commence  in  the  centre  of  the 
long  lines  representing  the  seven  times  or 
2520  years.  Adding  the  30  years  as  in  Dan. 
xii :  11,  and  the  45  years,  as  in  the  follow  ing 
verse  12,  the  result  is  shown  by  the  last 
column  of  figures  on  the  right  extremity  of 
the  short  lines 

No  other  reasons  are  offered  here  for  com- 
mencing the  three  times  and  a  half  in  the 
centre  of  the  seven  times,  except  the  gener- 
al principles  of  analogy.  But  in  the  parallel 
passages  in  the  Revelation,  it  will  be  shown 
how  far  analogy  is  corroborated  by  history, 
in  fixing  the  periods  of  taking  away  the  "daily 
sacrifice"  in  the  Christian  church. 

These  three  times  and  a  half,  or  1260 
years,  were  but  briefly  alluded  to  in 
the  visions  of  Daniel,  but  are  very  fully 
disclosed  in  the  apocalyptic  vision  of  John. 
There  the  1260  years  constitute  the  out- 
lines of  the  important  numbers  given  for 
computation,  but  the  2300  and  2520  years 
relating  to  the  Jews  are  not  even  alluded  to. 


I"" 


Q  'o  'a 

S  i-i 
sit- 

1'^     . 

<«  ^  ■> 

•K.  -^  O 

i  s  o 


o 
o 


^  o 

CO  CM 

Ci 


OD 


00 


GO 
00 


or- 
.  r- 


.CO 

< 

o 

-a 


6g 


ooo 


24* 


SECTION  XI. 


APOCALYPTIC  VISION  OF  JOHN. 


Having  attended  to  the  visions  of  Daniel, 
and  settled  their  proper  distinctions  of  time 
and  place,  the  reader  will  easily  obtain  a  sat- 
isfactory understanding  of  the  chief  outlines 
of  the  Revelation  of  John,  with  only  brief 
illustrations.  These  will  be  mainly  repre- 
sentations to  the  eye,  and  familiar  remarks. 
After  reading  these  with  care,  marking  the 
distinction  of  the  seals  and  trumpets,  the 
reader  may  with  great  interest  and  profit 
take  up  more  voluminous  dissertations,  par- 
ticularly such  as  Smith's  Key  to  the  Reve- 
lation. 


VISIONS    OF    JOHN.  279 

Many  of  those  portions  of  the  Revelation 
which  have  been  most  fully  explained  by 
other  writers,  will  be  but  briefly  touched 
upon  in  these  illustrations.  Distinctions 
overlooked  or  passages  mis-explained,  will 
receive  more  attention. 

The  introduction  of  John  is  strikingly 
beautiful.  It  is  a  preface  to  his  work,  and 
shows  a  characteristic  peculiar  to  the  pro- 
phetic writings,  of  anticipating  the  end  at 
the  beginning  of  a  series  of  consecutive 
events.  As  early  as  the  seventh  verse,  he 
announces  the  coming  of  Christ.  "  Behold 
he  Cometh  with  clouds." 

The  messages  to  the  seven  churches  of 
Asia,  while  ministering  consolation  or  admo- 
nition, contain  predictions  wonderfully  ful- 
filled in  their  subsequent  history,  even  to 
the  present  day. 

Those  writers  who  maintain,  that  in  this 
part  of  the  book,  the  apostle  merely  describes 
allegorically  seven  distinct  periods  of  the 
church  general,  instead  of  seven  local 
churches  then  really  existing,  and  who  with 
equal  facility,  reverse  the  process,  converting 
figure  into  fact,  when  it  suits  their  views, 
will  not  mislead  the  sober  minded,  mtelli- 
gent  reader. 

It  will  be  well  for  the  reader  to  commence 


280  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

this  book  and'read  in  course  till  he  comes  to 
the  part  wholly  symbolical,  and  to  observe 
that  in  this  book,  as  in  Genesis,  the  number 
SEVEN  is  the  symbolical  and  perfect  number. 
We  have  seven  stars,  seven  spirits,  seven 
churches,  seven  candlesticks.  So  also  in 
subsequent  chapters. 

In  the  fourth  chapter  we  come  to  the 
scene  of  subsequent  visions,  and  also  the  ac- 
tors in  those  scenes. 


Chap.  iv.  After  this  I  looked,  and  behold,  a  door  was 
opened  in  heaven,  and  the  first  voice  which  I  heard, 
was  as  It  were  of  a  trun\pet  talking  with  me  ;  which 
said,  come  up  hither,  and  I  will  show  thee  things  which 
must  be  hereafter. 

2  And  immediately  I  was  in  the  Spirit ;  and  behold, 
a  throne  was  set  in  heaven,  and  one  sat  on  the  throne. 

3  And  he  that  sat  was  to  look  upon  like  a  jasper 
and  a  sardine  stone  ;  and  there  was  a  rainbow  round 
about  the  throne  in  sight  like  unto  an  emerald. 

Visions  of  the  Throne. — The  place 
chosen  for  the  presentment  of  the  scenes  of 
this  book,  is  found  to  be  the  third  heavens, 
or  the  space  imagined  to  be  above  our  visi- 
ble heavens,  or  starry  regions.  Looking  up, 
John  seemed  to  see  an  opening  in  the  vault 
in  the  upper  sky,  which  terminates  all  hu- 
man vision  when  looking  upward.  A  trum- 
pet-like voice  summoned  him  thither,  to 
learn  the  events  of  futurity.     Obedient  to 


VISIONS    OF   JOHN.  28 1 

the  call,  John  seemed  to  himself  instantly  to 
lose  sight  of  all  earthly  things.  This  fig- 
urative view  of  the  throne  given  to 
John,  is  upon  the  same  principle  of 
that  given  of  the  New  Jerusalem  in  the 
close  of  the  Revelation.  Similar  figurative 
views  had  before  been  given  of  God,  as  that 
to  Isaiah  (chap,  vi:  1 — 8,)  and  to  Micaiah, 
when  called  before  Ahab,  and  to  Stephen, 
when  about  to  suffer  martyrdom. 

4  And  round  about  the  throne  M^ere  four  and  twenty 
seats  ;  and  upon  the  seats  I  saw  four  and  twenty  elders 
sitting,  clothed  in  white  raiment;  and  they  had  on 
their  heads  crowns  of  gold. 

5  And  out  of  the  throne  proceeded  lightnings,  and 
thunderings,  and  voices.  And  there  were  seven  lamps 
of  fire  burning  before  the  throne,  which  were  the  seven. 
Spirits  of  God. 

It  is  a  fact,  that  the  priests  of  the  Jewish, 
(typical  of  the  gospel  church,)  were  divided 
into  four  and  twenty  courses.  And  among 
the  Levites,  also,  there  were  four  and  twenty 
courses  of  sacred  musicians  for  public  wor- 
ship. These  are  generally  allowed  to  be  the 
emblematic  representatives  of  the  whole 
church  of  God,  both  under  the  old  and  new 
dispensation.  "The  seven  lamps  of  fire," 
are  emblematical  of  the  ''  seven  Spirits  of 
God,"  or  "the  manifold  gifts  of  God,"  com- 
24* 


282  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

municated  to  the  Christian  in  the  ^'  baptism 
of  the  Holy  Ghost  and  of  fire."  ''The 
lightnings  and  thunders,"  he.  allude  to  the 
scenes  on  mount  Sinai,  and  may  denote  the 
establishment  of  the  moral  law  by  the  Gos- 
pel. 

6  And  before  the  throne  there  was  a  sea  of  glass  like 
unto  chrystal  ;  And  in  the  midst  of  the  throne,  and 
round  about  the  throne  were  four  beasts  full  of  eyes 
before  and  behind. 

Before  proceeding  to  describe  this  sea  of 
glass,  and  the  "  four  beasts,"  or  living  creat- 
ures, (as  all  expositors  say  it  should  have 
been  translated,)  the  reader  shall  have  a  rep- 
resentation of  the  great  brazen  sea,  in  the 
temple  of  old,  which  was  for  washing.  This 
vessel  was  called  a  sea,  on  account  of  its 
great  capacity ;  and  in  allusion  to  that  sea, 
the  Christian  dispensation,  was  predicted  as 
a*"  fountain  to  be  opened  for  sin  and  forun- 
cleanness." 

A  sea  of  glass  will  better  illustrate  the  lu- 
cidness  of  the  Christian  dispensation,  where 
the  "  Sun  of  Righteousness"  has  arisen, 
whose  rays  now  pierce  throgh  the  establish- 
ment of  the  gospel  dispensation,  as  rays  of 
light  pervade  a  vessel  of  glass.  The  sea  of 
glass  was  represented  as  before  the  throne 


VISIONS    OF    JOHIf. 


283 


of  God,  as  the  ministrations  of  grace  are  un- 
der the  special  eye  of  Heaven. 


THE  BRAZEN  SEA  OF  THE  TEMPLE. 


The  brazen  sea  in  the  temple,  stood  on 
twelve  brazen  oxen,  three  of  them  facing 
each  cardinal  point  of  the  compass,  a  lively 
emblem  of  the  twelve  apostles,  setting  their 
faces  in  every  direction,  to  "  preach  the  Gos- 
pel to  all  nations."  We  accordingly  find  in 
the  6lh  verse,  the  four  living  creatures  em- 
blems of  the  embassadors  of  Christ,  as 
though  annexed  to  the  sea  of  glass,"  as  the 
oxen  were  to  the  brazen  sea. 


284 


ILLTSTHATIONS    OF    PROPHECY 


The  Christian  church,  as  well  as  the  an- 
cient Jewish  church,  has  her  sea  for  gracious 
cleansing.  The  sea  of  glass  here  represent- 
ed as  supported  by  the  four  living  creatures, 
is  shown  in  another  place,  where  the  victo- 
rious saints  stand  on  its  brim,  '^having  the 
harps  of  God."     (Rev.  xv  :  2.) 


7  And  the  first  beast  was  like  a  lion,  and  the  second 
beast  like  a  calf,  and  the  third  beast  had  a  face  as  a 
man,  and  the  fourth  beast  was  like  a  flying  eagle. 


VISIONS    OF    JOHN.  285 

Gospel  ministers  are  here  denoted  by 
these  emblems,  as  we  shall  see  by  the  part 
they  take  in  the  scenes  of  this  book.  "The 
lion,"  is  the  known  emblem  of  courage  and 
magnanimity, — "  the  calf,"  or  young  ox,  of 
strength,  hardiness,  and  patient  endurance 
of  labor, — "  the  human  face,"  is  the  emblem 
of  prudence,  benevolence  and  compassion, — 
and  "  the  eagle,"  of  penetration,  soaring  be- 
yond earthly  things,  &.c.  All  these  quali- 
ties should  be  combined  in  each  individual 
minister,  but  alas!  they  are  too  often  dis- 
tributed more  sparsely  than  in  this  emblem- 
atical figuie. 


8  And  the  four  beasts  had  each  of  them  six  wings 
about  him  ;  and  they  were  full  of  eyes  within  ;  and 
they  rest  not  day  and  night,  saying,  Holy,  holy,  holy, 
Lord  God  Almighty,  which  was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come. 


These  living  creatures  bear  some  resem- 
blance to  the  cherub  angels  which  Ezekiel 
saw  in  vision.  (Ezekiel  i :  10.)  They  "  had 
each  six  wings,"  but  they  had  each  four 
faces  also,  while  John's  living  creatures  had 
the  same  four  appearances  divided  among 
them.  Angels  may  possess,  singly,  the  ex- 
cellencies which  are  here  divided  among  sev- 
eral men.     These  six  wings  denote  alacritj 


286 


ILLUSTBATIONS    OF    PROPHCTE. 


in  the  service  of  God, — ''  full  of  eyes  within," 
indicates  self-knowledge. 


9  And  when  those  beasts  give  glory,  and  honor,  and 
thanks  to  him  that  sat  on  the  throne,  who  liveth  for 
ever  and  ever, 

10  The  four  and  twenty  elders  fall  down  before  him 
that  sat  on  the  throne,  and  worship  him  that  liveth  for 
ever  and  ever,  and  cast  their  crowns  before  the  throne, 
saying, 

11  Thou  art  worthy,  0  Lord,  to  receive  glory,  and 
honor,  and  power  ;  for  thou  hast  created  all  things,  and 
for  thy  pleasure  they  are  and  were  created. 


Here  we  see  the  representatives  of  the 
church  universal,  ascribing  "glory,  and  hon- 
or, and  thanks,"  to  the  eternal  Jehovah. 
In  the  next  chnpter,  we  shall  find  the  same 
company  worshipping  the  Son,  as  the  re- 
deemer of  sinners,  and  joined  by  the  angels 
in  that  sacred  service. 


SECTION  XIL 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS. 


Future  events  are  supposed  by  the  apos- 
tle John,  as  well  as  by  Daniel  and  other 
prophets,  in  a  beautiful  figure,  to  be  regis- 
tered in  ''  a  book,"  for  the  greater  certainty 
of  them.  Daniel  was  told,  (chapter  xii:  9,) 
in  reference  to  the  last  half  of  his  prophecy, 
in  the  three  times  and  a  half,  that  "  the 
words  were  closed  up  and  sealkd  till  the 
time  of  the  end.'  That  is  the  very  portion 
which  Christ  is  now  about  to  UNseal  and  dis- 
close to  his  serVant  John.  These  are  to  be 
opened  in  order,  for  the  events  do  follow  in 
regular  succession.  The  six  first  terminate 
with  persecuting  pagan  Rome,  but  the  7th 
period,  which  is  always  the  most  important, 
covers  more  space  than  the  whole  preceding 
six;  and  is  divided  into  seven  parts  again. 


u^^. 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS.  289 

Chap,  v  :  And  I  saw  in  the  right  hand  of  him  that 
sat  on  the  throne,  a  book  written  within  and  on  the 
back  side,  sealed  with  seven  seals. 

2  And  I  saw  a  strong  angel  proclaiming  with  a  loud 
voice,  Who  is  worthy  to  open  the  book,  and  to  loose  the 
seals  thereof  ? 

3  And  no  man  in  heaven,  nor  in  earth,  neither  under 
the  earth,  was  able  to  open  the  book,  neither  to  look 
thereon. 

4  And  I  wept  much,  because  no  man  was  found 
worthy  to  open  and  to  read  the  book,  neither  to  look 
thereon. 

5  And  one  of  the  elders  saith  unto  me.  Weep  not ; 
behold  the  lion  of  the  tribe  of  Juda,  the  Root  of  David, 
hath  prevailed  to  open  the  book,  and  to  loose  the 
seven  seals  thereof. 

6  And  I  beheld,  and  lo  in  the  midst  of  the  throne, 
and  of  the  four  beasts,  and  in  the  midst  of  the  elders, 
stood  a  Lamb  as  it  had  been  slain,  having  seven  horns, 
and  seven  eyes,  which  are  the  seven  Spirits  of  God 
sent  forth  into  all  the  earth. 

7  And  he  came  and  took  the  book  out  of  the  right 
hand  of  him  that  sat  upon  the  ihrone. 

8  And  when  he  had  taken  the  book,  the  four  beasts, 
and  four  and  twenty  elders  fell  down  before  the  Lamb, 
having  every  one  of  them  harps,  and  golden  vials  full 
of  odors,  which  are  the  prayers  of  saints. 

9  And  they  sung  a  new  song,  saying.  Thou  art  worthy 
to  take  the  booK,  and  to  open  the  seals  thereof;  for 
thou  wast  slain,  and  hast  redeemed  us  to  God,  by  thy 
blood  out  of  every  kindred,  and  tongue,  and  people, 
and  nation ; 

10  And  hast  made  us  unto  our  God  kings  and 
priests  :  and  we  shall  reign  on  the  earth. 

il  And  I  beheld,  and  I  heard  the  voice  of  many  an- 
gels round  about  the  throne,  and  the  beasts,  and  the 
elders  :  and  the  number  of  them  was  ten  thousand 
times  ten  thousand,  and  thousands  of  thousands  ; 

12  Saying  with  a  loud  voice,  Worthy  is  the  Lamb 
25 


290 


ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 


that  was  slain,  to  receive   power,   and   riches,  and  wis- 
dom, and  strength,  and  honor,  and  glory,  and  blessing. 

13  And  every  creature  Avhich  is  in  heaven,  and  on 
the  earth,  and  under  the  earth,  and  such  as  are  in  the 
sea,  and  all  that  are  in  them,  heard  I  saying.  Blessing, 
ancl  honor,  and  glory,  and  power,  be  unto  him  that  sit- 
teth  upon  the  throne,  and  unto  the  Lamb,  for  ever  and 
ever. 

14  And  the  four  beasts  said,  Amen.  And  the  four 
and  twenty  elders  fell  down  and  worshipped  him  that 
liveih  lor  ever  and  ever. 

We  will  conceive  of  this  book  consisting 
of  seven  volumes  or  rolls  so  that  the  opening 
of  one  seal  laid  open  the  contents  only  of  one 
volume.  John  "  vi^ept  much,"  (verse  4,) 
as  he  supposed  none  were  able  to  "  loose  the 
seals  thereof."  Who  now  are  so  much  con- 
cerned or  grieved  ?  The  way  was  now  pre- 
pared to  commence  the  unfolding  of  future 
events,  and  Christ  alone  is  able  to  show  his 
people  "  the  things  which  must  be  here- 
after." 


FIRST 


SEAL 


OPENED 


The  first  volume  of  the  Apocalyptic  book 
contained  the  events  of  about  30  years,  from 
A.  D.  70to  A.  D.  100. 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS. 


291 


Chap,  vi  :  1  And  T  saw  M'hen  the  Lamb 
opened  one  of  the  seals,  and  I  heard,  as  it 
were  thunder,  one  of  the  four  beasts, 
saying,  Come  and  see. 


As  the  first  seal  was  broken,  and  the  leaf 
unrolled,  future  events  were  presented  to 
view.  The  first  emblem  of  the  gospel  min- 
istry whose  face  was  like  a  lion,  said,  "come 
and  see."  I^et  modern  ministers  follow  this 
example,  and  their  people  will  soon  learn  to 
"  discern  the  signs  of  the  times." 


2  And  I  saw,  and 
behold,  a  white 
horse  :  and  he 
that  sat  on  him 
had  a  bow  ;  and  a 
crown  was  given 
unto  him  ;  and  he 
went  forth  con- 
quering and  to 
conquer. 


This  white  horse  is  an  emblem  of  victory, 
— his  rider  is  no  doubt  emblematical  of  the 
Captain  of  our  salvation,  coming  to  take  ven- 
in  the  destruction  of 


geance  on  his  enemies, 


292 


ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECr. 


the  Jews,  and  riding  "  forth  conquering  and 
to  conquer,"  during  the  apostolic  age  of  the 
church.  Christ  had  predicted  these  very  tri- 
umphs to  take  place  at  this  time,  when  he 
said  to  his  disciples,  "  Verily,  I  say  unto  you, 
there  be  some  standing  here  who  shall  not 
taste  of  death  till  they  see  the  Son  of  man 
coming  in  his  kingdom."  This  referred  es- 
pecially to  the  very  disciple  who  had  this 
vision  and  who  had  just  witnessed  the  de- 
struction of  Jerusalem  and  consequent  calam- 
ities which  awaited  the  Jews  and  now  saw 
the  triumphs  of  the  Gospel. 


SECOND 


OPENED 


The  second  volume  of  this  book  embrac- 
ed a  period  in  the  Roman  history  of  about 
38  years,  from  A.  D.  100  to  A.  D.  138. 


Verse  2  And  when  he  had  opened  the 
second  seal,  I  heard  the  second  beast  say, 
Come  and  see. 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS. 


293 


The  second  emblem  of  the  gospel  minis- 
try, whose  face  was  like  an  ox,  denotes  the 
patient  endurance  of  persecution  and  hard- 
ship which  characterized  the  church  during 
the  persecution  of  the  Roman  emperors  Tra- 
jan and  Adrian. 


4  And  there  went  out 
another  horse  that  was 
red  ;  and  power  was  giv- 
en  to  him  that  sat  thereon 
to  take  peace  from  the 
earth,  and  that  they  should 
kill  one  another  ;  and 
there  was  given  unto  him 
a  great  sword. 


This  seal  embraced  a  period  of  great  ca- 
lamity to  the  Jews,  Greeks  and  Romans. 
The  GREAT  SWORD  aud  RED  HORSE  are  ex- 
pressive emblems  of  this  slaughtering  and 
bloody  period.  Eusebius  says,  upon  the 
events  of  the  times,  "The  doctrines  of  the 
church  of  Christ  daily  increased,  but  the 
calamities  of  the  Jews  were  aggravated  with 
new  miseries.''  Orosius  treating  of  the  same 
times  says,  ''  the  Jews  with  an  incredible 
commotion,  made  wild  as  it  were  with  rage, 
rose  at  once  in  different  parts  of  the  earth.'* 
25* 


294 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


OPENED 


This  volume,  or  seal,  contained  the  pro- 
phetic history  of  about  50  years,  in  the  Ro- 
man empire,  carrying  us  down  to  about  A. 
D.  193. 


Verse  5  And  when  he  had  opened  the 
third  seal,  I  heard  the   third   beast  say 
Come  and  see. 


The  third  living  creature  whose  face  was 
like  a  man,  had  his  station  in  the  south  car- 
dinal point,  and  bishop  Newton  is  curious 
enough  to  trace  the  coincidences  between 
the  four  living  creatures  with  the  origin  of 
the  Roman  emperors  in  each  of  the  four  pe- 
riods. The  third  period  commenced  with 
the  reign  of  Septimius  Severus,  who  was  an 
emperor  from  the  south  being  a  native  of 
Africa. 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS.  2^ 

Verse  5  and  6  And  I  heheld, 
and  lo,  a  black  horse  :  and  he 
that  sat  on  him  had  a  pair  of 
balances  in  his  hand. 

And  I  heard  a  voice  in  the 
midst  of  the  four  beasts  say, 
A  measure  of  wheat  for  a  pen- 
ny,  and  three  measures  of  bar- 
ley for  a  penny  5  and  see  thou  hurt  not  the  oil  and  the 
wine. 

This,  too,  was  a  season  of  calamity.  Af- 
ter the  horrid  and  mutual  slaughter  of  the 
Jews  and  Romans  under  the  second  seal, 
the  great  famine  of  the  third  seal  commenc- 
ed, of  which  the  black  horse  and  the  rider's 
scales  is  an  apt  emblem.  In  Lam.  v:  10, 
we  read,  "  our  skin  is  black,  like  the  oven, 
because  of  the  terrible  famine.''^  "  A  meas- 
ure" here  according  to  the  tables  of  ancient 
measurement,  was  about  one  quart,  and  a 
Roman  penny,  was  about  seven  pence  half 
penny,  English,  and  was  the  common  day 
wages  of  a  laboring  man  and  the  slave.  La- 
boring men,  at  this  day,  would  not  think  a 
quart  of  meal  a  large  allowance  for  one  day, 
without  reserving  any  thing  for  their  families 
or  other  expenses.  The  luxuries  or  fruits  of 
the  earth,  implied  by  hurting  not  the  "  oil 
and  the  wine,"  if  literally  understood,  was 
probably  less  affected  by  the  famine  of  those 
days.      Tertullian  testifies   of  these  times, 


296 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 


that  a  scarcity  occurred  in  every  city,  follow- 
ed by  popular  tumults,  and  aggravated  by 
such  rains  as  seemed  to  threaten  a  second  del- 
uge. Antonius  Pius,  to  escape  being  ston- 
ed, was  obliged  to  open  his  own  treasures  to 
satisfy  the  hunger  of  his  subjects. 


FOURTH 


OPENED 


The  fourth  volume  or  division  of  the  book 
extends  from  A.  D.  193  to  243,  and  some 
think  to  270. 


Verse  7  And  when  he  had  opened  the 
fourlh  seal,  I  heard  the  voice  of  the  fourth 
beast  say.  Come  and  see. 


The  living  creature  who  was  like  a  flying 
eagle,  had  his  station  in  the  north,  and  this 
period,  Newton  says,  commenced  with 
Maximine,  who  was  an  emperor  from  the 
north. 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS.  297 


Verse  8  And  I  looked, 
and  behold,  a  pale  horse  ; 
and  his  name  ihat  sat  on 
him  was  Death,  and  hell 
followed  with  him.  And 
power  was  given  unto 
them  over  the  fourth  part 
of  the  earth,  to  kill  with 
sword,  and  with  hunger 
and  wiih  death,  and  with 
the  beasts  of  the  earth. 


Here  is  proclaimed  war,  and  famine,  and 
pestilence,  and  wild  beasts.  The  famine  of 
the  third  seal  had  not  wholly  ceased  its  rav- 
ages, and  in  oriental  language,  pestilence  is 
styled  "death,"  and  to  the  wicked,  "hell" 
is  also  nearly  allied.  A  fourth  part  of  the 
earth,  here,  probably,  has  allusion  to  the  Ro- 
man empire,  as  such,  more  exclusively,  be- 
ing the  fourth  great  division  of  universal 
power.  The  fourth  beast.  These  "  beasts 
of  the  earth,"  in  verse  8,  with  which  the  Ro- 
man empire  was  threatened  were  barbarous 
nations  hitherto  little  known.  Zosimus 
speaks  of  the  Scythians  and  other  northern 
tribes  beginning  their  work  of  devastation 
upon  the  empire  during  this  period.  Do- 
mestic wars  also  raged.  Numerous  compet- 
itors laid  claim  to  the  imperial  crown  at 
once,   and  twenty   actually  reigned  in  the 


298  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

space  of  sixty  years,   from  Caracalla,  A.  D. 
211,  to  Aurelian,   A.  D.  270. 


fc- 


FIFTH         iSEAIil         OPENED 


I! 
=  1 1 


From  A.  D.  270  to  304. 

9  And  when  he  had  opened  the  fifth  seal,  I  saw  un- 
der the  altar  the  souls  of  them  that  were  slain  for  the 
word  of  God,  and  for  the  testimony  which  they  held  : 

10  And  they  cried  with  a  load  voice,  saying,  How 
long,  0  Lord,  holy  and  true,  dost  thou  not  judge  and 
avenge  our  blood  on  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth  ? 

11  And  white  robes  were  given  unto  every  one  of 
them ;  and  it  was  said  unto  them,  that  they  should 
rest,  yet  for  a  little  season,  until  their  fellow  servants 
also  and  their  brethren,  that  should  be  killed  as  they 
were,  should  be  fulfilled. 

The  fifth  seal,  or  period,  is  remarkable  for  a 
dreadful  persecution  of  the  Christians,  who 
are  represented,  verse  9,  as ''  lying  under  the 
altar,"  (for  the  scene  is  still  in  the  taberna- 
cle or  temple.)  as  sacrifices  newly  slain  and 
oflTered  to  God.  Nine  bloody  persecutions 
had  taken  place,  previous  to  this,  in  the  pa- 
gan Roman  empire.  1st  under  Nero,  2d 
Domitian,  3cl  Adrain,  4th  the  Anthonies,  at 
two  periods,  5th  under  Maximin,  6th  under 
Decius,  7th  under  Gallus,  8th  under  Volu- 
sian,  and  9th  under  Valerian.  Thousands 
upon  thousands  had  thus  been  called  to  seal 


THE   SEVEN  SEALS.  299 

their  testimony  with  their  blood.  After  one 
more  bloody  persecution,  the  pagan  beast 
was  to  receive  a  wound  in  the  head,  which 
would  be  "unto  death,"  till  it  is  "  healed'* 
for  other  purposes.  This  last  persecution 
under  the  pagan  empire,  was  during  the 
reign  of  Dioclesian,  and  lasted  ten  years. 
The  blood  of  millions  of  martyrs  was  now 
calling  for  venoreance  on  that  wicked  em- 
pire.  Eusebius  and  Lactantius,  who  were 
two  eye  witnesses  of  the  last  persecution, 
have  written  large  accounts  of  it.  Orosius 
asserts,  that  it  was  longer  and  more  cruel 
than  any  one  of  the  past.  Sulpicius  Severus, 
too,  describes  it  as  the  most  bitter  persecu- 
tion, which  for  ten  years  depopulated  the 
people  of  God,  at  which  time  all  the  world, 
almost,  was  stained  with  the  blood  of  the 
martyrs,  and  was  never  more  exhausted  by 
any  wars.  The  history  of  these  times  gives 
the  best  comment  on  this  passage,  "  How 
long,  O  Lord,  holy  and  true,  dost  thou  not 
avenge,"  (Slc.  "  White  robes"  of  righteous- 
ness were  "  given  to  every  one  of  them,"  and 
they  exhorted  to  patience,  as  this  was  the  last 
persecution  under  pagan  Rome,  and  ven- 
geance was  about  to  overtake  their  wicked 
persecutors,  after  a  few  "  more  of  their  fel- 
low servants  were  killed,  as  they  were.'* 


300 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 


SIXTH 


OPENED 


Period  of  this  seal 
D.  350. 


from 


Verse  12    And  I  beheld  when  he  had 
opened  the  sixth  seal,  and  lo,  there  was 
a  great  earthquake  ;    and   the   sun   be-, 
came  black  as  sackcloth  of  hair,  and  the 
moon  became  as  blood  ; 

13  And  the  stars  of  heaven  fell  unto 
the  earth,  even  as  a  fig-tree  casteth  her 
untimely  figs,  when  she  is  shaken  of  a 
mighty  wind. 

14  And  the  heaven  departed  as  a 
scroll  when  it  is  rolled  together  ;  and 
every  mountain  and  island  were  moved 
out  of  their  places. 

15  And  the  kings  of  the   earth,  and  ,^ 
the  great  men,  and  the   rich   men,  and 
the  chief  captains,  and  the  mighty  men, 
and  every  bond-man,  and   every   free-.^  ^ 
man,  hid  themselves  in  the  dens  and  in  ^"^^ 
the  rocks  of  the  mountains  ;  ^ 

16  And  said   to   the   mountains  and 

rocks,  Fall  on  us,  and  hide  us  from  the  :^  :^  :^  i)j^ 

face  of  him  that  sitteth  on  the  throne, 

and  from  the  wrath  of  the  Lamb  ;         :^    .jk.   jk>   w 

17  For  the  great  day  of  his  wrath^    ^^  ^  7K 
has  come  ;  and  who  shall  be  able  to 

stand  ? 


Here  is  the  answer  to  the  inquiry  of  the 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS.  301 

martyrs,  under  the  fifth  seal.  This  was  the 
day  of  vengeance  to  the  pagan,  persecuting 
Roman  empire  on  earth.  It  was  a  terrible 
overthrow  of  the  wicked,  when  this  great 
revolution  took  place,  from  paganism  to 
Christianity,  under  the  emperor  Constantine. 
The  language  prefiguring  this  change,  is 
borrowed  from  the  great  judgment  day,  at 
the  end  of  the  world.  The  history  of  this 
signal  event,  is  the  best  commentary  upon 
these  passages,  to  which  the  reader  will  do 
well  to  refer.  Changes  in  the  religion  and 
governments  of  nations  are  always  represent- 
ed in  the  style  of  prophecy,  by  great  com- 
motions in  the  heavens  and  in  the  earth. 
*^  I  will  shake  the  heavens  and  the  earth,"  is 
the  language  of  Haggai,  ii :  6,  21,  in  refer- 
ence to  the  first  coming  of  Christ.  And  this 
'shaking'  says  Paul,  Heb.  xii:  27,  "  signifi- 
eth  the  removing  of  those  things  which  were 
shaken."  And  so  the  prophet  himself  ex- 
plains it.  "  I  will  overthrow  the  throne  of 
kingdoms,  and  I  will  destroy  the  strength  of 
the  kingdoms  of  the  Heathen."  And  when 
was  this  ever  more  literally  fulfilled  than  by 
the  great  concussion  which  displaced  pagan- 
ism and  advanced  Christianity  to  the  impe- 
rial throne  of  the  Roman  world.  See  on — 
Hagg.  ii :  12,  13,  14;  "  And  the  sun  became 
26 


302  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

black  as  sackcloth  of  hair,  and  the  moon  be- 
came as  blood,"  &c.  Isaiah  uses  similar 
language,  xiii :  10,  xxxiv  :  4,  concerning  the 
destruction  of  Babylon  and  Idumea.  And 
Jeremiah  concerning  Judah,  iv  :  23, 
24.  Ezekiel,  concerning  Egypt,  xxxiii :  7. 
Joel,  concerning  Jerusalem,  ii :  10 — 31.  And 
our  Saviour,  himself,  concerning  the  de- 
struction of  Jerusalem,  Matt,  xxiv :  29, 
"The  sun  shall  be  darkened,  and  the  moon 
sliall  not  give  her  light,  and  the  powers  of 
the  HEAVENS  shall  be  shaken."  The 
same  heavens  that  John  saw  shaken 
in  the  dissolution  of  tiie  pagan  Ro- 
man empire.  Mark  has  it,  in  the  parallel 
passage  chap,  xiii :  24 — 26,  "  But  in  those 
days,  after  that  tribulation,  (tribulation  of 
the  Jews  in  which  the  Christians  shared, 
typical  of  the  last  of  the  ten  persecutions,) 
the  sun  shall  be  darkened,  and  the  moon 
shall  not  give  her  light,  and  the  stars  of 
heaven  shall  fall,  and  the  powers  that  are  in 
heaven  shall  be  shaken.  Then  shall  they 
see  the  Son  of  man  coming  in  the  clouds  in 
power  and  glory."  Luke  has  it,  xxi :  25 — 
28,  "  And  there  shall  be  signs  in  the  sun, 
and  in  the  moon,  and  in  the  stars,  and  upon 
the  earth  distress  of  nations,  with  perplexity, 
the  sea  and  the  waves  roaring,  men's  hearts 


THE   SEVEN  SEALS.  303 

failing  them  for  fear,  and  for  looking  for 
those  things  that  are  coming  on  the  earth, 
for  the  powers  of  heaven  shall  be  shaken, 
and  then  shall  you  seethe  Son  of  Man  com- 
ing in  a  cloud  with  power  and  great  glory. 
And  when  these  things  begin  to  come  to 
pass,  then  look  up,  and  lift  up  your  heads, 
for  your  redemption  draweth  nigh."  Then 
Christ  adds,  (verse  32,)  "  Verily  I  say  unto 
you,  this  generation  shall  not  pass  away  till 
all  be  fulfilled."  So  all  this  high  wrought 
figurative  language  was  applicable  to  the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem.  And  equally  so 
to  the  destruction  of  pagan  Rome.  After 
such  language  is  a  few  more  times  typically 
fulfilled  upon  Anti-Christian  powers,  it  will 
receive  its  full  and  final  completion  on  the 
entire  wicked  world.  It  is  customary  with 
the  prophets,  after  they  have  described  a  se- 
ries of  events  in  a  highly  symbolical  and  fig- 
urative diction,  to  represent  the  same  again 
in  plainer  language.  John  observes  the 
same  method  here,  in  verses  15,  16  and  17, 
in  reference  to  the  revolution  in  the  Roman 
empire  in  the  time  of  Constantine.  *'  And 
the  kings  of  the  earth,  and  the  rich  men,  and 
the  chief  captains,  and  the  mighty  men," 
Slc.  That  is,  Maximian,  Galerius,  Maxi- 
mine,  Maxentius,  every  competitor  of  the 


304  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF     PROPHECY. 

imperial  throne,  with  all  their  adherents  and 
followers,  "  hid  themselves  in  the  dens  and 
in  the  rocks,"  expecting  nothing  but  the 
"  wrath  of  the  Lamb,"  for  the  persecutions 
they  had  just  inflicted  upon  his  disciples. 
They  had  rather  the  '*  mountains  would  fall 
on  them,"  than  even  to  meet  the  avenging 
sword  of  Constantine. 

The  description  of  this  seal  winds  up  in 
the  17th  verse  in  these  words — "For  the 
great  day  of  his  wrath  has  come  and  who 
shall  be  able  to  stand  ?"  We  have  seen  that 
it  was  truly  God's  great  day  of  wrath  to  that 
tyranical  empire  which  had  persecuted  his 
saints,  under  its  heathen  imperial  head.  It 
was  a  lively  emblem  and  type  of  the  battle 
of  the  "  great  day  of  God,"  now  not  far  fut- 
ure, and  also  of  the  end  of  the  world.  This 
is  the  death  of  the  Roman  or  fourth  beast, 
(Dan.  vii :  11,)  in  its  dragon  form,  after- 
wards to  be  revived  as  described,  (Rev.  xi,) 
where  he  will  live  again  in  his  nominal 
Christian  character.  All  these  distinctions 
will  be  familiarly  illustrated  in  the  progress 
of  this  work.  This  is  drawing  the  first 
great  outline  of  the  visions  of  John,  who 
follows  the  example  which  Daniel  had  left 
him. 


THE    SEVEN  SEALS. 


305 


Chap,  vii  :  1  And  after  these  things  I  saw  four 
angels  standing  on  the  four  corners  of  the  earih,  hold- 
ing the  four  winds  of  the  earth,  that  the  wind  should 
Rot  blow  on  the  earth,  nor  on  the  sea^  nor   on  any  tree. 


After  the  great  luminaries  of  paganism,  in 
the  Roman  world  has  set  in  everlasting  night, 
and  before  proceeding  to  the  opening  of  the 
seventh  and  last  seal,  there  was  a  short  rest- 
ing time  to  the  church,  like  that  which  fol- 
lowed the  conversion  of  Saul  of  Tarsus, — 
^'  Then  had  the  churches  rest  throughout  all 
Judea,  and  Gallilee,  and  Samaria,  and  were 
edified,  and  walking  in  the  fear  of  the  Lord, 
and  in  the  comfort  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  were 
multiplied."  Acts  ix :  31.  So  now  this 
26* 


306  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

**'  rest"  extends  ''  throughout"  all  the  vast 
dominions  of  the  Roman  empire.  This  tem- 
porary season  of  peace  is  beautifully  illustrat- 
ed by  four  angels  represented  as  standing 
at  the  four  cardmal  points  of  the  compass, 
holding  those  pending  winds,  which  were 
soon  to  sweep  over  the  empire,  by  desolat- 
ing hordes  of  northern  barbarians.  This 
wind  was  to  be  stayed  till  the  chosen  of  God 
in  the  empire,  should  be  brought  in,  and 
sealed  for  Christ.  Winds  are  a  noted  em- 
blem of  such  judgments  on  the  wicked  na- 
tions. See  Jeremiah  xlix  :  36.  "  And  upon 
Elam  will  I  bring  the  four  winds  from  the 
four  quarters  of  Heaven,"  &c. 

Verse  2  And  I  saw  another  angel  ascending  from 
the  east,  having  the  seal  of  the  living  God  ;  and  he 
cried  with  a  loud  voice  to  the  four  angels,  to  whom  it 
was  given  to  hurt  the  earth  and  the  sea, 

3  Saying, 


THE  SEVEN  SEALS.  307 

This  angel,  coming  like  the  natural  sun 
"  from  the  east,"  represents  the  Sun  of  Right- 
eousness ^'coming  with  heahng  in  his  wings." 
"  The  seal  of  the  living  God,"  is  but  the 
impression  of  the  moral  image  of  Christ 
upon  the  soul,  which  must  of  necessity  be 
manifested  in  the  life  of  every  true  disciple. 
Such  Christians  "bear  about  the  marks  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,"  as  visible,  as  the  servants 
in  ancient  times,  exhibited  the  '^  mark"  of 
their  several  masters  in  their  forehead. 

It  was  during  the  palmy  period  of  the 
Church,  in  the  reign  of  Constantino,  that 
this  "  sealing  of  the  servants  of  God" 
took  place,  and  it  was  typical  of  the  far  more 
glorious  reign  ofChrist  after  the  great  *'  Bat- 
tle of  God,"  and  the  destruction  of  wicked 
nations. 

These  were  halcyon  days,  wherein  wars 
and  persecutions  ceased,  and  peace  and 
tranquility  did  every  where  pervade  the 
world  for  a  short  season.  Eusebius  is  co- 
pious in  his  remarks  upon  this  subject,  and 
quotes  the  passage  of  the  Psalmist,  as  ren- 
dered by  the  lxx  :  Ps.  xlvi :  89.  "  Come 
hither,  and  behold  the  works  of  the  Lord, 
what  wonders  he  halh  wrought  in  the  earth  : 
He  maketh  wars  to  cease  unto  the  ends  of 
the  earth,  he  breaketh  the  bow  and  cutteth 


303 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF  PROPHECY. 


the  spear  in  sunder,  he  burneth  the  chariot 
in  the  fire."  These  things  he  says,  "  being 
manifestly  fulfilled  in  our  times,  we  rejoice 
over  them."  Lactatius  in  the  same  tri- 
umphant strain,  says,  "  tranquility  being  re- 
stored throughout  the  world,  the  Church 
which  was  lately  rumed  riseth  again.  After 
the  violent  agitation  of  so  great  a  tempest, 
a  calm  air  and  the  desired  light  become  re- 
splendent. Now  God  hath  relieved  the  af- 
flicted. Now  he  hath  wiped  away  the 
tears  of  the  sorrowful." 
Such  is  the  testimony 
of  contemporary  writers. 
Medals  of  Constantino  are 
still  preserved,  with  the 
head  of  that  emperor 
and  this  inscription  on  one 
side. 


And  on  the  reverse, 


BLESSED    TRANQUILITY. 


During  this  time  of"  tranquility,"  the  ser- 
vants of  "God  were  sealed,"  in  allusion  to 
the  ancient  custom  of  marking  servants  in 


THE    SEVEN    SEALS.  309 

their   foreheads,   to  distinguish   what  they 
were  and  to  whom  they  belonged. 


Verse  4  And  I  heard  the  number  of  them  which 
were  sealed  ;  and  there  were  sealed  a  hundred  and 
forty  and  four  thousand  of  all  the  tribes  of  the  children 
of  Israel. 

5  Of  the  tribe  of  Juda  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Reuben  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Gad  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 

6  Of  the  tribe  of  Aser  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Nepthalim  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 
Of  the  tribe  of  Manases  were  sealed  twelve  thousand. 

7  Of  the  tribe  of  Simeon  were  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand. Of  the  tribe  of  Levi  were  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand. Of  the  tribe  of  Isachar  were  sealed  twelve 
thousand. 

8  Of  the  tribe  of  Zabulon  were  sealed  twelve  thou- 
sand. Of  the  tribe  of  Joseph  were  sealed  twelve 
thousand.  Of  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  were  sealed 
twelve  thousand. 


Here  is  given  the  square  of  the  number  of 
the  twelve  patriarchs  and  apostles  carried 
out  in  thousands,  to  indicate  the  greatness  of 
the  number  of  the  converts  at  this  time.  Jew 
and  Gentile  converts  are  here  arranged,  un- 
der the  twelve  tribes  of  Israel,  as  all  equally 
the  '  seed  of  Abraham,'  in  Christ  and  the  new 
Covenant.  But  the  twelve  tribes  are  not 
here  enumerated  in  the  same  method  and 
order  as  in  other  parts  of  the  Bible.  Judah 
has  the  first  rank  or  precedence.    From  him 


310  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

descended  the  Messiah.  Dan  is  entirely 
omitted, — his  was  the  first  tribe  which  was 
broken,  in  consequence  of  gross  idolatry. 
Ephraim  is  not  mentioned.  His  tribe  first 
rebelled  against  the  house  of  David,  and  fell 
into  idolatry, — and  as  the  reader  will  recol- 
lect from  its  often  repetition  in  the  course  of 
these  illustrations,  "  was  broken  to  be  no 
more  a  people."  Levi  is  substituted  for  one, 
and  Joseph  is  put  instead  of  the  other. 

Verse  9  After  this  I  beheld,  and  lo,  a  great  multi- 
tude, which  no  man  could  number,  of  all  nations,  and 
kindreds,  and  people  and  tongues,  stood  before  the 
throne,  and  before  the  Lamb,  clothed  with  white  robes, 
and  palms  were  in  their  hands, 

10  And  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying,  Salvation  to 
our  God,  which  sitteth.  upon  the  throne,  and  unto  the 
Lamb. 

This  innumerable  company  of  glorified 
saints  were  presented,  in  vision,  to  John,  in 
anticipation  of  the  scenes  of  persecution 
which  are  to  follow  during  the  seventh  seal, 
containing  the  seven  trumpets.  The  reader 
will  bear  this  in  mind,  till  we  come  to  con- 
sider the  war  of  the  papal  beast,  or  the  sec- 
ond modification  of  the  Roman  empire. 

11  And  all  the  angels  stood  round  about  the  throne 
and  about  the  elders  and  the  four  beasts,  and  fell  be- 
fore the  throne  on  their  faces,  and  worshipped  God, 


THE    SEVEN    SEALS.  311 

12  Saying,  Amen  :  Blessing,  and  glory,  and  wisdom, 
and  thanksgiving,  and  honor,  and  power,  and  might, 
be  unto  our  God  for  ever  and  ever,  Amen. 


Angels  having  been  "  ministering  spirits 
sent  forth  to  minister  to  them  that  shall  be 
heirs  to  salvation,"  are  here  represented  as 
sharing  with  the  saints  in  the  glories  of  their 
triumphs. 

Verse  13  And  one  of  the  elders  answered,  saying 
unto  me,  What  are  these  which  are  arrayed  in  while 
robes  ?    and  whence  came  they  ? 

14  And  I  said  unto  him.  Sir,  thou  knowest.  And  he 
said  to  me.  These  are  they  which  came  out  of  great 
tribulation,  and  have  washed  their  robes,  and  made 
them  white  in  the  blood  of  the  Lamb. 

15  Therefore  are  they  before  the  throne  of  God,  and 
serve  him  day  and  night  in  the  temple  ;  and  he  that 
sitteth  on  the  throne  shall  dwell  among  them. 

16  They  shall  hunger  no  more,  neither  thirst  any 
more  ;  neither  shall  the  sun  light  on  them,  nor  any 
heat. 

17  For  the  Lamb  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  throne, 
shall  feed  them,  and  shall  lead  them  unto  living  foun- 
tains  of  water  ;  and  God  shall  wipe  all  tears  from  their 
eyes. 

However  this  language  may  primarily  ap- 
ply to  those  martyrs  who  triumphantly  over- 
came temptation  and  persecution,  during 
the  reign  of  Anti-Christ,  it  is  so  energetic 
that  nothing  short  of  the  future  heavenly  fe- 
licity of  the  saints  can  fully  answer  to  the 


312  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

description.  The  same  "white  robes"  were 
given  to  them  as  to  those  who  faithfully  ''en- 
dured the  cross"  under  the  persecutions  of 
the  pagan  emperors,     (page  298.) 


SEVENTH       air:EAL:3        OPENED 


Period  extending  from  A.  D.  350  to  the 
end  of  the  world. 

Chap,  viii :  1  And  when  he  had  opened  the  seventh 
seal,  there  was  silence  in  heaven  about  the  space  of 
half  an  hour. 

This  silence  of  "  half  an  hour,"  may  be 
illustrative  either  of  the  short  continuance  of 
this  peaceful  state  of  the  church  and  world, 
or  the  solemn  expectation  excited  on  the  oc- 
casion. But  primarily  it  was  an  allusion  to 
a  ceremony  among  the  Jews,  in  the  temple 
worship.  See.  2  Chron.  xxix :  25 — 28. 
Philo  informs  us,  that  the  incense  used 
to  be  offered  before  the  morning,  and 
after  the  evening  sacrifice.  The  trumpets 
sounded  while  the  sacrifices  were  made. 
While  the  priest  went  into  the  temple  to 
burn  incense  all  were  silent,  and  the  peo- 
ple prayed  without  to  themselves.  Luke  i : 
10.      This     vision     was     in     the     morn- 


THE     SEVEN    SEALS. 


813 


ing  of  the  church,  and  agreeable  to 
custom  the  silence  preceded  the  sounding 
of  the  trumpets.  When  the  first  seal  was 
opened  "  there  was  the  voice  of  thunder," 
and  when  the  sixth  seal  was  opened  "  there 
was  a  great  earthquake."  But  at  the  open- 
ing of  the  seventh  it  was  a  time  of  peace 
and  silence  of  the  elements.  They  were  soon 
however,  to  be  put  in  commotion  again. 

Verse  2  And  I  saw  seven  angeis   which  stood  before 
God,  and  to  them  were  given  seven  trumpets. 


314 


ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY. 


After  the  silent  interval,  there  came  forth 
seven  angels,  for  whom  there  was  prepared 
seven  trumpets,  emblematical  of  the  judg- 
ments they  were  appointed  soon  to  execute. 
These  have  been  considered  archangels, 
from  the  fact  that  they  "  stood  before  God." 


Verse  3  And  an- 
other angel  came  and 
stood  before  the  altar, 
having  a  golden  cen- 
ser,and  there  was  giv- 
en unto  him  much  in- 
cense, that  he  should 
offer  it  with  the  pray- 
ers of  all  the  saints 
upon  the  golden  al-^ 
tar  which  was  before  ~~ 
the  throne. 

4  And  the  smoke  of  the  incense,  which  came  up 
with  the  prayers  of  the  saints,  ascended  up  before  God 
out  of  the  angel's  hand. 


To  carry  out  the  significant  figure,  ''anoth- 
er angel"  like  the  priest  offered  the  incense. 
The  altar  of  incense  according  to  the  cere- 
monial law,  Ex.  XXX :  1 — 10,  was  like  a  ta- 
ble, twenty-two  inches  square  and  forty-four 
inches  high,  and  was  to  be  overlaid  with 
pure  gold.  Hence  it  is  here  called  the  golden 
altar. 


THE   SEVEN    SEALS. 


315 


Verse  5  And  the  angel  took  the 
censer,  and  filled  it  with  fire  of  the 
altar,  and  cast  it  into  the  earth  ;  and 
there  were  voices,  and  thundering, 
and  ligntnings,  and  an  earthquake. 


Here  then  the  period  denoted  by  the  half 
hour  of  silence  expired,  and  the  usual  pro- 
phetic signs  and  preludes  of  great  calami- 
ties and  commotions  are  given.  Ezekiel  x  : 
2,  "  took  coals  of  fire  from  between  the  cher- 
ubim," and  scattered  them  over  Jerusalem, 
to  denote  the  judgments  of  God  to  be  exe- 
cuted upon  that  city.  As  the  six  first  seals 
foretold  the  state  and  condition  of  the  Ro- 
man empire  before  and  till  it  became  Christ- 
ian, so  the  seventh  seal  as  divided  in  seven 
trumpets,  as  we  shall  now  see  in  the  next 
section,  will  foreshow  the  condition  of  it 
afterwards. 


SECTION  XIII. 


THE  SEVEN  TRUMPETS. 


Chap,  viii  :  6  And  the 
seven  angels,  which  had 
the  seven  trumpets,  pre- 
pared themselves  to  sound. 


SEVEN    TRUMPETS.  3 11 

As  already  remarked,  the  period  and 
events  of  the  seven  trumpets,  are  contained 
w^ithin  the  last  volume  of  the  book  of  seals. 
Most  of  the  events  which  fulfil  the  trumpets, 
are  secular  or  political  events,  i.  e.  it  de- 
scribes the  judgments  of  God  upon  wicked 
nations,  in  the  lulfilment  of  his  word  in  pro- 
tecting Zion  from  utter  destruction  during 
her  degeneracy  and  wilderness  state,  and 
during  the  reign  of  the  eastern  and  western 
apostacies  and  Anti-Christian  powers.  The 
four  first  trumpets,  principally  denote  the 
gradual  but  complete  subversion  of  the  Ro- 
man empire,  subsequent  to  the  days  of  Con- 
stantino, and  just  previous  to  the  full  estab- 
lishment of  the  reign  of  popery.  The  three 
last  trumpets,  carry  down  the  history  of  the 
world  to  the  final  blast  of  the  *'  trump  of 
the  archangel,"  which  is  the  seventh  and  last 
trumpet  which  will  ever  greet  human  ears. 
It  will  finally  summon  ihe  wicked  to  judg- 
ment, at  the  close  of  the  millennial  reign  of 
saints,  and  usher  in  the  heavenly  jubilee 
to  the  righteous.  The  three  woes  annexed 
are  of  shorter  duration  than  the  sounding 
ot  the  trumpets,  and  relate  to  specific  events, 
as  we  shall  see. 

27* 


318 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


THE  FIRST 


\ 


PERIOD. 


From  about  A.  D.  370  or  80,  to  A.  D.  410. 


Verse  7  The  first  angel  sounded,  and 
there  followed  hail  and  fire  mingled  with 
blood,  and  they  w^ere  cast  upon  the 
earth  ;  and  the  third  part  of  the  trees 
was  burnt  up,  and  all  green  grass  was 
burnt  up. 


Here  the  winds  of  God's  judgments  began 
to  be  let  loose,  which  were  held  by  the  four 
angels,  (chap,  vii:  1.)  The  prophet  Isaiah, 
xxviii :  2,  predicted  the  invasion  of  Israel  by 
the  king  of  Assyria,  in  similar  language.  See 
also  xxix :  6,  and  Ezek.  xiii :  23.  This  first 
hail  storm,  of  Huns  and  Goths,  came  down 


THE    SEVEN   TRUMPETS. 


319 


upon  the  Roman  earth,  soon  after  the  death 
of  Constantino,  and  down  to  the  lime  of  the 
death  of  Theodosius  the  great,  who  died  A. 
D.  395.  These  northern  barbarians  were 
headed  by  Alaric,  in  their  first  ravages  of  the 
empire. 


THE    SECOND 


PET    PERIOD, 


From  A.  D.  410  to  A.  D.  450. 


life,  died 
stroyed. 


8  And  the  second  angel  sounded, 
and  as  it  were  a  great  mountain  burn- 
ing with  fire  was  cast  into  the  sea  ;  and 
the  third  part  of  the  sea  became  blood; 

9  And  the  third  part  of  the  crea- 
tures which  were  in  the  sea,   and  had 

and  the  third  part  of  the  ships  were  dc- 


A  mountain  in  the  style  of  poetry,  and 
prophecy,  means  kingdom.  The  sea 
"  means  peoples,  and  multitudes,  and  na- 
tions, and  tongues."     Rev.  xvii:  15.     "A 


320  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

third  part"  of  the  provinces  of  the  empire 
having  been  devastated  by  the  fire  and  hail  of 
the  Goths  and  Huns,  under  the  first  trumpet, 
bloody  hordes  of  Goths  and  Vandals  invad- 
ed Italy,  the  central  "  third  part"  of  the  em- 
pire, and  turned  its  w^ater  into  blood.  Ala- 
ric  at  the  head  of  a  vast  army  of  Goths  first 
laid  seige  to  Rome,  took  and  plundered  the 
city,  slaying  immense  multitudes  of  its  in- 
habitants. In  June,  455,  Genseric,  at  the 
head  of  three  hundred  thousand  Moors  and 
Vandals  from  Africa,  landed  suddenly  upon 
the  Roman  coast,  and  soon  completed  the 
work  of  blood,  carrying  immense  wealth 
and  multitudes  of  captives  from  Rome.  Old 
Babylon  is  the  constant  apocalyptic  type  of 
Rome.  The  destruction  of  Babylon  was 
symbolized  by  the  tearing  up  of  a  large 
mountain  from  its  base,  and  by  setting  it  on 
fire.  See  Jer.  li :  25.  "  Behold  I  am  against 
thee,  O  destroying  mountain,  sailh  the  Lord, 
which  destroyest  all  the  earth:  and  I  will 
stretch  out  my  hand  upon  thee,  and  roll 
thee  down  from  the  rocks,  and  will  make 
thee  a  burnt  mountain."  By  former  rava- 
ges the  power  of  Rome  had  been  greatly 
weakened,  but  by  Genseric  it  was  so  com- 
pletely broken  that  in  a  little  time  it  was  ut- 
terly subverted. 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS. 


321 


THE    THIRD 


PERIOD. 


From  A,  D.  450  to  A.  D.  500. 

10  And  the  third  angel  sounded, 
and  there  fell  a  great  star  from  heaven, 
burning  as  it  were  a  lamp,  and  it  fell 
upon  the  third  part  of  the  rivers,  and 
upon  the  fountains  of  waters  ; 

11  And  the  name  of  the  star  is  called 
wormwood :  and  the  third  part  of  the  waters  became 
wormwood  ;  and  many  men  died  of  the  waters  because 
they  were  made  bitter. 


If  the  calamities  of  the  second  trumpet 
fell  upon  Italy  and  Rome,  the  centre  or  sea 
of  the  empire,  the  judgments  of  this  trumpet 
must  be  expected  to  fall  on  the  tributary 
streams  or  sources  of  the  empire.     A  falling 


322  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF    PROPHECY. 

star,  in  prophetic  imagery,  will  apply  to  sec- 
ular or  ecclesiastical  rulers.  Isaiah,  address- 
ing the  king  of  Babylon  after  his  fall,  says, 
"  How  art  thou  fallen  from  heaven,  O  Luci- 
fer, son  of  the  morning !"  After  the  bloody 
devastations  of  the  Moors  and  Vandals  the 
source  and  fountain  of  the  Roman  empire 
rapidly  declined.  Momylas,  the  last  empe- 
ror, expired  in  the  year  476,  yet  all  its  an- 
cient forms  of  government  were  not  yet  de- 
stroyed. The  wormwood  and  the  gall  of 
this  trumpet  period  was  poured  into  the  re- 
ligious sources  and  fountains  of  the  empire 
as  well  as  political.  The  Arian  heresy, 
though  it  arose  long  before  this  time,  yet 
being  now  embraced  by  wicked  politicians, 
or  rulers,  it  became  a  bitter  engine  of  perse- 
cution, and  perplexity  to  the  church. 

Mosheim  testifies,  that  toward  the  sixth 
century,  the  Arians  were  triumphant  in  sev- 
eral parts  of  Asia,  Africa,  and  Europe.  Their 
opinions  were  openly  professed,  and  their 
cause  maintained  by  the  Vandals  in  Africa, 
the  Goths,  the  Spaniards  and  Burgundians, 
the  Suevi,  and  the  greater  part  of  the  Gauls, 
and  the  Trinitarians  were  rigorously  treated 
by  them,  particularly  in  Africa  and  Italy. 
The  Arian  power,  and  the  'bitterness'  of  their 
resentments  fell  heavy  upon  the  Trinitarians. 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS 


323 


THE  FOURTH    TR^^m^TET     PERIOD. 

From  A.  D.  500  to  A.  D.  566. 


12  And  the  fourth  angel  sounded, 
and  the  third  part  of  the  sun  was  smit- 
ten, and  the  third  part  of  the  moon,  and 
the  third  part  of  the  stars  ;  so  as  the 
third  part  of  them  was  darkened,  and 
the  day  shone  not  for  a  third  part  of  it, 
and  the  night  likewise. 


The  calamities  which  befel  the  Roman 
empire  under  the  three  former  trumpets, 
first,  under  the  figure  of  a  hail  storm,  de- 
stroying a  third  part  of  the  trees  and  green 
grass, — second,  a  burning  mountain  cast 
into  the  sea  or  centre  of  the  empire,  and  de- 
stroying a  third  part  of  the  inhabitants, — 
and  third,  a  fallen   star  embittering  a  third 


324  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

part  of  the  civil  and  religious  rivers  and  foun- 
tains of  the  empire, — now,  fourthly,  a  third 
part  of  the  sun,  and  moon,  and  stars  of  the 
empire  were  eclipsed,  till  about  the  year  566, 
when  they  set  in  darkness,  and  the  last 
trace  of  the  seven  forms  of  government  in 
the  ancient  Roman  empire  was  extinguished, 
and  Rome  itself  was  reduced  from  being  the 
empress  of  the  world,  to  be  a  poor  dukedom, 
tributary  to  the  Exarch  of  Ravenna.  That 
power  which  Paul  said  letteth  or  prevented 
the  development  of  the  '*  man  of  sin,"  was 
now  ''  taken  away."  All  that  the  Church 
gained  in  outward  splendor  and  prosperity 
under  Constantino,  she  lost  in  purity  in  man- 
ners and  doctrine.  The  holy  simplicity  of 
primitve  Christianity  was  no  more.  The 
heresy  of  Arius  introduced  a  succession  of 
crimes  disgraceful  alike  to  humanity  and  re- 
ligion. Nothing  now  remained  but  for  the 
*'  little  horn"  to  "  pluck  up"  the  three  Goth- 
ic horns,  or  kingdoms,  in  Italy,  "by  the 
roots,"  (Dan.  vii :  8—21,  22,)  and  the 
western  apostacy  would  be  complete.  Then 
the  saints  would  be  "  given  into  his  hands 
for  a  time,  times,  and  the  dividing  of  times." 
This  mighty  spiritual  empire,  "  the  man  of 
sin,"  the  *'  son  of  perdition,"  began  his  ty- 
ranical  reign  soon  after  this  period. 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  325 

Verse  13   And  I  beheld,  and  heard  an  angel  flying 
through  the  midst  of  heaven,  saying  with  a  loud  voice, 


Notice  is  here  proclaimed  by  an  angel 
that  still  greater  and  more  terrible  plagues  are 
in  store  for  the  wicked  nations,  and  annex- 
ed three  distinct  woes  to  the  three  last  trum- 
pets. The  foregoing  trumpets  relate  chiefly 
to  the  downfall  of  the  western  empire,  the 
two  following  relate  chiefly  to  calamities 
coming  on  the  eastern  empire.  The  fore- 
going contain  a  less  compass  of  time,  the 
following  are  of  longer  duration  as  well  as  of 
larger  description.  We  shall  now,  therefore, 
leave  the  history  of  the  western  empire,  and 
follow  the  apostle  over  into  the  eastern  sec- 
tion of  a  degenerate  church,  and  witness  a 
connected  series  of  events  of  near  twelve 
hundred  years.  These  woes  as  we  shall  see, 
are  of  much  shorter  duration  than  the  trum- 
pets to  which  they  are  especially  annexed. 
28 


326 


ILLUSTRATIONS     OF    PROPHECY, 


THE  FIFTH      TK 


PET    PERIOD. 


From    A.   D.  566  to  A.   D.  ISSl.—First 
Wo,  from  612  to  762. 


CHAr.  IX  :  1  And  the 
fifth  angel  sounded,  and 
I  saw  a  star  fall  from 
heaven  imto  the  earth  ; 
and  to  him  was  given  the 
key  of  the  bottomless  pit. 


The  woof  this  trumpet  commenced  soon 
after  606,  when  Mohamed  retired  to  hiscave 
at  Hera.  The  fallen  Nestorian  Monk.  Ser- 
gius,  who  assisted  Mohamed  in  forging  liis 
imposture,  and  who  infused  into  it  all  the 
venom  of  an  apostate  ecclesiastic,  is  by  some 
thought  symbolized  as  this  fallen  star.  About 
the  year  609,  Mohamed   emerged  from  his 


SEVEN    TRUMPETS.  327 

solitary  retreat,  and  three  years  he  silently 
employed  in  the  conversion  of  fourteen  pros- 
elytes, the  first  fruits  of  his  mission.  In  the 
year  612  he  assumed  the  prophetic  office. 
His  fabled  journey  to  heaven  was  announc- 
ed some  years  after.  He  pretended  that  he 
had  been  predicted  in  the  books  of  Moses, 
but  that  the  Jews  had  expunged  these  pre- 
dictions. He  also  declared  that  Jesus  had 
foretold  his  coming.  He  averred  that  he 
was  sent  to  teach  and  propagate  a  religion 
in  the  world  which  was  an  improvement  and 
perfecting  both  of  the  religion  of  Moses  and 
Jesus.  Thus  "  he  magnified  himself  against 
the  prince  of  princes,"  Dan.  viii:  24,  "  and 
spoke  marvelous  things  against  the  God  of 
gods."  Dan.  xi :  36.  See  page  89  and  147. 
These  pretences  w^ould  make  the  emblem  of 
a  "  fallen  star"  more  appropriate  to  Moham- 
ed  than  Sergius,  because  the  former  did 
shine  with  a  very  conspicuous,  though  pes- 
tiferous light.  The  key  given  him  to  "  open 
the  bottomless  pit,"  or  the  abyss  of  hell,  was 
a  very  suitable  emblem  of  the  power  and  in- 
fluence which  Mohamed  acquired,  for  the 
propagation  of  his  satanicai  delusions,  as  if 
hell  itself  had  been  opened  by  him,  and  its 
destructive  exhalations  obscured  the  sun  and 
infected  the  air. 


328  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

2  And  he  opened  the  bottomless  pit ;  and  there  arose 
a  smoke  out  of  the  pit,  as  the  smoke  of  a  great  furnace  ; 
and  the  sun  and  the  air  were  darkened  by  reason  of  the 
smoke  of  the  pit. 


If  Sergius  was  the  fallen  star,  who  opened 
the  door  of  the  bottomless  pit,  then  Moham- 
ed  must  have  been  the  Apollyon,  and  his 
disciples,  the  locusts.  Mohamed  early  be- 
gun to  excite  that  smoke  which  soon  dark- 
ened the  eastern  heaven.  In  this  enterprise 
he  and  his  successors  were  so  prosperous, 
that  the  light  of  Christianity  was  obscured, 
and  in  many  parts  of  the  Greek  church, 
where  once  it  shone  in  the  clearest  manner. 
The  smoke  from  this  abyss,  occasioned  al- 
most total  darkness,  throughout  the  eastern 
church,  *  The  sun  and  the  air  were  dark- 
ened." 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS. 


329 


o  And  there  came  out  ^  ^  ^  ^  ^  ^  ^ 
of  the  smoke  locusts  upon  V  ^  ^  5^  ^  ^  5*^ 
the  earth  ;  and  unto  them 
was  given  power,  as  the 
scorpions  of  the  earth  have 
power. 


The  locusts  which  issued  from  the  smoke 
of  the  pit  or  false  doctrine  of  Mohamed, 
began  early  to  mature  and  rapidly  to  in- 
crease. Poor  Sergius,  who  assisted  to  open 
the  pit,  did  not  live  long  to  see  the  swarms  of 
locusts  which  issued  Irom  thence,  for  it  is 
related  in  history,  that  after  he  had  aided  in 
framing  the  imposture,  and  fully  to  mature 
it,  Mohamed  having  no  further  occasion  for 
him,  to  secure  the  secret,  put  him  to  death. 
Great  armies  of  Arabians  and  Saracens  were 
raised  by  means  of  Mohamed's  imposture, 
to  spread  desolation  through  the  earth.  (See 
Ex.  X  :  6 — 13,  Joel  i :  4 — 7,  ii  :  4 — 7,  ix  : 
18 — 20.)  They  not  only  resembled  locusts 
in  their  numbers,  but  they  also  came  from 
the  same  regions  where  those  destructive  in- 
sects have  in  all  ages  arisen.  These  mysti- 
cal locusts  were  to  have  "  power  as  scor- 
pions," which  signifies  that  wherever  ihey 
28* 


330 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF   PROPHECY. 


flew,  they  would  carry  along   with  them  a 
loathsome  and  deadly  superstition. 

4  And  it  was  commanded  them  that  they  should 
not  hurt  the  grass  of  the  earth,  neither  any  green  thing, 
neither  any  tree  ;  but  only  those  men  which  have^ot  the 
seal  of  God  in  their  foreheads. 

5  And  to  them  it  was  given  that  they  should  not  kill 
them,  but  that  they  should  be  tormented  five  months  : 
and  their  torment  was  as  the  torment  of  a  scorpion, 
when  he  striketh  a  man. 

6  And  in  those  days  shall  men  seek  death  and  shall 
not  find  it ;  and  shall  desire  to  die,  and  death  shall  flee 
from  them. 


^ili 


The  commission  given  to  Apollyon,  and 
his  symbolical  locusts,  only  extended  to  hurt 
those  men  who  had  not  the  *'  seal  of  God  in 
their  foreheads,"  and  those  they  were  to  tor- 
ment rather  than  kill.  It  appears  from  his- 
tory, that  in  the  countries  invaded  by  the 
Saracens  there  had  been  a  very  great  defec- 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  331 

tion  from  primitive  Christianity,  for,  before 
these  ravages  of  the  Saracenic  locusts,  will- 
worship  of  saints  and  martyrs  had  extended 
itself  far  and  wide,  and  to  use  the  language 
of  Daniel  in  reference  to  this  very  time,  the 
"  transgressors  had  come  to  the  full."  The 
ravages  of  the  Saracens  continued  five 
months,  in  prophetic  language,  \.  e.  150 
years,  accordingly,  reckoning  from  612,  the 
year  that  Apollyon  and  his  locusts  issued 
from  the  bottomless  pit,  the  five  months 
would  expire  762.  At  this  time  the  Sara- 
cens ceased  from  their  locust  devastations, 
and  became  a  settled  people.  Such  would 
be  the  "  torment "  from  the  cruelty,  rapacity 
and  lust  of  these  Saracenic  locusts,  that 
death  would  appear  to  vast  numbers  more 
desirable  than  life. 


7  And  the  shapes  of  the  locusts  were  like  unto 
horses  prepared  unto  battle  ;  and  on  their  heads  were 
as  it  were  crowns  Uke  gold,  and  their  faces  were  as  the 
faces  of  men. 

8  And  they  had  hair  as  the  hair  of  women,  and  their 
teeth  was  as  the  teeth  of  lions. 


332  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

9  And  they  had  breast  plates,  as  it  were  breast  plates 
of  iron  ;  and  the  sound  of  their  Mings  was  as  the  sound 
of  chariots  of  many  horses  running  to  battle. 

10  And  they  had  tails  like  unto  scorpions,  and  there 
were  stings  in  their  tails  :  and  their  power  was  to  hurt 
men  five  months. 

11  And  they  had  a  king  over  them,  which  is  the  an- 
gel of  the  bottomless  pit,  whose  name  in  the  Hebrew 
tongue  is  Abaddon,  but  in  the  Greek  tongue  hath  his 
name  Apollyon. 

The  Arabians  were  remarkable  for  their 
skill  in  horsemanship,  and  their  chief  force 
lay  in  cavalry.  Many  authors  have  observed 
that  the  locust  resembled  a  horse.  The  Ital- 
ians called  them  cavalette,  as  it  were  little 
horses.  The  Arabians  wore  their  beards, 
which  rendered  their  "  faces  as  the  faces  of 
men,"  while  the  hair  of  their  heads  was  flow- 
ing, or  plaited,  like  that  *'of  women."  The 
locusts  had  a  shell  or  skin,  which  has  been 
called  their  armor.  The  description  here, 
as  the  reader  will  percieve,  is  partly  in  allus- 
ion to  the  natural  locusts,  and  partly  descrip- 
tive of  the  habits  of  the  Arabs.  All  the  co- 
incidences cannot  be  pointed  out  in  these 
brief  illustrations. 

Five  months  is  here  repeated,  as  their 
commission  "  to  hurt."  This  doubtless  has 
an  allusion  to  the  five  natural  months  which 
literal  locusts  commit  their  ravages  upon  the 
earth;  but  in  prophetic  figure  it  was  fulfilled 


•  SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  333 

when  the  Saracens  became  a  settled  people, 
and  at  the  expiration  of  150  years  they  built 
Bagdad  as  their  capital  and  ceased  their 
ravages.  The  ''king,"  verse  11,  accords 
remarkably  with  the  "  king"  in  Dan.  xi :  3(3. 
See  remarks  section  vi,  page  147. 
One  wo  is  past,  &c, 


Verse  12  One  wo  is  past ;  and__behold,  there  come  two 
woes  more  hereafter. 


At  the  conclusion  of  the  prophecy  respect- 
ing the  Saracens  it  is  added,  "one  wo  is 
past,"  and  as  their  power  to  do  mischief  was 
limited  to  "five  months  "  it  would  seem  to 
limit  the  fifth  trumpet  period  to  150  years 
ending  7G2.  But  it  only  terminates  the 
peculiar  "  wo  "  annexed  to  this  trumpet 
which  ended  with  the  ravages  of  the  Sara- 
cens. The  fifth  trumpet  does  not  cease  its 
sounding  till  the  sixth  commences.  There- 
fore this  trumpet  must  continue  its  sounding 
from  the  time  the  fourth  trumpet  closed  in 
the  western  empire  566,  to  the  time  the  sixth 
commences  its  sounding,  which  was  not  till 
1281,  giving  the  fifth  trumpet  a  period  of 
715  years.  This  is  following  the  analogy 
of  the  seals,  the  last  of  which  is  far  the  long- 
est in  duration  and  important  as  to  events. 


334 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


THE  SIXTH 


PERIOD. 


§B^=^ 


From  A.  D.  1281  till  ''time  timesandan 
half"  shall  be  no  longer. 

13  And  the  sixth  angel  sounded, 
and  I  heard  a  voice  from  the  four  horns 
of  the  golden  altar  which  is  before  God, 

14  Saying  to  the  sixth  angel  which , 
had  the  trumpet,  Loose  the  four  angels 
which  are  bound  in  the  great  river  Eu- 
phrates. 

15  And  the  four  angels  were  loosed,  which  were  pre- 
pared for  an  hour,  and  a  day,  and  a  month,  and  a  year, 
for  to  slay  the  third  part  of  men. 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  335 

16  And  the  number  of  the  army  of  the  horsemen 
■vvere  two  hundred  thousand  thousand  :  and  I  heard  the 
number  of  them. 

The  four  angels  were  the  four  Sultanies 
of  the  Turks,  before  their  organizing  into 
one  empire,  the  capitals  of  which  were  Bag- 
dad, Damascus,  Aleppo,  and  Iconium. — 
These  Sultanies  were  "bound"  to  their  sev- 
eral localities,  or  territories,  near  the  river 
Euphrates,  for  a  long  time,  through  the  in- 
strumentality of  the  crusades.  But  when 
these  wars  ceased,  and  Syria  and  Egypt 
were  abandoned  by  the  Christians  at  the 
latter  end  of  the  13th  century,  then  the  four 
angels,  or  sultanies  near  the  river  Euphrates, 
"  were  loosed."  Ortogrul,  dying  in  the  year 
1288,  was  succeeded  by  his  son  Othman, 
who  in  the  year  1299,  founded  a  new  em- 
pire composed  of  the  remains  of  the  four 
Turkish  sultanies,  called  to  this  day,  the  Ot- 
toman empire.  The  Turks,  like  the  Sara- 
cens, were  all  horsemen,  and  the  number  of 
their  armies  of  cavalry  was  immense.  The 
"  hour,  and  a  day,  and  a  month,  and  a  year," 
verse  15,  reckoned  as  prophetic,  would  be 
391  years  and  15  days.  The  first  conquest 
of  the  Turks  over  the  Christians  took  place 
A.  D.  1281,  and  the  last  success,  by  which 
they  extended  their  dominions,  was  A.  D. 


336 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


1672,  exactly  391  years.  Bishop  Newton 
remarks,  if  more  accurate  and  authentic  his- 
tories of  the  Ottomans  were  brought  to  light, 
and  we  knew  the  very  day  wherein  Cutahi 
was  taken,  as  certainly  as  we  know  that 
wherein  Cameniec  was  taken,  the  like  ex- 
actness might  also  be  found  in  the  fifteen 
days."  Of  the  ending  of  the  Ottoman 
Empire,  and  the  Mohamedan  power,  we 
have  no  prophetic  numbers  given  except  in 
Daniel's  vision  of  2300  days.  That  has  been 
sufficiently  discussed  in  former  sections. 
The  wo  of  this  trumpet  then  ceased,  with 
the  conquests  of  the  Turks  1672,  but  the 
trumpet  will  sound  till  the  angel  comes  down 
and  swears  that  time,  times  and  a  half 
*'  shall  be  no  longer." 


17  And  thus  I  saw  the  horses  in  the  vision,  and 
them  that  sat  on  them,  having  breast  plates  of  fire,  and 
of  jacinth,  and  brimstone  j  and  the  heads  of  the  horses 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  337 

Ivere  as  the  heads  of  lions  ;    and  out  of  their  mouths 
issued  fire,  and  smoke,  and  brimstone. 

18  By  these  three  was  the  third  part  of  men  killed,  by 
the  fire,  and  by  the  smoke,  and  by  the  brimstone,  which 
issued  out  of  their  mouths. 

19  For  their  power  is  in  their  mouths,  and  in  their 
tails  :  for  their  tails  were  like  unto  serpents,  and  had 
heads,  and  with  them  they  do  hurt. 

Here  the  armor  of  the  Turks  and  mode  of 
warfare  was  much  modified  by  more  mod- 
ern inventions.  The  Turks  first  introduce 
the  use  of  fire  arms,  and  we  read  no  more  of 
the  "  breast  plate  of  steel,"  but  of  fire, "  and 
jacinth  and  brimstone,"  evidently  alluding 
to  the  use  of  fire  arms.  Those  who  have 
been  in  action  testify,  that  the  horses  in  bat- 
tle raise  their  heads  to  a  level  with  the  fire- 
arms of  their  riders,  when  in  the  act  of  aim- 
ing at  their  enemies,  and  that  the  fire  and 
smoke  appear  to  issue  from  the  mouths  of 
the  horses. 

As  fire-arms  came  into  use,  shields,  and 
breast  plates,  andother  articles  of  ancient  ar- 
mor ceased  to  be  worn  by  warriors.  None  can 
fail  to  notice  this  coincidence  in  the  descrip- 
tion of  the  Saracens,  and  the  more  modern 
Turkish  horsemen.  The  Turks  wear  no  ar- 
mor but  "  fire  and  jacinth  and  brimstone." 
The  immense  power  of  conquest  with  the 
Turkish  armies,  all  agree,  was  found  to  be  in 
29 


338  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

the  use  of  fire  arms,  and  the  immense  can- 
non which  they  used  in  the  seige  of  cities. 
"The  fire,  and  smoke,  and  brimstone," 
which  issued  out  of  the  "  mouth'*' of  them 
were  found  to  "do  hurt"  in  a  manner  hith- 
erto unknown.  And  hke  the  Saracens,  they 
had  "  power  to  do  hurt  with  their  tails." 
The  same  scorpion  sting  of  the  Mohamedan 
faith  followed  the  conquests  of  the  Turks. 

20  And  the  rest  of  the  men  which  Avere  not  killed  by 
these  plagues  yet  repented  not  of  the  works  of  their 
hands,  that  they  should  not  worship  devils,  and  idols  of 
gold,  and  silver,  and  brass,  and  stone,  and  of  wood  : 
which  neither  can  see,  nor  hear,  nor  walk  : 

21  Neither  repented  they  of  their  murders,  nor  of  their 
sorceries,  nor  of  their  fornication,  nor  of  their  thiefts. 

The  Saracens  were  commissioned  to  tor- 
ment the  "third  part  of  men,"  or  the  Gre- 
cian Empire,  but  not  to  kill  or  subdue  it. — 
The  Turks  were  commissioned  to  kill  or 
subjugate  this  "third  part  of  men."  It  was 
a  political  death  to  the  men  of  the  eastern, 
or  Greek  Church,  and  Empire,  to  be  so  en- 
tirely subverted. 

The  rest  of  the  men  which  were  not 
killed,  "repented  not,"  &c.  The  Greek 
Church  was  not  reformed  by  these  terrible 
calamities,  of  her  Avorship  of  images,  and 
her  spiritual  fornication,  and  sorceries  ;  nor 
did  the  Latin  Church,  take  warning  from 
the  fate  of  her  sister's  downfall. 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  339 

John,  in  the  conclusion  of  the  ninth  chap- 
ter, had  closed  his  account  of  the  corrup- 
tions of  the  Eastern  Church,  and  full  estab- 
lishment of  the  Mohamedan  and  the  Otto- 
man power,  but  having  only  touched  upon 
the  corruptions  of  the  AVestern  Church, 
proceeds  next  to  deliver  the  prophecies  re- 
lating to  that  chain  of  most  lamentable 
events.  Before  entering  upon  the  subject, 
he  is  prepared  for  it  by  an  august  and  con- 
solatory vision.  "  The  mighty  angel,"  de- 
scribed in  the  1st  verse,  is  somewhat  like 
the  angel  in  the  three  last  chapters  of  Dan- 
iel, and  in  the  first  chapter  of  the  Revela- 
tion. In  Daniel,  xii — 7,  he  lifts  his  hand 
to  heaven,  and  swears  "by  him  that  liveth 
forever,"  that  "it  shall  be  for  a  time,  times, 
and  an  half"  But  here  he  swears  that  this 
"time,  times,  and  an  half,"  "should  be  no 
longer,"  "  in  the  days  of  the  voice  of  the  sev- 
enth angel,  when  he  shall  begin  to  sound." 
Observe  here,  that  when  the  seventh  angel 
shall  BEGIN  TO  SOUND,  tlic  1260  years,  and 
the  "mystery  of  God,"  which  Daniel  calls 
"the  scattering  of  the  holy  people,"  shall 
be  finished,"  i.  e.  the  "time,"  of  the  wick- 
ed, "shall  be  no  longer."  The  voice  of  the 
seventh  angel"  will  not  end  his  sounding, 
till  he  wakes  the  dead  at  the  close  of  the 
millenium,  for  the  seventh  is  the  last  truni- 
petj  "  THE  trumpet  of  the  archangel." 


SEVEN  TRUMPETS.  34 i 

Chap,  x  :  And  I  saw  another  mighty  angel  come 
down  from  heaven,  clothed  with  a  cloud  :  and  a  rain- 
bow was  upon  his  head,  and  his  face  was  as  it  were  the 
sun,  and  his  feet  as  pillars  of  fire. 

2  And  he  had  in  his  hand  a  little  book  open  :  and  he 
set  his  right  foot  upon  ihe  sea,  and  ^his  left  foot  upon 
the  earth, 

3  And  cried  with  a  loud  voice,  as  when  a  lion  roar- 
eth  :  and  when  he  had  cried,  seven  thunders  uttered 
Iheir  voices* 

4  And  when  the  seven  thunders  had  uttered  their 
voices,  I  was  about  to  write  ,  and  I  heard  a  voice  from, 
heaven  sa3dng  unto  me,  Seal  np  those  things  which 
the  seven  thunders  uttered,  and  write  them  not. 

5  And  the  angel  which  I  saw  stand  upon  the  sea  and 
Upon  the  earth,  lifted  up  his  hand  to  heaven, 

6  And  sware  by  him  that  liveth  for  ever  and  ever, 
who  created  heaven  and  the  things  that  therein  are, 
and  the  earth,  and  the  things  that  therein  are,  and  the 
sea,  and  the  things  that  are  therein,  that  there  should 
be  time  no  longer. 

7  But  in  the  day  of  the  voice  of  the  seventh  angel, 
when  he  shall  begin  to  sound,  the  mystery  of  God 
should  be  finished,  as  he  has  declared  to  his  servants 
the  prophets. 

8  And  the  voice  which  I  heard  from  heaven  spake 
unto  me  again,  and  said,  Go,  and  take  tlie  little  book 
which  is  open  in  the  hand  of  the  angel  which  standeth 
Upon  the  sea  and  upon  the  earth. 

9  And  I  went  unto  the  angel,  and  said  unto  hinu 
Give  me  the  little  book.  And  he  said  unto  me,  Take  iu 
and  eat  it  up  ;  and  it  shall  make  thy  belly  bitter,  but 
it  shall  be  in  thy  mouth  sweet  as  honey. 

10  And  I  took  the  little  book  out  of  the  angel's 
hand,  and  ate  it  up ;  and  it  was  in  my  mouth  sweet  as 
honey ;  and  as  soon  as  I  had  eaten  it,  my  belly  was 
bitter. 

29* 


342  ILLUSTRATIONS  Or  PROPHFCY 


11  And  he  said  unto  me,  Thou  must  prophecy  again 
before  many  peoples,  and  nations,  and  tongues,  and 
kings. 


It  would  be  interesting,  though  perhaps 
not  profitable  to  every  reader,  to  go  into  a 
comparison  of  the  views  and  speculations 
of  able  commentators,  upon  this  little  book, 
and  the  tenth  chapter  of  Revelation.  The 
writer's  inclination  to  do  this  is  so  strong, 
that  nothing  but  the  most  rigorous  enforce- 
ment of  the  limitation  assigned  to  this 
work,  has  prevented.  This  little  book,  not 
belonging  to  the  sixth  trumpet,  nor  special- 
ly to  the  seventh,  but  a  sort  of  pause  be- 
tween both,  has  been  seized  by  different 
writers,  as  lawful  spoil,  and  annexed  to 
their  several  favorite  systems  of  interpreta- 
tion. For  instance,  one  writer  applies  the 
seven  thunders  to  the  period  of  the  cru- 
sades, another,  to  the  period  of  the  terri- 
ble wars  attendant  on  the  French  Revolu- 
tion, and  a  third,  to  the  formation  of  seven 
different  Societies  of  modern  times.  John 
was  forbidden  to  write  what  the  "  seven 
thunders  uttered,"  and  why  be  "wise  above 
what  is  WRITTEN."  Blessed  be  God,  there 
is  enough  already  written  for  the  instruc- 
tion of  all,  if  all  will  heed  the  exhortation^ 
"  let  him  that  readeth  understand." 


SEVEN   TRUMPETS.  343 

The  reader  need  not  be  troubled  with  a 
notice  of  the  volumes  which  have  been 
written  about  this  "  httle  book,"  constituting 
a  grand  division  in  the  book  of  Revelation. 
For  the  whole  prophecy  is  completely  di- 
vided into  seven  seals,  the  last  seal  subdi- 
vided into  seven  trumpets,  and  the  last  har- 
vest and  vintage  of  the  two  anti-Christian 
powers,  divided  into  seven  vials.  If  due 
heed  be  paid  to  these  divisions,  no  other  is 
necessary.  This  little  book,  or  the  tenth 
chapter,  relates  one  of  those  gracious  in- 
terviews with  John,  which  the  same  angel 
so  often  held  with  Daniel,  when  he  was 
about  to  give  a  pre-intimation  ot  the  calam- 
ities coming  on  his  people.  Such  consola- 
tions were  needed  by  both  these  distinguish- 
ed prophets.  The  anticipations  of  future 
events  were  sweetened  to  John  by  this  inter- 
view for  a  time,  but  the  prophecy  which 
he  was  to  write  for  the  perusal  of  '"  peoples, 
and  nations,  and  tongues,  and  kings,"  con- 
tained many  things  which  would  be  found 
^^  bitter  ^^  during  the  process  of  digestion. 


SECTION  XIV. 


I'llOPHECY  OF  THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


During  the  fifth  and  sixth  trumpet  periods* 

The  apostle  having  given  us  an  outline 
of  the  great  events  under  the  fifth  and 
sixth  trumpets,  in  the  Eastern  or  Greek 
Church,  now  in  the  four  following  chapters 
carries  us  over  into  the  Western  or  Latin 
Church,  and  informs  us  what  events  were 
there  to  take  place  during  the  sounding  of 
the  same  trumpets.  The  events  of  these 
chapters  are  coincident,  giving  a  graphic 
view  of  the  history  of  1260  years,  in  four 
narratives,  running  exactly  parallel,  form- 
ing jointly  a  complete  history  of  the  western 
apostacy.  As  there  is  four  distinct  outlines 
of  the  events  of  this   important  period  of 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES.  345 

prophecy  relating  to  the  Western  Church, 
the  events  of  which,  though  various,  yet  so 
perfect  is  their  synchronism,  it  will  be  con- 
venient for  reference  to  throw  them  into 
four  separate  Sections.  The  eleventh  chap- 
ter connects  the  treading  of  the  holy  city 
under  foot  42  months,  and  the  desolate 
prophecying  of  the  two  witnesses  during 
the  same  period  of  1260  days,  of  the  victory 
of  the  beast  of  the  bottomless  pit  over  them, 
three  days  and  a  half,  and  their  triumphant 
assent  into  the  symbolical  heavens. 

Chap,  xi  :  1  And  there  was  given  me  a  reed  like  unto 
a  rod  :  and  the  angel  stood,  saying,  Kise,  and  measure 
the  temple  of  God,  and  the  altar,  and  them  that  worship 
therin. 

2  But  the  court  which  is  without  the  temple  leave  out, 
and  measure  it  not ;  for  it  is  given  unto  the  Gentiles  : 
and  the  holy  city  shall  they  tread  under  foot  forty  and 
two  months. 

The  temple,  the  altar,  and  they  that  wor- 
ship therein,  are  those  few  Christians,  who, 
in  the  midst  of  a  crooked  and  perverse  gen- 
eration, stood  fast  in  the  faith  of  Jesus 
Christ.  The  court  without  the  temple  sym- 
bolizes those  nominal  Christians,  who  were 
Gentiles  in  practice,  and  whom  the  apostle 
was  commanded  to  leave  out,  as  unworthy 
of  being  measured.  Measuring  the  servants 
of  God  is  equivalent  to  sealing  them.  (See 
Rev.  VII — 3,  or  Sec.  xii,  page  307.) 


346  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF   PROPHECY. 


3  And  I  will  give  power  unto  my  two  witnesses,  and 
they  shall  prophesy  a  thousand  two  hundred  and  three- 
score days,  clothed  in  sackcloth. 

4  These  are  the  two  olive-trees  and  the  two  candle- 
sticks standing  before  the  God  of  the  earth. 

5  And  if  any  man  will  hurt  them,  fire  proceedeih  out 
of  their  mouth,  and  devoureth  their  enemies  ;  and  if 
any  man  will  hurt  them,  he  must  in  this  manner  be 
killed. 

0  These  have  power  to  shut  heaven,  that  it  rain  not 
in  the  days  of  their  prophecy  ;  and  have  power  over 
waters  to  turn  them  to  blood,  and  to  smite  the  earth  with 
all  plagues,  so  often  as  they  will. 

No  time  or  space  can  be  afforded  to  no- 
tice the  many  fanciful  conjectures  concern- 
ing the  Ui'o  witnesses.  All  such  specula- 
tions must  be  left  to  those  who  have  theo- 
ries of  their  own  to  estabhsh.  Christ  says 
to  the  apostle  here,  "I  will  give  power  unto 
iny  two  wil7iesses,^^  during  the  period  of 
the  great  apostacy,  and  although  they  are 
reduced  to  the  lowest  number  by  which 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES.  347 

facts  are  to  be  established,  Dieut.  xix — 15, 
Math,  xviii — 16,  yet  God  will  not  leave 
his  cause  without  a  loitness.  Christ  said 
to  the  twelve,  "  Ye  are  my  tvitnessesJ^ 
"  Ye  are  witnesses  of  these  things."  ''  And 
ye  shall  witness  unto  me  in  Jerusalem,  and 
unto  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth." 
"  We  are  all  witnesses ^''^  says  the  apostle, 
'•God  raised  up  Christ  from  the  dead, 
whereof  we  are  witnesses.''^  "  Who  am  an 
elder  and  a  witness.'^  Passages  showing 
what  constitutes  a  witness  for  the  truth  of 
pure  Christianity,  are  too  numerous  to  be 
quoted.  Paul  says,  "  seeing  we  are  sur- 
rounded with  so  great  a  cloud  of  witness- 
es.^^ But  during  the  darkness  of  Popery, 
they  were  reduced  to  a  few,  and  those 
clothed  in  sackcloth. 

We  find  a  type  for  every  thing  peculiar 
to  these  witnesses,  under  the  Jewish  dispen- 
sation. A  few  only  can  be  noticed  here  : 
"  These  are  the  two  olive  trees,"  like  Josh- 
ua and  Zerubabel,  Zach.  iv — 11,  14. 
"Fire  proceedeth  out  of  their  mouth,"  like 
Moses  and  Elijah,  Num.  xvi ;  2  Kings,  i. 
Their  fire  was  real,  this  symbolical. — 
''  These  have  power  to  shut  heaven,  that  it 
rain  not  in  the  days  of  their  prophecy" — 
that  is,  they  are  like  Elijah,  who  prophe- 
cied  a  want  of  rain  in  the  days  of  Ahab,  1 


348  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

Kings,  xvii.  James,  v — 17,  "  It  rained 
not  on  the  earth  for  the  space  of  three 
years  and  six  months,  which  mystically 
understood,  is  the  same  space  of  time  as 
the  "  forty  and  two  months" — during  this 
time  divine  grace  would  cease  to  fall  on 
those  men  who  despised  Christ's  "witness- 
es." These  two  witnesses,  therefore,  sym- 
bolize a  regular  succession  of  true  witnesses 
for  God,  during  the  reign  of  the  "man  of 
sin,"  not  considered  as  public  teachers, 
merely,  for  both  an  Olive  tree^  and  a  can- 
dlestick are  equally  symbols  of  a  church, 
or  community  of  private  Christians. 

7  And  when  they  shall  have  finished  their  testimony, 
the  beast  that  ascendeth  out  of  the  bottomless  pit  shall 
make  war  against  them,  and  .shall  overcome  them,  and 
kill  them. 

8  And  their  dead  bodies  shall  lie  in  the  street  of  the 
great  city,  which  spiritually  is  called  Sodom  and  Egypt, 
where  also  our  Lord  was  crucified. 

9  And  they  of  the  people,  and  kindreds,  and  tongues, 
and  natiqns,  shall  see  their  dead  bodies  three  days  and 
a  half,  and  shall  not  suffer  their  dead  bodies  to  be  put 
in'  graves. 

iO  And  they  that  dwell  upon  the  earth  shall  rejoice 
over  them,  and  make  merry,  and  shall  send  gifts  one  to 
another  ;  because  these  two  prophets  tormented  them 
that  dwell  on  the  earth. 

The  foe,  that  slays  the  witnesses,  is 
styled  the  beast  of  the  bottomless  pit,  but 
this  is  given  by  anticipation,  for  John  does 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES.  349 

not  describe  this  beast  until  we  come  to  the 
xiii  chapter.  The  death  of  the  witnesses, 
and  the  temporary  triumph  of  their  foes, 
alludes  to  the  struggle  of  the  last  combina- 
tion of  the  wicked  powers  of  Europe,  as  we 
shall  see  in  the  xvii  chapter,  where  the  ten 
horns  shall  for  the  last  time,  "give  their  pow- 
er and  strength  unto  the  beast"— shall  for  the 
last  time,  "make  war  with  the  Lamb,  "(slay 
his  witnesses,)  and  finally  turn  and  "hate 
the  whore,  and  shall  make  her  desolate 
and  naked,  and  shall  eat  her  flesh  and  burn 
her  with  fire."  While  the  witnesses,  dur- 
ing this  last  struggle  lay  dead,  "  in  one  of 
the  streets  of  this  great  city,"  which  is  com- 
posed of  the  ten  horns  or  kingdoms  of  the 
beast,  there  will  be  a  short  triumph  of  the 
wicked.  Three  years  and  a  half  will  ter- 
minate their  merriment,  for  they  shall  see 
Christ's  witnesses  again  at  their  post  in 
the  symbolical  heavens,  or  the  church,  tes- 
tifying to  the  truth,  however  tormenting 
their  message  may  be  to  the  wicked. 

"  The  great  city,"  in  which  the  two  wit- 
nesses are  to  be  slain,  and  lay  unburied  for 
the  space  of  three  days  and  an  half,  sym- 
bolizes with  "  Sodom,"  in  abomination, 
*'  Egypt,"  in  the  oppression  of  God's  people, 
and  "  Jerusalem,"  in  her  apostacy  from  the 
true  worship  and  faith,  verse,  8. 
30 


350 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


11  And  after  three  days^ 
and  a  half  the  Spirit  of  life 
from  God  entered  into  them, 
and  they  stood  upon  their 
feet  ;  and  great  fear  fell  upon 
them  which  saw  them. 

12  And  they  heard  a 
great  voice  from  heaven 
saying  unto  them,  Come  up 
hither.  And  they  ascend- 
ed up  to  heaven  in  a  cloud  ; 
and  their  enemies  beheld 
them. 


13  And  the  same  hour  was  there  a  great  earthquake, 
and  the  tenth  part  of  the  city  fell,  and  in  the  earthquake 
were  slain  of  men  seven  thousand  :  and  the  remnant 
were  affrighted,  and  gave  glory  to  the  God  of  heaven. 

14  The  second  wo  is  past ;  and  behold,  the  third  wo 
Cometh  quickly. 

John  is  still  giving  intimations  of  what 
took  place  in  the  western  empire,  during 
the  sixth  trumpet,  without  special  regard  to 
the  order  of  every  event.  Soon  after  the 
wo  of  the  sixth  trumpet,  so  far  as  it  related 
to  the  conquests  of  the  Turks,  had  ceased, 
John,  in  vision,  hears  an  earthquake.  An 
earthquake,  in  prophecy,  is  the  symbol  of 
a  violent  revolution,  either  religious  or  po- 
litical. Now  what  earthquake  took  place 
in  the  west  soon  after  the  cessasion  of  the 
wo  of  the  sixth  trumpet  in  the  east.     The 


THI    TWO  WITNESSES.  351 

WO  only  is  here  spoken  of  as  past,  for  the 
sixth  trumpet  has  not  yet  finished  its 
blast.  John,  to  complete  the  account  of 
the  two  witnesses,  had  carried  their  his- 
tory beyond  the  period  of  the  earthquake, 
for  they  are  not  to  be  slain  till  the  fall  of 
the  other  nine  parts  of  the  city.  Now  we 
will  suppose  that  while  John's  attention  was 
intensely  fixed  upon  the  scenes  of  the  vis- 
ion in  relation  to  the  two  witnesses,  "  the 
same  hour,"  i.  e.,  the  same  period  of  the 
sixth  trumpet,  is  suddenly  startled  by  a 
"  great  earthquake."  The  natural  inquiry 
would  be,  "what  does  that  mean?"  The 
answer  is,  a  tenth  part  of  the  city  has  fal- 
len. What  city  ?  "  That  great  city  which 
reigneth  over  the  kings  of  the  earth." 
Of  how  many  kingdoms  is  "the  great 
city"  composed?  "The  ten  horns  which 
thou  sawest  are  ten  kings,  which  re- 
ceive power  as  kings,  one  hour  with  the 
beast."  Putting  all  this  information  togeth- 
er, the  reader  need  not  be  told  that  the  only 
violent  revolution  in  one  of  the  ten  king- 
doms of  Europe,  subsequent  to  the  wo,  or 
the  devastating  wars  of  the  Turks,  and 
during  the  sounding  of  the  sixth  trumpet, 
took  place  in  France. 

Any  one  familiar  with  the  scenes  of  the 
French  Revolution,  may  behold  a  perfect 


352  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

type  of  what  will  take  place  at  the  downfall 
of  Babylon,  or  the  "  earthquakes,"  which 
will  result  in  the  fall  of  the  other  nine  parts 
of  "the  great  city."  That  event  accom- 
plished "one  tenth"  of  the  harvest  and 
vintage  of  the  old  Roman  "  earth."  France 
slew  the  witnesses  in  the  type,  i.  e.,  she 
suppressed  their  testimony,  precisely  three 
years  and  a  half— she  "  made  war  with  the 
Lamb,"  and  she  "hated  the  whore,"  and 
did  her  part,  as  one  of  the  "  ten  kings,"  to 
"  eat  her  flesh,  and  burn  her  with  fire,"  so 
that  the  great  papal  harlot  has  never  re- 
gained the  power  and  influence  lost  in  con- 
sequence of  the  French  Revolution.  If 
such  was  the  type  or  tenth  of  the  fall  of 
that  great  city,  and  the  slaying  of  the  wit- 
nesses, what  must  be  the  consummation? 

15  And  the  seventh   angel  sounded ; 
and  there  were  great  voices  in  heaven, 
saying,  The  kingdoms  of  this  world  are 
become  the  kingdoms  of  our  Lord,  and . 
of  his  Christ ;    and  he  shall  reign  for 
ever  and  ever. 
!  16  And  the  four  and  twenty  elders, which  sat  before  God 
on  their  seats,  fell  upon  their  faces,  and  worshipped  God, 

17  Saying,  We  give  thanks,  0  Lord  God  Almighty, 
which  art,  and  wast,  and  art  to  come ;  because  thou 
hast  taken  to  thee  thy  great  power,  and  hast  reigned. 

18  And  the  nations  were  angry,  and  thy  wrath  has 
come,  and  the  time  of  the  dead,  that  they  should  be 
judged,  and  that  thou  shouldst  give  reward  unto  thy 


THE  SEVENTH  TRUMET.  353 

servants  the  prophets,  and  to  the  saints,  and  them  that 
tear  thy  name,  small  and  great ;  and  shouldest  destroy 
them  which  destroy  the  earth. 

19  And  the  temple  of  God  was  opened  in  heaven,  and 
there  was  seen  in  his  temple  the  ark  of  his  testament : 
and  there  were  lightnings,  and  voices,  and  thunderings, 
and  an  earthquake,  and  great  hail. 

John  here  merely  announces  the  sound- 
ing of  the  seventh  trumpet,  and  gives  a 
graphic  view  of  things  in  anticipation.  Sub- 
sequent chapters  will  complete  the  predict- 
ed events.  This  trumpet  will  continue  the 
jubilee  trumpet  of  the  entire  millennial  reign 
of  the  saints,  and  its  last  blast  will  wake 
the  dead,  "  both  small  and  great,  to  stand 
before  God."  The  wo  of  this  trumpet,  like 
the  two  preceding,  is  of  comparatively  short 
duration  ;  it  finishes  the  harvest  and  vint- 
age of  a  wicked  world,  before  the  saints  come 
into  complete  possession  of  the  earth.  John 
had  said,  "  the  second  wo  is  past,  and  behold 
the  third  wo  cometh  quickly."  "A  short 
work  will  the  Lord  make  in  the  earth," 
though  he  will  not  hasten  matters  out  of 
their  due  order,  but  will  conduct  every 
thing  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  analo- 
gy, symmetry,  and  beauty.  It  has  been 
already  42  years  since  the  "tenth  part  of 
the  city  fell,"  so  that  by  the  third  wo  com- 
ing quickly,  does  not  mean  the  accomplish- 
ment of  the  great  events  in  haste. 
30* 


SECTION  XV. 


WAR  OF  THE  DRAGON  WITH  THE  WOMAN. 


Chap,  hi  :  1  And  there  appeared  a  great  wonder  in. 
heaven  ;  a  woman  clothed  with  the  sun,  and  the  moon 
Under  her  feet,  and  upon  her  head  a  crown  of  twelve 
stars  : 

2  And  she,  being  with  child,  cried,  travailing  in 
birth,  and  pained  to  be  delivered. 

The  reader  must  adhere  strictly  to  the 
great  "clue"  to  the  book  of  Revelation, 
which  is  its  internal  geography  and  chro- 
nology, or  he  will  find  himself  roving  abroad 
with  the  conflicting  theories  of  different 
writers.  John,  sometimes,  to  make  his  narra- 
tive complete,  anticipates  a  little  or  reverts 
back  a  little,  but  never  violates  the  true 
order  as  to  time  and  place.  To  give  a  con- 
nected account  of  the  whole  conflict  of  the 
Church  and  Satan  in  all  his  variety  of  visible 
agents,  John  must  commence  with  the  Chris- 
tian era.  He  begins  therefore  with  the  com- 
mon emblem  of  the  true  Church,  an  emblem 


WAR  OF  THE  DRAGON. 


355 


well  known  in  the  sacred  oracles — a  virtu- 
ous female — and  in  this  case,  represented 
appropriately,  in  a  significant  position,  state, 
and  habiliments,  "clothed  with  the  sun," 
with  his  bright  rays  dazzhng  around  her. 
A  lively  figure  of  the  union  of  the  true 
Church  of  Christ  with  him,  "  the  Sun  of 
righteousness."  High  in  the  symbolic,  or 
visible  heaven,  the  moon  would  be  under 
her  feet.  She  was  *'  crowned  with  twelve 
stars,"  "  remaining  stedfast  in  the  Apostles' 
doctrine,"  and  praying  and  laboring  for  the 
birth  of  her  offspring. 


3  And  there  appeared  another  wonder  in  heaven  ; 
and  behold,  a  great  red  dragon,  having  seven  heads  and 
ten  horns,  and  seven  crowns  upon  his  heads. 

4  And  his  tail  drew  the  third  t)art  of  the  stars  of 
heaven,  and  did  cast  them  to  the  earth. 


356  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

The  dragon,  as  the  Apostle  elsewhere 
teaches  us,  is  "  that  old  serpent  called  the 
devil  and  satan."  The  devil's  first  visible 
agent  in  warring  against  the  ''  seed  of  the 
church,"  was  Pagan  Rome  under  its  several 
forms  of  government,  but  especially  the  im- 
perial head.  That  this  was  the  division  of 
Rome  represented  by  the  dragon,  there  can 
be  no  doubt,  for  the  ''  crowns  were  upon  his 
heads."  The  ten  horns  "  were  ten  kings 
which  had  recieved  no  kingdom  as  yet,"  as 
the  Apostle  was  afterwards  instructed.  The 
Roman  power  had  cast  down  the  princes  of 
the  third  part  of  the  earth,  denoted  by  the 
stars. 

The  object  of  this  chapter  seems  to  be  an 
exhibition  of  the  two  contending  parties,  the 
Church  and  the  devil.  The  struggle  was  to 
continue  till  the  millennium,  first  under  the 
dragon,  then  second,  under  the  ten-horned 
beast  from  the  sea,  in  connection  with  the 
ten-horned  beast  from  the  earth,  with  the 
image  of  the  old  beast.  The  w^ar  com- 
menced under  the  dragon,  but  was  much 
longer,  and  of  deeper  interest,  as  carried 
on  between  the  Church  and  papal  see.  The 
defence  of  the  real  Church  was  the  great  prin- 
ciple of  self-sacrifice,  on  the  other  side  they 
met  the  most  cruel  hate  and  persecution. 


WAR  OF  THE  DRAGON. 


357 


4  And  the  dragon  stood  before  the  woman  which  was 
ready  to  be  delivered,  for  to  devour  her  child  as  soon  as 
it  was  born. 


^^^ 


5  And  she  brought  forth 
a  man-child,  who  was  to  rule 
all  nations  with  a  rod  of 
iron :  and  her  child  was 
caught  up  unto  God,  and 
^  to  his  throne. 


This  seems  to  be  a  double  figure,  for  if 
Christ  is  the  man-child  born  to  the  church 
here  alluded  to,  he  is  both  her  Savior  and 
spiritual  successor.  Christ  himself  quoted 
the  passage  which  made  him  •'  the  root  and 
the  offspring  of  David."  It  was  Christ  who 
was  to  rule  all  nations  with  "  a  rod  of  iron," 
Ps.  ii — 9,  and  the  Church  was  instructed  to 
say,  "  unto  us  a  child  is  born,  unto  us  a  son 
is  given,  and  the  government  shall  be  upon 
his  shoulders." 


358 


ILLUSTRAIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


6  And  the  woman  fled  into  the  wilderness,  where  she 
hath  a  place  prepared  of  God,  that  they  should  feed  her 
there  a  thousand  two  hundred  and  threescore  days. 

If  John  went  back  to  connect  the  persecu- 
tions of  the  Church  under  the  pagan  beast, 
or  dragon,  with  the  papal  beast,  it  was 
merely  to  give  a  connected  outline,  for  in 
this  verse  he  has  come  down  again  to  the 
place  from  whence  the  main  drift  of  his  nar- 
rative commences,  the  well  known  period  of 
the  wilderness  state  of  the  Church,  under 
Popery,  for  1260  years. 


7  And  there  was  war  m  heaven  ;  Michael  and  his  an- 
gels fought  against  the  dragon  ;  and  the  dragon  fought 
and  his  angels, 

8  And  prevailed  not ;  neither  was  their  place  found 
any  more  in  heaven. 

9  And  the  great  dragon  was  cast  out,  that  old  serpent, 
called  the  Devil,  and  Satan,  which  deceiveth  the  whole 
world  :  he  was  cast  oat  into  the  earth,  and  his  angels 
were  cast  out  with  him, 

10  And  I  heard  a  loud  voice  saying  in  heaven.  Now 


WAR  OF  THE  DRAGON.  359 

is  come  salvation,  and  strength,  and  the  kingdom  of  our 
God,  and  the  power  of  his  Christ ;  for  the  accuser  of 
our  brethren  is  cast  down,  which  accused  them  before 
our  God  day  and  night. 

11  And  they  overcame  him  by  the  blood  of  the  Lamb, 
and  by  the  Avord  of  their  testimony  ;  and  they  loved  not 
their  lives  unto  ihe  death. 

12  Therefore  rejoice,  ye  heavens,  and  ye  that  dwell 
in  them^  Wo  to  the  inhabiters  of  the  earth,  and  of  the 
sea !  for  the  devil  is  come  down  unto  you,  having  great 
wrath,  because  he  knoweth  that  he  hath  but  a  short  time. 

13  And  when  the  dragon  saw  that  he  was  cast  unto 
the  earth,  he  persecuted  the  woman  which  brought  forth 
the  man-child. 

When  the  angel  was  about  to  give  Daniel 
a  more  full  explanation  of  his  vision  of  the 
Persian  ram,  and  the  Grecian  goat,  he  said, 
"  The  Prince  of  the  kingdom  of  Persia, 
withstood  me  one  and  twenty  days,  but  lo  ! 
Michael,  one  of  the  chief  princes,  came  to 
help  me,"  Dan.  x — 13.  In  verse  20,  he 
says  again,  "  Now  will  I  return  to  fight  with 
the  Prince  of  Persia,  and  when  I  am  gone 
forth,  lo  !  the  Prince  of  Greece  shall  come." 
The  same  warfare,  by  the  same  Michael  and 
his  angels  was  maintained  against  the  dragon, 
and  his  angels,  the  power  of  imperial  Rome, 
till  it  was  cast  out  as  has  been  seen  in  for- 
mer Sections.  "  The  weapons  of  our  war- 
fare," says  Paul,  "  are  not  carnal,  but  spirit- 
ual, and  mighty,  through  God,  to  the  pul- 
ling down  of  strong  holds." 


360 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PRORHECY. 


14  And  to  the  woman  were  given  two  wings  of  a  great 
eagle,  that  she  might  fly  into  the  wilderness,  into  her 
place,  where  she  is  nourished  for  a  lime,  and  times,  and 
half  a  time,  from  the  face  of  the  serpent. 

15  And  the  serpent  cast  out  of  his  mouth  water  as  a 
flood,  after  the  woman,  that  he  might  cause  her  to  be 
carried  away  of  the  flood. 

16  And  the  earth  helped  the  woman ;  and  the  earth 
opened  her  mouth,  and  swallowed  up  the  flood  which  the 
dragon  cast  out  of  his  mouth. 

17  And  the  dragon  was  wroth  with  the  woman,  and 
went  to  make  war  with  the  remnant  of  her  seed, 
which  keep  the  commandments  of  God,  and  have  the 
testimony  of  Jesus  Christ. 


As  soon  as  the  persecuting  power  of 
Rome,  with  its  various  forms  of  government, 
symbolized  by  the  seven  heads  of  the  drag- 
on, had  passed  away,  another,  and  more  ter- 
rible persecuting  power  arose,  as  we  shall 
soon  see,  before  which  the  "  woman,"  or 


WAR  OF  THE  DRAGON.  361 

true  church,  takes  her  flight  into  her  wilder- 
ness state,  for  the  noted  period,  here  repeat- 
ed, of  1260  years,  leaving  the  "  temple  of 
God,"  to  the  "man  of  sin,"  to  "tread  under 
foot  forty  and  two  months."  The  dragon 
improves  his  last  opportunity  to  persecute 
the  woman,  before  resigning  his  seat  to  the 
papal  beast.  But  even  in  her  retreat  she 
has  to  encounter  the  "  serpent "  in  other 
forms. 

The  flood  of  water  cast  out  of  the  mouth 
of  the  serpent's  pagan  agent,  is  supposed  to 
refer  to  the  hordes  of  pagan  Huns,  Goths, 
Vandals,  and  other  barbarian  nations,  which 
inundated  the  western  empiie  about  the 
time  ofthe  flight  of  the  Church.  This  event 
proved  entirely  contrary  to  the  expectations 
of  the  serpent,  for  the  victorious  barbarians 
united  themselves  with  the  vanquished  Ro- 
mans, and  formed  one  people,  embracing  at 
least,  the  forms  of  the  Christian  religion. 
Thus  for  a  time,  "  The  earth  helped  the  wo- 
man." But  the  wrath  ofthe  serpent  found 
new  means  to  persecute,  for  many  of  the 
heathen  princes  from  the  north,  embraced 
the  Arian  faith,  and  persecuted  the  Trinita- 
rians, thus  "  making  war  upon  the  remnant 
of  her  seed,  which  kept  the  commandments 
of  God,  and  have  the  testimony  of  Jesus." 
31 


SECTION  XVI. 


THE  TEN  HORNED  BEAST  OF  THE  SEA. 


Chap,  xiii :  1  And  I  stood  upon  the  sand  of  the  sea^ 
and  saw  a  beast  rise  up  out  of  the  sea,  having  seven 
heads  and  ten  horns,  and  upon  his  horns  ten  crowns, 
and  upon  his  heads  the  name  of  blasphemy. 

Some  expositors  make  this  chapter  syn- 
chronize with  the  xi  and  xiii,  instead  of 
bringing  the  account  of  the  "  war  in  heav- 
en," down  to  the  first  flight  of  the  Church. 

Whether  we  were  right  in  making  the  xii 
chapter  introductory  to  this,  or  whether  it 
should  have  been  placed  as  running  parallel 
with  this,  each  reader  must  judge  for  him- 
self. All  writers  agree  respecting  its  rela- 
tion to  the  subsequent  part  of  the  Revela- 
tion. This,  without  any  dispute,  describes 
the  rise  of  popery  in  the  western  empire,  or 
Latin  Church. 


WAR  OF  THE  DRAGON, 


363 


2  And  the  beast  which  I  saw  was  like  unto  a  leopard, 
•and  his  feet  were  as  the  feet  of  a  bear,  and  his  mouth 
as  the  mouth  of  a  lion  :  and  the  dragon  gave  him  his 
power,  and  his  seat,  and  great  authority. 


The  beast  coming  up  out  of  the  sea,  or 


from   among  "  nations,    and 


tongues, 


and 


peoples,"  combines  all  the  ferocity  of  the 
three  first  empires  predicted  by  Daniel, — 
first,  "  like  unto  a  leopard  " — the  Grecian 
empire  ;  "  feet  as  the  feet  of  a  bear  " — the 
Persian  empire  ;  "  and  his  mouth  like  the 
mouth  of  a  lion" — the  Babylonian  empire. 
To  this  combined  and  concentrated  barbar- 
ism, the  dragon,  or  pagan  Rome,  gave  "  his 
power,  and  his  seat,  and  great  authority." 
What  has  the  Church  to  expect  ? 


364  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


3  And  I  saw  one  of  his  heads  as  it  were  wounded  to 
death  ;  and  his  deadly  wound  was  healed  :  and  all  the 
world  wondered  after  the  beast. 

"  The  head  of  the  beast,  wounded  to 
death,"  represented  the  overthrow  of  impe- 
rial authority,  when  Rome  became  a  duke- 
dom to  the  exarchate  of  Ravenna.  Five  of 
the  heads  of  the  dragon  were  superseded 
before  the  time  John  wrote,  as  will  be  ex- 
plained to  the  apostle.  Chap.  xvii.  The 
imperial  head,  name,  and  dignity,  was  after- 
wards partially  revived  in  the  emperors 
of  Germany, — its  power  still  further  healed 
or  restored  by  Bonaparte,  and  may  be  whol- 
ly recovered  for  a  time,  yet,  before  the 
beast  "goeth  into  perdition."  The  pagan, 
persecuting  power  of  this  head  received  a 
wound  by  Constantine,  though  the  imperial 
power  or  head,  continued  sound  for  centu- 
ries afterwards. 


WORSHIP  OF  THE  DRAGON. 


365 


4  And  they  wor 
shipped  the  dragon 
which  gave  power 
unto  the  beast :  and 
they  worshipped  the 
beast,saying,  Who  is 
like  unto  the  beast  ? 
who  is  able  to  make 
war  with  him  ? 


''  All  the"  Roman  "  world;  wondered  af- 
ter the  beast."  Thus  they  virtually  worship- 
ped the  dragon,  by  submitting  without  re- 
serve, to  tlie  same  idolatrous,  persecuting 
power  as  before,  only  in  another  form.  It 
must  ever  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  beast 
which  rises  out  of  the  sea,  to  which  this 
dragon  first  gave  his  seat  and  power,  is  the 
secular  Roman  beast,  corresponding  with 
Daniel's  terrible  beast.  Papal  Rome,  an- 
swering to  the  little  horn  of  Diniers  beast, 
is  another  power  to  be  described  in  the  next 
Section.  Compare  Dan.  vii — 7,  with  these 
passages,  and  Rev.  xvii.  A  right  under- 
standing of  the  distinction  between  the  sec- 
ular and  papal  powers  of  Rome,  is  essential 
to  every  reader.  Although  these  powers 
acted  in  concert,  they  exercised  distinct 
functions. 

31* 


366 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY, 


5  And  there  was  given  unto  him  a  mouth  speaking 
great  things  and  blasphemies ;  and  power  was  given 
unto  him  to  continue  forty  and  two  months. 

This  beast  was  without  a  name,  like  the 
fourth  in  Daniel,  which  symbolized  the 
same  empire.  (See  page  55,  Sect  ii.)  Dan- 
iel's fourth  beast,  which  was  "  dreadful  and 
terrible,"  with  its  little  horn,  comprehended 
all  which  is  symbolized  by  the  dragon,  this 
beast,  the  ten-horned  beast  yet  to  be  de- 
scribed, the  image  of  the  beast,  and  the  wo- 
man sitting  on  this  beast,  (chap,  xvii.) 
When  the  persecuting  power  denoted  by 
this  beast,  arose,  it  was  to  be  expected  that 
the  devil  would  transfer  the  authority  hith- 
erto lodged  with  his  pagan  vicegerent,  the 
dragon,  to  this  beast. 


War  of  the  beast.  36t 

6  And  he  opened  his  mouth  in  blasphemy  against  God, 
to  blaspheme  his  name,  and  his  tabernacle,  and  them 
that  dwell  in  heaven. 

7  And  it  was  given  unto  him  to  make  war  with  the 
saints,  and  to  overcome  them :  and  power  was  given 
him  over  all  kindreds,  and  tongues,  and  nations. 

8  And  all  that  dwell  upon  the  earth  shall  worship  him, 
whose  names  are  not  written  in  the  book  of  life  of  the 
Lamb  slain  from  the  foundation  of  the  world. 

9  If  any  man  have  an  ear,  let  him  hear. 

10  He  that  leadeth  into  captivity  shall  go  into  cap- 
tivity :  he  that  killeth  with  the  sword  must  be  killed 
with  the  sword.  Here  is  the  patience  and  the  faith 
of  the  saints. 


Here  again,  we  have  a  description  of  the 
different  modes  of  warfare  between  the 
wicked  world  and  Christ's  real  disciples. 
^'  My  kingdom  is  not  of  this  world,"  says 
Christ,  "  else  would  my  children  fight." 
"  He  that  taketh  the  sword  shall  perish  by 
the  sword."  But  "  here  is  the  patience  and 
faith  of  the  saints."  They  conquer  by  pa- 
tient suffering.  Their  "  faith  overcomes  the 
world."  Such  will  be  the  conquest  of  this 
world  before  the  beast  and  false  prophet  go 
finally  into  perdition,  and  the  "  God  of  heav- 
en sets  up  a  kingdom,  which  shall  never  be 
destroyed."  "  And  when  there  shall  be  no 
one  to  hurt  or  molest  in  all  God's  holy 
mountain,"  Then  shall  the  *' saints  inherit 
the  earth." 


368 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


THE  FALSE  PROPHET  OR  TWO  HORNED 
BEAST  OF  THE  EARTH. 


Chap.  XTii:  11  And  I  beheld  another  beast  coming 
up  out  of  the  earth,  and  he  had  two  horns  like  a  lamb, 
and  he  spake  as  a  dragon. 

12  And  he  exerciseih  all  the  power  of  the  first  beast 
before  him,  and  causeth  the  earth  and  them  which  dwell 
therein  to  worship  the  first  beast,  whose  deadly  wound 
was  healed. 

13  And  he  doeth  great  wonders,  so  that  he  maketh 
fire  come  down  from  heaven  on  the  earth  in  the  sight 
of  men, 

14  And  deceiveth  them  that  dwell  on  the  earth  by 
the  means  of  those  miracles  which  he  had  power  to  do 
in  the  sight  of  the  beast  ;  saying  to  them  that  dwell  on 
the  earth,  that  they  should  make  an  image  to  the  beast 
which  had  the  wound  by  a  sword,  and  did  live. 

The  regular  and  secular  clergy,  under 
their  respective  generals  and  bishops,  are 
the  two  horns,  or  ecclesiastical  kingdoms  of 
the  papal  catholic  empire. 


IMAGE  or  THE  BEAST.  369 


15  And  he  had  power 
to  give  life  unto  the  im- 
age of  the  beast,  that 
the  image  of  the  beast 
should  both  speak,  and 
cause  that  as  many  as 
would  not  worship  the 
image  of  the  beast 
should  be  killed. 


16  And  he  causeth  all,  both  small  and  great, 
rich  and  poor,  free  and  bond,  to  receive  a  mark  in  their 
right  hand,  or  in  their  foreheads  ; 

17  And  that  no  man  might  buy  or  sell,  save  he  that 
had  the  mark,  or  the  name  of  the  beast,  or  the  number 
of  his  name. 

18  Here  is  wisdom.  Let  him  that  hath  understanding 
count  the  number  of  the  beast  :  for  it  is  the  number  of 
a  man  j  and  his  number  is  six  hundred  three  score  and 
six. 

The  false  prophet,  i.  e.  hierarchal  Rome, 
clothed  the  image  or  effigy  of  secular 
papal  Rome  with  ancient  imperial  digni- 
ty. The  pope  was  the  creature  of  the 
clergy,  who  claimed,  not  only  imperi- 
al dignity,  but  infallibiHty.  The  name 
and  number  of  this  beast  has  been  a  mat- 
ter of  much  speculation,  and  it  is  a  mat- 
ter of  doubt  whether  "  he  that  has  under- 
standing" enough,  has  yet  been  found,  to 
"  count  the  number  of  the  beast."  The 
writer  does  not  claim  that  "  wisdom." 


SECTION  XVII 

THE  REFORMATION  OR  SECOND 
SEALING  TIME. 


Chap,  xiv  :  1  And  I  looked,  and  lo,  a  Lamb  stood  on 
the  mount  Sion,  and  with  him  a  hundred  forty  and  four 
thousand,  having  his  Father's  name  written  in  their 
foreheads. 

2  And  I  heard  a  voice  from  heaven,  as  the  voice  of 
many  waters,  and  as  the  voice  of  a  great  thunder  :  and 
I  heard  the  voice  of  harpers  harping  with  their  harps  : 

3  And  they  sung  as  it  were  a  new  song  before  the 
throne,  and  before  the  four  beasts,  and  the  elders  :  and 
no  man  could  learn  that  song  but  the  hundred  and  forty 
and  four  thousand,  which  were  redeemed  from  the  earth. 

4  These  are  they  which  were  not  defiled  with  women  ; 
for  they  are  virgins.  These  are  they  which  follow  the 
Lamb  whithersoever  he  goeth.  These  were  redeemed 
from  among  men,  being  the  first-fruits  unto  God  and  to 
tne  Lamb. 

6  And  in  their  mouth  was  found  no  guile:  for  they 
are  without  fault  before  the  throne  of  God. 


THE  MISSIONARY  ANGEL.  871 


6  And  I  saw  another  angel  fly  in  the  midst  of  heaven 
having  the  everlasting  gospel  to  preach  unto  ihem  that 
dwell  on  the  earth,  and  to  every  nation,  and  kindred, 
and  tongue,  and  people. 

This  is  generally  supposed  to  refer  to  the 
period  of  the  Reformation  by  Martin  Luther 
and  others.  The  Church  then  began  to 
emerge  from  her  wilderness  slate.  It  was 
a  sort  of  sealing  time  again,  a  period  which 
runs  exactly  parallel  with  the  pouring  out  of 
the  seven  last  plagues  upon  the  wicked,  as 
we  shall  see  by  and  by.  God  has  always 
set  mercy  over  against  judgment.  The  mo- 
ment he  begins  to  redeem  his  people,  he  be- 
gins to  plague  their  enemies. 
''  Come  out  of  her,  my  people,"  is  the  ex- 
hortation of  the  apostle,  and  one  of  the  old- 
er prophets  cries,  "  Ho,  ho,  come  forth,  de- 
liver thyself,  O  Zion,  that  dwellest  with  the 
daughters   of  Babylon." 


372 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PRGPHECY. 

7  Saying  with  a  loud  voice, 


"  The  hour  of  his  judgment  is  come,"  that 
is,  the  period  of  the  destruction  of  anti- 
Christ  was  drawing  near,  and  the  reformers 
of  the  sixteenth  century  commenced  sound- 
ing the  alarm.  So  it  was  when  the  Lord 
was  about  to  gather  a  remnant  of  his 
outcasts  from  old  Babylon  and  Egypt. — 
Isaiah  xxvii — 13,  "And  it  shall  come  to 
pass  at  that  day  that  the  great  trumpet  shall 
be  blown."  So  it  was  predicted  of  the  final 
restoration  of  the  Jews,  Dan.  xii — 14,  "  Mi- 
chael stands  up"  to  plead  for  his  people. 
So  here,  as  the  hour  of  his  judgment  of  the 
beast  and  false  prophet  draws  near,  the  Lord 
sends  his  missionary  angel  to  preach  the 
gospel  to  them  that  dwell  on  the  Roman 
earth.  The  period  of  pouring  out  the  vials 
of  wrath  was  co-incident  with  the  flight  of 
these  angels. 


BABYLON  FALLEN.  373 

Verse  8  And  there  followed  another  angel,  saying, — 


This  annunciation  is  made  by  the  second 
angel,  as  he  flies  through  the  heavens,  or 
church  on  earth.  If  the  flight  of  the  first 
angel  was  at  the  period  of  the  Reformation, 
this  was  probably  about  the  time  of  the  fal- 
ling of  the  papal  see  from  being  a  predomi- 
nant power.  This  was  about  the  time  of 
the  falling  of  a  tenth  part  of  the  city,  chap. 
xi,  and  the  pouring  out  of  the  fifth  vial, 
chap,  xvi — lOj  upon  the  seat  of  the  beast, 
and  the  filling  of  his  kingdom  with  dark- 
ness. That  was  a  type  of  the  great  last 
battle,  so  that  the  angel  proclaims  here  the 
typical  fall  of  Babylon.  Nine  parts  of  the 
great  city  are  reserved  for  a  time  still  future, 
when,  like  a  "  millstone,  it  will  be  cast  into 
the  depths  of  the  sea." 
32 


374  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 

And  the   third  angel  followed  them  saying,- 


which  is  poured  out  without  mixture  into  the  cup  of  his 
indignation ;  and  he  shall  be  tormented  with  fire  and 
brimstone  in  the  presence  of  the  holy  angels,  and  in  the 
presence  of  the  Lamb: 

11  And  the  smoke  of  their  torment  ascendeth  up  for 
ever  and  ever :  and  they  have  no  rest  day  nor  night, 
who  worship  the  beast  and  his  image,  and  whosoever 
receiveth  the  mark  of  his  name. 

12  Here  is  the  patience  of  the  saints  :  here  are  they 
that  keep  the  commandments  of  God,  and  the  faith 
of  Jesus. 

13  And  I  heard  a  voice  from  heaven,  saying  unto  me, 
Write,  Blessed  are  the  dead  which  die  in  the  Lord  from 
henceforth  :  Yea,  saith  the  Spirit,  that  they  may  rest 
from  their  labors  ;  and  their  works  do  follow  them. 

As  the  character  of  the  Romish  Church 
became  more  and  more  developed  and  un- 
derstood, the  wrath  of  God  would  be  more 
and  more  justly  deserved  by  all  who  still 
*'  worshipped    the   beast   and    his   image." 


SECTION  XVIII. 


THE  HARVEST  AND  VINTAGE  OF 


THE  WICKED. 


We  come  now  again  to  consider  events 
still  future,  and  instead  of  the  guidance,  we 
have  only  the  analogy  of  past  events,  for  our 
direction.  After  rapidly  glancing  at  the 
events  of  the  harvest  and  vintage  of  the 
wicked,  the  apostle  will  conduct  us  back 
to  the  period  of  the  Reformation,  and  show 
us  a  regular  succession  of  divine  judgments 
upon  the  wicked,  anti-Christian  powers,  in 
the  seven  last  plagues,  contained  in  the  sev- 
en vials,  in  the  two  subsequent  chapters. 


376  ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PRTPHECY. 


Chap,  xiv  :  14  And  I  looked,  and  behold,  a  white  cloud, 
and  upon  the  cloud  one  sat  like  unto  the  Son  of  man, 
having  on  his  head  a  golden  crown,  and  in  his  hand  a 
sharp  sickle. 

'The  last  section  was  closed  with  the  12t^ 
and  13th  verses,  where  the  predictions  wer^ 
brought  down  to  scenes  of  persecution,  and 
great  trials  of  the  patience  of  the  saints. 
When  Zion  is  in  trouble,  her  king  is  near ; 
"  I  will  not  leave  you  comfortless.  I  will 
be  a  wall  of  fire  round  about  you."  When 
John  was  about  to  describe  a  new  scene,  he 
usually  said,  ^'  I  beheld,"  &.C.,  so  here,  "I 
looked,  and  behold,  a  white  cloud,  and  upon 
the  cloud  sat  one  like  unto  the  son  of  man." 
Persecution  will  test  the  "  patience  of  the 
saints,"  till  Babylon  is  utterly  destroyed  from 
the  earth.  Blessed  are  the  dead  who  die 
in  the  defence  of  the  truth. 


HARVEST  OF   THE  WICKED.  377 

15  And  another  angel  came  out  of  the  temple,  crying 
^^•ith  a  loud  voice  to  him  that  sat  on  the  cloud, 


The  preceding  judgments  and  transac- 
tions, not  having  produced  a  voluntary 
reformation  in  the  kingdom  of  the  beast, 
the  iniquity  of  the  nations  of  which  it  is  con- 
stituted, is  filled  up,  and  they  become  ripe 
for  judgments,  which  judgments  are  em- 
blematically described  as  a  harvest  and  a 
vintage.  (See  Joel,  iii — 9 — 17.)  The 
events  here  predicted  evidently  relate  to  the 
fall  of  popery,  and,  as  before  remarked, 
give  a  plain  intimation  of  what  is  more 
fully  predicted  in  the  next  and  followiug 
chapters.  In  one  of  Christ's  parables,  "  the 
harvest  is  the  end  of  the  world,"  so  here, 
this  is  the  end  of  the  wicked  Roman  powefj 
political  and  ecclesiastical. 
32* 


378 


ILLUSTRITIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


t^k^i^6i^^^fe^(fe:^^?li:^;'t^r;-v%7> 


16  And  he  that  sat  on  the  cloud  thrust  in  his  sickle  on 
the  earth :  and  the  earth  was  reaped. 


Here  is  the  scenery  of  a  natural  har- 
vest, corresponding  with  the  event  de- 
scribed. "  The  angel  from  the  temple," 
15th  verse,  doubtless  denotes  the  min- 
isters of  the  gospel,  as  employed  to  an- 
nounce the  approach  of  these  judgments. 
As  the  vintage  succeeds  the  harvest  in 
the  course  of  nature,  so  it  is  subse- 
quent to  it  in  the  prophecy,  and  will  be  by 
far  the  most  terrible.  The  figure  of  a  har- 
vest is  frequently  used  to  denote  the  gather- 
ing of  the  righteous,  but  the  vintage  seldom, 
if  ever,  in  the  bible.  "  The  reapers  are  the 
angels,"  Christ  says  in  one  of  his  parables. 


HARVEST  OF  THE  WICKED. 


379 


17 


And  another  angel  ^ 


came  out  of  the  temple ^^ 
which  is  in  heaven,  he  also| ' 
having  a  sharp  sickle. 


M=- 


This  is  another  angel  who  is  employed  to 
gather  the  clusters  of  the  wicked,  which  are 
luxurious  in  their  growth,  and  now  fully 
ripe.  The  other  angel  is  represented  us  di- 
recting Christ  to  thrust  in  his  sickle,  and 
reap,  but  that  could  not  with  propriety  be 
done  by  any  of  his  ministers,  except  in  the 
language  of  prayer,  not  for  his  judgments 
directly  upon  the  wicked,  but  as  desired  pro- 
tection for  Zion  always  implies  confusion  to 
her  enemies.  In  the  case  of  the  vintage, 
17th  verse,  the  angel  comes  out  of  the  tem- 
ple, and  is  soon  followed  by  another,  who 
has  power  ovei  fire,  and  gives  directions  to 
his  fellow.  As  all  these  things  are  future^ 
we  must  look  to  the  analogy  of  the  past, 
rather  than  indulge  in  conjectures.  This 
angel  will  soon  come  forth  to  gather  the 
grapes,  which  will  have  a  similar  fate  to  the 
"  grapes  of  Sodom  and  the  clusters  of  Gomor- 
roh." 


380 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


18  And  another  angel  came  out  from 
the  altar,  which  had  power  over  fire  ; 
and  cried  with  a  loud  cry  to  him  that 
had  the  sharp  sickle,  saying,  Thrust  in 
thy  sharp  sickle,  and  gather  the  clusters 
of  the  vine  of  the  earth  j  for  the  grapes 
are|_fully  ripe. 


"  Angels  are  ministering  spirits  to  the  heirs 
of  salvation,"  and  God  also  performs  his 
works  of  judgment  by  the  ministry  of  an- 
gels. This  angel  comes  from  the  altar, 
having  power  over  fire,  and  directs  his  an- 
gelic associates  to  gather  the  clusters  of  the 
vine  of  the  earth,  and  the  work  is  done. 
How  far  the  element  of  literal  fire  may  be 
made  to  have  a  terrible  agency  in  the  events 
of  that  day,  when  the  cities  of  the  nations 
shall  fall,  time  alone  will  decide.  This  will 
be  the  gathering  of  the  clusters  of  the  wick- 
ed for  the  great  battle  preceding  the  reign 
of  the  saints.  At  the  close  of  that  reign, 
Gog  and  Magog,  who  revive  their  wicked  op- 
erations, and  compass  the  camp  of  the  saints, 
are  represented  as  destroyed  by  fire  from 
God,  out  of  heaven.  These  periods  of  de- 
struction to  the  wicked,  are  denoted  by  sim- 
ilar language  in  both  cases. 


VINTAGE  OF  THE  WICKED.      381 


19  And  the  angel  thrust  in  his  sickle  into  the  earth, 
and  gathered  the  vine  of  the  earth,  and  cast  it  into  the 
great  wine-press  of  the  wrath  of  God. 

The  angel  with  the  sharp  sickle  is  obe- 
dient to  the  call  of  his  associate.  The  first 
fruits  of  the  vine  are  not  usually  gathered 
with  a  sickle,  but  gathered  by  hand.  This 
is  the  last  gathering  for  the  wine  press. 

20  And  the  wine-press  was  trodden  without  the  city, 
and  blood  came  out  of  the  wine-press,  even  unto  the 
horse-bridles,  by  the  space  of  a  thousand  and  six  hun- 
dred furlongs. 

The  wine  press  is  now  trodden,  and  be- 
hold the  terrific  effect.  Blood  flows  from 
the  centre  of  destruction  as  high  as  the 
horse's  bridles.  This  figure  is  one  of  amaa- 
ing import!  It  is  remarkable  that  16  hun- 
dred furlongs,  or  two  hundred  miles,  is 
exactly  the  length  of  the  papal  dominion  in 
Italy,  and  probably  these  will  be  deluged 
with  blood,  in  a  most  fearful  manner. 


SECTION  XIX. 


SEVEN  LAST  PLAGUES. 


Chap,  xv  :  1  And  I  saw  another  sign  in  heaven,  great 
and  marvellous,  seven  angels  having  the  seven  last 
plagues  ;  for  in  them  is  filled  up  the  wrath  of  God. 

We  come  now  to  the  period  of  the  seven 
last  plagues,  running  parallel  with  the  events 
of  the  last  chapter,  from  the  Reformation, 
early  in  the  sixteenth  century,  to  the  millen- 
nium. And  here,  again,  before  entering  up- 
on the  fearful  judgments  of  the  last  vials, 
the  saints  must  first  be  prepared,  by  taking 
a  glance  of  the  glorious  things  which  were 
to  follow.  This  is  following  the  analogy 
of  communications  made  to  Daniel  from 
time  to  time. 


THE  SEA  OF  GLASS. 


383 


2  And  I  saw  as  it  were  a  sea  of  glass  mingled  with 
fire  ;  and  them  that  had  gotten  the  victory  over  the  beast, 
and  over  the  image,  and  over  his  mark,  and  over  the 
number  of  his  name,  stand  on  the  sea  of  glass,  having 
the  harps  of  God, 

3  And  they  sang  the  song  of  Moses  the  servant  of  God, 
and  the  song  of  the  Lamb,  saying,  Great  and  marvellous 
are  thy  works.  Lord  God  Almighty;  just  and  true  are 
thy  ways,  thou  King  of  saints. 

4  Who  shall  not  fear  thee,  0  Lord,  and  glorify  thy 
name  ?  for  thou  only  art  holy  ;  for  all  nations  shall  come 
and  worship  before  thee  ;  for  thy  judgments  are  made 
manifest. 


This  sea  of  glass  was  before  shown  to 
John,  chap,  iv — 6,  but  it  was  not  then  sur- 
rounded by  those  who  had  gained  the  victo- 
ry, (see  section  xi.  page  284,)  nor  did  the 
apostle  then  speak  of  its  being  m'ngled  with 
fire. 


384 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


5  And  after  that  I  looked,  and  behold,  the  temple  of 
the  tabernacle  of  the  testimony  in  heaven  was  opened  ; 

6  And  the  seven  angels  came  out  of  the  temple, 
having  the  seven  plagues,  clothed  in  pure  and  white 
linen,  and  having  their  breasts  girded  with  golden 
girdles. 


7  And  one  of  the  four  beasts  gave  unto  the  seven 
angels  seven  golden  vials  full  of  the  wrath  of  God,  who 
liveth  for  ever  and  ever. 


THE  SEVEN  LAST  PLAGUES.       385 

8  And  the  temple  was  filled  with  smoke  from  the 
glory  of  God,  and  from  his  power  ;  and  no  man  was 
able  to  enter  into  the  temple,  till  the  seven  plagues  of 
the  seven  angels  were  fulfilled. 

We  here  see  one  of  the  four  living  crea- 
tures present  to  the  angels  the  seveu  vials  of 
wrath. 

Chap.  XVI:  1  And  I  heard  a  great  voice  out  of  the 
temple  saying  to  the  seven  angels.  Go  your  ways  and 
pour  out  the  vials  of  the  wrath  of  God  upon  the  earth. 

Vial  and  cup  are  synonymous  terms  in 
the  scriptures.  "  Upon  the  wicked,  God 
shall  rain  fire  and  brimstone,  and  a  horrible 
tempest ;  this  shall  be  the  portion  of  their 
cup."  The  seven  vials  are  seven  select  por- 
tions of  divine  judgments,  accomplishing  the 
last  harvest  and  vintage  of  the  wicked.  The 
apostle  in  a  former  chapter,  gave  a  graphic 
sketch  of  the  same  judgments,  under  differ- 
ent figures.  That  was  a  general  descrip- 
tion, this  is  more  particular  and  systematic  ; 
that  related  mostly  to  the  Roman  anti- 
Christ,  this  includes  the  eastern  apostacy  ; 
that  was  under  the  figure  of  the  last  harvest 
and  vintage  of  the  wicked,  this  divides  that 
last  harvest  into  several  regular  and  succes- 
sive plagues,  in  allusion  to  the  plagues  of 
Egypt,  when  God's  chosen  people  were  de- 
livered. 

33 


386 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


2  And  the  first  went,  and  poured  out 
his  vial  upon  the  earth  ;  and  there  fell 
a  noisome  and  grievous  sore  upon  the 
men  which  had  the  mark  of  the  beast, 
and  upon  them  which  worshipped  his 
image. 


This  was  the  papal  earth,  though  the  pic- 
tural  illustration  here  shows  the  whole 
sphere.  The  papal  beast  rose  out  of  the 
earth.  This  vial  was  poured  out  in  the 
time  of  Martin  Luther,  and  Leo  X,  and  ex- 
posed the  rotten  and  ulcerous  character  of 
the  Romish  Church.  The  whole  papal  sys- 
tem, on  exposure,  was  found  to  be  a  horrid 
and  grievous  ulcer,  and  all  the  men  who 
had  the  mark  of  the  beast,  were  found  to  be 
infected  with  the  disease.  This  was  a 
"grievous  and  noisome  sore,"  indeed,  and 
resulted  in  that  consumption  which  has 
wasted  the  energies  of  the  harlot  church  ev- 
er since,  and  which  only  waits  to  be  "  de- 
stroyed by  the  brightness  of  his  (Christ's) 
coming.  This  is  a  very  appropriate  fig- 
ure, and  was  used  in  Isaiah,  i — 6,  to  repre- 
sent a  very  corrupt  state  of  the  Jewish 
church.  No  soundness  in  it,  but  full  of 
wounds,  and  bruises,  and  putrifying  sores. 


THE  SEVEN  LAST  PLAGUES. 


387 


3  And  the  second  angel  poured  out 
his  vial  upon  the  sea  ;  and  il  became  as 
the  blood  of  a  dead  man  :  and  every 
living  soul  died  in  the  sea. 


The  second  vial  was  poured  upon  the 
sea,  or  central  part  of  the  papal  dominions. 
It  will  be  well  for  the  reader  to  observe  that 
most  of  the  vials  bear  a  striking  analogy  to 
the  trumpets,  (seepages  318  and  19.)  The 
second  trumpet  turned  the  sea  of  pagan 
Rome  into  blood ;  the  second  vial  brought 
fearful  calamities  upon  the  seat  of  papal 
Rome.  Had  it  not  been  for  the  sanguinary 
and  bloody  wars  between  Francis  L  king  of 
France,  and  Charles  V,  emperor  of  Germany, 
and  the  calamities  they  brought  on  Italy 
and  the  pope,  the  effects  of  the  exposure  of 
the  papal  corruptions  by  Luther  and  oth- 
ers, would  not  have  been  borne  by  the  pa- 
pal power.  The  efforts  of  the  reformers 
would  have  been  crushed  in  the  bud,  had 
not  this  vial  followed  the  first  in  quick  suc- 
cession. From  that  hour  the  papal  sun  be- 
gan to  decline. 


388 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


4  And  the  third  angel  poured  out  his 
vial  upon  the  rivers  and  fountains  ot 
Waters,  and  they  became  blood. 


5  And  I  heard  the  angel  of  the  waters  say,  Thou 
art  righteous,  0  Lord,  which  art,  and  wast,  andshalt  be, 
because  thou  hast  judged  thus. 

5  For  they  have  shed  the  blood  of  saints  and  prophets, 
and  thou  hast  given  them  blood  to  drink  j  for  they  are 
worthy. 

7  And  I  heard  another  out  of  the  altar  say,  Even  so, 
Lord  God  Almighty,  true  and  righteous  are  thy  judg- 
ments. 

The  sea  having  been  turned  to  blood,  the 
next  vial  is  poured  upon  the  rivers  and  foun- 
tains, which  supplied  the  central  portions  of 
the  papal  dominions.  These  rivers  and 
founiains  denote  the  kingdoms  and  nations 
which  composed  the  Roman  earth.  There 
was  a  general  peace  concluded  in  1559,  and 
the  historian  says,  *' from  this  moment  Ita- 
ly ceased  to  be  the  grand  theatre  on  which 
the  great  monarchs  of  Spain,  France,  and 
Germany,  contended  for  power  and  fame. 


THE  SEVEN  LAST  PLAGUES.       389 


8  And  the  fourth  angel  poured  out 
his  vial  upon  the  sun  ;  and  power  was 
given  unto  him  to  scorch  men  with  fire. 

9  And  men  were  scorched  with  great 
heat,  and  blasphemed  the  name  of  God, 

v,V\lll.t///,;      which  hath  power  over  these  plagues; 
j^vV)^  and  they  repented  not  to  give  him  glory, 

'^0 


The  third  and  fourth  vials  keep  up  the 
analogy  of  the  trumpets,  (see  page  223.) 
The  sun  in  the  prophecies  is  frequently  put 
for  the  race  of  kings,  and  kingly  authority. 
After  the  sun  of  the  pagan  Roman  earth 
was  darkened  by  the  blast  of  the  fourth 
trumpet,  the  papal  power  soon  arose  in  its 
stead,  assuming  to  be  the  head  of  the  state, 
as  well  as  of  the  Church.  He  "  reigned  over 
the  kings  of  the  earth"  for  several  centuries, 
but  this  fourth  plague  smote  him,  and  the 
kings  began  to  "hate  the  whore,"  and  men  of 
the  Romish  Church  began  to  feel  the  scorch- 
ing effects  of  kingly  power,  but  they  repent- 
ed not  to  give  glory  to  God  as  they  should 
have  done  at  the  waning  power  of  the  papal 
see,  but  increased  in  their  blasphemy  and 
wickedness. 

33* 


390 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


10  And  the  fifth  angel  poured  out  his 
vial  upon  the  se&i  of  the  beast ;  and  his 
kingdom  was  full  of  darkness,  and  they 
gnawed  their  tongues  for  pain, 


11  And  blasphemed  the  God  of  heaven,  because  of 
their  pains  and  their  sores,  and  repented  not  of  their 
deeds. 

Now  comes  a  new  plague  upon  the  very 
seat  of  the  beast  and  false  prophet.  He  re- 
members the  sores  exposed  by  the  first  vial. 
His  kingdom  is  turned  into  darkness.  The 
sun  of  his  imperial  power  now  sets  forever, 
and  even  his  ecclesiastical  power  was  very 
much  eclipsed  by  the  French  Revolution. 
He  had  for  many  centuries  assumed  the 
character  of  the  lamb,  while  he  spake  as  a 
dragon,  but  now  his  imperial  dragon  power 
was  taken  away,  and  with  it  a  tenth  part  of 
his  great  city  fell. 


SEVEN  LAST  PLAGUES. 


391 


12  And  the  sixtli  angel  poured  out 
his  vial  upon  the  great  river  Euphrates ; 
and  the  water  thereof  was  dried  up, 
that  the  way  of  the  kings  of  the  east 
might  be  prepared. 


The  sixth  trumpet  blast  loosed  the  four 
angels  from  their  local  restrictions  near  the 
river  Euphrates,  which  opened  their  way  to 
conquest  and  power,  (page  334.)  Having 
had  their  hour,  and  day,  and  month,  and 
year,  for  conquests,  and  a  long  uninterrupt- 
ed possession  of  that  power,  it  is  now  al- 
most dried  up  by  the  contents  of  the  sixfh 
vial.  This  is  a  strikingly  well  marked  peri- 
od in  prophecy  The  reader  has  only  to 
cast  his  eye  over  the  eastern  world,  and  he 
will  s(>e  the  work  of  this  angel  almost  ac* 
complished. 


392 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF   PROPHECY. 


13  And  I  saw  three  unclean  spirits  like  frogs  come 
out  of  the  mouth  of  the  dragon,  and  out  of  the  mouth 
ofthe  beast,  and  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  false  prophet. 

The  events  denoted  by  these  figures,  al- 
though in  the  immediate  future,  still  it  be- 
comes us  to  think  and  speak  with  caution. 
It  seems  evidently  to  denote  a  rally  of  all 
the  remaining  elements  of  satan's  kingdom 
for  the  last  battle.  He  has  issued  his  sum- 
mons for  his  pagan  agent,  his  papal  agent, 
and  the  subtle,  two  horned,  lamb-like  beast, 
or  false  prophet,  to  send  out  their  unclean 
spirits,  as  numerous  and  insinuating  as  the 
frogs  of  Egypt,  to  marshall  their  forces.  It 
does  not  require  a  stretch  of  fancy  to  behold 
this  work  already  commencing.  The  pres- 
ent attitude  and  jealousies  of  the  powers  of 
Europe  and  Asia,  betoken  some  great  and 
terrible  overturn. 


liAST  GATHERING  TO  BATTLE, 


393 


The  beast  sends  out  his  unclean  spirit 
This  beast  is  now  in  his  ten-horn  state, 
though  their  power  will  probably  merge  in- 
to the  blasphemous,  or  healed  iiead  of  the 
dragon,  under  which  he  is  to  go  into  final 
perdition.  The  ten  kingdoms  of  the  old 
Roman  earth  are  now  in  a  fearfully  unsettled 
state.  The  ballance  of  their  power  cannot 
much  longer  be  maintained.  A  second  Bo- 
naparte may  soon  finish  what  the  first  con- 
templated doing.  To  maintain  the  equilib- 
rium of  separate  kingly  powers,  these  ten 
horns,  or  the  chief  of  them,  are  endeavoring 
to  maintain  the  "  integrity  "  of  the  worst 
government  in  the  world,  fearing  that  a 
chasm  in  any  portion  of  the  earth  would 
crumble  them  into  one  common  mass  of 
ruin.  The  work  cannot  be  delayed  beyond 
the  appointed  time. 


394 


ILLUSTRATIONS  OF  PROPHECY. 


The  false  prophet,  although  deprived  of 
his  political  power,  will  issue  his  unclean 
spirit  like  a  frog.  The  dying  struggle  of  the 
papacy  will  doubtless  be  fearful  in  its  results. 

14  For  they  are  the  spirits  of  devils,  working  mira" 
cles,  which  go  forth  unto  the  kings  of  the  earth,  and  of 
the  whole  world,  to  gather  them  to  the  battle  of  that 
great  day  of  God  Almighty. 

15  Behold  I  come  as  a  thief.  Blessed  is  he  that 
watcheth,  and  keepeth  his  garments,  lest  he  walk  naked 
and  they  see  his  shame. 

16  And  he  gathered  them  together  into  a  place  called 
in  the  Hebrew  tongue^ Armageddon. 

All  manner  of  deception  will  doubtless  be 
practised  by  these  spirits  of  devils,  and 
none  are  better  qualified  for  such  a  work 
than  the  false  prophet.  These  unclean 
spirits  are  not  to  be  confined  to  the  Roman 
earth,  or  both  of  the  anti-Christian  powers, 
but  they  are  to  go  forth,  not  to  the  kings  of 
the  earth  merely,  but  to  the  whole  world. 


LAST  PLAGUE. 


395 


17  And  the  seventh  angel  poured  out 
his  vial  into  the  air  ;  and  there  came  a 
great  voice  out  of  the  temple  of  heaven, 
from  the  throne,  saying,   It  is  done. 

18  And  there  were  voices,  and  thun- 
ders, and  lightnings  ;  and  there  was  a 
great  earthquake,  such  as  was  not  since 
men  were  upon  the  earth,  so  mighty  an 
earthquake,  and  so  great. 

19  And  the  great  city  was  divided 
into  three  parts,  and  the  cities  of  the 
nations  fell :  and  great  Babylon  came 
in  remembrance  before  God,  to  give 
unto  her  the  cup  of  the  wine  of  the 
fierceness  of  his  wrath. 

20  And  every  island  fled  away,  and 
the  mountains  were  not  found. 

21  And  there  fell  upon  men  a  great 
hail  out  of  heaven,  every  stone  about 
the  weight  of  a  talent ;    and  men  blas- 

/^///  phemed  God   because  of  the   hail ;   for 
the  plague  thereof  was  exceeding  great. 


This  last  plague  is  poured  into  the  air — all- 
pervading  as  far  as  wicked  men  are  found. 
It  is  not  confined  to  the  locality  of  the  Ro- 
man earth,  though  by  it,  that  great  city  is 
to  be  divided  into  three  parts,  and  the  cities 
of  the  other  nine  nations  fall.  The  last  vial, 
like  the  wo  of  the  last  trumpet,  terminates 
with  a  great  hail  storm. 


MYSTERY. 


THE   GREAT  CITY   WHICH   REIGNETH  OVER 
THE  KINGS  OF  THE  EARTH. 


Chap,  xvii  :  1  And  there  came  one  of  the  seven  an- 
gels which  had  the  seven  vials,  and  talked  with  mo, 
saying  unto  me,  Come  hither;  I  will  shew  unto  thee 
the  judgment  of  the  great  whore  that  sitteth  upon  many- 
waters; 

2  With  whom  the  kings  of  the  earth  have  committed 
fornication,  and  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  have  been 
made  drunk  with  the  wine  of  her  fornication. 

3  So  he  carried  me  away  in  the  spirit  into  the  wil- 
derness :  and  I  saw  a  woman  sit  upon  a  scarlet-colored 
beast,  full  of  names  of  blasphemy,  having  seven  heads 
and  ten  horns. 

4  And  the  woman  was  arrayed  in  purple  and  scarlet- 
color,  and  decked  with  gold  and  precious  stone  and 
pearls,  having  a  golden  cup  in  her  hand  full  of  abom- 
inations and  filthiness  of  her  fornication  : 

5  And  upon  her  forehead  was  a  name  written,  MYS- 
TERY, BABYLON  THE  GREAT,  THE  MOTHER 
OF  HARLOTS  AND  ABOMINATIONS  OF  THE 
EARTH. 

6  And  I  saw  the  woman  drunken  with  the  blood  of 
the  saints,  and  with  the  blood  of  the  martyrs  of  Jesus  : 
and  when  I  saw  her,  I  wondered  with  great  admira- 
tion. 

7  And  the  angel  said  unto  me,  Wherefore  didst  thou 
marvel  ?  I  will  tell  thee  the  mystery  of  the  woman, 
and  of  that  beast  that  carrieth  her,  which  hath  the  seven 
heads  and  ten  horns. 

8  The  beast  that  thou  sawest,  was,  and  is  not ;  and 
shall  ascend  out  of  the  bottomless  pit,  and  go  into  per- 
dition :  and  they  that  dwell  on  the  earth  shall  wonder, 
who>e  names  were  not  written  in  the  book  of  life  from 
the  foundation  of  the  world,  when  they  behold  the  beast 
that  was,  and  is  not,  and  yet  is. 


398  ILLUSTRATIOxNS    OF    PROPHECY. 

This  chapter  is  a  kind  of  parenthesis  in 
the  course  of  the  prophecy,  to  show  John 
more  precisely  what  was  meant  by  "the 
great  city,"  or  Babylon,  the  ruin  of  which 
is  to  be  so  dreadful.  Idolatry  is  noted  in 
the  Bible  as  spiritual  adultery,  and  popery 
is  that  hateful  system  of  false  religion^ 
called  the  "  mother  of  harlots,"  that  is,  it 
became  the  mother  of  every  other  adulterat- 
ed system  of  the  christian  religion.  Espe- 
cially do  we  find  her  progeny  among  those 
churches  which  are  allied  to  human  govern- 
ments, an  unholy  connection,  a  connection 
which  Christ  will  never  tolerate  in  his  in- 
tended bride,  The  papal  church  had  driven 
Christ's  real  spouse  into  the  wilderness, 
(chap,  xii :  6.)  and  "  as  he  that  leadeth  into 
captivity  shall  go  into  captivity,"  so  the 
"great  whore"  is  found  in  the  "wilder- 
ness" when  her  ''judgment"  is  come.  It 
was  the  custom  of  the  Romans  when  they 
executed  criminals  to  place  over  their  fore- 
heads their  character  and  crime  written  in 
capitals. 

9  And  here  is  the  mind  which  halh  wisdom.  The 
seven  heads  are  seven  mountains,  on  which  the  woman 
sittelh. 

10  And  there  are  seven  kings  :  five  are  fallen,  and 
one  is,  and  the  other  is  not  yet  come  ;  and  when  he 
cometh,  he  must  continue  a  short  space. 

11  And  the  beast  ihat  was,  and  is  not,  even  he  is  the 
eighth,  and  is  of  the  seven,  and  gceth  into  perdition. 


THE    GREAT    CITY. 


399 


s  Here  is  a  proper  exercise  for  wisdom,  to 
discover  what  is  meant  by  the  beast 
''  winch  was,  and  is  not,  and  yet  is."  The  ex- 
planation of  the  seven  monntains  are  given 
by  the  angel  as  denoting  seven  "  kings  "  of 
forms  of  government,  as  heads  of  the  pagan 
beast.  Six  of  these  governmental  heads 
were  kings,  consuls,  dictators,  decemvirs, 
tribunes,' and  emperors.     The  first  five  had 


fallen  when  John  had  the  interview  with 
the  angel,  ^'  one  is,"  the  impe- 
rial   was    then    in    existence, 
''and    the   other    is    not    yet 

come,    but     when 

he  Cometh  he  must 
continue  for  a  short  space." 
What  this  last  form  of  govern- 
ment is  to  be,  has  very  very 
much  perplexed  writers  of  past 
days   for  the  very  good  rea-  ^"". 

son   that  it  was  then  future, 
and  the  type  had  not  been  fully  developed. 
But  since  a  "  tenth  part  of  the  city  fell,"  the 
nature  of  this  last  head  Avould  have  been 
well  understood,  if  modern  writers  had  not 


400        ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

verged  to  the  other  common  extreme  of  con- 
jecture, and  made  the  type  the  consumma- 
tion of  the  whole  abomination.  This  last 
form  of  government  in  the  Roman  empire, 
will  be  the  eighth  head  numerically,  or  in 
reckoning  forward,  being  the  next  after  the 
seventh,  but  is  of  the  seven,  that  is,  it  may 
be  reckoned  among  the  seven,  or  as  accord- 
ing with  them  in  its  nature. 

We  see  in  the  type,  the  French  Revolution, 
this  head  exhibited  the  features  of  the  Re- 
publican, Consular,  and  Imperial.  It  was 
also  atheistical,  and  persecuting.  Under 
this  last  head,  which  "  must  continue  for  a 
short  space,''  the  old  Roman  Empire,  which 
for  near  two  thousand  years  has  assumed 
as  many  forms  of  governments  as  suited  the 
convenience  of  Satan,  the  prime  mover,  is 
to  "  go  into  perdition."  We  have  first  seen 
this  empire  under  the  symbol  of  ''iron  and 
clay,"  "strong  exceedingly"  for  a  time, 
Dan.  11  :  then  a  beast  "dreadful  and  terri- 
ble," Dan.  vii:  then  the  great  red  dragon, 
Rev.  xii :  next  the  beast  from  the  sea,  Rev. 
xiii,  again  from  the  "  bottomless  pit,"  to- 
gether with  its  union  with  the  beast  out  of 
the  earth  with  two  horns.  Rev.  xiii,  and 
now  carrying  the  "great  whore,"  and 
finally  its  last  form  in  which  it  is  to  hate 
the  whore,  make  war  with  the  Lamb,  slay 
the  witnesses  and  go  into  perdition 


THE   GREAT    CITY.  401 


12  And  the  ten  horns 
which  thou  sawest  are  ten 
kings,  which  have  receiv- 
ed no  Uingtiomasyet  J  but 
receive  power  as  kings  one 
hour  with  the  beast. 


The  old  Roman  beast  had  ten  horns  and 
the  new  beast  from  the  bottomless  pit  has 
the  same.  These  denote  a  succession  of 
kings  which  had  not  existed  when  John  had 
his  vision.  Compare  notes  page  54,  5  and 
6,  with  page  78. 

13  These  have  one  mind,  and  shall  give  their  power 
and  strength  unto  the  beast. 

14  These  shall  make  war  with  the  Lamb,  and  the 
Lamb  shall  overcome  them  :  lor  he  is  Lord  of  lords, 
and  King  of  kings ;  and  they  that  are  with  him  are 
called,  and  chosen,  and  faithful. 


After  Rome  became  papal,  the  ten  king- 
doms basely  submitted  to  the  dictation  of 
the  Roman  bishops,  and  the  prostitution 
was  mutual,  for  the  great  harlot  church 
"  committed  fornication  with  the  kings  of 
the  earth."  Rome,  in  all  her  modifications, 
has  made  war  with  the  Lamb,  but  at  the 
expiration  of  the  1260  years,  the  Lamb  will 
overcome  all  other  powers,  and  give  the 
kingdom  to  his  "chosen  and  faithful." 


402  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

15  And  he  saith  unto  me,  The  waters  which  thoa 
sawest,  where  the  whore  sitteth,  are  peoples,  and  multi- 
tudes, and  nations,  and  tongues. 

16  And  the  ten  horns  which  thou  sawest  upon  the 
beast,  these  shall  hate  the  whore,  and  shall  make  her 
desolate  and  naked,  and  shall  eat  her  flesh  and  burn  her 
with  fire. 

17  For  God  hath  put  in  their  hearts  to  fulfil  his  will, 
and  to  agree,  and  give  iheir  kingdom  unto  the  beast, 
until  the  words  of  God  shall  be  fulfilled. 

18  And  the  woman  which  thou  sawest  is  that  great 
cityj  which  reigneth  over  the  kings  of  the  earth. 

Here  is  a  clear  explanation  of  many  of 
these  symbolical  allusions,  and  a  glance  at 
Rome  in  its  complex  character  from  the  time 
John  wrote  till  a  period  yet  future,  when  a 
combination  of  the  ten  kings  with  the  last 
head  of  the  beast  is  to  destroy  the  Romish 
church,  and  then  the  whole  will  go  into  per- 
dition together.  "  The  woman  which  thou 
sawest,"  &c.  verse  18.  Every  body  knows 
this  refers  to  Rome,  even  candid  papists  have 
acknowledged  it,  though  they  wish  to  con- 
fine the  interpretation  to  Rome  while  pagan. 
Burn  her  with  fire — referring  to  the  punish- 
ment of  the  priest's  daughter  who  was  guilty 
of  fornication.  France  begun  this  work, 
but  the  completion  of  this  fearful  doom  in 
all  its  horrors  still  awaits  the  prostituted 
church. 

Chap,  xviii  :  1  And  after  these  things  I  saw  another 
angel  come  down  fiom  heaven,  having  great  power; 
and  the  earth  was  lig!  ted  with  his  glory. 


BABYLON    FALLEN.  403 

2  And  he  cried  mightily  with  a  strong  voice,,  saying, 
Babylon  the  great  is  fallen,  is  fallen,  and  is  become  the 
habitation  of  devils,  and  the  hold  of  every  foul  spirit, 
and  a  cage  of  every  unclean  and  hateful  bird. 

3  For  all  nations  have  drunk  of  the;  wine  of  the  wrath 
of  her  fornication,  and  the  kings  of  the  earth  have  com- 
mitted fornication  with  ber,  and  the  merchants  of  the 
earth  are  waxed  rich  through  the  abundance  of  her 
delicacies. 

How  frequent  the  repetition  of  the  doom 
of  mystical  Babylon  is  brought  before  the 
Biblical  reader ! 

4  And  I  heard  another  voice  from  heaven,  saying. 
Come  out  of  her,  my  people,  that  ye  be  not  partakers  of 
her  sins,  and  that  ye  receive  not  of  her  plagues. 

5  For  her  sins  have  reached  unto  heaven,  and  God 
hath  remembered  her  iniquities. 

6  Reward  her  even  as  she  rewarded  you,  and  double 
unto  her  double  according  to  her  works  :  in  the  cup 
which  she  hath  filled,  fill  to  her  double. 

7  How  much  she  hath  glorified  herself,  and  lived  de- 
liciously,  so  much  torment  and  sorrow  give  her:  for 
she  saiih  in  her  heart,  I  sit  a  queen,  and  am  no  widow, 
and  shall  see  no  sorrow. 

8  Therefore  shall  her  plagues  come  in  one  day,  death, 
and  mourning,  and  famine;  and  she  shall  be  utterly 
burned  with  fire_:  for  stroug  is  the  Lord  God  who  judg- 
eth  her. 

9  And  the  kings  of  the  earth,  who  have  committed 
fornication  and  lived  deliciously  with  her,  shall  bewail 
her,  and  lament  for  her,  when  tiiey  shall  see  the  smoke 
of  her  burning, 

10  Standing  afar  off  for  the  fear  of  her  torment,  say- 
ing, Alas,  alas  !  that  great  city  Babylon,  that  mighty 
city  !  for  in  one  hour  is  thy  judgment  come. 

11  And  the  merchants  of  the  earth  shall  weep  and 
mourn  over  her ;  for  no  man  buyeih  their  merchandise 
any  more : 


404  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

12  The  merchandise  of  gold,  and  silver,  and  precious 
stones,  and  of  pearls,  and  fine  linen,  and  purple,  and 
silk,  and  scarlet,  and  all  thyne  wood,  and  all  manner 
vessels  of  ivory,  and  all  manner  ves>el.s  ol  most  precious 
wood,  and  of  brass,  and  iron,  and  martrle, 

13  And  cinnamon,  and  odors,  and  ointments,  and 
frankincense,  and  wine,  and  oil,  and  fine  flour,  and 
wheat,  and  beasts,  and  sheep,  and  horses,  and  slaves, 
and  souls  of  men. 

14  And  the  fruits  that  thy  soul  lusted  after  are  de- 
parted from  thee,  and  all  things  which  v/ere  dainiy  and 
goodly  are  departed  from  thee,  and  thou  shall  find  them 
no  more  at  all. 

15  The  merchants  of  these  thing?  which  were  made 
rich  by  her.  shall  stand  afar  off,  for  the  fear  of  her  tor- 
ment, weeping  and  wailing, 

16  And  saying,  Alas,  alas  !  that  great  city,  that  was 
clothed  in  tine  linen,  and  purple,  and  scarlet,  and  decked 
with  gold,  and  precious  stones,  and  pearls  ! 

17  For  in  one  hour  so  great  riches  is  come  to  nought. 
And  every  ship-ma.sier,  and  all  the  company  in  ships, 
and  sailors,  and  as  many  as  irade  by  sea,  stood  afar  off, 

18  And  cried  when  ihey  saw  the  smoke  of  her  burn- 
ing, saying,  What  ciiy  ii  like  unto  this  great  ciiy  ! 

19  And  they  cast  dust  on  their  heads,  and  cried, 
weeping  and  wailing,  saying,  Alas,  alas!  that  great 
city,  wherein  were  made  rich  all  that  had  ships  in  the 
sea  by  reason  of  her  costliness  !  for  in  one  hour  is  she 
made  desolate. 

20  Rejoice  over  her,  thou  heaven,  and  ye  holy  apos- 
tles and  prophets  J  for  God  haih  avenged  you  on  her. 

21  And  a  mighty  angel  took  up  a  sione  like  a  great 
millstone,  and  cast  it  into  the  sea,  saying,  Thus  with 
violence  siiall  that  great  city  Babylon  be  thrown  down, 
aufl  shall  be  found  no  more  at  all. 

22  And  the  voice  of  harpers,  and  musicians,  and  of 
pipers,  and  trumpeters,  shall  be  heard  no  more  at  all  in 
Ihee  ;  and  no  craftsman,  of  whatsoever  craft  he  be,  shall 
be  founrl  any  more  in  thee  ;  and  the  sound  of  a  mill- 
stone shall  be  heard  no  more  at  all  in  thee  ; 

23  And  the  light  of  a  candle  shall  shine  no  more  at 


MARRIAGE    SUPPER    OF    THE    LAMB.         405 

all  in  thee ;  and  ihe  voice  of  the  bridegroom  and  of  the 
oride  shall  be  heard  no  more  ai  all  in  thee  :  for  ihy  mer- 
chants were  the  great  men  of  the  earth  ;  for  by  thy  sor- 
ceries were  all  nations  deceived. 

24  And  in  her  was  found  the  blood  of  prophets,  and 
of  saints,  and  of  all  that  were  slain  upon  the  earth. 

Chap,  xix  :  1  And  after  these  things  I  heard  a  great 
voice  of  much  people  in  heaven,  saying,  Alleluia:  Sal- 
vation, and  glory,  and  honor,  aud  power,  unto  tfle  Lord 
our  God  : 

2  For  true  and  righteous  are  his  judgments  :  for  he 
hath  judged  the  great  whore,  which  did  corrupt  the 
earth  with  her  fornication,  and  hath  avenged  the  blood 
of  his  servants  at  her  hand. 

3  And  again  they  said,  Alleluia.  And  her  smoke 
rose  up  for  ever  and  ever. 

4  And  the  f  tur  and  twenty  elders  and  the  four  beasts 
fell  down  and  worshipped  God  that  sat  on  the  throne, 
saying.  Amen  ;  Alleluia. 

5  And  a  voice  came  out  of  the  throne,  saying.  Praise 
our  God,  all  ye  his  servants,  and  ye  that  fear  him,  both 
small  and  great. 

6  And  I  heard  as  it  were  the  voice  of  a  great  multi- 
tude, and  as  the  voice  of  many  waters,  and  as  the  voice 
of  mighty  ihunderings,  saying.  Alleluia:  for  the  Lord 
God  omnipotent  reigneih. 

This  happy  company  are  preparing  for 
the  marriage  of  the  true  church  to  Christ, 
her  only  head.  As  long  as  the  church 
yielded  any  of  her  affections  to  the  "kings 
of  the  earth,"  he  refused  to  celebrate  the 
glorious  nuptials.  After  the  last  remnant 
of  the  chain  of  earthly  kingdoms  with 
which  the  nominal  church,  first  Jewish  and 
then  Gentile,  "  committed   fornication,"  is 


406  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROFHECY. 

destroyed,  then  will  the  marriage  take  place, 
and  not  before. 

7  Let  us  be  glad  and  rejoice,  and  give  honor  to  him : 
for  the  marriage  of  the  Lamb  is  come,  and  his  wife 
hath  made  herself  ready. 

8  And  to  her  was  granted  that  she  should  be  arrayed 
in  fine  linen,  clean  and  white  •  for  ihe  fine  linen  is  the 
righteousness  of  saints. 

9  And  he  saith  unto  me,  Write,  Blessed  are  they 
which  are  called  unto  the  marriage-supper  of  the  Lamb. 
And  he  saitli  unto  me.  These  are  the  true  sayings  of 
God. 

Now  comes  the  glorions  consummation. 
2520  years  had  Christ  spurned  the  Jewish 
church  for  her  unhallowed  connexion  with 
idolatrousgovernments,  and  half  that  period, 
1260,  was  the  younger  sister  left  on  trial  for 
the  same  offence,  but  now  they  are  purified 
and  made  ^vhite,  and  Christ  becomes  the 
possessor  of  their  undivided  affections — the 
''KING  OF  KINGS  AND  LORD  OF 
LORDS."  No  longer  leaning  on  the  ^'  civil 
arm,"  but  on  the  "  arm  of  her  beloved  " — 
no  more  "  going  down  into  Egypt "  or  over 
into  Assyria  for  help.  All  are  blessed  who 
come  to  this  supper. 

10  And  I  fell  at  his  feet  to  worship  him.  And  he 
said  unto  me,  See  thou  do  it  not :  I  am  thy  fellow-serv- 
ant, and  of  ihy  brethren  that  have  the  testimony  of  Je- 
sus: worship  God:  for  the  testimony  of  Jesus  is  the 
spirit  of  prophesy. 


THE  LAST  SUPPER  OF  THE  WICKED.    407 

11  And  I  saw  heaven  opened,  and  behold,  a  white 
horse  ;  and  he  ihat  sal  upon  him  was  called  Faithful 
and  True,  and  in  righteousness  he  doth  judge  and  make 
war. 

12  His  eyes  were  as  a  flame  of  fire,  and  on  his  head 
were  many  crowns ;  and  he  had  a  name  written,  that 
no  man  knew,  but  he  himself.  - 

13  And  he  was  clothed  with  a  vesture  dipped  in  blood  : 
and  his  name  is  called^  The  Word  of  God. 

14  And  the  armies  which  were  in  heaven  followed 
him  upon  white  horses,  clothed  in  fine  linen,  white  and 
clean. 

15  And  out  of  his  mouth  goeth  a  sharp  sword,  that 
with  it  he  should  smile  the  nations  :  and  he  shall  rule 
them  with  a  rod  of  iron  :  and  he  treadeth  the  wine  press 
of  ihe  fierceness  and  wraih  of  Almighty  God. 

16  And  he  hath"  on  his  vesture  and  on  his  thigh  a 
name  wriiten,  KING  OF  KINGS,  AND  LORD  OF 
LORDS. 

17  And  I  saw  an  angel  standing  in  the  sun  ;  and  he 
cried  with  a  loud  voice,  saying  to  all  the  fowls  that  fly 
in  the  midst  of  heaven,  Come  and  gnther  yourselves  to- 
gether unto  ihe  supper  of  the  great  God  ; 

18  That  ye  may  eat  the  flesh  of  kings,  and  the  flesh 
of  captains,  and  the  flesh  of  mighty  men,  and  the  flesh 
of  horses,  and  of  them  that  sii  on  them,  and  the  flesh 
of  all  men,  both  free  and  bond,  both  small  and  great. 

19  And  I  saw  the  beast,  and  the  kings  of  the  earih, 
and  their  armies  gathered  together  to  make  war  against 
him  that  sat  on  the  horse,  and  against  his  army. 

20  And  the  beast  was  taken,  and  with  him  the  false 
prophet  that  wrought  miracles  before  him,  with  wliich 
he  deceived  them  that  had  received  the  mark,  of  the 
beast,  and  them  that  worshipped  his  image.  These 
both  were  cast  into  a  lake  of  Are  burning  with  brim- 
stone. 

21  And  ihe  remnant  were  slain  with  the  sword  of 
him  that  sat  upon  the  horse,  which  sword  proceeded  oiit 
of  his  mouth :  and  all  the  fowls  were  filled  with  their 
flesh. 


408  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY, 

Chap,  xx  :  1  And  I  saw  an  angel  come  down  from 
heaven  having  the  key  of  the  boiiomless  pit  and  a  great 
chain  in  his  hand. 

2  And  he  laid  hold  on  the  dragon,  that  old  serpent, 
which  is  the  Devil,  and  Satan,  and  bound  him  a  thou- 
sand years. 

3  And  cast  him  into  the  bottomless  pit,  and  shut  him 
up,  and  set  a  seal  upon  him,  that  he  should  deceive  the 
nations  no  more,  till  the  thousand  years  shall  be  ful- 
filled J  and  after  that  he  must  be  loosed  a  little  season. 

Here  will  be  a  period  of  one  thousand 
years  in  which  persecuting  governments  in 
all  their  forms  will  be  excluded  from  human 
society.  The  devil  will  be  confined,  and 
the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  will  enjoy 
their  inheritance  unmolested.  "  The  saints 
shall  inherit  the  earth,"  agreeable  to  pro- 
mise, during  the  entire  Jubilee  Sabbath  of 
creation.  After  that  there  will  be  a  short 
declension  in  which  Satan  will  again  find 
access  to  the  hearts  of  a  portion  of  the 
human  race,  but  it  will  finish  his  work  on 
earth  forever. 

4  And  I  saw  thrones,  and  they  sat  upon  them,  and 
judgment  was  given  unto  them  :  and  I  saw  the  souls  of 
them  that  were  beheaded  for  the  witness  of  Jesus,  and 
for  ihe  word  of  God,  and  which  had  not  worshipped  the 
beast,  neither  his  image,  neither  had  received  his  mark 
upon  their  foreheads,  or  in  their  hands  ;  and  they  lived 
and  reigned  with  Christ  a  thousand  years. 

5  But  the  rest  of  the  dead  lived  not  again  until  the 
thousand  years  were  finished.  This  is  the  first  resur- 
reclion. 


FIRST    RESURRECTION.  409 

6  Blessed  and  holy  is  he  that  hath  part  in  the  first 
resurrection:  on  such  the  second  death  hath  no  power, 
but  they  shall  be  priests  of  God  and  of  Christ,  and  shall 
reign  vviih  him  a  thousand  years. 

This  is  the  resurrection  or  revival  of  high 
and  holy  character  like  as  "John  came  in 
the  spirit  and  power  of  Elias."  The  soul 
of  eminent  piety  "will  live  and  reign"  in 
the  persons  of  Christians  during  the  thous- 
and years,  not  the  bodies  of  the  dead.  John 
(verse  6)  uses,  almost  the  same  lan- 
guage of  Daniel,  xii :  12.  The  rest  of  the 
dead,  &c.  5  verse,  that  is,  the  character  of 
the  wicked  will  not  revive  again  till  the 
close  of  a  1000  year,  when  there  will  be  a 
short  revival  of  Gog  and  Magog  with  Satan 
at  their  head. 


7  And  when  the  thousand  years  are  expired,  Satan 
shall  be  loosed  out  of  pri.^on, 

8  And  shall  go  out  to  deceive  the  nations  which  are 
in  the  four  quarters  of  the  earth.  God  and  Magog,  to 
gather  ihem  together  to  battle  :  the  number  of  whom  is 
as  the  sand  of  the  sea. 

9  And  they  went  up  the  breadth  of  the  earth,  and 
compassed  the  camp  of  the  saints  about,  and  the  beloved 
city  :  and  fire  came  down  from  God  out  of  heaven,  and 
devoured  them. 

10  And  ihc  devil  that  deceived  them  was  cast  into 
the  lake  of  fire  and  brimstone,  where  the  beast  and  the 
false  prophet  are,  aud  shall  he  tormented  ilay  and  night 
for  ever  and  ever. 

11  And  I  saw  a  great  white  throne,  and  him  that  sat 
on  it,  Irom  whose  face  the  earth  and  the  heaven  fled 
away  ;  and  there  was  found  no  place  for  them. 


410  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 

12  And  I  saw  the  dead,  small  and  great,  stand  before 
God  ;  and  the  books  were  opened  :  and  another  book 
was  opened,  which  is  the  book  of  life  :  and  the  dead 
were  judged  out  of  those  things  which  were  written  in 
the  books,  according  to  their  works. 

13  And  the  sea  gave  up  the  dead  which  were  in  it; 
and  death  and  hell  delivered  up  the  dead  which  were  ia 
them  :  and  they  were  judged  every  man  according  to 
their  works. 

14  And  death  and  hell  were  cast  into  the  lake  of  fire. 
This  is  the  second  death. 

15  And  whosoever  was  not  found  written  in  the  book 
of  life  was  cast  into  the  lake  of  fire. 

Here  follows  the  general  and  literal  resur- 
rection, "small  and  great,"  very  different 
language  from  that  which  described  the 
mystical  resurrection  before  the  Millen- 
nium. 

Chap,  xxr:  1  And  I  saw  a  new  heaven  and  a  new 
earth  :  for  the  first  heaven  and  the  first  earth  were 
passed  away  ;  and  there  was  no  more  sea. 

2  And  I  John  saw  the  holy  city,  New  Jerusalem, 
coming  down  from  God  out  of  heaven,  prepared  as  a 
bride  adorned  for  her  husband. 

3  And  I  heard  a  great  voice  out  of  heaven,  saying, 
Behold,  the  tabernacle  of  God  is  with  men,  and  he  will 
dwell  with  them,  and  they  shall  be  his  people,  and  God 
himself  shall  be  with  them,  and  be  their  God. 

4  And  God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears  from  their  eyes  ; 
and  there  shall  be  no  more  death,  neither  sorrow,  nor 
crying,  neither  shall  there  be  any  more  pain :  for  the 
former  thines  are  passed  away. 

5  And  he  that  sat  upon  the  throne  said,  Behold,  1 
make  all  things  new.  And  he  said  unto  me.  Write  : 
for  these  words  are  true  and  faithful. 

6  And  he  said  unto  me,  It  is  done.     I  am  Alpha  adn 


THE   NEW   JERUSALEM.  411 

Omega,  the  beginning  and  the  end.  I  will  give  unto 
him  that  is  alhirst  of  the  fountain  of  the  water  of  life 
freely. 

7  He  that  overcoraeth  shall  inherit  all  things  ;  and  I 
will  be  his  God,  and  he  shall  be  my  son. 

8  But  the  fearful  and  the  unbelieving,  and  the  abo- 
minable, and  murderers,  and  whoremongers,  and  sor- 
cerers, and  idolaters,  and  all  liars,  shall  have  their  part 
in  the  lake  which  burneth  with  fire  and  brimstone: 
which  is  the  second  death. 

The  writer  does  not  object  to  the  idea  that 
this  world,  after  being  renovated  by  fire, 
should  be  fitted  up  for  a  delightful  residence 
of  the  redeemed.  They  would  not  be  tied 
to  the  new  earth  by  the  law  of  gravitation, 
but  could  roam  through  the  universe  of 
worlds  at  pleasure. 

9  And  there  came  unto  me  one  of  the  seven  angels, 
which  had  the  seven  vials  full  of  the  seven  last  plagues, 
and  talked  vviih  me,  saying,  Come  hither,  I  will  show 
thee  the  biide,  the  Lamb's  wife. 

lU  And  he  carried  me  away  in  the  spirit  to  a  great 
and  high  mountain,  and  showed  me  that  great  city,  ihe 
holy  Jerusalem,  descending  out  of  heaven  Irom  God, 

11  Having  the  plory  of  God  •  and  her  light  was  like 
unto  a  stone  most  precious,  even  like  a  jasper-stone, 
clear  as  crystal  ; 

12  And  had  a  wall  great  and  high,  and  had  twelve 
gates,  and  ai  the  gales  twelve  angels,  and  names  writ- 
ten thereon,  which  are  the  names  of  the  twelve  tribes  of 
the  children  of  Israel. 

13  On  the  east,  three  gates;  on  the  north,  three 
gates ;  on  the  south,  three  gales ;  and  on  the  west, 
three  gates. 

14  And  the  walls  of  the  city  had  twelve  foundations, 


412  ILLUSTRATIONS    OF   PROPHECY. 

and  in  them  the  names  of  the  twelve  apostles  of  the 
Lamb. 

15  And  he  that  talked  with  me  had  a  golden  reed  to 
measure  the  city,  and  the  gales  thereof,  and  the  wall 
thereof, 

16  And  the  city  lieth  foursquare,  and  the  length  is  as 
laro;e  as  the  breadth  :  and  he  measured  the  city  with  the 
reed,  twelve  thousand  furlongs.  The  length,  and  the 
breadth,  and  the  height  of  it  are  equal, 

17  And  he  measured  the  wall  thereof,  a  hundred  and 
forty  and  lour  cubits,  according  to  the  measure  of  a 
man,  that  is,  of  the  angel. 

18  And  the  building  of  the  wall  of  it  was  of  jasper  : 
and  the  city  was  pure  gold,  like  unto  clear  glass, 

19  And  "the  foundations  of  the  wall  of  the  city  were 
garnished  with  all  manner  of  precious  stones,  Tne 
first  foundation  was  jasper ;  the  second,  sapphire  ;  the 
third,  a  chalcedon)/^ ;  the  fourth,  an  emerald  ; 

20  The  fifth,  sardonyx;  the  sixth,  sardius  ;  the  sev- 
enth, chrysolite;  the  eighth,  beryl ;  the  ninth,  a  topaz; 
the  tenth,  a  chrysoprasus  ;  the  eleventh,  a  jacinth;  ihe 
twelfth,  an  amethyst, 

21  And  th3  twelve  gates  were  twelve  pearls  ;  every 
several  gate  was  of  one  peari ;  and  the  street  of  the 
city  was  pure  gold,  as  it  were  transparent  glass, 

22  And  I  saw  no  temple  therein  :  for  the  Lord  God 
Almighty  and  the  Lamb  are  the  temple  of  it. 

23  And  the  city  had  no  need  of  the  sun.  neither  of  the 
moon,  to  shine  in  it :  for  the  glory  of  God  did  lighten 
It,  and  the  Lamb  is  the  light  thereof, 

24  And  the  nations  of  them  which  are  saved  shall 
walk  in  the  light  o(  it:  and  the  kings  of  the  earth  do 
bring  their  glory  and  honor  into  it, 

25  And  the  gates  of  it  shall  not  be  shut  at  all  by  day  : 
for  there  shall  be  no  night  there, 

26  And  they  shall  bring  the  glory  and  honor  of  the 
nations  into  it, 

27  And  there  shall  in  no  wise  enter  into  it  any  thing 
that  defileth,  neither  whatsoever  worketh  abomination, 


'     THE    TREE    OF    LIFE.  413 

or  rtiaketh  a  lie  ;   bul  they  which  are  written  in  the 
Lamb's  book  ol  life. 

Chap,  xxii  :  1  And  he  showed  me  a  pure  river  of 
water  of  life,  clear  as  crystal,  proceeding  out  of  the 
throne  of  God  and  of  the  Laimb 

2  In  the  midst  of  the  si  ret  t  of  it,  and  on  either  side  of 
the  river,  was  there  the  tree  of  lil'e,  which  bare  twelve 
manner  of  fruits,  and  yielded  her  fruit  every  month: 
and  the  leaves  of  ihe  tree  were  for  the  healing  of  the 
nations. 

3  And  there  shall  be  no  more  curse  ;  but  the  throne 
of  God  and  of  the  Lan)b  shall  be  in  it ;  and  his  servants 
shall  serve  him  : 

4  And  they  shall  ?ee  his  face  ;  and  his  name  shall  be 
in  their  forelieads. 

6  And  there  shall  be  no  night  there;  and  they  need 
no  candle,  neither  light  oi'  the  snn  ;  for  the  Lord  God 
giveth  them  light:  and  they  shall  reign  for  ever  and 
evt^r. 

6  And  he  said  unto  me.  These  sayings  are  faiihful 
and  true.  And  the  Lord  God  of  the  holy  piopheis  sent 
his  angel  to  show  unto  his  servant  the  things  which 
must  shortly  be  done. 

7  Behold,  I  come  quickly;  blessed  is  he  that  keepeth 
the  sayings  of  the  prophecy  of  ihi>,  book. 

8  And  I  John  saw  these  things,  and  heard  them. 
And  when  I  had  heard  and  seen,  I  lell  down  to  worship 
before  the  feei  of  the  angel  which  showed  me  these 
things. 

9  Then  saith  he  unto  me,  See  thou  do  it  not :  for  I 
am  thy  fellow-servant,  and  of  thy  brethren  the  pro- 
phets, and  of  them  which  keep  the  sayings  of  this  book  : 
worship  God. 

10  And  he  saith  unto  me.  Seal  not  the  sayings  of  the 
prophecy  of  this  book  .  for  the  time  is  at  hand. 

11  He  that  is  unjust,  let  him  be  unjust  still:  and  he 
which  IS  filthy,  let  him  be  filthy  still  :  and  he  that  is 
righteous,  let  him  be  righteous  aiUl :  and  he  that  is 
holy,  let  him  be  holy  siilir 


414 


ILLUSTRATIONS    OF    PROPHECY. 


12  And,  behold,  I  come  quickly;  and  my  reward  is 
with  me,  to  give  every  man  according  as  his  work  shall 
be. 

13  I  am  Alpha  and  Omega,  the  beginning  and  the 
end,  the  first  and  the  last. 

14  Blessed  are  they  that  do  his  commandments,  that 
they  may  have  right  to  the  tree  of  life,  and  may  enter 
in  through  the  gates  into  the  city. 

15  For  wiihuut  are  dogs,  and  sorcerers,  and  whore- 
mongers, and  murderers,  and  idolaters,  and  whoever 
loveih  and  maketh  a  lie, 

16  I  Jesus  have  sent  mine  angel  to  testify  unto  you 
these  things  in  the  churches.  I  am  the  root  and  the  off- 
spring of  David,  and  the  bright  and  morning-.star. 

17  And  the  Spirit  and  the  bride  say,  Come.  And  let 
him  that  heareth  say,  Come.  And  let  him  that  is  athirst, 
Come.  And  whosoever  will,  let  him  take  the  water  of 
life  freely. 

18  For  T  testify  unto  every  man  that  heareth  the 
words  of  the  prophecy  of  this  book,  If  any  man  shall 
add  unto  these  things,  God  shall  add  unto  him  the 
plagues  that  are  written  in  this  book. : 

19  And  if  any  man  shall  take  away  from  the  words 
of  the  book  of  this  prophecy,  God  shall  take  away  his 
part  out  of  the  book  o[  liCe,  and  out  of  the  holy  city,  and 
from  the  things  which  are  written  in  this  book. 

20  He  which  lestifieth  these  things  saith,  Surely  I 
come  quickly  :  Amen.     Even  so,  come,  Lord  Jesus. 

21  The  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  be  with  you 
all.    Amen. 


DATE  DUE 

,.N«M.«-«« 

« 

T     ' 

.-,^JJ' 

/ 

/ 

1                GAYLORD 

PRINTED                / 

h 


Bbl556.Cl7  ;    op^,ecy.part.cularly 


m 


